2010 Mclass PDF

M-Class
Operator’s Manual
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Symbols
Trademarks®:
RAdBlue® is a registered trademark of the
German Association of the Automotive
Industry (VDA).
RBabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
RESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered
trademarks of Daimler.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
Prince, a Johnson Controls Company.
RSIRIUS and related marks are trademarks
of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc.
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
G Warning!
Warning notices draw your attention to
hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
! Highlights hazards that may result in

damage to your vehicle.
i Helpful hints or further information you

may find useful.
X This symbol points to instructions
for you to follow.
X A number of these symbols
appearing in succession indicates
a multiple-step procedure.
Y page This symbol tells you where to look
for further information on a topic.
YY This continuation symbol marks a
warning or procedure which is
continued on the next page.
Display Text in displays, such as the control
system, are printed in the type
shown here.

Our company and staff congratulate you on
the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a
demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire
to own an automobile that will be as easy as
possible to operate and will provide years of
service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of
many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To
help assure your driving pleasure, and also
the safety of you and your passengers, we ask
you to make a small investment of time:
RPlease read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
RPlease follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are
designed to acquaint you with the
operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
RPlease pay attention to the warnings and
cautions contained in this manual. They are
designed to help improve the safety of the
vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles of
safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A Daimler Company
1645841383 É1645841383}ËÍ
Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 25
Introduction ......................................... 20 Safety and security ............................. 35
Controls in detail ................................. 69
Operation ........................................... 209
Practical hints ................................... 267
Technical data ................................... 345

4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Front passenger front air bag off

indicator lamp (USA only) ........ 42, 305
115V AC Socket ................................. 198 Messages in the multifunction
3-zone automatic climate control display ........................................... 275
see Climate control system OCS (Occupant Classification
4-ETS System) ........................................... 42
see ETS/4-ETS Safety guidelines ............................. 39
4MATIC Side impact ...................................... 40
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC) Window curtain ................................ 41
Air conditioning refrigerant and
A lubricant ............................................. 359
ABS (Antilock Brake System) ............. 62 Air distribution .......................... 171, 180
Indicator lamp ................................ 298 Air filter .............................................. 292
Messages in the multifunction AIRMATIC/Compass menu ............... 127
display ................................... 273, 284 Air pressure
Accessory weight .............................. 239 see Tire inflation pressure
Accidents ........................................... 107 Air pressure (tires) ............................ 240
Air bags ........................................... 37 Air pump (electric) ............................ 328
Distance warning function ............. 151 Air recirculation mode .............. 172, 182
Emergency calls (Tele Aid) ............. 200 Air suspension program
NECK-PRO active front head Comfortable driving style ............... 156
restraints ........................................ 53 Introduction ................................... 155
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps Messages in the multifunction
Messages in the multifunction display ........................................... 285
display ........................................... 293 Sporty driving style ........................ 156
see Headlamps Suspension tuning ......................... 156
Adaptive Damping System Vehicle level control ...................... 156
see ADS Air volume ................................. 171, 181
AdBlue® ...................................... 331, 361 Alarm system
Capacity, AdBlue® tank ................. 358 see Anti-theft systems
Refilling ......................................... 332 Alignment bolt (vehicle tool
Additives kit) .............................................. 268, 327
Engine oil ....................................... 359 All-wheel drive (4MATIC) .................. 159
Gasoline ......................................... 361 Alternator
Address change ................................... 22 Messages in the multifunction
ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ..... 156 display ................................... 280, 290
Advanced Tire Pressure Alternator (Technical data)
Monitoring System (Advanced see Vehicle specification
TPMS) ................................................. 223 AMG menu ......................................... 123
Messages in the multifunction Anticorrosion/antifreeze .................. 363
display ................................... 281, 296 Antilock Brake System
Air bags ................................................ 37 see ABS
Emergency call upon deployment . . 200 Anti-theft systems ............................... 66
Front, driver and passenger ............. 40 Anti-theft alarm system ................... 66
Front passenger front air bag off Immobilizer ...................................... 66
indicator lamp (Canada Aquaplaning
only) ........................................ 46, 305 see Hydroplaning

Index 5
Armrest, front Batteries, SmartKey

Storage compartment .................... 193 Checking condition .......................... 73
Ashtrays ............................................. 196 Replacing ....................................... 309
Aspect ratio (tires) ............................ 240 Battery, Vehicle ................................. 334
Audio/DVD menu .............................. 126 Charging ........................................ 336
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ........ 90 Jump starting ................................. 336
Automatic central locking .......... 74, 135 Messages in the multifunction
Automatic headlamp mode ................ 93 display ................................... 280, 290
Automatic interior lighting control .... 97 Bead (tire) .......................................... 240
Automatic locking when driving ...... 135 Beverage holders
Automatic shift program .................. 114 see Cup holders
Automatic transmission ................... 109 Bleeding the fuel system (diesel
Automatic shift program ................ 114 engine) ............................................... 331
Emergency operation (limp-home BlueTEC
mode) ............................................ 117 AdBlue® tank ................................. 331
Gear range indicator ...................... 114 AdBlue® tank capacity ................... 358
Gear ranges ................................... 113 Brake fluid
Gear selector lever ........................ 109 Checking level ............................... 217
Hill-start assist system .................. 152 Messages in the multifunction
Kickdown ....................................... 113 display ........................................... 284
Kickdown (manual shift program) . . 117 Brake lamps
Manual shift program ..................... 115 Cleaning lenses ............................. 263
One-touch gearshifting .................. 115 Brake pads
Program mode indicator ................ 114 Messages in the multifunction
Program mode selector switch display ........................................... 283
(automatic shift program) .............. 114 Brakes ................................................ 245
Program mode selector switch High-performance brake system .... 246
(manual shift program) .................. 116 Parking brake ........................ 107, 247
Shifting procedure ......................... 111 Warning lamp ................................. 299
Steering wheel gearshift control .... 115 Break-in period .................................. 210
Towing a trailer .............................. 113 Bug cover (Radiator) ......................... 214
Transmission position indicator ..... 112 Bulbs
Transmission positions .................. 112 see Replacing bulbs
AUX socket ........................................ 193
Axle oils .............................................. 357 C
B CAC (Customer Assistance Center) ... 23

California retail buyers and
BabySmart™ lessees, important notice for ............. 21
Air bag deactivation system ............. 46 Calls (phone) ...................................... 139
Self-test ........................................... 47 Can holders
Backrest see Cup holders
see Seats Capacities and recommended
Backup lamps fuel/lubricants .................................. 356
Messages in the multifunction Cargo compartment
display ........................................... 293 Cargo net ....................................... 191
Bar (air pressure unit) ....................... 240 Cargo volume, expanding .............. 189
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 63 Cover blind .................................... 190

6 Index
Fuse box ........................................ 344 Air recirculation mode ........... 172, 182
Hooks ............................................ 189 Air volume ............................. 171, 181
Tie-down rings ............................... 188 Automatic mode .................... 170, 179
Cargo compartment cover blind ...... 190 Climate control .............................. 167
Cargo net ........................................... 191 Deactivating system .............. 169, 178
Cargo tie-down rings ......................... 188 Front defroster ...................... 171, 181
Carpets, cleaning .............................. 265 Residual heat and
Carriers .............................................. 187 ventilation .............................. 172, 183
Center console Temperature .......................... 170, 179
Lower part ....................................... 32 Clock ............................................ 28, 132
Upper part ....................................... 31 Cockpit ................................................. 27
Central locking Cold tire inflation pressure .............. 240
Automatic ................................ 74, 135 Collapsible tire (spare wheel) .......... 356
KEYLESS-GO .................................... 71 Collapsible wheel chock ................... 270
Locking/unlocking from inside ........ 75 COMAND system
SmartKey ......................................... 70 see separate COMAND system
Central locking/unlocking switch ..... 75 operating instructions
Certification label .............................. 346 Combination switch ............................ 95
Children in the vehicle Comfort submenu
Air bags ........................................... 37 Easy-entry/exit feature .................. 136
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation Fold-in function for exterior rear
system ............................................. 46 view mirrors ................................... 137
Child safety locks (rear doors) ......... 60 Seat belt adjustment feature ......... 136
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type .... 59 Compass
Indicator lamp, front passenger Calling up ....................................... 207
front air bag off (Canada only) ......... 46 Control system .................................. 119
Indicator lamp, front passenger Multifunction display ..................... 121
front air bag off (USA only) .............. 42 Multifunction steering wheel ......... 119
Infant and child restraint systems .... 56 Resetting to factory settings .......... 129
OCS (Occupant Classification Control system menus ...................... 121
System) ........................................... 42 AIRMATIC/Compass ...................... 127
Override switch ................................ 60 AMG ............................................... 123
Safety notes ..................................... 55 Audio/DVD .................................... 126
Tether anchorage points .................. 58 Distronic ........................................ 128
Top tether ........................................ 58 Navigation ..................................... 127
Child safety Off-road Mode ............................... 125
see Children in the vehicle Settings ......................................... 129
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type Standard display ............................ 122
see Children in the vehicle Telephone ...................................... 139
Chrome-plated exhaust tip, Trip computer ................................ 138
cleaning .............................................. 266 Vehicle configuration ..................... 137
Cigarette lighter ................................ 196 Vehicle status message memory ... 128
Climate control system .................... 165 Control system submenus
3-zone automatic climate control . . 173 Comfort ......................................... 135
Air conditioning ..................... 169, 178 Instrument cluster ......................... 130
Air conditioning refrigerant ............ 359 Lighting .......................................... 133
Air distribution ....................... 171, 180 Time/Date ..................................... 132
Vehicle ........................................... 135

Index 7
Coolant Digital clock

Anticorrosion/antifreeze ............... 363 see Clock
Capacities ...................................... 358 Digital speedometer ......................... 123
Checking level ............................... 216 Dimensions (vehicle)
Messages in the multifunction see Vehicle specification
display ........................................... 288 Direction of rotation (tires) .............. 231
Corner-illuminating front fog Displays
lamps .................................................... 96 Digital speedometer ...................... 123
Cruise control .................................... 141 Distronic ........................................ 146
Activating ....................................... 142 Maintenance service indicator ....... 258
Canceling ....................................... 142 Messages in the multifunction
Changing the set speed ................. 143 display ........................................... 272
Last stored speed .......................... 143 Multifunction display ..................... 121
Lever .............................................. 142 Outside temperature ............. 123, 131
Messages in the mutlifunction Symbol messages .......................... 283
display ........................................... 278 Text messages ............................... 273
Resume function ............................ 143 Trip computer ................................ 138
Setting current speed .................... 142 Vehicle status message memory ... 128
Cup holders ........................................ 194 Vehicle system settings ................. 129
Curb weight ....................................... 240 Distronic ............................................ 144
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 23 Cleaning system sensor cover ....... 263
Customer Relations Department ....... 24 Control system .............................. 128
Distance warning function ............. 151
D Distance warning
lamp ...................................... 146, 302
Dashboard
Driving with .................................... 150
see Instrument cluster Menu ............................................. 147
Data recording ..................................... 24 Messages in the multifunction
Date, Setting ...................................... 132 display ........................................... 278
Daytime running lamp mode .............. 94 Resume function ............................ 149
Switching on or off ......................... 133 Sensor cover .................................. 263
Deep water Speed settings ............................... 148
see Standing water Door control panel .............................. 33
Defroster Door handles ........................................ 33
Rear window .................................. 183 Doors
Windshield ............................. 171, 181 Child safety locks ............................ 60
Delayed shut-off Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ... 71
Exterior lamps ................................ 134 Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 70
Interior lighting .............................. 135 Messages in the multifunction
Department of Transportation display ........................................... 286
see DOT Opening from inside ......................... 74
Diesel engine Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 203
Preglow indicator lamp .................... 29 Unlocking (Mechanical key) ........... 306
Diesel fuel DOT (Department of
see Fuel Transportation) .................................. 240
Difficulties Downhill Speed Regulation
While driving .................................. 106 see DSR
With starting .................................. 105 Drinking and driving ......................... 244

8 Index
Driving Electronic Stability Program

Abroad ........................................... 257 see ESP®
Hydroplaning ................................. 247 Electronic Traction System
Instructions ........................... 103, 244 see ETS/4-ETS
In winter ........................................ 243 Emergency, in case of
Off-road ......................................... 248 First aid kit ..................................... 268
Problems ....................................... 106 Flat tire .......................................... 319
Safety systems ................................ 61 Hazard warning flasher .................... 96
Systems ......................................... 141 Roadside Assistance ................ 21, 201
Through standing water ................. 247 Towing the vehicle ......................... 338
With Distronic ................................ 150 Emergency calls
Driving and parking Tele Aid .......................................... 200
Safety notes .................................. 103 Emergency engine shutdown ........... 344
Driving off .................................. 105, 247 Emergency operations
Driving safety systems ....................... 61 Limp-home mode ........................... 117
ABS .................................................. 62 Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 203
BAS .................................................. 63 Emergency Tensioning Device
EBP .................................................. 63 see ETD
ESP® ................................................ 63 Emission control ............................... 258
ETS/4-ETS ....................................... 64 Information label ............................ 347
Driving systems System warranties ........................... 20
Air suspension program ................. 155 Engine
All-wheel drive (4MATIC) ................ 159 Break-in recommendations ............ 210
Cruise control ................................ 141 Cleaning ......................................... 262
Distronic ........................................ 144 Compartment ................................ 212
Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) . . 152 Malfunction indicator
Hill-start assist system .................. 152 lamp ........................................ 29, 303
Off-road driving program ............... 155 Messages in the multifunction
Parktronic system .......................... 160 display ........................................... 288
Rear view camera .......................... 163 Number .......................................... 347
Driving tips, automatic Starting .......................................... 103
transmission ...................................... 113 Turning off ..................................... 108
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) .... 152 Engine (Technical data)
Messages in the multifunction see Vehicle specification
display ........................................... 286 Engine compartment
Radiator ......................................... 214
E Engine coolant
see Coolant
Easy-entry/exit feature .............. 87, 136
Engine oil
EBP (Electronic Brake
Adding ........................................... 215
Proportioning) ...................................... 63
Additives ........................................ 359
Electrical system
Checking level ............................... 214
Improper work on or
Consumption ................................. 214
modifications ................................... 23
Messages in the multifunction
Power outlets ................................. 197
display ........................................... 291
Electrical system (Technical data)
see Vehicle specification

Index 9
Oil dipstick ..................................... 215 Fog lamps ............................................. 95

Recommended engine oils and oil Messages in the multifunction
filter ............................................... 359 display ................................... 293, 294
ESP® (Electronic Stability Fold-in function for exterior rear
Program) .............................................. 63 view mirrors ................................ 91, 137
ETS/4-ETS ....................................... 64 Four-wheel drive
Messages in the multifunction see All-wheel drive (4MATIC)
display ................................... 273, 284 Front air bags
Off-road ESP® .................................. 65 see Air bags
Trailer stabilization ........................... 66 Front axle oil ...................................... 357
Warning lamp ................................. 301 Front lamps
ETD (Emergency Tensioning see Headlamps
Device) ................................................. 52 Front passenger front air bag ............ 40
Safety guidelines ............................. 39 Messages in the multifunction
ETS/4-ETS (Electronic Traction display ........................................... 275
System) ................................................ 64 Front passenger front air bag off
Express operation indicator lamp (Canada only) ..... 46, 305
Power windows .............................. 100 Front passenger front air bag off
Tilt/sliding sunroof ........................ 184 indicator lamp (USA only) .......... 42, 305
Exterior lamp switch ........................... 93 Front seat head restraints
Exterior rear view mirrors .................. 89 see Head restraints
Fold-in function ........................ 91, 137 Fuel ..................................................... 210
Parking position ............................... 90 Additives ........................................ 361
Power-folding ................................... 91 Capacity, fuel tank ......................... 358
Exterior view of vehicle ...................... 26 Diesel fuel ............................. 358, 360
Drive sensibly–safe fuel ................. 244
F Fuel consumption statistics ........... 138
Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 212
Fastening the seat belts ..................... 50 Fuel tank reserve warning
First aid kit ......................................... 268 lamp ........................................ 29, 303
Flat tire ............................................... 319 Premium unleaded gasoline ... 358, 360
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 329 Refueling ........................................ 210
Mounting the spare wheel ............. 324 Requirements ................................ 360
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 320 Fuel filler flap ..................................... 212
Spare wheel ........................... 319, 356 Opening manually .......................... 308
TIREFIT (tire repair kit) ................... 320 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Floormats ........................................... 208 Capacities ...................................... 356
Fluids Fuel system, bleeding (diesel
AdBlue® ......................................... 358 engine) ............................................... 331
Automatic transmission fluid ......... 357 Fuel tank
Brake fluid ..................................... 358 Capacity ........................................ 358
Capacities ...................................... 356 Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 212
Engine coolant ............................... 358 Refueling ........................................ 210
Engine oil ....................................... 357 Fuses .................................................. 342
Power steering fluid ....................... 357
Washer and headlamp cleaning
system ........................................... 358

10 Index
G Daytime running lamp mode ............ 94

Delayed shut-off ............................ 134
Garage door opener .................... 32, 204 Halogen ......................................... 312
Gasoline High-beam flasher ............................ 96
see Fuel High-beam headlamps ..................... 96
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ... 240 Low-beam headlamps ...................... 93
Gear range ......................................... 113 Replacing bulbs ............................. 311
Indicator ........................................ 114 Switch .............................................. 93
Limiting .......................................... 115 Headliner, cleaning and care of ....... 265
Shifting into optimal ...................... 115 Head restraints .................................... 81
Gear selector lever ............................ 109 Adjustment ................................ 81, 83
Cleaning ......................................... 265 Folding back .................................... 84
Gearshift pattern ........................... 109 NECK-PRO active front head
Shifting procedure ......................... 111 restraints ......................................... 53
Transmission position indicator ..... 112 NECK-PRO active front head
Transmission positions .................. 112 restraints, resetting ....................... 309
Generator Rear seat head restraints ................. 84
see Alternator Heated steering wheel ........................ 88
Global locking/unlocking Height adjustment
see Key, SmartKey Seat belt outlet ................................ 51
Glove box ........................................... 193 Seats ............................................... 81
Gross Axle Weight Rating Vehicle level control ...................... 156
see GAWR High-beam flasher ............................... 96
Gross Trailer Weight High-beam headlamps ................ 96, 312
see GTW Indicator lamp .................................. 29
Gross Vehicle Weight High-performance brake system ..... 246
see GVW Hill-start assist system ..................... 152
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Hood ................................................... 212
see GVWR Messages in the multifunction
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) .............. 240 display ........................................... 286
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) ............ 240 Hooks ................................................. 189
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Horn ...................................................... 27
Rating) ................................................ 240 HVAC
see Climate control system
H Hydroplaning ..................................... 247
Halogen headlamps
see Headlamps I
Hard plastic trim items, cleaning .... 265 Identification labels .......................... 346
Hazard warning flasher ....................... 96 Identification number, vehicle
Headlamp cleaning system ................ 96 (VIN) ................................................... 347
Headlamps Ignition ................................... 79, 80, 104
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps ............. 92 Immobilizer .......................................... 66
Adjusting aim ................................. 317 Indicator lamps
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 93 see Lamps, indicator and warning
Bi-Xenon .................................. 92, 312 Infant and child restraint systems
Cleaning lenses ............................. 263 see Children in the vehicle
Cleaning system .............................. 96

Index 11
Inflation pressure Global unlocking

see Tires, Inflation pressure (SmartKey) ....................................... 71
Infrared reflecting windshield ......... 208 Important notes on KEYLESS-GO ..... 72
Inside door handle .............................. 74 Locking/unlocking ........................... 70
Instrument cluster ............................ 117 Loss of ............................................. 73
Illumination .................................... 118 Messages in the multifunction
Lamps ............................................ 297 display ................................... 286, 287
Multifunction display ..................... 121 Opening and closing the power
Instrument lighting tilt/sliding sunroof ......................... 102
see Instrument cluster, Illumination Opening and closing the windows . 102
Instrument panel Remote control ................................ 70
see Instrument cluster Replacing ......................................... 74
Instruments and controls Replacing batteries ........................ 309
see Cockpit Restoring to factory setting ....... 71, 73
Interior lighting Selective setting ........................ 71, 73
Delayed shut-off ............................ 135 Starter switch positions ................... 79
Emergency lighting .......................... 98 KEYLESS-GO
Front ................................................ 97 Starter switch positions ................... 80
Front reading lamps ......................... 97 Kickdown ........................................... 113
Rear ................................................. 98 Kickdown (manual shift program) ... 117
Rear reading lamps .......................... 98 Kilopascal (air pressure unit) ........... 240
Interior rear view mirror ..................... 89
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 90 L
Interior storage spaces
Labels
see Storage compartments
Certification ................................... 346
Intermittent wiping
Emission control information ......... 347
Rain sensor ...................................... 99
Tire and Loading Information
placard ........................................... 227
J Tire inflation pressure .................... 220
Jack ..................................................... 270 Lamps, exterior
Jump starting ..................................... 336 Exterior lamp switch ........................ 93
Front .............................................. 312
K Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 293
Key, Mechanical Rear ............................................... 312
Loss of ............................................. 73 Switching on/off .............................. 93
Replacing ......................................... 74 Lamps, indicator and warning
Unlocking/locking manually .......... 306 ABS .......................................... 28, 298
Key, SmartKey Brakes ..................................... 28, 299
Battery check lamp .......................... 73 Center console ................................ 31
Checking batteries ........................... 73 Distance warning
Factory setting ........................... 71, 72 lamp .............................. 146, 151, 302
Global locking (KEYLESS- Engine malfunction .................. 29, 303
GO) .................................................. 73 ESP® ........................................ 28, 301
Global locking (SmartKey) ................ 71 Fog lamps ........................................ 95
Global unlocking (KEYLESS- Front passenger front air bag off
GO) ............................................ 72, 73 (Canada only) .......................... 46, 305

12 Index
Front passenger front air bag off M

(USA only) ................................ 42, 305
Fuel tank reserve ..................... 29, 303 Maintenance ........................................ 21
High-beam headlamps ............... 29, 96 Maintenance System
Instrument cluster ................... 28, 297 Service indicator display ................ 259
Low-beam headlamps ................ 29, 93 Service indicator message ............. 258
Low tire pressure/TPMS Service term exceeded .................. 259
malfunction telltale .................. 28, 304 Manual headlamp mode (Low-
Seat belt telltale ................ 29, 51, 300 beam headlamps) ................................ 93
SRS .................................... 29, 36, 301 Manual shift program ....................... 115
Turn signals ..................................... 28 Maximum engine speed
Language, selecting .......................... 131 see Vehicle specification
LATCH-type child seat anchors Maximum loaded vehicle weight ..... 241
see Children in the vehicle Maximum load rating (tires) ............. 240
License plate lamps Maximum permissible tire
Messages in the multifunction inflation pressure .............................. 241
display ........................................... 294 Mechanical key .................................. 306
Replacing bulbs ............................. 313 Media interface ................................. 193
Light alloy wheels, cleaning ............. 264 Memory function ................................. 92
Lighter Menus
see Cigarette lighter see Control system menus
Lighting ................................................ 92 Minispare wheel
Daytime running lamp mode ............ 94 see Spare wheel
Exterior ............................................ 93 Mirrors .................................................. 89
Interior ............................................. 97 Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 90
Limp-home mode .............................. 117 Exterior rear view mirror parking
Load index (tires) ...................... 236, 240 position ............................................ 90
Loading Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 89
see Vehicle loading Interior rear view mirror ................... 89
Locator lighting ................................. 133 Memory function .............................. 92
Lock button Power-folding exterior rear view
Outside door handle (KEYLESS- mirrors ............................................. 91
GO) .................................................. 73 Vanity mirror .................................. 195
Locking the vehicle MOExtended system ......................... 330
KEYLESS-GO .................................... 71 MOExtended tires ..................... 330, 352
Manually ........................................ 307 MON (Motor Octane Number) .......... 360
SmartKey ......................................... 70 Motor Octane Number
Loss of see MON
Key .................................................. 73 Multicontour seat ................................ 85
Service and Warranty Information Multifunction display ........................ 121
booklet .......................................... 346 Symbol messages .......................... 283
Low-beam headlamps ......................... 93 Text messages ............................... 273
Exterior lamp switch ........................ 93 Vehicle status messages ............... 272
Indicator lamp .................................. 29 Multifunction display messages
Switching on .................................... 93 ABS ....................................... 273, 284
Lubricants .......................................... 356 Active headlamps .......................... 293
Lumbar support ................................... 84 Advanced TPMS ..................... 281, 296
Air bags ......................................... 275

Index 13
Air filter .......................................... 292 Multifunction steering wheel

Air suspension program ................. 285 Adjustment ...................................... 86
Alternator .............................. 280, 290 Buttons .......................................... 119
Automatic Cleaning ......................................... 265
transmission .................................. 280 Easy-entry/exit feature ........... 87, 136
Battery ................................... 280, 290 Gearshift control ............................ 115
Brake fluid ..................................... 284 Heating ............................................ 88
Brake pads ..................................... 283 Memory function .............................. 92
Coolant .......................................... 288 Overview .......................................... 30
Corner-illuminating front fog
lamps ............................................. 295 N
Cruise control ................................ 278
Navigation menu ............................... 127
Distronic ........................................ 278
Doors ............................................. 286 Navigation system
Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) . . 286 see Separate operating instructions
EBP ................................................ 284 NECK-PRO active front head
Engine oil ....................................... 291 restraints ............................................. 53
Resetting ....................................... 309
ESP® ...................................... 273, 284
Nets, parcel ....................................... 188
Fog lamps .............................. 293, 294
Night security illumination .............. 134
Front passenger front air bag ........ 275
Normal occupant weight .................. 241
Gas cap .......................................... 292
Number, vehicle identification
High-beam lamps ........................... 294
(VIN) ................................................... 347
Hood .............................................. 286
License plate lamps ....................... 294
Light sensor ................................... 294 O
Low-beam lamps ............................ 294 Occupant Classification System
Parking brake ................................ 284 see OCS (Occupant Classification
Parking lamps ................................ 294 System)
PRE-SAFE® .................................... 274 Occupant distribution ....................... 241
Reserve fuel ................................... 291 Occupant safety
Reverse lamp ................................. 293 Air bags ........................................... 37
Side marker lamps ......................... 293 BabySmart™ .................................... 46
SmartKey ............................... 286, 287 Children and air bags ....................... 37
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO .......... 286 Children in the vehicle ..................... 55
SRS ................................................ 285 Child seat anchors – LATCH-type .... 59
Tailgate .......................................... 286 Fastening the seat belts ................... 50
Tail lamps ...................................... 295 Front passenger front air bag off
Tele Aid .......................................... 285 indicator lamp (Canada
Tire inflation pressure ............ 281, 296 only) ........................................ 46, 305
Tire pressure monitor .................... 281 Front passenger front air bag off
Tires ...................................... 281, 296 indicator lamp (USA only) ........ 42, 305
Trailer brake lamps ........................ 295 Infant and child restraint systems .... 56
Trailer tail lamps ............................ 295 Introduction ..................................... 36
Trailer turn signal lamps ................ 295 OCS (Occupant Classification
Turn signals ................................... 296 System) ........................................... 42
Washer fluid ................................... 288 PRE-SAFE® ....................................... 52
Seat belts .................................. 39, 48

14 Index
OCS (Occupant Classification Parts service ...................................... 346

System) ................................................ 42 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
Self-test ........................................... 45 (Canada only)
Odometer ........................................... 121 see Front passenger front air bag
Off-road driving ................................. 248 off indicator lamp (Canada only)
Checklist ............................... 249, 253 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
Crossing obstacles ........................ 252 (USA only)
Driving instructions ........................ 248 see Front passenger front air bag
Driving on sand .............................. 252 off indicator lamp (USA only)
Driving through water .................... 251 Passenger safety
Returning ....................................... 253 see Occupant safety
Ruts ............................................... 253 Pedals ................................................. 244
Steep terrain .................................. 250 Phone
Off-road driving program .................. 155 see Telephone
Off-road Mode menu ......................... 125 Plastic parts, cleaning ...................... 264
Oil, oil level Power assistance .............................. 244
see Engine oil Power outlets .................................... 197
On-board computer Power seats
see Control system see Seats
One-touch gearshifting ..................... 115 Power tailgate
Operating safety .................................. 23 Closing ............................................. 76
Ornamental moldings, cleaning ....... 262 Messages in the multifunction
Outside temperature display ........................................... 286
see Displays Opening ........................................... 76
Overhead control panel ...................... 32 Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Operation ....................................... 184
P Synchronizing ................................ 186
Power washer .................................... 261
Paintwork, cleaning .......................... 261
Power windows ................................. 100
Paintwork code ................................. 347
Cleaning ......................................... 264
Panic alarm .......................................... 61
Operation ....................................... 100
Parcel nets ......................................... 188
Rear door window, override
Parking ............................................... 107 switch .............................................. 60
Parktronic system .......................... 160 Synchronizing ................................ 102
Parking brake ............................ 107, 247 Practical hints ................................... 268
Messages in the multifunction Preglow indicator lamp .............. 29, 104
display ........................................... 284
PRE-SAFE® ............................................ 52
Parking position
Messages in the multifunction
Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 90
display ........................................... 274
Transmission position .................... 112
Problems
Parktronic system
While driving .................................. 106
Cleaning system sensors ............... 263
With vehicle ..................................... 23
Malfunction .................................... 163
With wipers .................................... 100
Minimum distance ......................... 161
Product information ............................ 20
Sensor range ................................. 161
Production options weight ............... 241
Switching on/off ........................... 162
System sensors ............................. 160
Warning indicators ................... 27, 161

Index 15
Program mode selector switch Reporting safety defects .................... 24

Automatic shift program ................ 114 Research Octane Number
Manual shift program ..................... 116 see RON
Proximity key Reserve fuel
see Key, SmartKey Messages in the multifunction
PSI (air pressure unit) ....................... 241 display ........................................... 291
Warning lamp ................................... 29
R Reset button ................................ 28, 118
Reset tool (NECK-PRO active front
RACETIMER ........................................ 124
head restraints) ................................. 309
Radiator ..................................... 214, 242
Restraint systems
Radio
see Occupant safety
Selecting stations .......................... 126
Rims ........................................... 241, 352
Radio transmitters ............................ 257
Roadside Assistance ................... 21, 201
Rain sensor
RON (Research Octane Number) ..... 360
see Intermittent wiping
Rubber parts, cleaning ...................... 264
Rear axle oil ....................................... 357
Run-flat tires
Rear center console ashtray
see MOExtended tires
see Ashtrays
Rear doors
S
Child safety locks ............................ 60
Rear door window Safety
Override switch ................................ 60 Driving safety systems ..................... 61
Rear fog lamp Occupant safety ............................... 36
see Fog lamps Reporting defects ............................ 24
Rear lamps Safety belts
see Tail lamps see Seat belts
Rear seat head restraints Seat belt force limiter ......................... 52
see Head restraints Seat belts ............................................. 48
Rear view camera .............................. 163 Adjustment function ........................ 51
Cleaning the camera lens .............. 263 Children in the vehicle ..................... 55
Rear window defroster ..................... 183 Cleaning ......................................... 265
Rear window wiper/washer ............. 100 Fastening ......................................... 50
Recommended tire inflation Height adjustment ........................... 51
pressure ..................................... 219, 241 Proper use of ................................... 48
Refilling Safety guidelines ............................. 39
AdBlue® ......................................... 332 Safety notes ..................................... 48
Refrigerant, air conditioning ............ 359 Telltale ..................................... 29, 300
Refueling ............................................ 210 Seat heating ......................................... 86
Regular checks .................................. 212 Seating capacity ................................ 228
Reminder, Seat belt Seats ..................................................... 81
see Seat belts, Telltale Adjustment ...................................... 81
Remote control Easy-entry/exit feature .................... 87
see Key, SmartKey Folding (expanding cargo volume) . 189
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ......... 203 Heating ............................................ 86
Replacing Memory function .............................. 92
Key .................................................. 74 Multicontour seat ............................ 85
Replacing bulbs ................................. 311 Ventilation ....................................... 85

16 Index
Securing cargo Sport Utility Vehicle

Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 188 see SUV
Selective setting SRS
see Key, SmartKey Indicator lamp ................... 29, 36, 301
Selector lever Messages in the multifunction
see Gear selector lever display ........................................... 285
Self-test Standing water, driving through ...... 247
BabySmart™ .................................... 47 Starter switch positions
OCS (Occupant Classification KEYLESS-GO .................................... 80
System) ........................................... 45 SmartKey ......................................... 79
Tele Aid .......................................... 199 Starting difficulties (engine) ............ 105
Service Starting the engine ........................... 103
see Maintenance Steering column
Service, parts .................................... 346 see Multifunction steering wheel,
Service and warranty information ..... 20 Adjustment
Service intervals Steering wheel
see Maintenance System, Service see Multifunction steering wheel
indicator message Steering wheel gearshift control ..... 115
Service life (tires) .............................. 232 Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services . . . 204
Settings Storage compartments ..................... 192
Factory setting (KEYLESS-GO) ......... 72 Storing tires ....................................... 233
Factory setting (SmartKey) .............. 71 Stranded vehicle ............................... 342
Memory function .............................. 92 Sunroof
Menu ............................................. 129 see Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Selective setting (KEYLESS-GO) ....... 73 Sun visors .......................................... 195
Selective setting (SmartKey) ............ 71 Suspension tuning
Side impact air bags ........................... 40 see Air suspension program
Side marker lamps SUV (Sport Utility Vehicle) ................. 22
Cleaning lenses ............................. 263
Messages in the multifunction T
display ........................................... 293
Sidewall (tires) .................................. 241 Tachometer .................................. 29, 119
SmartKey Overspeed range ........................... 119
see Key, SmartKey Tailgate
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO Closing ............................................. 75
see Key, SmartKey Messages in the multifunction
Snow chains ...................................... 243 display ........................................... 286
Snow tires Opening ........................................... 75
see Winter tires Power tailgate .................................. 76
Spare wheel ....................................... 352 Unlocking manually ....................... 307
Tail lamps ........................................... 312
Mounting ....................................... 324
Storage location ............................ 271 Cleaning lenses ............................. 263
Speedometer ............................... 28, 146 Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 295
Speed settings
Tar stains ........................................... 261
Cruise control ................................ 142
Technical data
Distronic ........................................ 148
Resume function ................... 143, 149 Air conditioning refrigerant ............ 359
Brake fluid ..................................... 359

Index 17
Capacities fuels, coolants, Phone book .................................... 140

lubricants etc. ................................ 356 Redialing ........................................ 141
Coolant .......................................... 362 Temperature
Engine oil additives ........................ 359 Interior temperature .............. 170, 179
Engine oils ..................................... 359 Outside .................................. 123, 131
Fuel requirements .......................... 360 Tether anchorage points
Gasoline additives .......................... 361 see Children in the vehicle
Identification labels ....................... 346 Tie-down rings ................................... 188
Premium unleaded gasoline ........... 360 Tightening torque
Rims and tires ................................ 352 Wheels ........................................... 330
Spare wheel ................................... 356 Time setting ....................................... 132
Vehicle specification ML 350 ......... 348 TIN (Tire Identification Number) ...... 241
Vehicle specification Tire and Loading Information
ML 350 4MATIC ............................. 349 placard ............................................... 227
Vehicle specification Tire and loading terminology ........... 239
ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC ............... 348 TIREFIT ............................................... 320
Vehicle specification Tire Identification Number
ML 550 4MATIC ............................. 350 see TIN
Vehicle specification ML 63 AMG . . 351 Tire inflation pressure
Washer and headlamp cleaning Checking ........................................ 221
system ................................... 358, 364 Important notes on ........................ 220
Technical data (dimensions) Label on the inside of fuel filler
see Vehicle specification flap ................................................ 220
Technical data (electrical system) Placard on driver’s door B-pillar ..... 227
see Vehicle specification Tire labeling ....................................... 235
Technical data (engine) Tire load rating .................................. 240
see Vehicle specification Tire ply composition and material
Technical data (weights) used .................................................... 241
see Vehicle specification Tire pressure loss warning system . 222
Tele Aid ............................................... 199 Tire repair kit
Emergency calls ............................. 200 see TIREFIT
Information button ......................... 202 Tires ........................................... 218, 352
Initiating an emergency call Advanced Tire Pressure
manually ........................................ 201 Monitoring System (Advanced
Messages in the multifunction TPMS) ............................................ 223
display ........................................... 285 Air pressure ................................... 219
Remote door unlock ...................... 203 Care and maintenance ................... 232
Roadside Assistance button .......... 201 Cleaning ......................................... 233
Search & Send ............................... 203 Direction of rotation, spinning ....... 231
SOS button .................................... 201 Important notes on tire inflation
Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services .. 204 pressure ........................................ 220
System self-test ............................. 199 Inflation pressure ........................... 221
Telephone ............................................. 30 Information placard ....................... 227
Answering/ending a call ................ 140 Inspection ...................................... 232
Hands-free microphone ................... 33 Labeling ......................................... 235
Menu ............................................. 139 Load index ............................. 236, 240
Operation ....................................... 139 Load rating .................................... 240

18 Index
Messages in the multifunction Transfer case ..................................... 117

display ................................... 281, 296 Transmission
MOExtended .................................. 352 see Automatic transmission
Ply composition and material Transmission fluid level .................... 216
used ............................................... 241 Transmission gear selector lever
Problems under-/overinflation ...... 221 see Gear selector lever
Retreads ........................................ 218 Transmission positions .................... 112
Rims and tires (technical data) ...... 352 Traveling abroad ............................... 257
Rotation ......................................... 234 Tread (tires) ....................................... 242
Service life ..................................... 232 Tread depth (tires) .................... 232, 242
Sizes .............................................. 352 Treadwear .......................................... 233
Snow chains .................................. 243 Treadwear indicators (tires) .... 232, 242
Speed rating .......................... 237, 241 Trip computer menu ......................... 138
Storing ........................................... 233 Trip odometer, resetting ................... 118
Temperature .......................... 220, 234 Turning off the engine ...................... 108
Terminology ................................... 239 Turn signals ......................................... 95
TIREFIT (tire repair kit) ................... 320 Cleaning lenses ............................. 263
Tire Identification Number ............. 241 Indicator lamps ................................ 28
Tire pressure loss warning system . 222 Messages in the multifunction
TPMS low tire pressure/ display ........................................... 296
malfunction telltale ........................ 304 TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) ........... 242
Traction ................................. 233, 241
Tread ............................................. 242 U
Tread depth ........................... 232, 242
Treadwear ...................................... 233 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear indicators ............. 232, 242 Standards .................................. 233, 242
Vehicle maximum load on .............. 242 Units
Wear pattern .................................. 234 Selecting digital speedometer
Winter tires ............................ 242, 352 display mode ................................. 131
Tire speed rating ....................... 237, 241 Selecting speedometer/
Tongue Weight Rating odometer display mode ................. 131
see TWR Unleaded gasoline, premium ........... 360
Top tether Unlocking the vehicle
see Children in the vehicle KEYLESS-GO .................................... 71
Total load limit ................................... 241 Manually ........................................ 306
Towing SmartKey ......................................... 70
Towing eye bolt .............................. 339 Upholstery, cleaning ......................... 265
Trailer .................................... 113, 254 Useful features .................................. 194
Vehicle ........................................... 338
Towing eye bolt ................................. 339 V
Traction ...................................... 233, 241 Vehicle
Trailer towing ............................ 113, 254 Battery ........................................... 334
Coupling a trailer ........................... 255 Care ............................................... 260
Decoupling ..................................... 257 Control system .............................. 119
Electrical connections .................... 254 Identification Number (VIN) ........... 346
Towing ........................................... 256 Locking/unlocking ........................... 70
Trailer hitch ................................... 254 Lowering (wheel change) ............... 329
Weights and ratings ....................... 254

Index 19
Modifications and alterations, Washer and headlamp cleaning

Operating safety .............................. 23 system ................................................ 364
Towing ........................................... 338 Washer fluid
Unlocking/locking manually .......... 306 Messages in the multifunction
Vehicle configuration menu ............. 137 display ........................................... 288
Vehicle dimensions Mixing ratio .................................... 364
see Vehicle specification Refilling .......................................... 217
Vehicle Identification Number Washing the vehicle .......................... 260
(VIN) ................................................... 346 Wear pattern (tires) .......................... 234
Vehicle jack Weights (vehicle)
see Jack see Vehicle specification
Vehicle level control Wheel
see Air suspension program Changing ....................................... 319
Vehicle lighting .................................... 92 Removing ....................................... 327
Vehicle loading Spare ............................................. 319
Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 188 Tightening torque ........................... 330
Cargo volume, expanding .............. 189 Wheels, sizes ..................................... 352
Carriers .......................................... 187 Wheels, Tires and .............................. 218
Instructions .................................... 186 Window curtain air bags ..................... 41
Load limit ....................................... 228 Windows
Terminology ................................... 239 see Power windows
Vehicle maximum load on the tire ... 242 Windows, cleaning ............................ 264
Vehicle specification Windshield
ML 350 .......................................... 348 Cleaning wiper blades .................... 264
ML 350 4MATIC ............................. 349 Infrared reflecting .......................... 208
ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC ............... 348 Washer fluid ................................... 364
ML 550 4MATIC ............................. 350 Wipers ............................................. 98
ML 63 AMG ................................... 351 Windshield wipers
Vehicle status message memory .... 128 Replacing wiper blades .................. 318
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 268 Winter cover .............................. 214, 242
Vehicle washing Winter driving
see Vehicle care Instructions .................................... 243
Vehicle weights Radiator cover ............................... 242
see Vehicle specification Snow chains .................................. 243
Tires ............................................... 242
W Winter tires ................................ 242, 352
Wood trims, cleaning ........................ 266
Warning lamps
see Lamps, Indicator and warning
Warning sounds
Distance warning function ............. 151
Distronic ........................................ 146
Driver’s or passenger’s seat belt ..... 51
Parking brake ................................ 284
Parktronic system .......................... 163
Seat belt telltale ............................ 300
Warranty coverage ............................ 346

20 Introduction
Product Information We continuously strive to improve our

product and ask for your understanding that
Please observe the following in your own best we reserve the right to make changes in
interest: design and equipment. Therefore,
We recommend using Genuine Mercedes- information, illustrations, and descriptions in
Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and this Operator’s Manual might differ from your
accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle.
vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine their
Vehicle equipment
reliability, safety and special suitability for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Your vehicle may have some or all of the
We are unable to make an assessment for equipment described in this manual.
other products and therefore cannot be held Therefore, you may find explanations for
responsible for them, even if in individual optional equipment not installed in your
cases an official approval or authorization by vehicle. If you have any questions about
governmental or other agencies should exist. operating particular equipment, any
Use of such parts and accessories could authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad
adversely affect the safety, performance or to demonstrate the proper procedures.
reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use Optional equipment is also described in this
them. manual, including operating instructions
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts and pre- wherever necessary. Since they are special-
approved conversion parts and accessories order items, the descriptions and illustrations
are available at any authorized Mercedes- herein may vary slightly from the actual
Benz Center. In addition, you will receive equipment of your vehicle.
comprehensive information on permissible If there are any equipment details that are not
technical modifications and expert shown or described in this Operator’s
installations. Manual, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures. The
Operator’s Manual Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet
are important documents and should be kept
Notes with the vehicle.
This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal
of useful information. We urge you to read it
carefully and familiarize yourself with the Service and warranty information
vehicle before driving. The Service and Warranty Information
For your own safety and longer service life of booklet contains detailed information about
the vehicle, we urge you to follow the the warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz,
instructions and warnings contained in this including:
Operator’s Manual. Ignoring them could RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
result in damage to the vehicle or personal
injury to you or others. Vehicle damage REmission System Warranty
caused by failure to follow instructions is not REmission Performance Warranty
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited RCalifornia,
Connecticut, Maine,
Warranty.
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,

Introduction 21
Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission Written notification should not be sent to a
Control System Warranty1 dealer, it should be addressed to
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Laws) Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
automobiles Maintenance
Under California law you may be entitled to a The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the necessary maintenance work which should
purchase price or lease price, if after a be performed at regular intervals.
reasonable number of repair attempts Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its you when you take the vehicle to an
authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
one or more substantial defects or service. The service advisor will record each
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered service in the booklet for you.
by its express warranty. During the period of
18 months from original delivery of the
vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles Roadside Assistance
(approximately 29 000 km) on the odometer
of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
reasonable number of repair attempts is Program provides factory-trained technical
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the
more of the following occurs: toll-free Roadside Assistance number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
(1) the same substantial defect or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect Customer Assistance Representatives
or malfunction has been subject to repair 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
two or more times, and you have directly Roadside Assistance will be provided in
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in accordance with standard program
writing of the need for its repair, guidelines which include providing service to
(2) the same substantial defect or the vehicle up to a reasonable distance from
malfunction of a less serious nature than a paved roadway. We will make every effort
category (1) has been subject to repair to assist in a breakdown situation, however,
four or more times and you have directly the accessibility of your vehicle will be
notified us in writing of the need for its determined by our authorized Mercedes-Benz
repair, or Center technician or the tow service provider
on a case-by-case basis and may be a factor
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of
in our ability to respond.
repair of the same or different substantial
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative Additional charges may be applicable for a
total of more than 30 calendar days. breakdown location determined not to be a
reasonably accessible roadside location as
1 Applicable to vehicles with gasoline engine only.
Z
22 Introduction
determined by our authorized technician and the use of leaded fuels will damage the
tow service provider. catalysts.
For additional information refer to the RGasoline may have a considerably lower
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance octane rating, and improper fuel can cause
Program brochure (in the USA) or the engine damage.
Roadside Assistance section of the Service
and Warranty Information Booklet (in
Canada) in your vehicle literature portfolio. Sport Utility Vehicle
G Warning!
Change of address or ownership This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for both
If you change your address, be sure to send on-road and off-road use. It can go places and
in the “Change of Address Notice” found in perform tasks for which conventional 2-wheel
the Service and Warranty Information drive passenger cars are not intended. This
Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz vehicle will handle and maneuver differently
Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at from conventional passenger cars in driving
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372), or conditions which may occur on streets,
Customer Service (in Canada) at highways and off-road use.
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in This vehicle has a higher ground clearance
contacting you in a timely manner should the and a higher center of gravity than many
need arise. passenger cars. As with other vehicles of this
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all type, if you make sharp turns at excessive
literature with the vehicle to make it available speeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle may
to the next operator. roll over or may go out of control and crash.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
Truck” found in the Service and Warranty
result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes-
and severe or fatal injury.
Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the
USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the
(1-800-367-6372), or Customer Service (in Operator’s Manual. Take time to become
Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. familiar with the driving characteristics of this
vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all
vehicle controls. Learn how your vehicle
Operating your vehicle outside the handles on different road surfaces. Do not
USA or Canada attempt sharp turns at excessive speeds or
abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign actions that can cause loss of vehicle control.
countries, please be aware that: When driving off-road or working the vehicle
RService facilities or replacement parts may hard, do not overload it. And, always wear
not be readily available. your seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash,
RUnleaded
an unbelted person is significantly more likely
gasoline for vehicles with
to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
catalytic converters may not be available;

Introduction 23
Operating safety Proper use of the vehicle

Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are
G Warning! familiar with the following information and
Work improperly carried out on electronic rules:
components and associated software could Rthe safety precautions in this manual
cause them to cease functioning. Because the
vehicle’s electronic components are Rthe “Technical data” section in this manual
interconnected, any modifications made may Rtraffic rules and regulations

produce an undesired effect on other
Rmotor vehicle laws and safety standards
systems. Electronic malfunctions could
seriously impair the operating safety of your G Warning!
vehicle.
Various warning labels are attached to your
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center vehicle. These warning labels are intended to
for repairs or modifications to electronic make you and others aware of various risks.
components. Do not remove any of these warning labels
Other improper work or modifications on the unless explicitly instructed to do so by
vehicle could also have a negative impact on information on the label itself. Removing
the operating safety of the vehicle. warning labels may cause you and others to
Some safety systems only function while the be unaware of certain risks which may result
engine is running. You should therefore never in an accident and/or personal injury.
turn off the engine while driving.
G Warning!
G Warning! HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
tires/wheels may cause serious damage and Instructions included in your vehicle literature
impair the operating safety of your vehicle. portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize
Such blows can be caused, for example, by potential danger.
running over an obstacle, road debris or a
pothole. If you feel a sudden significant
vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect Problems with your vehicle
that damage to your vehicle as occurred:
Rturn on your hazard warning flashers If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
Rslow down carefully affect its safe operation, we urge you to
Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safe contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
distance from the road immediately to have the problem diagnosed
Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/ and corrected if required. If the matter is not
wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle handled to your satisfaction, please discuss
appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other management or, if necessary, contact us at
qualified maintenance or repair facility for one of the following addresses:
further inspection or repairs. In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Z
24 Introduction
In Canada: Vehicle data recording

Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Information regarding electronic
98 Vanderhoof Avenue recording devices
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 (Including notice pursuant to California Code
§ 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with
Reporting safety defects
devices that can record vehicle systems data
and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may
For the USA only:
transmit some data in certain accidents.
The following text is published as required of
This information helps, for example, to
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
to continuously improve vehicle safety.
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
Daimler may access the information and
of 1966”.
share it with others
Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis
Reporting safety defects purposes
Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner or
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause lessee
injury or death, you should immediately Rin response to an official request by law
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety enforcement or other government agency
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to Rfor use in dispute resolution involving
notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
Daimler, its affiliates or sales/service
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may organization and/or
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
Ras otherwise required or permitted by law
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. Please check the Tele Aid subscription
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in service agreement for details regarding the
individual problems between you, your information that may be recorded or
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. transmitted via that system.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
www.safercar.gov.

25
Exterior view ....................................... 26

Cockpit ................................................. 27
Instrument cluster .............................. 28
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 30
Center console .................................... 31
Overhead control panel ...................... 32
Door control panel .............................. 33

26 Exterior view
Exterior view
At a glance
i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially available
for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please be aware that your vehicle might not be
equipped with all features described in this manual.
Function Page Function Page
: Tailgate 75 F Hood 212
Power tailgate 76 G Wipers 98
; Rear window defroster 183 Wiper blades, replacing 318
= Rear window wiper/washer 100 Wiper blades, cleaning 264
Wiper blade, replacing 318 H Windshield:
Wiper blade, cleaning 264 Wiping with washer fluid 99
? Rear lamps 311 Cleaning 264
A Fuel filler flap 210

I Power tilt/sliding sunroof 184
B Doors:
J Carriers 187
Locking and unlocking 70, K Tires and wheels 218
306 Rims and tires 352
C Exterior rear view mirrors 89 L Headlamp cleaning system 96
D Towing eyes 339 M Front fog lamp 95
E Front lamps 311

Cockpit 27
Cockpit
At a glance
: Cruise control lever: I Starter switch 79
Cruise control 141 J Steering wheel adjustment,
Distronic 144 manual 86
; Instrument cluster 28, K On-board diagnostics
117 (OBD) socket
= Multifunction steering 30, L Hood lock release 212
wheel 119
M Parking brake release 107
? Horn
N Parking brake pedal 107
A Steering wheel gearshift
control 115 O Door control panel 33
B Gear selector lever 109 P Exterior lamp switch 93
C Front Parktronic warning Q Steering wheel adjustment,
indicators 161 electrical 86
Heated steering wheel 88
D Overhead control panel 32
R Combination switch:
E Glove box lid release, glove
box lock 193 Turn signals 95
Wipers 98
F Glove box 192 High beam 96
G Power outlet 197
H Center console 31
Z
28 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
At a glance

: # Left turn signal $ Brake warning lamp,
indicator lamp USA only 299
d ESP® warning lamp 301
; To dim instrument cluster
· Distance warning
illumination 118
lamp3 302
= Reset button for: J Brake warning lamp,
Trip odometer 118 Canada only 299
Settings 129 h Combination low tire
? To brighten instrument pressure/TPMS
cluster illumination 118 malfunction telltale, USA 223,
only 304
A ! Right turn signal
indicator lamp
B Clock 132
C Speedometer with:
! Antilock Brake
System (ABS) indicator
lamp 298
È Variable speed limiter
indicator lamp2
2 Lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should go out when the engine is running.
3 Vehicles without Distronic: Warning lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should
go out when the engine is running.

Instrument cluster 29
At a glance
D Multifunction display with: Fuel gauge with: Fuel tank
reserve warning lamp 303
Trip odometer 118
8 Fuel filler flap
Main odometer 121
indicator: The fuel filler flap
E Tachometer with: is located on the rear right-
7 Seat belt telltale 51, hand side.
300 G Multifunction display with:
% Preglow indicator Outside temperature
lamp, diesel engine only 104 indicator or digital
or speedometer (depending
é Recuperative Brake on selected setting in the 123,
System (RBS) warning control system) 131
lamp, ML 450 HYBRID only4 Transmission position
+ Supplemental indicator 112
Restraint System (SRS) 36, Gear range indicator 114
indicator lamp 301 Automatic transmission
L Low-beam headlamp program mode indicator 114
indicator lamp 93 Rear window wiper
; Engine malfunction indicator 100
indicator lamp, Canada only 303 Downhill Speed Regulator
! Engine malfunction (DSR) indicator 153
indicator lamp, USA only 303 Off-road driving program
K High-beam headlamp indicator 155
indicator lamp 96
4 See separate HYBRID Supplemental Operating Instructions.
Z
30 Multifunction steering wheel
Multifunction steering wheel Function Page

Press button & or *
At a glance
briefly:
to move within a menu
to select previous or next
track, scene or stored
station within Audio/DVD
menu 126
to switch to the phone book
and select a name or
number within Telephone
menu 139
Press and hold button
& or *:
to select previous or next
track with quick search or
Function Page to select previous or next
station in station list or
: Multifunction display 121 wave band within Audio/
DVD menu 126
; Press button ~:
to start the quick search in
to end a call 139
the phone book within
to reject an incoming call 139 Telephone menu 139
Press button 6: Press button A to turn
to answer a call 139 the Voice Control System
to dial5 139 off6, see separate operating
to redial5 139 instructions.
Press button W or X:
to select submenus in the
Settings menu 130
to set values
to set the volume
Press button ? to turn
the Voice Control System
on6, see separate operating
instructions.
= Press button V or U
to select next/previous
menu. 119
5 Function only available in telephone menu.

6 Vehicles without Voice Control System: Button without function.

Center console 31
Center console Function Page

Upper part Front passenger front air
At a glance
bag off indicator lamp 46,
(Canada only) 305
D Storage compartment 192
E Alarm system indicator
lamp 67
F Electronic Stability
Program (ESP®) switch 64
G Adaptive Damping System
(ADS) switch 156
H Seat ventilation, driver’s
side 85
I Seat heating, driver’s side 86
J Switch for Downhill Speed
Regulation (DSR) 152
ML 450 HYBRID: Parktronic
Function Page system deactivation switch 160
: COMAND system, see K Hazard warning flasher
separate operating switch 96
instructions L Switch for off-road driving
; Climate control system 165 program 155
Rear window defroster 183 ML 63 AMG: Program mode
selector switch for
= Seat heating, front automatic transmission 115
passenger side 86 ML 450 HYBRID: Program
? Seat ventilation, front mode selector switch for
passenger side 85 automatic transmission7
A Parktronic system
deactivation switch 162
ML 450 HYBRID: Fuel filler
flap switch7
B Vehicle level control switch 156
C Front passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp (USA 42,
only) 305
7 See separate HYBRID Supplemental Operating Instructions.
Z
32 Overhead control panel
Lower part Overhead control panel

At a glance

: Ashtray with storage : Left front reading lamp on/
compartment 196 off 97
Cigarette lighter 196 ; Automatic interior lighting 97
; Cup holder 194 = Rear interior lighting on/off 97
= Front armrest storage ? Front interior lighting on/
compartment 192 off 97
? Removable card/ticket A Right reading lamp on/off 97
holder 194
B Front right interior lamp 97
C Power tilt/sliding sunroof
switch 184
D SOS button (Tele Aid
system) 201
E Interior rear view mirror 89
F Reading lamps 97
G Garage door opener 204

Door control panel 33
Function Page Door control panel

H Hands-free microphone for
At a glance
Tele Aid (emergency call
system), telephone and
Voice Control System, see
separate operating
instructions
I Front left interior lamp 97
Function Page
: Inside door handle 74
; Central locking/unlocking
switch 75
= Exterior rear view mirror
adjustment 89
? Selection buttons for
exterior rear view mirror
adjustment 89
Power-folding exterior rear
view mirrors 91
A Switches for opening/
closing front and rear door
windows 100
B Rear door window override
switch 60
C Remote tailgate switch,
power tailgate 78
Z
34

35
Vehicle equipment .............................. 36

Occupant safety .................................. 36
Panic alarm .......................................... 61
Driving safety systems ....................... 61
Anti-theft systems .............................. 66
Safety and security

36 Occupant safety
Vehicle equipment G Warning!

Modifications to or work improperly
i This Operator’s Manual describes all conducted on restraint system components
features, standard or optional, potentially or their wiring, as well as tampering with
available for your vehicle at the time of interconnected electronic systems, can lead
Safety and security
purchase. Please be aware that your to the restraint systems no longer functioning
vehicle might not be equipped with all as intended.
features described in this manual. Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices
(ETDs), for example, could deploy
inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents
Occupant safety although the deceleration threshold for air
Introduction bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,
never modify the restraint systems. Do not
In this section you will learn the most tamper with electronic components or their
important facts about the restraint system software.
components of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are: i See “Children in the vehicle”
RSeat belts (Y page 55) for information on
Rinfants and children traveling with you in
RChild restraints
the vehicle
RLower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren Rrestraint systems for infants and children
(LATCH)
Additional protection potential is provided by:
RSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) with SRS indicator lamp
- Air bags The SRS system conducts a self-test when
- Air bag control unit (with crash sensors) the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running. This
- Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for
facilitates detection of system malfunctions.
seat belts
The SRS indicator lamp + in the
- Seat belt force limiter instrument cluster comes on when the
RNECK-PRO active front head restraints ignition is switched on. It goes out no later
than a few seconds after the engine has been
RPreventive occupant safety (PRE-SAFE®) started.
RAir bag system components with The SRS components are in operational
- Front passenger front air bag off readiness when the SRS indicator lamp
indicator lamp + is not lit while the engine is running.
- USA only: Front passenger seat with A malfunction in the system has been
Occupant Classification System (OCS) detected if the SRS indicator lamp +
Rfails to go out after approximately
- Canada only: Front passenger seat with
4 seconds after the engine was started
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system
Rdoes not come on at all
Although the systems are independent, their
Rcomes on after the engine was started or
protective functions work in conjunction with
each other. while driving

Occupant safety 37
G Warning! Deployment of the air bags temporarily

The SRS self-check has detected a releases a small amount of dust from the air
malfunction when the SRS indicator lamp bags. This dust, however, is neither harmful
+: to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
vehicle. The dust might cause some
Rdoes not come on at all
Safety and security

temporary breathing difficulty for people with
Rdoes not go out after 4 seconds after the asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
engine was started this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
Rcomes on while driving soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
For your safety, we strongly recommend that vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz air by opening a window or door.
Center immediately to have the system
checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be G Warning!
activated when needed in an accident, which To reduce the risk of injury when the front air
could result in serious or fatal injury. The SRS bags inflate, it is very important for the driver
might also deploy unexpectedly and and front passenger to always be in a properly
unnecessarily which could also result in injury seated position and to wear their respective
as well. seat belt.
In addition, improper work on the SRS creates For maximum protection in the event of a
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or collision always be in normal seated position
causing unintended air bag deployment. Work with your back against the seat backrest.
on the SRS must therefore only be performed Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is
by qualified technicians. Contact an properly positioned on your body.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system speed and force, a proper seating position
to accommodate a person with disabilities, and correct positioning of the hands on the
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe
USA only: Call our Customer Assistance distance from the air bag. Occupants who are
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes not wearing their seat belt, are not seated
(1-800-367-6372) for details. properly or are too close to the air bag can be
seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it
inflates with great force instantaneously:
Air bags RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
G Warning! position that is as upright as possible with

Air bags are designed to reduce the potential your back against the seat backrest.
of injury and fatality in certain RMove the driver’s seat as far back as
Rfrontal impacts (front air bags) possible, still permitting proper operation
of vehicle controls. The distance from the
Rside impacts (side impact air bags and center of the driver’s chest to the center of
window curtain air bags) the air bag cover on the steering wheel
Rrollovers (window curtain air bags) must be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or more.
However, no system available today can You should be able to accomplish this by
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If
Z
38 Occupant safety
you have any difficulties, please contact an There is a possibility for a side impact air bag-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. related injury if occupants, especially
RDo not lean your head or chest close to the children, are not properly seated or restrained
steering wheel or dashboard. when next to a side impact air bag which
needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in
RKeep hands on the outside of the steering
Safety and security
order to do its job.

wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
the rim can increase the risk and potential
follow these guidelines:
severity of hand/arm injury when the driver
front air bag inflates. (1) Always sit as upright as possible,
wear the seat belt properly, and for
RAdjust the front passenger seat as far as
children 12 years old and under,
possible rearward from the dashboard
use an appropriately sized infant
when the seat is occupied.
restraint, toddler restraint, or
ROccupants, especially children, should booster seat recommended for the
never place their bodies or lean their heads size and weight of the child.
in the area of the door where the side (2) Always wear seat belts properly.
impact air bag inflates. This could result in
serious injuries or death should the side Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain
impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as Rfrontal impacts (front air bags)
upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized Rside impacts (side impact and window
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or curtain air bags) if the system determines
booster seat recommended for the size and the need for air bag deployment
weight of the child. Rrollovers (window curtain air bags)
RCanada only: Children 12 years old and Only in the event of such a situation will they
under must never ride in the front seat, provide their supplemental protection.
except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized The driver and passengers should always
BabySmart™ compatible child seat, which wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not
operates with the BabySmart™ air bag possible for the air bags to provide their
deactivation system installed in the vehicle supplemental protection.
to deactivate the front passenger front air
In case of other types of impacts and impacts
bag when it is installed properly. Otherwise
below air bag deployment thresholds, air
they will be struck by the air bag when it
bags will not deploy. The driver and
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
passengers will then be protected to the
or fatal injury will result.
extent possible by a properly fastened seat
Failure to follow these instructions can result belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also
in severe injuries to you or other occupants. needed to provide the best possible
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you protection in a rollover.
make the buyer aware of this safety Air bags are not a substitute for seat belts.
information. Be sure to give the buyer this Always wear your seat belt, regardless of
Operator’s Manual. whether or not your vehicle is equipped with
air bags.
G Warning!
It is important to your safety and that of your
Accident research shows that the safest place passengers to have deployed air bags
for children in an automobile is in a rear seat. replaced and to have any malfunctioning air

Occupant safety 39
bags repaired. This will help to make sure the cover, outboard sides of the seat
air bags will continue to provide supplemental backrests, door trim panels, or door frame
crash protection for occupants. trims.
RDo not install additional electrical/
Safety guidelines for the seat belt, electronic equipment on or near SRS
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD)
Safety and security

components and wiring.
and air bag
RKeep area between air bags and occupants
G Warning! free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,
RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have umbrellas, etc.).
been subjected to stress in an accident RDo not hang items such as coat hangers
must be replaced. Their anchoring points from the coat hooks or handles over the
must also be checked. Only use seat belts door. These items may be thrown around in
installed or supplied by an authorized the vehicle and cause head and other
Mercedes-Benz Center. injuries when the window curtain air bag is
RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency deployed.
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain RAir bag system components will be hot after
perchlorate material, which may require an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.
special handling and regard for the
RNever place your feet on the instrument
environment. Check with your local
government’s disposal guidelines. panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
California residents, see keep both feet on the floor in front of the
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ seat.
Perchlorate/index.cfm. RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a
RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD causing unintended air bag deployment.
that has deployed must be replaced. PRE- Work on the SRS must therefore only be
performed by qualified technicians.
SAFE® has electrically operated reversible
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
pre-tensioners in addition to the
Center.
pyrotechnic ETDs.
RFor your protection and the protection of
RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
others, when scrapping the air bag unit or
They could tear.
ETD, our safety instructions must be
RDo not make any modification that could followed. These instructions are available
change the effectiveness of the seat belts. from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may Center.
severely weaken them. In a crash they may RGiven the considerable deployment speed,
not be able to provide adequate protection. required inflation volume, and the material
RNo modifications of any kind may be made of the air bags, there is the possibility of
to any components or wiring of the SRS. abrasions or other, potentially more serious
RDo no change or remove any component or
injuries resulting from air bag deployment.
part of the SRS. If you sell your vehicle, we strongly
RDo not install additional trim material, seat recommend that you inform the subsequent
covers, badges, etc. over the steering owner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS.
wheel hub, front passenger front air bag Also refer them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
Z
40 Occupant safety
Front air bags The air bags will not deploy in impacts which
do not exceed the system’s preset
G Observe Safety notes, see page 37. deployment thresholds. You will then be
protected by the fastened seat belts.
The front air bags will not deploy in the event
Safety and security
of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of

longitudinal deceleration or acceleration
exceeds the preset deployment threshold for
the front air bags.
The front passenger front air bag will only be
deployed if
Rvehicles with OCS, USA only: the system,
based on OCS weight sensor readings,
Driver’s front air bag : and front passenger detects that the front passenger seat is
front air bag ; are designed to provide occupied
increased protection for the driver and front Rthe 42 indicator lamp in the
passenger against the risk of injuries to the center console is not lit
head and thorax. (USA only: (Y page 42),
Driver and front passenger front air bags are Canada only: (Y page 46))
deployed Rthe impact exceeds a preset deployment
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts threshold
Rif the system determines that air bag ! Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bag
deployment can offer additional protection deactivation system (Canada only): Do not
to that provided by the seat belt place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on
Rdepending on whether the respective seat the front passenger seat. This could cause
belt is in use the front or side impact air bag on the front
passenger side to deploy in a crash which
Rindependently of the side impact air bags exceeds the system’s deployment
and/or the window curtain air bags threshold.
The front air bags in this vehicle have been
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows Side impact air bags
the air bags to have different rates of inflation.
The rate of inflation is based on the vehicle G Observe Safety notes, see page 37.
deceleration rate as assessed by the air bag G Warning!
control unit.
The pressure sensors for side impact air bag
Vehicles with OCS, USA only: The front control are located in the doors. Do not
passenger front air bag deployment is modify any components of the doors or door
additionally influenced by the passenger’s trim panels including, for example, the
weight category as identified by the Occupant addition of door speakers.
Classification System (OCS) (Y page 42).
Improper repair work on the doors or the
Vehicles with OCS, USA only: The lighter the modification or addition of components to the
front passenger-side occupant, the higher the doors create a risk of rendering the side
vehicle deceleration rate required for second impact air bags inoperative or causing
stage inflation of the front passenger front air unintended air bag deployment. Work on the
bag.

Occupant safety 41
doors must therefore only be performed by the preset deployment threshold for the side
qualified technicians. Contact an authorized impact air bags.
Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bag
deactivation system (Canada only): Do not
place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on
Safety and security

the front passenger seat. This could cause
the front or side impact air bag on the front
passenger side to deploy in a crash which
exceeds the system’s deployment
threshold.
G Warning!
Only use seat covers which have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model. Using other seat covers may
Front side impact air bags : and rear side interfere with or prevent the deployment of
impact air bags ; are designed to provide the side impact air bags. Contact an
increased protection for the thorax but not authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
the head, neck and arms. availability.
The side impact air bags are deployed
Ron the impacted side of the vehicle Window curtain air bags
Rin instances with a high rate of lateral G Observe Safety notes, see page 37.
vehicle deceleration or acceleration
Rregardless of whether the seat belts on the
impacted side of the vehicle are in use
Rindependently of the front air bags
Rindependently of the ETDs
Vehicles with OCS (USA only): The front
passenger side impact air bag will not deploy
if the OCS senses that the front passenger
seat is empty and the front passenger seat
belt is not fastened. With the front passenger
seat empty and the seat belt fastened, the Window curtain air bags : are designed to
front passenger side impact air bag will provide increased protection for the head but
deploy independently of the empty seat. not the chest or arms.
Whether a seat belt is recognized as fastened Window curtain air bags : are deployed
depends on whether or not the latch plate is
Ron the impacted side of the vehicle
properly inserted into the buckle.
Rin instances with a high rate of lateral
The side impact air bags are not deployed in
side impacts which do not exceed the vehicle deceleration or acceleration
system’s deployment threshold. Rindependently of the front air bags
The side impact air bags will not deploy in the
event of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of
lateral deceleration or acceleration exceeds
Z
42 Occupant safety
Rregardless of whether the front passenger Furthermore, the occupant weight may
seat is occupied appear to increase or decrease due to the
Rin certain vehicle rollovers, if the system following:
determines that air bag deployment can Robjects hanging on the seat
offer additional protection to that provided Robjects lodged underneath the seat
Safety and security
by the seat belt

Robjects stuffed between the seat and
Window curtain air bags : are not deployed middle console
in impacts which do not exceed the system’s
Robjects stuffed between the seat and door
deployment threshold.
Window curtain air bags : deploy in the area Rother passengers pushing on the seat
indicated by the arrows. Robjects applying pressure to the back of
the seat
Always make sure the seat has clearance
Occupant Classification System in all directions at all times.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is If your seat, including the trim cover and
standard equipment in USA. cushion, needs to be serviced in any way, take
The OCS activates or deactivates the front the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
passenger front air bag automatically. The Center.
respective status is based on the classified Only seat accessories approved by
occupant weight category determined by Mercedes-Benz may be used.
weight sensor readings from the front Both the driver and the front passenger
passenger seat. should always use the 42
The system does not deactivate indicator lamp as an indication of whether or
Rthe front passenger side impact air bag not the front passenger is properly
Rthe
positioned.
window curtain air bag
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) G Warning!
If the 42 indicator lamp
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
illuminates when an adult or someone larger
must sit
than a small individual is in the front
Rwith the seat belt properly fastened passenger seat, have the front passenger
Rin a position that is as upright as possible reposition himself or herself in the seat until
with the back against the seat backrest the 42 indicator lamp goes out,
Rwith
or check whether objects are caught under or
the feet on the floor
around the seat.
If the occupant’s weight is transferred to In the event of a collision, the air bag control
another object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning unit will not allow front passenger front air bag
on armrests), the OCS may not be able to deployment when the OCS has classified the
properly approximate the occupant’s weight front passenger seat occupant as weighting
category. as much as or less than a typical 12-month-
old child in a standard child restraint or if the
front passenger seat is classified as being
empty.

Occupant safety 43
When the OCS senses that the front If the 42 indicator lamp is not
passenger seat occupant is classified as illuminated, the front passenger front air bag
being up to or less than the weight of a typical is activated and will be deployed
12-month-old child in a standard child Rin the event of certain frontal impacts
restraint, the 42 indicator lamp
Rif impact exceeds a preset deployment
Safety and security

will illuminate when the engine is started and
remain illuminated, indicating that the front threshold
passenger front air bag is deactivated. Rindependently of the side impact air bags
When the OCS senses that the front If the front passenger front air bag is
passenger seat is classified as being empty, deployed, the rate of inflation will be
the 42 indicator lamp will influenced by
illuminate when the engine is started and
Rthe rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as
remain illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated. assessed by the air bag control unit
Rthe front passenger’s weight category as
When the OCS senses that the front
passenger seat occupant is classified as identified by the OCS
being heavier than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard child For more information on air bag display
restraint or as being a small individual (such messages in the multifunction display, see
as a young teenager or a small adult), the (Y page 275).
42 indicator lamp will illuminate G Warning!
for approximately 6 seconds when the engine According to accident statistics, children are
is started and then, depending on occupant safer when properly restrained in the rear
weight sensor readings from the seat, remain seating positions than in the front seating
illuminated or go out. With the position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
42 indicator lamp illuminated, children be placed in the rear seats whenever
the front passenger front air bag is possible. Regardless of seating position,
deactivated. With the 42 children 12 years old and under must be
indicator lamp out, the front passenger front seated and properly secured in an appropriate
air bag is activated. infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
When the OCS senses that the front seat recommended for the size and weight of
passenger seat occupant is classified as an the child.
adult or someone larger than a small The infant or child restraint must be properly
individual, the 42 indicator lamp secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and
when the engine is started and then goes out, top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
indicating that the front passenger front air child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
bag is activated. Occupants, especially children, should always
If the 42 indicator lamp is sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
illuminated, the front passenger front air bag properly and use an appropriately sized infant
is deactivated and will not be deployed. restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Z
44 Occupant safety
Children can be killed or seriously injured by injured or even killed if the front passenger
an inflating air bag. Note the following front air bag inflates.
important information when circumstances RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
require you to place a child in the front facing child restraint on the front passenger
passenger seat: seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
Safety and security
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag use the proper child restraint
technology designed to deactivate the front recommended for the age, size and weight
passenger front air bag in your vehicle of the child, and secure child restraint with
when the system senses the weight of a the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child
typical 12-month-old child or less along seat manufacturer’s instructions. For
with the weight of a standard appropriate children larger than the typical 12-month-
child restraint on the front passenger seat. old child, the front passenger front air bag
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the may or may not be activated.
front passenger seat will be seriously
Deployment of the driver front air bag does
injured or even killed if the front passenger
not mean that the front passenger front air
front air bag inflates in a collision which
bag also should have deployed.
could occur under some circumstances,
even with the air bag technology installed The OCS may have determined
in your vehicle. The only means to Rthat the seat was empty or occupied by the
completely eliminate this risk is to never weight up to or less than that of a typical
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint 12-month-old child seated in a standard
in the front seat. We therefore strongly child restraint – both of which are instances
recommend that you always place a child where the system suppresses deployment
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat. of the front passenger front air bag even
RIf you must install a rear-facing child though the impact met the criteria and was
restraint on the front passenger seat of sufficient severity to deploy the driver
because circumstances require you to do front air bag
so, make sure the 42 Rthat the seat was occupied by a small
indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating individual (such as a young teenager or a
that the front passenger front air bag is small adult) or a child who weighs more
deactivated. Should the 42 than the weight of a typical 12-month-old
indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while child in a standard child restraint – both of
the restraint is installed, please check which are instances where the system may
installation. Periodically check the suppress deployment of the front
42 indicator lamp while passenger front air bag even though the
driving to make sure the 42 impact met the criteria and was of
indicator lamp is illuminated. If the sufficient severity to deploy the driver front
42 indicator lamp goes out or air bag
remains out, do not transport a child on the
front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the

Occupant safety 45
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a

position that is as upright as possible with
your back against the seat backrest.
RWhile seated, an occupant should not
position him/herself in such a way as to
Safety and security

cause the occupant’s weight to be lifted
from the seat bottom as this may result in
the OCS being unable to correctly
approximate the occupant’s weight
category.
42 indicator lamp : will be RRead and observe all warnings in this
illuminated, except with the SmartKey chapter.
removed from the starter switch or with the
starter switch in position 0. OCS Self-test
G Warning! After turning the SmartKey in the starter
If the red SRS indicator lamp + in the switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
instrument cluster and the 42 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or
indicator lamp are lit at the same time, there twice, the 42 indicator lamp
is a malfunction in the OCS. The front illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly
passenger front air bag will be deactivated in sitting on the front passenger seat and the
this case. Have the system checked by system classifies the occupant as an adult,
qualified technicians as soon as possible. the 42 indicator lamp will
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz illuminate and go out after approximately
Center. 6 seconds.
Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an If the seat is not occupied and the system
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. classifies the front passenger seat as being
In order to ensure proper operation of the air empty, the 42 indicator lamp
bag system and OCS: will illuminate and not go out.
RDo not place more than 4.4 lb (2 kg) into G Warning!
the parcel net on the back of the front If the 42 indicator lamp does not
passenger seat. Otherwise, the OCS may illuminate, the system is not functioning. You
not be able to properly approximate the must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
occupant weight category. Center before seating any child on the front
RDo not place objects under and/or around passenger seat.
the front passenger seat.
For more information, see the “Practical
RDo not hang anything from or attach any hints” section (Y page 305).
items to the seats.
G Warning!
RDo not stuff objects such as books between
Never place anything between seat cushion
the front passenger seat and the center
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
console or front passenger door.
the effectiveness of the OCS. The bottom and
RDo not move the front passenger seat back of the child seat must make full contact
backwards against stiff objects. with the passenger seat cushion and
backrest.
Z
46 Occupant safety
If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger child seat, which operates with the
seat backrest. BabySmart™ system installed in the vehicle
An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause to deactivate the front passenger front air
injuries to the child in case of an accident, bag when it is installed properly. Otherwise
instead of increasing protection for the child. they will be struck by the air bag when it
Safety and security
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
installation of child seats. or fatal injury will result.
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation injured or even killed if the front passenger
system front air bag inflates in a collision which
could occur under some circumstances,
The BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system even with the air bag technology installed
is standard equipment in Canada. in your vehicle. The only means to
G Warning! completely eliminate this risk is to never
According to accident statistics, children are place a child in a rear-facing child restraint
safer when properly restrained in the rear in the front seat. We therefore strongly
seating positions than in the front seating recommend that you always place a child
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
children be placed in the rear seats whenever RIf you must install a BabySmart™
possible. Regardless of seating position, compatible rear-facing child restraint on
children 12 years old and under must be the front passenger seat because
seated and properly secured in an appropriate circumstances require you to do so, make
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster sure the 42 indicator lamp is
seat recommended for the size and weight of illuminated, indicating that the front
the child. passenger front air bag is deactivated.
The infant or child restraint must be properly Should the 42 indicator lamp
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat not illuminate or go out while the restraint
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and is installed, please check installation.
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the Periodically check the 42
child seat manufacturer’s instructions. indicator lamp while driving to make sure
Occupants, especially children, should always the 42 indicator lamp is
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt illuminated. If the 42 indicator
properly and use an appropriately sized infant lamp goes out or remains out, do not
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat transport a child on the front passenger
recommended for the size and weight of the seat until the system has been repaired.
child. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
Children can be killed or seriously injured by front passenger seat will be seriously
an inflating air bag. Note the following injured or even killed if the front passenger
important information when circumstances front air bag inflates.
require you to place a child in the front RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
passenger seat: facing child restraint on the front passenger
RChildren 12 years old and under must never seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes- use the proper child restraint
Benz authorized BabySmart™ compatible recommended for the age, size and weight

Occupant safety 47
of the child, and secure child restraint with The system does not deactivate
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child Rthe side impact air bag
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Rthe window curtain air bag
G Warning! Rthe Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD)
Safety and security

When using a BabySmart™ compatible child
seat on the front passenger seat, the front Self-test BabySmart™ without special
passenger front air bag will not deploy only if child seat installed
the 42 indicator lamp remains
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
illuminated.
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
Please be sure to check the 42 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or
indicator lamp every time you use a twice, the 42 indicator lamp
BabySmart™ compatible child seat on the comes on for approximately 6 seconds and
front passenger seat. Should the then goes out.
42 indicator lamp go out while
If the 42 indicator lamp should
the restraint is installed, please check
not come on or is continuously lit, the system
installation. If the 42 indicator
is not functioning. You must see an
lamp remains out, do not use the
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before
BabySmart™ restraint to transport a child on
seating any child on the front passenger seat.
the front passenger seat until the system has
More information can be found in the
been repaired.
“Practical hints” section (Y page 305).
G Warning!
Do not place powered-on laptops, mobile
phones, electronic tags such as those used in
ski passes and like electronic devices on the
front passenger seat. Signals from such
devices may interfere with the BabySmart™
air bag deactivation system. Such signal
interference may cause the 42
indicator lamp not to come on during self-test.
The SRS indicator lamp + and/or the
42 indicator lamp could be
Special BabySmart™ compatible child seats, continuously lit, indicating that the system is
designed for use with the Mercedes-Benz not functioning. The front passenger front air
system, are required for use with the bag could deploy inadvertently or fail to
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system. deploy in an accident.
Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for information on availability. With G Warning!
the special child seat installed properly, the The BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system
front passenger front air bag will not deploy. will ONLY work with a special child seat
The 42 indicator lamp : will be designed to operate with it. It will not work
illuminated, except with the SmartKey with child seats which are not BabySmart™
removed from the starter switch or with the compatible.
starter switch in position 0. Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
Z
48 Occupant safety
the effectiveness off the BabySmart™ air bag G Warning!

deactivation system. The bottom of the child Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
seat must make full contact with the front backrest in an excessively reclined position as
passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly this can be dangerous. You could slide under
mounted child seat could cause injuries to the the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
Safety and security
child in case of an accident, instead of it, the seat belt would apply force at the
protecting the child. abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
installation of special child seats. seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a position that is as upright as
possible and the seat belt is properly
Seat belts positioned on the body.
Safety notes G Warning!

The use of seat belts and infant and child Never let more people ride in the vehicle than
restraint systems is required by law in all 50 there are seat belts available. Make sure
states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
territories and all Canadian provinces. restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
use a seat belt for more than one person at a
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
time.
occupants should have their seat belts
fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion. G Warning!
For information on infants and children Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint been subjected to stress in an accident must
systems for infants and children, see be replaced. Also, the seat belt anchoring
“Children in the vehicle” (Y page 55). points must be checked.
G Warning! Only use seat belts which have been approved
Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. by Mercedes-Benz.
Always make sure all of your passengers are Do not make any modifications to the seat
properly restrained. You and your passengers belts. This can lead to unintended activation
should always wear seat belts. of the ETDs or to their failure to activate when
Failure to wear and properly fasten and necessary.
position your seat belt greatly increases your Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an severely weaken them. In a crash they may
accident. not be able to provide adequate protection.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can Have all work carried out only by qualified
be considerably more severe without your technicians. Contact an authorized
seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat Mercedes-Benz Center.
belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit
the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from Proper use of seat belts
it. You can be seriously injured or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or G Warning!
death is lessened if you are properly wearing USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
your seat belt. The air bags can only protect RSeat belts can only protect when used
as intended if the occupants are properly properly. Never wear seat belts in any other
wearing their seat belts.

Occupant safety 49
way than as described in this section, as such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as
that could result in serious injuries in case these might cause injuries.
of an accident. RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted
REach occupant should wear their seat belt snugly. Take special care of this when
at all times, because seat belts help reduce wearing loose clothing.
Safety and security

the likelihood of and potential severity of RNever use a seat belt for more than one
injuries in accidents, including rollovers. person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt
The integrated restraint system includes around a person and another person or
SRS (driver front air bag, front passenger other objects at the same time.
front air bag, side impact air bags, window
RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a
curtain air bags for door windows),
Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs), crash, you would not have the full width of
seat belt force limiters, and front seat knee the seat belt to distribute impact forces.
bolsters. The twisted seat belt against your body
could cause injuries.
The system is designed to enhance the
protection offered to properly belted RPregnant women should also always use a
occupants in certain frontal (front air bags lap/shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
and ETDs) and side (side impact air bags, should be positioned as low as possible on
window curtain air bags, and ETDs) impacts the hips to avoid any possible pressure on
which exceed preset deployment the abdomen.
thresholds and in certain rollovers (window RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is
curtain air bags and ETDs). as upright as possible.
RNever wear the shoulder belt under your RCheck your seat belt during travel to make
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. sure it is properly positioned.
In a frontal crash, your body would move
RNever place your feet on the instrument
too far forward. That would increase the
chance of head and neck injuries. The seat panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
belt would also apply too much force to the keep both feet on the floor in front of the
ribs or abdomen, which could severely seat.
injure internal organs such as your liver or RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant
spleen. restraints, toddler restraints, or children in
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder booster seats, always follow the child seat
section is located as close as possible to manufacturer’s instructions.
the middle of the shoulder. It should not
touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder G Warning!
portion of the seat belt under your arm. For Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They
this purpose, you can adjust the height of could tear.
the seat belt outlet. Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the
RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
your hips and not across the abdomen. If This could damage the seat belt.
the lap belt is positioned across your Never attempt to make modifications to seat
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in belts. This could impair the effectiveness of
a crash. the seat belts.
RNever wear seat belts over rigid or
breakable objects in or on your clothing,
Z
50 Occupant safety
Fastening the seat belts

G Warning!
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
Safety and security
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that

children be placed in the rear seats whenever
possible. Regardless of seating position,
children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an
appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat recommended for
the size and weight of the child. For additional
information, see “Children in the vehicle”.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. X With a smooth motion, pull the seat belt out
of seat belt outlet :.
G Warning! X Place the shoulder portion of the seat belt
Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bag across the top of your shoulder and the lap
deactivation system, Canada only: Children portion across your hips.
12 years old and under must never ride in the X Push latch plate ; into buckle = until it
front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz
clicks.
authorized BabySmart™ compatible child
Seat belt adjustment function: The seat
seat, which operates with the BabySmart™
belts on both front seats adjust to the
system installed in the vehicle to deactivate
upper body automatically as necessary
the front passenger front air bag when it is
(Y page 51).
installed properly. Otherwise they will be
X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the
struck by the air bag when it inflates in a
crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury correct height (Y page 51).
will result. X If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a
snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.
All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seat
belt have special seat belt retractors to
secure child restraints properly. For more
information on special seat belt retractors,
see “Infant and child restraint system”
(Y page 56).
To release the seat belt with seat belt release
button ?, see (Y page 51).

Occupant safety 51
Seat belt outlet height adjustment Releasing the seat belts

X Press seat belt release button ?
(Y page 50).
Allow the retractor to completely rewind
the seat belt by guiding latch plate ;
Safety and security

(Y page 50).
! Make sure the seat belt retracts
completely. Otherwise the seat belt and/or
latch plate could get caught or pinched in
the door or in the seat mechanism. This can
damage the seat belt and impair its
X Raising: Slide the seat belt outlet height effectiveness, and/or cause damage to the
adjuster upward. door and/or door trim panel. Such damage
The seat belt outlet height adjuster is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
engages in different positions. Limited Warranty.
Damaged seat belts must be replaced.
X Lowering: Press and hold release Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
button :. Center.
X Slide the seat belt outlet height adjuster
downward. Enhanced seat belt reminder system
X Release button : and make sure the seat
When the engine is started, the seat belt
belt outlet height adjuster engages into telltale 7 will always illuminate for
place.
6 seconds to remind you and your passengers
to fasten your seat belts.
Seat belt adjustment function If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened when
The seat belt adjustment function adjusts the the engine is started, an additional warning
seat belts on both front seats to the upper chime will sound. The warning chime goes out
body of the respective vehicle occupant. The after approximately 6 seconds or once the
seat belt will be pulled slightly tighter for that driver’s seat belt is fastened.
purpose when If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the
Ryou engage the latch plate into the buckle front passenger’s seat belt (with the front
and then turn the SmartKey in the starter passenger seat occupied) is not fastened with
switch to position 2 front doors closed,
Rthe seat belt telltale 7 remains
Rthe SmartKey in the starter switch is in
position 2 and you then engage the latch illuminated for as long as either the driver’s
plate in the buckle or front passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened.
The seat belt adjustment function takes place
Rand if the vehicle speed once exceeds
with a certain amount of retracting force
when the system senses slack between the 15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale
vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not 7 starts flashing and a warning chime
retain the seat belt during this procedure. You sounds with increasing intensity for a
can activate or deactivate the seat belt maximum of 60 seconds or until the
adjustment function via the control system driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt are
(Y page 136). fastened.
Z
52 Occupant safety
If you and/or your passenger release the In an impact, the ETDs remove slack from the
seat belt during driving, the seat belt seat belts in such a way that the seat belts fit
telltale 7 starts flashing and the more snugly against the body. Seat belt force
warning chime sounds as described before. limiters, when activated, are employed to
If the driver’s or the front passenger’s seat help reduce the peak force exerted by the
seat belts on occupants during a crash.
Safety and security
belt remains unfastened after 60 seconds,

the warning chime stops sounding, the seat i The ETDs do not correct an incorrect seat
belt telltale 7 stops flashing but position or incorrectly worn seat belts.
continues to be illuminated. The ETDs do not pull occupants back
After a vehicle standstill, the warning chime toward the seat backrest.
is reactivated and the seat belt telltale
7 is flashing again if the vehicle speed G Warning!
once exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h). Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must be
replaced.
The seat belt telltale 7 will only go out if
both the driver’s and the front passenger’s For your safety, when disposing of the
seat belt (with the front passenger seat pyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safety
occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is instructions. These are available at any
standing still and a front door is opened. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
For more information, see “Practical hints” The PRE-SAFE® system has electrically
(Y page 300). operated reversible pre-tensioners that do
not require replacement after activation.
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD),
seat belt force limiter
Preventive occupant safety (PRE-
The seat belts for the front seats and rear SAFE®)
outer seats are equipped with ETDs and seat
belt force limiters. G Warning!
The ETDs are designed to activate in the The PRE-SAFE® system is intended to reduce
following cases: the effects of an accident on vehicle
Rin frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding occupants who are wearing their seat belt
the system’s preset deployment threshold properly. Despite your vehicle being equipped
with the PRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of
Rin side impacts exceeding the system’s personal injuries occurring as a result of an
preset deployment threshold on the far accident cannot be eliminated. Therefore,
side of the impact always drive carefully and adjust your driving
Rin certain vehicle rollovers to the prevailing road, weather, and traffic
Rif the restraint systems are operational and conditions.
functioning correctly, see “SRS indicator
lamp” (Y page 36)
The ETDs for the front seats will only activate
if the front seat belts are fastened (latch plate
properly inserted into buckle).
The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate
with or without the respective seat belts
fastened.

Occupant safety 53
The PRE-SAFE® system takes preventive ! When moving the seats, make sure there
measures to better protect the occupants are no items in the footwell or behind the
from the possibility of personal injuries in the seats. Otherwise, you could damage the
following hazardous situations: seats and/or the items.
Remergency braking maneuvers with the For information on the seat belt adjustment
Safety and security

Brake Assist System (BAS) (Y page 63) function as an integrated comfort feature of
activated PRE-SAFE®, see (Y page 51).
Rcritical dynamic driving situations, e.g.
when the vehicle has been caused to
understeer or oversteer because it has NECK-PRO active front head
exceeded its physical limitations or in case restraints
of evasive steering maneuvers at speeds The NECK-PRO active front head restraints
above approximately 85 mph (140 km/h) are intended to offer the driver and front
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures passenger increased protection from
when it is activated: whiplash-type injuries. In the event of a rear-
RThe front seat belts are pre-tensioned
end collision, the NECK-PRO active front head
restraints on the front seats are designed to
automatically.
move forward in the direction of travel. They
RVehicles with front passenger seat memory thus provide the head with increased support
function: If the passenger seat is in an earlier on in the collision sequence. The
unfavorable position, the seat will be NECK-PRO active front head restraints will
adjusted to a position that seeks to better move forward whether the seats are occupied
protect the occupant. or not.
RIf the vehicle is in a critical dynamic driving
G Warning!
situation, the door windows close, except
Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to the
for a minimal gap that remains open.
head restraint posts. Otherwise, the NECK-
RVehicles with power tilt/sliding sunroof: If PRO active front head restraints may not be
the vehicle is in a critical dynamic driving able to function properly or offer the intended
situation, the tilt/sliding sunroof also degree of protection they were designed for
closes, except for a minimal gap that in the event of a rear-end collision.
remains open.
If the closing procedure of any of these G Warning!
elements is blocked, it will stop and open Only use seat or head restraint covers which
slightly. have been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Once the hazardous situation no longer exists Benz for your vehicle model.
and an accident has been avoided, the seat Using other seat or head restraint covers may
belt pre-tensioning is deactivated. All of the interfere with or prevent the activation of the
PRE-SAFE® settings can be re-adjusted NECK-PRO active front head restraints and/
following the critical driving event. or the deployment of the front side impact air
bags.
If the seat belts do not release:
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
X Adjust the seat backrest or seat slightly to for availability.
the rear until the seat belt tension is
reduced. When the NECK-PRO active front head
The locking mechanism releases. restraints have been triggered in an accident,
the NECK-PRO active front head restraints
Z
54 Occupant safety
must be reset. Otherwise, the NECK-PRO

active front head restraints cannot offer any
additional protection in the event of another
rear-end collision.
For information on resetting the activated
Safety and security
NECK-PRO active front head restraints, see

“Resetting activated head restraints”
(Y page 309).
You cannot remove the NECK-PRO active
front head restraints.
G Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
to the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
injury to the head and neck in the event of an
accident or similar situation. Steering wheel
For information on head restraint adjustment, G Observe Safety notes, see page 86.
see “Head restraint height” (Y page 83), or X Position steering wheel : properly. See
see “Head restraint fore and aft adjustment”
(Y page 87) for manual adjustment and
(Y page 83).
(Y page 87) for electrical adjustment.
Make sure:
Correct driver seat adjustment RYou can reach the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent at the elbows.
G Warning!
RYou can move your legs freely.
In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
control the following must be done before the RAll displays (including malfunction and
vehicle is put into motion: indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster
Rseat adjustment are clearly visible.
Rhead restraint adjustment
Seat belt
Rsteering wheel adjustment
Rrear view mirror adjustment
G Observe Safety notes, see page 48.
X Fasten and position your seat belt ;
Rfastening of seat belts
correctly (Y page 50).

Occupant safety 55
Make sure: Children in the vehicle

RThe seat belt is always fitted snugly.
Safety notes
RAdjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
section is located as close as possible to If an infant or child is traveling with you in the
the middle of the shoulder. vehicle:
Safety and security

X Secure the child using an infant or child
RPlace the lap portion of the seat belt as low
restraint appropriate to the age and size of
as possible on your hips.
the child.
X Make sure the infant or child is properly
Seat and head restraint secured at all times while the vehicle is in
G Observe Safety notes, see page 81. motion.
X Position seat = and head restraint G Warning!
properly. See (Y page 82) for seat and When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
head restraint adjustment. SmartKey from the starter switch. Always
Observe the following points: take the SmartKey with you and lock the
RAlways be in a properly seated position. vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
RThe position should be as far rearward from
restraint system, or with access to an
the front air bag in the steering wheel as unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
possible, while still permitting proper access to a vehicle could result in an accident
operation of vehicle controls. and/or serious personal injury. The children
RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating could
position that still allows you to reach the Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle
accelerator/brake pedal safely.
Rbe seriously or fatally injured through
RThe seat must be adjusted so that you can excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
correctly fasten and position your seat belt.
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
RThe seat backrest must be in a position that
vehicle equipment that can be operated
is as nearly upright as possible. even if the SmartKey is removed from the
RAdjust the seat cushion so that the front starter switch or removed from the vehicle,
edge of the seat cushion lightly supports such as seat adjustment, steering wheel
your legs. adjustment, or the memory function
RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as If children open a door, they could injure other
close to the head as possible and the persons or get out of the vehicle and injure
center of the head restraint supports the themselves or be injured by following traffic.
back of the head at eye level. Do not expose the child restraint system to
RNever place hands under the seat or near direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s
any moving parts while the seat is being metal parts, for example, could become very
adjusted. hot, and the child could be burned by these
parts.
G Warning!
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger or cargo compartment unless they
are firmly secured in place.
Z
56 Occupant safety
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo G Warning!

increases a child’s risk of injury in the event Never release the seat belt buckle while the
of vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt
Rstrong braking maneuvers retractor will be deactivated.
Rsudden changes of direction
Safety and security
Ran accident
i Information on child seats with mounting
fittings for tether anchorages
(Y page 58).
Infant and child restraint systems For information on LATCH-type child seat
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55. anchors (Y page 59).
We recommend all infants and children be The use of infant or child restraints is required
properly restrained at all times while the by law in all 50 states, the District of
vehicle is in motion. Columbia, the U.S. territories and all
Canada only: Canadian provinces.
Only use a BabySmart™ compatible child Infants and small children should be seated
restraint for the front passenger seat in this in an appropriate infant or child restraint
vehicle. system. They must be properly secured in
All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seat accordance with the manufacturer’s
belt have special seat belt retractors for instructions for the child restraint. All infant
secure fastening of child restraints. or child restraint systems must comply with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
To fasten a child restraint, follow the child
213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle
restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.
mounting.
A statement by the child restraint
To activate the special seat belt retractor: manufacturer of compliance with these
X Pull the shoulder belt out completely and standards can be found on the instruction
let it retract. label on the restraint and in the instruction
During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting manual provided with the restraint.
sound can be heard to indicate that the When using any infant restraint, toddler
special seat belt retractor is activated. restraint, or booster seat, make sure to
The seat belt is now locked. carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s
X Push down on child restraint to take up any instructions for installation and use.
slack. Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to
To deactivate the special seat belt retractor:
infant or child restraints.
X Release the seat belt buckle and let the
seat belt retract completely. G Warning!
The seat belt can then again be used in the According to accident statistics, children are
usual manner. safer when properly restrained in the rear
To deactivate the special seat belt retractor seating positions than in the front seating
for the front passenger seat, the front position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
passenger seat must be in the most backward children be placed in the rear seats whenever
position. possible. Regardless of seating position,
seated and properly secured in an appropriate

Occupant safety 57
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
seat recommended for the size and weight of front passenger seat will be seriously
the child. injured or even killed if the front passenger
The infant or child restraint must be properly front air bag inflates in a collision which
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat could occur under some circumstances,
Safety and security

belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and even with the air bag technology installed
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the in your vehicle. The only means to
child seat manufacturer’s instructions. completely eliminate this risk is to never
Occupants, especially children, should always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt in the front seat. We therefore strongly
properly and use an appropriately sized infant recommend that you always place a child
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
recommended for the size and weight of the RIf you must install a rear-facing child
child. restraint on the front passenger seat
Children can be killed or seriously injured by because circumstances require you to do
an inflating air bag. Note the following so, make sure the 42
important information when circumstances indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating
require you to place a child in the front that the front passenger front air bag is
passenger seat: deactivated. Should the 42
RUSA
indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while
only: Your vehicle is equipped with air
the restraint is installed, please check
bag technology designed to deactivate the
installation. Periodically check the
front passenger front air bag in your vehicle
42 indicator lamp while
when the system senses the weight of a
driving to make sure the 42
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropriate indicator lamp is illuminated. If the
child restraint on the front passenger seat. 42 indicator lamp goes out or
remains out, do not transport a child on the
RUSA only: For children larger than the front passenger seat until the system has
typical 12-month-old child, the front been repaired.
passenger front air bag may or may not be
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
activated. Always make sure the
42 indicator lamp is
injured or even killed if the front passenger
illuminated, indicating that the front
front air bag inflates.
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
RCanada only: Children 12 years old and
facing child restraint on the front passenger
under must never ride in the front seat,
seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized
use the proper child restraint
BabySmart™ compatible child seat, which
recommended for the age, size and weight
operates with the BabySmart™ system
of the child, and secure child restraint with
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child
front passenger front air bag when it is
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
installed properly. Otherwise they will be
struck by the air bag when it inflates in a
G Warning!
crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury
will result. Infants and small children should never share
a seat belt with another occupant. During an
Z
58 Occupant safety
accident, they could be crushed between the anchors and rear seats. This can further
occupant and seat belt. reduce the risk of injury.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
Safety and security
or the child is not properly secured in the child

restraint.
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not
face or neck. A booster seat may be
necessary to achieve proper seat belt
positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt X Press in lower part of anchorage ring
fits properly without a booster. cover : on the seat backrest on which a
When the child restraint is not in use, remove child seat is to be installed.
it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat X Pull on upper part of anchorage ring
belt to prevent the child restraint from cover : to remove cover.
becoming a projectile in the event of an X Store anchorage ring cover : in a
accident.
convenient place (e.g. glove box).
Installation of infant and child restraint

systems
G Warning!
Always lock the seat backrests in their upright
position when the rear seats are occupied by
passengers. Lock the seat backrests in their
upright position after installing top tether
straps or when the extended cargo
compartment is not in use. Make sure that
X Move the respective head restraint to its
seat backrests are secured properly by
uppermost position (Y page 84).
pushing and pulling on the seat backrests. If
a seat backrest is not locked properly, the
seat backrest could fold. The child seat would
no longer be supported properly or positioned
to provide its intended benefit. That could
cause serious or even fatal injuries.
This vehicle is equipped with tether

anchorages for a top tether strap at each of
the rear seating positions.
Top tether straps enable an additional
connection to be made between child
restraint systems secured with LATCH-type

Occupant safety 59
X Guide top tether strap ? between the 41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where
head restraint and top of the seat backrest. a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
X Securely fasten hook =, which is part of booster.
top tether strap ?, to anchorage ring ;. Install child seat according to manufacturer’s
Make sure instructions.
Safety and security

Rhook = is attached to anchorage ring ; The child seat must be firmly attached to both
anchors.
beyond the safety catch, as illustrated
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
Rtop tether strap ? is not twisted loose during an accident which could result in
Rthe head restraint is installed and serious injury or death to the child.
positioned such that top tether strap ? Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
can pass freely between the head restraint child seat mounting fittings must be replaced.
and top of the seat backrest
Each rear outer seat has two LATCH-type
Rtop tether strap ? is positioned between anchors for the installation of a LATCH-type
the seat backrest and the cargo child seat with matching mounting fittings.
compartment cover blind (if installed) Non-LATCH-type child seats may also be used
Rtop tether strap ? is positioned between and can be installed using the vehicle’s seat
the seat backrest and the cargo net (if belt system. Install child seat according to the
installed) manufacturer’s instructions.
X Lower the head restraint if necessary The LATCH-type anchors are blended with
(Y page 84). covers.
Make sure the top tether strap can pass
freely between the head restraint and top
of the seat backrest.
X Install the child restraint system and
tighten the top tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
After removing the child restraint system and
top tether strap ?:
X Reinstall anchorage ring cover :.
X Remove anchorage ring covers : from
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type anchors ; of the seat on which a child seat
is to be installed.
G Warning!
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not
face or neck.
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children over
Z
60 Occupant safety
Safety and security
X Install a LATCH-type child seat according X Securing: Press the lever down in direction
to the manufacturer’s instructions. of arrow ;.
A rigid connection between the child seat X Check to make sure the child safety locks
and the body of the vehicle is established. are working properly.
X Make sure that the seat belt for the rear
X Releasing: Press the lever up in direction
center seat can operate freely with a child
of arrow :.
seat installed.
Override switch
Child safety
Child safety locks With the override switch you can disable the
rear door window switches in the rear door
panels. This can be useful, for instance, when
G Warning! you have children riding in the rear passenger
Children could open a rear door from the compartment.
inside. This may cause serious personal injury
G Warning!
or an accident. Therefore, secure the rear
Activate the override switch when children
doors with the child safety locks whenever
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The
children are riding in the back seats of the
children may otherwise injure themselves,
vehicle.
e.g. by becoming trapped in the rear door
The child safety locks on the rear doors window opening.
enable you to secure each rear door
individually. You cannot open a secured rear
door from the inside. You can open the rear
door from the outside when the vehicle is
unlocked.
X Activating: Press override switch :.

The switch engages in recessed position.

Driving safety systems 61
The rear door windows can no longer be i USA only:

operated using the respective switch This device complies with Part 15 of the
located in the rear doors. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
You can still operate the rear door windows following two conditions:
using the switches located on the door 1. This device may not cause harmful
Safety and security

control panel of the driver’s door. interference, and
X Deactivating: Press override switch :
2. this device must accept any
again. interference received, including
The switch disengages from its recessed interference that may cause undesired
position back to its original position. operation.
The rear door windows can be operated
Any unauthorized modification to this
again using the respective switch located
device could void the user’s authority to
in the rear doors.
operate the equipment.
For more information on power windows, see
the “Controls in detail” section i Canada only:
(Y page 100). This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
Panic alarm
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Driving safety systems

Example illustration: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
X
Introduction
Activating: Press and hold !
button : for at least 1 second. This section contains information about the
An audible alarm and flashing exterior following driving safety systems:
lamps will operate briefly. RABS (Antilock Brake System)
X Deactivating: Press ! button : again.
RBAS (Brake Assist System)
or REBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning)
X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
or
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. i In winter operation, the maximum
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be effectiveness of most of the driving
inside the vehicle. systems described in this section is only
Z
62 Driving safety systems
achieved with winter tires, or snow chains ABS

as required.
Safety notes G Warning!
G Warning! Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady
Safety and security
brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the

The following factors increase the risk of
brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS
accidents:
and significantly reduces braking
RExcessive speed, especially in turns effectiveness.
RWet and slippery road surfaces
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
RFollowing another vehicle too closely the brake pressure so that the wheels do not
The driving safety systems described in this lock during braking. This allows you to
section cannot reduce these risks or prevent maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
the natural laws of physics from acting on the The ABS is functional above a speed of
vehicle. They cannot increase braking or approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
steering efficiency beyond that afforded by of road surface conditions.
the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
or the traction afforded. respond even to light brake pressure.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can The ABS indicator lamp ! indicator lamp
prevent accidents. in the instrument cluster comes on when you
The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with the switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
driving safety systems described in this engine is running.
section must never be exploited in a reckless
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize Braking
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
Always adjust your driving style to the
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
prevailing road and weather conditions and
brake pedal. The pulsation indicates that the
keep a safe distance to other road users and
ABS is in the regulating mode.
objects on the street.
X Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake
If a driving system malfunctions, other driving
pedal while you feel the pulsation.
safety systems may also switch off. Observe
indicator and warning lamps that may come Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
on as well as messages in the multifunction yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
display that may appear. namely braking power and the ability to steer
the vehicle.
G Warning! The pulsating brake pedal can be an
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read indication of hazardous road conditions and
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating functions as a reminder to take extra care
Instructions included in your vehicle literature while driving.
portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize
potential danger. Emergency brake maneuver
X Keep continuous full pressure on the brake
pedal.

G Warning! EBP
If the ABS malfunctions, other driving safety
systems such as the BAS or the ESP® are also
switched off. Observe indicator and warning
The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP)
lamps that may come on as well as messages
enhances braking effectiveness by allowing
the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion
Safety and security

in the multifunction display that may appear.
of the braking effort in straight-line braking
If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lock without a loss of vehicle stability.
during hard braking, reducing steering
capability and extending the braking distance. G Warning!
If the EBP malfunctions, the brake system will
Off-road ABS (vehicles with 4MATIC) still function with full brake boost. However,
the rear wheels could lock up during
Vehicles with 4MATIC have a special ABS off- emergency braking situations, for example.
road feature. With the off-road driving You could lose control of the vehicle and
program switched on (Y page 155), the ABS cause an accident.
designed for off-road driving is activated
Adapt your driving style to the changed
automatically.
driving characteristics.
When applying the brakes at speeds below
18 mph (30 km/h), the front wheels are
locked cyclically to shorten the braking
distance (dig-in effect). This will restrict
ESP®
steering the vehicle. G Observe Safety notes, see page 62.
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
operational as soon as the engine is running.
BAS
It monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of
G Observe Safety notes, see page 62. adhesive friction between the tires and the
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in road surface) and handling.
emergency situations. If you apply the brakes The ESP® recognizes that the vehicle deviates
very quickly, the BAS provides full brake from the direction of travel as intended by the
boost automatically, thereby potentially driver. By applying brakes to individual
reducing the braking distance. wheels and by limiting the engine output, the
X Apply continuous full braking pressure until ESP® works to stabilize the vehicle. The
the emergency braking situation is over. ESP® is especially useful while driving off and
The ABS will prevent the wheels from on wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP®
locking. also stabilizes the vehicle during braking and
When you release the brake pedal, the brakes steering maneuvers.
function again as normal. The BAS is then The ESP® warning lamp d in the
deactivated. instrument cluster comes on when you switch
on the ignition. It goes out when the engine
G Warning! is running.
If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system still
The ESP® warning lamp d in the
functions, but without the additional brake
boost available that the BAS would normally instrument cluster flashes when the ESP® is
provide in an emergency braking maneuver. engaged.
Therefore, the braking distance may increase.
Z
64 Driving safety systems
G Warning! position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is

Never switch off the ESP® when you see the being tested on a brake test dynamometer.
Such testing should be no longer than 10
ESP® warning lamp d flashing in the
seconds.
instrument cluster. In this case proceed as
follows: Active braking action through the ESP®
Safety and security
may otherwise seriously damage the brake

RWhen driving off, apply as little throttle as system which is not covered by the
possible. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator
pedal. ! The ESP® will only function properly if you
RAdapt
use wheels of the recommended tire size
your speed and driving style to the
as specified in the “Technical data” section
prevailing road conditions.
of this Operator’s Manual.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid. The ESP® cannot i The cruise control switches off
prevent accidents resulting from excessive automatically when the ESP® engages.
speed.
Electronic Traction System
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: (ETS/4-ETS)
Only conduct operational or performance
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such G Observe Safety notes, see page 62.
tests are necessary, contact an authorized The ETS (Electronic Traction System) and
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could 4-ETS (four-wheel Electronic Traction
otherwise seriously damage the brake System, vehicles with 4MATIC only) are
system or the transfer case which is not components of the ESP®. The ETS/4-ETS
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited improves the vehicle’s ability to utilize
Warranty. available traction, especially under slippery
road conditions by applying the brakes to a
! Vehicles without 4MATIC: spinning wheel. Vehicles with 4MATIC also
Because the ESP® operates automatically, transfer more power to the wheel(s) with
the engine and ignition must be shut off traction.
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or When you switch off the ESP®, the
1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in ETS/4-ETS is still enabled.
position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is X If conditions require, switch on the off-road
being tested on a brake test dynamometer
driving program (Y page 155).
or the vehicle is being towed with one axle
raised. Off-road 4-ETS (vehicles with 4MATIC)
Active braking action through the ESP® With the off-road driving program switched on
may otherwise seriously damage the brake (Y page 155), the 4-ETS designed for off-road
system which is not covered by the use is activated automatically.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: Switching off the ESP®

Because the ESP® operates automatically, G Warning!
the engine and ignition must be shut off The ESP® should not be switched off during
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or normal driving other than in the
1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in

circumstances described below. Disabling

the system will reduce vehicle stability in
driving maneuvers.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
Safety and security

To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch off
the ESP®. This allows the drive wheels to spin
and thus cut into surfaces for better grip, for
example
Rwhen driving with snow chains
X With the engine running, press ESP®
Rin deep snow
switch : until the ESP® warning lamp
Rin sand or gravel d in the instrument cluster comes on.
G Warning! The ESP® is switched off.
Switch on the ESP® immediately if the G Warning!
aforementioned circumstances do not apply When the ESP® warning lamp d is
anymore. Otherwise the ESP® will not illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to skid switched off or is not operational due to a
or a wheel is spinning. malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard
When you switch off the ESP®, driving maneuvers is reduced.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
Rthe ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle road conditions and to the non-operating
Rthe engine output is not limited, which status of the ESP®.
allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut
into surfaces for better grip ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
Rthe ETS/4-ETS will still apply the brakes to extended period with the ESP® switched
a spinning wheel off. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Rthe ESP® continues to operate when you
are braking
Rthe cruise control cannot be activated Switching on the ESP®
Rthe cruise control or the Distronic system
X Press ESP® switch : until the ESP®
switch off if activated
warning lamp d in the instrument
i When the ESP® is switched off and one or cluster goes out.
more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP® You are now again in normal driving mode
warning lamp d in the instrument with the ESP® switched on.
cluster flashes. However, the ESP® will
then not stabilize the vehicle. Off-road ESP® (vehicles with 4MATIC)
With the off-road driving program switched on
(Y page 155), the ESP® designed for off-road
use is activated automatically. At speeds
below 27 mph (45 km/h), the ESP® assists in
Z
66 Anti-theft systems
over-/understeering, thus improving vehicle Activating

traction.
X With SmartKey: Remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch.
ESP® trailer stabilization
X With KEYLESS-GO: Turn off the engine and
If the trailer you are towing should begin to open the driver’s door.
Safety and security
sway, the rig can only be stabilized by

immediately applying the brakes hard. Deactivating
Steering during this maneuver will not help to
stabilize the rig. X Switch on the ignition.
The ESP® will assist you in such situations. i Starting the engine will also deactivate
The ESP® recognizes when the trailer starts the immobilizer.
swaying and will apply the brakes to reduce In the event that the engine cannot be
the vehicle speed to a non-critical speed that started (yet the vehicle’s battery is
allows the vehicle-trailer combination to charged), the system is not operational.
stabilize. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
The ESP® trailer stabilization is functional at Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
vehicle speeds above approximately 40 mph USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
(65 km/h) when the ESP® is switched on.
G Warning! Anti-theft alarm system
The system will not be able to assist when the
trailer jackknifes Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
Rifthe ESP® has switched off due to a someone opens
malfunction
Ra door
Ron wet or icy roads
Rthe tailgate
Ron roads with slippery surface
Rthe hood
Rin sand or gravel
The alarm will stay on even if the activating
Trailers with a high center of gravity may tip element, a door, for example, is closed
over before the system recognizes swaying of immediately.
the trailer.
The alarm system will also be triggered when
Rthe vehicle is opened with the mechanical
Anti-theft systems key
Ra door is opened from the inside
Immobilizer
To cancel the alarm after it has been
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized triggered, see “Canceling the alarm”
persons from starting your vehicle. (Y page 67).
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The
engine can be started by anyone with a valid
SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.

Anti-theft systems 67
i If the alarm stays on for more than Canceling the alarm

30 seconds, the Tele Aid system initiates a
call to the Response Center automatically. To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
The Tele Aid system will initiate the call X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
provided that X Press button % or & on the
Safety and security

Ryou have subscribed to the Tele Aid SmartKey.
service In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
Rthe Tele Aid service has been activated X Grasp an outside door handle.
properly The SmartKey must be within 3 ft (1 m) of
Rthe necessary mobile phone, power the vehicle.
supply and GPS coverage are available X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.
X Arming: Lock the vehicle with the

SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
The turn signal lamps flash three times to
indicate that the vehicle is locked. Indicator
lamp : flashes to indicate that the alarm
system is armed.
i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
times, a door or the tailgate may not be
properly closed.
Close the respective element.
X Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate
that the alarm system is disarmed.
i Unless you open a door or the tailgate
within approximately 40 seconds after
unlocking the vehicle:
RThe vehicle will be locked again.
RThe anti-theft alarm system will be

rearmed.
Z
68

69
Vehicle equipment .............................. 70

Locking and unlocking ....................... 70
Starter switch positions ..................... 79
Seats .................................................... 81
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 86
Mirrors ................................................. 89
Memory function ................................. 92
Controls in detail
Lighting ................................................ 92
Wipers .................................................. 98
Power windows ................................. 100
Driving and parking .......................... 103
Automatic transmission ................... 109
Transfer case .................................... 117
Instrument cluster ............................ 117
Control system .................................. 119
Driving systems ................................ 141
Overview of climate control sys-
tem functions and air vents ............. 165
Climate control ................................. 167
3-zone automatic climate control . . . 173
Rear window defroster ..................... 183
Power tilt/sliding sunroof ............... 184
Loading and storing .......................... 186
Useful features ................................. 194

70 Locking and unlocking
Vehicle equipment SmartKey

Your vehicle comes supplied with two
i This Operator’s Manual describes all
SmartKeys, each with remote control and a
features, standard or optional, potentially removable mechanical key.
available for your vehicle at the time of
purchase. Please be aware that your The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
vehicle might not be equipped with all Rthe doors
features described in this manual. Rthe tailgate
Controls in detail
Rthe fuel filler flap

Locking and unlocking
Notes
When unlocking the vehicle, all turn signal
lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the
doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system
is disarmed.
When locking the vehicle, all turn signal lamps
flash three times. The locking knobs in the
doors move down. The anti-theft alarm Example illustration: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
system is armed. : & Lock button
All doors and the tailgate must be closed. ; F Unlock button for tailgate
If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with = % Unlock button
the SmartKey, the batteries in the SmartKey
are discharged, the SmartKey is i USA only:
malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery is This device complies with Part 15 of the
drained. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
X Check the batteries in the SmartKey following two conditions:
(Y page 73) and replace them if 1. This device may not cause harmful
necessary. interference, and
X Use the mechanical key to unlock the
driver’s door (Y page 306).
X Use the mechanical key to lock the vehicle
(Y page 307). operation.
X Have the vehicle battery and the vehicle
battery connections checked at an
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact
Roadside Assistance or an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

Locking and unlocking 71
i Canada only: KEYLESS-GO

This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
the following two conditions: with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each
with remote control and a removable
1. This device may not cause interference, mechanical key.
and The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated into
2. this device must accept any the SmartKey. The validity of the SmartKey is
Controls in detail
interference received, including checked every time you grasp an outside door
interference that may cause undesired handle.
operation of the device. When the SmartKey is valid, your vehicle
Any unauthorized modification to this unlocks
device could void the user’s authority to Rthe doors
Rthe fuel filler flap
Factory setting Rthe tailgate
X Global unlocking: Press button %. i USA only:
Unless you open a door or the tailgate within This device complies with Part 15 of the
approximately 40 seconds after unlocking FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
the vehicle: following two conditions:
RThe vehicle will be locked again. 1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
RThe antitheft alarm system will be rearmed.
X Global locking: Press button &. interference received, including
Selective setting operation.
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish Any unauthorized modification to this
to reprogramm the SmartKey. Pressing device could void the user’s authority to
button % will then only unlock the driver’s operate the equipment.
door and the fuel filler flap.
i Canada only:
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons
% and & simultaneously for Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
approximately 6 seconds until the battery the following two conditions:
check lamp (Y page 73) flashes twice.
1. This device may not cause interference,
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
and
X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap: Press button % once.
X Global unlocking: Press button %
twice. operation of the device.
X Global locking: Press button &.
Z
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO Find the SmartKey or change its present
RYou
location immediately (e.g. place it on the
can also use the SmartKey with
front passenger seat or insert it in shirt
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
pocket).
(Y page 70).
RIf you have started the engine with the
RYou can combine KEYLESS-GO functions
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you can
with normal SmartKey functions (e.g.
turn it off again by
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and locking
- pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
Controls in detail
with button &).

button
RAlways carry the SmartKey with you.
- inserting the SmartKey into the starter
RNever store the SmartKey together with: switch when the vehicle is at a standstill
- Electronic items such as a mobile phone and the automatic transmission is in park
or another SmartKey position P
- Metallic objects such as coins or metal RThe vehicle could be inadvertently
foil unlocked if the SmartKey is within 3 ft (1 m)
Doing so could impair the function of the of the vehicle and
KEYLESS-GO system. - an outside door handle is splashed with
RTo lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey water
must be located outside the vehicle within or
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the - you attempt to clean an outside door
tailgate. handle
RWhen the vehicle has been parked for more
RRemember that the engine can be started
than 72 hours, the KEYLESS-GO function is
deactivated. Pull an outside door handle by anyone with a SmartKey that is left
and switch on the ignition once to activate inside the vehicle.
the KEYLESS-GO function. Possibility 1 (One SmartKey in the vehicle,
one SmartKey outside the vehicle):
RIf the SmartKey is positioned farther away
from the vehicle, the system may no longer If you leave the SmartKey behind when
recognize the SmartKey. The vehicle exiting and locking the vehicle, no message
cannot be locked or the engine started via appears in the multifunction display.
the KEYLESS-GO system. Possibility 2 (One SmartKey in the vehicle,
RIf the SmartKey is removed from the vehicle
no SmartKey outside the vehicle):
(e.g. if a passenger exits the vehicle with When exiting and trying to lock the vehicle,
the SmartKey) the message Key Detected In Vehicle
appears in the multifunction display. The
- when pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/
vehicle will not be locked.
stop button or trying to lock the vehicle
with the lock button on an outside door
handle the message Key Not Factory setting
Detected appears in the multifunction X Global unlocking: Grasp an outside door
display handle.
- with the engine running, the red message
Key Not Detected appears in the
multifunction display while driving off

Unless you open a door or the tailgate within Checking SmartKey batteries
approximately 40 seconds after unlocking
the vehicle:
RThe vehicle will be locked again.
RThe antitheft alarm system will be rearmed.
Controls in detail
Example illustration: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
X Press button & or % on the
SmartKey.
Battery check lamp : comes on briefly to
X Global locking: Press lock button : on an indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in
order.
outside door handle.
If the battery check lamp does not come on
briefly during check, the SmartKey batteries
Selective setting are discharged.
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish X Replace the batteries (Y page 309).
to reprogram the SmartKey. Grasping the
driver’s outside door handle will then only i You can obtain the required batteries at
unlock the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap. any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons
i If the batteries are checked within signal
% and & simultaneously for
range of the vehicle, pressing button
approximately 6 seconds until the battery & or % will lock or unlock the vehicle
check lamp (Y page 73) flashes twice.
accordingly.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap: Grasp the driver’s outside door Loss of the SmartKey
handle. If you lose your SmartKey or mechanical key,
X Global unlocking: Grasp any outside door you should do the following:
handle other than the driver’s outside door
X Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
handle.
X Global locking: Press lock button : on an
X Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
outside door handle.
mechanical key to your car insurance
company immediately.
X Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to supply you with a replacement. For
Z
information on replacing the SmartKey, see

“Replacing the SmartKey” (Y page 74).
Replacing the SmartKey

Only you, or someone authorized by you can
order a replacement key from any Mercedes-
Benz Center. In order to do so, the Mercedes-
Controls in detail
Benz Center will require proof of identity and

vehicle ownership with original documents,
including the following: Example illustration driver’s door
If you are the current owner of the vehicle: If the vehicle has previously been locked with
Rthe vehicle’s current state registration the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening
Ra current identity card, passport, or drivers a door from the inside will trigger the anti-
license theft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, see (Y page 67).
If you are an authorized person:
X Front doors: Pull on inside door
Rthe vehicle’s current state registration handle ; on the respective front door.
Ra current identity card, passport, or drivers If the door was locked, locking knob : will
license for the authorized individual move up.
Rsigned and dated authorization from the X Rear doors: Pull up locking knob on the
owner of the vehicle for which the key is respective rear door to unlock door.
being requested X Pull on the inside door handle on the
i Duplicated or photocopied respective rear door.

documentation will not be accepted.
Activating the key Automatic central locking

The doors and the tailgate lock automatically
Once you, or an authorized person, has
when the vehicle is set into motion.
provided the appropriate documents, the
Mercedes-Benz Center will need to You can open a locked front door from the
synchronize the key to your vehicle before it inside. Open door only when conditions are
can be used. In order to do so, the Mercedes- safe to do so.
Benz Center need access to your vehicle. The doors are designed to unlock
automatically after an accident if the force of
the impact exceeds a preset threshold.
Opening the doors from the inside The vehicle locks automatically when the
You can open a door from the inside even ignition is switched on and the wheels are
when it is locked unless it is secured with the turning at vehicle speeds of above 9 mph
child safety lock (Y page 60). (15 km/h). You could therefore lock yourself
out when the vehicle is pushed or towed or is
Open door only when conditions are safe to
on a test stand.
do so.
i You can also activate or deactivate the
automatic central locking using the control
system (Y page 135).

Locking and unlocking from the inside Tailgate

G Observe Safety notes, see page 55. G Warning!
You can lock or unlock the vehicle from the Make sure the tailgate is closed when the
inside using the central locking switches. This engine is running and while driving. Among
can be useful, for example, if you want to lock other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
the vehicle before starting to drive. gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in
The central locking switches do not lock or unconsciousness and death.
Controls in detail
unlock the fuel filler flap.
A minimum height clearance of 7.20 ft
The switches are located in each front door. (2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate.
Opening the tailgate from the outside
X Locking: Press central locking switch ;.

When all doors and the tailgate are closed,
the vehicle locks. X Pull on handle :.
X Unlocking: Press central unlocking
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: The
switch :. vehicle must be unlocked.
You can open a locked front door from the X Pull tailgate upwards to open.
inside at any time. Open door only when
conditions are safe to do so.
Closing the tailgate from the outside
If the vehicle was previously locked with the
central locking switch G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
Rand the SmartKey is set to factory settings,
G Warning!
the complete vehicle is unlocked when a
To prevent possible personal injury, always
front door is opened from the inside
keep hands and fingers away from the cargo
Rand the SmartKey is set to selective compartment opening when closing the
settings, only the front door opened from tailgate. Be especially careful when small
the inside is unlocked children are around.
If the vehicle has been locked centrally with
the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it will not
unlock using the central unlocking switch.
Z
Notes for operating the tailgate with the

SmartKey:
You can also open, close, and stop the
tailgate by pressing button F on the
SmartKey.
The prerequisites for this are:
RNo SmartKey is inserted in the starter
switch.
Controls in detail
RKEYLESS-GO: The vehicle’s on-board

electronics must have status 0
X Lower tailgate by pulling firmly on (Y page 80).
handles :.
X Close tailgate with hands placed flat on it. Opening the tailgate from the outside
Once the tailgate touches the latch, the You can unlock and open the tailgate
tailgate will pull itself shut automatically. simultaneously from the outside when the
vehicle is stationary.
X Press and hold button F on the
Power tailgate SmartKey until the tailgate unlocks and
G Warning! begins to open.
While the tailgate is opening, an acoustic
Make sure the tailgate is closed when the
warning sounds.
engine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) or
gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Pull on the
unconsciousness and death. handle (Y page 75).
! The tailgate swings open upwards Closing the tailgate from the outside
automatically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance. G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
A minimum height clearance of 7.20 ft G Warning!
(2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate. Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
In vehicles with power tailgate, you can make sure no one is in danger of being
Ropen and close the tailgate from the inside injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from the
and the outside electrically
cargo compartment opening when closing the
Rlimit the opening height of the tailgate
tailgate. Be especially careful when small
Rinterrupt the opening/closing procedure at children are around. To stop the closing
any time by procedure, do one of the following:
- pressing or pulling the door-mounted RPress or pull the remote tailgate opening/
remote tailgate opening/closing switch closing switch on the driver’s door.
- pulling the outside handle on the tailgate RPress the tailgate closing switch.
- pressing the tailgate closing switch RPress the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch.
- pressing the KEYLESS-GO locking/
closing switch

RPull outside handle on the tailgate. Closing the tailgate and locking the
RWhen no SmartKey is inserted in the starter
vehicle from the outside (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO)
switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make
sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
have status 0): Press button F on the
SmartKey. G Warning!
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
Do not leave the SmartKey in the vehicle. You make sure no one is in danger of being
Controls in detail
may lock yourself out. injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
If the vehicle was previously centrally locked always keep hands and fingers away from the
with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, the cargo compartment opening when closing the
tailgate will lock automatically when it is tailgate. Be especially careful when small
closed. The turn signal lamps flash three children are around. To stop the closing
times to confirm locking. procedure, do one of the following:
RPress or pull the remote tailgate opening/
closing switch on the driver’s door.
RPress the tailgate closing switch.
RPress the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch.
RPull outside handle on the tailgate.
RWhen no SmartKey is inserted in the starter
switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make
sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics
have status 0): Press button F on the
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO
SmartKey.
You can close the tailgate and lock the vehicle

simultaneously from the outside using the
KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO

X Press tailgate closing switch : or press
and hold button F on the SmartKey until
the tailgate begins to close.
X Make sure you have the SmartKey with you.
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
X Press KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
object while closing, the closing procedure is
stopped and the tailgate reopens. This may switch : briefly.
happen if luggage has been piled too high, for The tailgate closes.
example. Once the tailgate and all doors are closed:
Z
RThe vehicle locks. You can unlock and open the tailgate
RThe turn signals flash three times to simultaneously from the driver’s seat when
confirm locking. the vehicle is stationary.
RThe locking knobs in the doors move
down.
RThe anti-theft alarm system is armed.
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
Controls in detail
object while closing, the closing procedure is

stopped and the tailgate reopens. This may
happen if luggage has been piled too high, for
example.
The closing process is stopped if the system
cannot recognize a SmartKey with KEYLESS-
GO anymore. Make sure the SmartKey with X Pull remote tailgate opening/closing
KEYLESS-GO is within approximately 3 ft switch : until the tailgate begins to open.
(1 m) of the tailgate. Repeat the closing While the tailgate is opening, an acoustic
procedure if necessary. warning sounds.
The tailgate remains unlocked when a
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized Closing
inside the vehicle to prevent a possible G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
inadvertent lockout. In this case, the turn
signals will not flash and the anti-theft alarm G Warning!
will be triggered when the tailgate is opened. Maintain sight of the area around the rear of
the vehicle while operating the tailgate with
Opening/closing the tailgate from the the door-mounted remote tailgate switch.
inside Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being
Opening injured.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 76. To interrupt the closing procedure, press or
pull the door-mounted remote tailgate switch.
G Warning!
Maintain sight of the area around the rear of If the tailgate comes into contact with an
the vehicle while operating the tailgate with object while closing, the closing procedure is
the door-mounted remote tailgate switch. stopped and the tailgate reopens. This may
Monitor the opening procedure carefully to happen if luggage has been piled too high, for
make sure no one is in danger of being example.
injured. X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
To interrupt the opening procedure, press or position 1 or 2.

pull the door-mounted remote tailgate switch. X Press remote tailgate opening/closing
When the SmartKey is not inserted in the switch : until the tailgate begins to close.
starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: While the tailgate is closing an acoustic
Make sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics warning sounds.
have status 0): Press button F on the X Interrupting the closing procedure:
SmartKey. Press or pull remote tailgate opening/
closing switch :.

Starter switch positions 79
Limiting opening height of tailgate Starter switch positions

You can limit the opening height of the SmartKey
tailgate in the upper opening range. This can
be useful, for example, when the space above G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
the tailgate is not sufficient.
Activating
X Open the tailgate: Pull on handle
Controls in detail
(Y page 75) or press and hold button
F on the SmartKey until the tailgate
opens.
X Stop opening procedure: When the
tailgate is in the desired position, press
tailgate closing switch (Y page 77) or pull
on handle once more.
X You can also press or pull the remote Starter switch
tailgate opening/closing switch g For removing SmartKey
(Y page 78) to stop the opening procedure. 1 Power supply for some electrical
consumers, e.g. radio
X Press and hold the tailgate closing switch
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
in the tailgate (Y page 77) until you hear a
short acoustic signal. consumers) and driving position
The opening height of the tailgate is limited. 3 Starting position
The tailgate will now stop at the stored When you switch on the ignition, all lamps
position when opened. (except low-beam headlamp indicator lamp,
high-beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn
Deactivating signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the
X Press and hold the tailgate closing switch instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the
in the tailgate (Y page 77) until you hear instrument cluster fails to come on when the
two short, consecutive acoustic signals. ignition is switched on, have it checked and
replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster remains on after starting
the engine or comes on while driving, refer to
“Lamps in instrument cluster” (Y page 297).
X Always remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch when the engine is not in
operation.
This will help to prevent accelerated vehicle
battery discharge or a completely
discharged vehicle battery.
If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
starter switch, the vehicle battery may not be
sufficiently charged.
X Check the vehicle battery and charge it if
necessary.
or
Z
80 Starter switch positions
X Get a jump start.

i If the SmartKey does not belong to the
vehicle, the SmartKey can be turned in the
starter switch. However, the ignition does
not switch on and the engine does not start.
KEYLESS-GO
Controls in detail

Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GO : KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
feature are supplied with a SmartKey with ; Starter switch
integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a
removable KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. X Insert the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button must be into the starter switch (if not inserted
inserted in the starter switch and the already).
SmartKey present in the vehicle. X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button park position P.
without depressing the brake pedal X Do not depress the brake pedal.
corresponds to the various starter switch
positions (Y page 79).
Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
with the brake pedal firmly depressed will
start the engine (Y page 103).
The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button can be
pulled out of the starter switch easily. You can
then insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch.
i The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button does
not need to be removed from the starter
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
switch when you leave the vehicle.
= USA only
However, always take the SmartKey with
you when you leave the vehicle. As long as ? Canada only
the SmartKey is in the vehicle, the vehicle’s
electrical systems can be switched on or Position 0
the engine can be started using the
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
button, the vehicle’s on-board electronics
have status 0 (as with SmartKey removed).
Position 1
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
once.
This supplies power for some electrical
consumers, such as radio functions.

Seats 81
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/ G Warning!

stop button Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Ronce more, the ignition (position 2) is Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
switched on the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Rtwice more the power supply is again Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
switched off backrest in an excessively reclined position as
this can be dangerous. You could slide under
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
Controls in detail
Ignition (or position 2)
it, the seat belt would apply force at the
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
twice. or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat
This supplies power for all electrical belts provide the best restraint when the
consumers. wearer is in a position that is as upright as
All lamps (except low-beam headlamp possible and seat belts are properly
indicator lamp, high-beam headlamp positioned on the body.
indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instrument G Warning!
cluster come on. If a lamp in the instrument Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
cluster fails to come on when the ignition correctly fasten your seat belt.
is switched on, have it checked and Observe the following points:
replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the RAdjust the seat backrest until your arms are
instrument cluster remains on after slightly angled when holding the steering
starting the engine or comes on while wheel.
driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument
RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating
cluster” (Y page 297).
position that still allows you to reach the
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/ accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
stop button once, the power supply is again position should be as far back as possible
switched off. with the driver still able to operate the
controls properly.
RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as
Seats close to the head as possible. The center of
Safety notes the head restraint must support the back of
the head at eye level.
G Warning! RNever place hands under the seat or near
In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle any moving parts while a seat is being
control the following must be done before the adjusted.
vehicle is put into motion:
Failure to do so could result in an accident
Rseat adjustment and/or serious personal injury.
Rhead restraint adjustment
G Warning!
Rsteering wheel adjustment
The power seats can be operated at any time.
Rrear view mirror adjustment Therefore, do not leave children unattended
Rfastening of seat belts in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
Z
82 Seats
vehicle could result in an accident and/or seats may not be moved to the rearmost
serious personal injury. position. Otherwise you could damage the
front and rear seats.
G Warning!
According to accident statistics, children are ! When adjusting the seat backrest tilt and
safer when properly restrained in the rear head restraint height, make sure the sun
seating positions than in the front seating visor is folded up. If the head restraint is in
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that the uppermost position, it could hit and
Controls in detail
children be placed in the rear seats whenever damage the sun visor.
possible. Regardless of seating position,
i Vehicles without memory function:
seated and properly secured in an The seats can be adjusted within 5 minutes
appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler after either front door has been opened.
restraint, or booster seat recommended for The counter resets each time
the size and weight of the child. For additional Ryou open or close a front door
information, see “Children in the vehicle”. Ryou insert the SmartKey into the starter
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is switch
Ryou remove the SmartKey from the
or the child is not properly secured in the child starter switch
restraint. Ryou switch the ignition on or off
Just like in vehicles with memory function,
G Warning!
the power seats can be operated at any
For your protection, drive only with properly time when the ignition is switched on.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close i The memory function (Y page 92) lets
to the head as possible and the center of the you store the settings for the seat position
head restraint supports the back of the head together with the settings for the steering
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for wheel (electrical) and exterior rear view
injury to the head and neck in the event of an mirrors.
accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
restraints. Head restraints are intended to
help reduce injuries during an accident.
Seat adjustment
! When moving the seats, make sure there
are no items in the footwell or behind the
seats. Otherwise, you could damage the
seats and/or the items.
Power seats
! When the rear seats are folded forward,
e.g. for cargo volume expansion, the front

Seats 83
X Seat fore and aft adjustment: Press the

switch forward or backward in direction of
arrow A.
X Seat backrest tilt: Press the switch
forward or backward in direction of
arrow ?.
X Seat height: Press the switch up or down
in direction of arrow =.
Controls in detail
X Seat cushion tilt: Press the switch up or
down in direction of arrow ; until your
upper legs are lightly supported. X Raising: Adjust the height of head
X Head restraint height (vehicles with restraint : by pulling it upward.
memory function): Press the switch up or If head restraint : is fully retracted, press
down in direction of arrow :.
release button ; in direction of arrow and
Head restraint height adjustment, pull head restraint : upward.
manual X Lowering: Press release button ; in
This feature is only available in vehicles direction of arrow and press down on head
without memory function. restraint :.
G Warning! Head restraint fore and aft adjustment

For your protection, drive only with properly G Warning!
Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close System: When adjusting the head restraint,
to the head as possible and the center of the make sure your fingers do not become caught
head restraint supports the back of the head between the head restraint cushion and the
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for monitor. Failing to do so may lead to injury.
injury to the head and neck in the event of an
accident or similar situation.
restraints. Head restraints are intended to
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move
the respective head restraint up from the
lowest non-use position and have the
occupant adjust the head restraint properly.
! Do not attempt to remove front seat head

restraints. They can only be removed by
qualified technicians. We recommend that X While seated, reach behind you with both
you have this work carried out by an hands and find lower edge of the head
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. restraint.
X Push or pull on the lower edge of the head
restraint cushion to the desired position.
Z
84 Seats
Lumbar support G Warning!

You can adjust the contour of the driver’s seat Make sure the rear seat head restraints
lumbar support to help enhance support to engage when placing them upright manually.
your spine. Otherwise their protective function cannot be
ensured.
The back of the head will not be supported in
the event of a collision. That could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. Rear seat
Controls in detail
occupants can be seriously injured or killed.
Rear seat head restraint height

adjustment
X Curvature position: Use button : to

move the curvature up and button = to
move it down.
X Degree of curvature: Use button ; to
lessen the curvature and button ? to
increase it.
X Raising: Pull head restraint : upward to

Rear seat head restraints
the desired position.
G Warning! X Lowering: Press release button ; and
For your protection, drive only with properly push down on head restraint :.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it Rear seat head restraint fore and aft
is as close to the head as possible and the adjustment
center of the head restraint supports the back
of the head at eye level. This will reduce the
potential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move
the respective head restraint up from the
lowest non-use position and have the
occupant adjust the head restraint properly.
restraints installed when the rear seats are
occupied. Head restraints are intended to

Seats 85
X While seated, reach behind you with both

hands and find lower edge of the head
restraint.
X Adjust the head restraint to the desired
position by pushing or pulling on the lower
edge of the head restraint cushion.
Rear seat head restraints, removing
Controls in detail
and installing
X Switch on the ignition.

X Seat cushion depth: Adjust the seat
cushion depth to the length of your upper
leg using switch :.
X Seat backrest contour: Adjust the
contour of the seat backrest to the desired
position using W or X.
X Move the seat backrest support cushion to
the bottom with button ? or to the center
X Removing: Pull head restraint : to its with button =.
uppermost position. X Seat backrest side bolsters: Adjust the
X Press release button ; and pull out head side bolsters so that they provide good
restraint. lateral support using switch ;.
X Installing: Insert head restraint : into
openings on the seat backrest.
X Push head restraint : down until it audibly
Seat ventilation
engages.
X Press release button ; and adjust head
restraint : to the desired position.
Multicontour seats
The multicontour seat has a movable seat
cushion and inflatable air cushions built into
the seat backrest to provide additional
lumbar and side support.
The blue indicator lamps ; in seat ventilation
switch : come on to show which ventilation
level you have selected.
i The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat
can be activated using the summer opening
feature (Y page 102).
Z
X Switch on the ignition. The seat heating switches from level 3 (high)
X Switching on: Press respective seat to level 2 after approximately 5 minutes.
ventilation switch :. The seat heating switches from level 2 to level
Three blue indicator lamps ; in seat 1 (low) after approximately 10 minutes.
ventilation switch : come on. After approximately 20 minutes in level 1, the
X Press seat ventilation switch : repeatedly seat heating switches off automatically.
until the desired ventilation level is set. X Switch on the ignition.
Controls in detail
X Switching off: Press seat ventilation X Switching on: Press respective seat
switch : repeatedly until all indicator heating switch :.
lamps ; go out. Three red indicator lamps ; in the
If there is insufficient voltage the seat respective seat heating switch : come on.
ventilating switches off automatically. X Continue pressing respective seat heating
switch : until desired seat heating level is
reached.
Seat heating
X Switching off: Press respective seat
heating switch : repeatedly until all
indicator lamps ; go out.
If one or more of indicator lamps ; in
respective seat heating switch : are
flashing, there is insufficient voltage available
since too many electrical consumers are
turned on. The seat heating switches off
automatically.
The seat heating will switch back on again
automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
Front seat heating switches available.
The switches for the outboard rear seat
heating are located in the rear center console.
Multifunction steering wheel
Safety notes
G Warning!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or
driving without the steering wheel adjustment
feature locked could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
The electrical steering wheel adjustment
feature can be operated at any time.
Rear seat heating switches Therefore, do not leave children unattended
The red indicator lamps ; in front or rear in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
seat heating switch : come on to show vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
which heating level you have selected. vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.

Multifunction steering wheel 87
Make sure X Adjusting steering wheel in or out: Move

Ryou can reach the steering wheel with your stalk in direction of arrows :.
arms slightly bent at the elbows X Adjusting steering wheel up or down:
Ryou
Move stalk in direction of arrows ;.
can move your legs freely
Rall displays (including malfunction and i You can store the settings for the steering
indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster wheel with the memory function
are clearly visible (Y page 92).
Controls in detail
Steering wheel adjustment, manual Easy-entry/exit feature
This feature allows the driver an easier entry
into and exit from the vehicle. When entering
and exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is
in its uppermost position.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated
or deactivated in the Comfort submenu of the
control system (Y page 135).
G Warning!
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
X Unlocking: Pull release handle : out to
activated.
its stop limit.
To stop steering wheel movement do one of
X Move steering wheel to the desired
the following:
position.
RMove steering wheel adjustment stalk.
X Locking: Push release handle : back to
its original position. RPress one of the memory position buttons.
X Make sure the steering wheel is securely RPress memory button M.
locked by trying to move it up and down as Do not leave children unattended in the
well as in and out before driving off. vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
Steering wheel adjustment, electrical feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,

the steering wheel will return to its last set
position when you close the driver’s door with
the ignition switched on. The steering wheel
will also return to its last set position when
you insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button once with the driver’s door closed.
Z
i The last set steering wheel position is

stored when the ignition is switched off or
the position is stored in memory
(Y page 92).
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
The steering wheel also tilts upwards when
Controls in detail
you open the driver’s door with the SmartKey

in starter switch position 0 or 1 or the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in position 1.
i When the current position for the steering
X Switching on: Turn switch at the tip of the
wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the
stalk in direction of arrow :.
steering wheel will no longer be able to
Indicator lamp = comes on.
move upward when the easy-entry/exit
feature is activated. i The steering wheel heating may be
The adjustment procedure is briefly suspended temporarily. However, indicator
interrupted when the engine is started. lamp = remains on. The steering wheel
G Warning! heating is suspended when the
temperature of the vehicle interior is above
Let the system complete the adjustment
86‡ (30†). It is also suspended when the
procedure before setting the vehicle in
temperature of the steering wheel is above
motion. All steering wheel adjustment must
95‡ (35†).
be completed before setting the vehicle in
motion. Driving off with the steering wheel When these conditions do not apply
still adjusting could cause the driver to lose anymore, steering wheel heating
control of the vehicle. continues.
X Switching off: Turn switch at the tip of
Crash-responsive exit aid stalk in direction of arrow ;.
When you open the driver’s door after an Indicator lamp = goes out.
accident has occurred, the steering column
i Indicator lamp = flashes or goes out in
moves up. The position of the SmartKey in the
case of power surge or undervoltage or if
starter switch is insignificant. This function
the steering wheel heating malfunctions.
facilitates exiting as well as rescue of vehicle
occupants. i The steering wheel heating switches off
The crash-responsive exit aid can only be automatically when you remove the
triggered when the easy-entry/exit feature is SmartKey from the starter switch or, on
activated via the control system. vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, when you
switch off the ignition and open the driver’s
door.
Heated steering wheel
For more information on the steering wheel,
The steering wheel heating warms up the see “Multifunction steering wheel”
leather area of the steering wheel. (Y page 119).

Mirrors 89
Mirrors
Notes
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a good
view of the road and traffic conditions.
Controls in detail
Interior rear view mirror
X Adjust the interior rear view mirror
manually. X Switch on the ignition.
X Press button : for the driver’s side
Interior rear view mirror, antiglare
exterior rear view mirror or button = for
position
the passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror.
The indicator lamp in the respective button
comes on for approximately 15 seconds.
If you do not make adjustments to the
selected exterior rear view mirror within
15 seconds, the indicator lamp goes out.
You will then have to select the desired
exterior rear view mirror again before
adjustments can be made. Adjustments
can only be made with the indicator lamp
for the respective exterior rear view mirror
X Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position by button illuminated.
moving lever : towards the windshield. X Press adjustment button ; up, down, left
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed. or right according to the desired setting.
! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
Exterior rear view mirrors hit from the front, manually snap it back
into place.
G Warning!
Exercise care when using the passenger-side ! Vehicle with power-folding exterior rear
exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface view mirrors:
is convex (outwardly curved surface for a If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
wider field of view). Objects in mirror are forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear)
closer than they appear. Check your interior or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from front),
rear view mirror and glance over your press fold button to fold mirrors in, then
shoulder before changing lanes. press fold button again to fold mirrors out.
Do not force mirrors by hand as this may
damage the adjustment mechanism.
The mirror housing is then properly
positioned and you can adjust the mirror in
the usual manner.
Z
90 Mirrors
i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior

rear view mirrors will be heated
automatically.
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors

The exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s
side and the interior rear view mirror will
Controls in detail
respond automatically to glare when the

ignition is switched on and incoming light
from headlamps falls on the sensor in the
interior rear view mirror.
X Press button =, to select the passenger-
The rear view mirrors will not react if the
automatic transmission is set to reverse gear side exterior rear view mirror.
R or the interior lighting is switched on. X Shift the automatic transmission into
reverse gear R.
G Warning! The passenger-side exterior rear view
The auto-dimming function does not react if mirror moves to the preset parking
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors position.
in the interior rear view mirror. X Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior view mirror with adjustment button ; so
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not that you see the rear wheel and the road
react, for example, when transporting cargo curb.
which covers the rear window. The exterior rear view mirror parking
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles position is stored.
(incident light) could blind you. As a result,
you may not be able to observe traffic
Calling up the parking position
conditions and could cause an accident.
X Press button =, to select the passenger-
Exterior rear view mirror parking side exterior rear view mirror.
position X Shift the automatic transmission into
For more convenient parking, you can set the reverse gear R.
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so The passenger-side exterior rear view
that you can see the rear wheel and the road mirror moves to the stored parking
curb. position.
Setting and storing the parking position

Mirrors 91
The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror each exterior rear view mirror in completely
returns to its previously stored driving (Y page 91).
position X Fold each exterior rear view mirror out
R10 seconds after you have put the gear completely (Y page 91).
selector lever out of reverse gear R When the exterior rear view mirrors fold
Rimmediately once your vehicle exceeds a properly upon locking the vehicle, the exterior
speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) mirrors are synchronized. Otherwise repeat
the above steps.
Controls in detail
Rimmediately when you press button : to
select the driver’s side exterior rear view Folding in and out manually
mirror
The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if
they are not folded out completely.
Power-folding exterior rear view
mirrors
! Before you drive the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, fold in the exterior rear
view mirrors. Otherwise they may get
damaged.
Folding in and out automatically

The function must be activated in the
Convenience submenu (Y page 137).
The exterior rear view mirrors fold in X Switch on the ignition.
automatically as soon as the vehicle is locked X Folding in: Briefly press button :.
from the outside. Both exterior rear view mirrors fold in.
The exterior rear view mirrors fold out
i At speeds above approximately 30 mph
automatically as soon as the vehicle is
unlocked and the driver’s or front passenger (47 km/h), you will not be able to fold the
door is subsequently opened. exterior mirrors in.
X Folding out: Briefly press button :.
Synchronizing Both exterior rear view mirrors fold out.
The power-folding rear view mirrors may have ! If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
to be synchronized after the vehicle battery forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear)
has been disconnected or discharged. If the or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the
exterior rear view mirrors do not fold properly front), press button : to fold mirrors in.
upon locking or unlocking the vehicle, do the Then press button : again to fold mirrors
following: out. Do not force mirrors by hand as this
X Make sure the power-folding function in the may damage the adjustment mechanism.
control system is activated (Y page 137). The mirror housing is then properly
X When the power-folding function is positioned and you can adjust the mirror in
activated and the exterior rear view the usual manner.
mirrors still do not fold properly: Fold Make sure both rear view mirrors are folded
out before driving off.
Z
92 Lighting
Memory function Recalling positions from memory

Notes X Press and hold desired memory position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat has moved
With the memory function you can store up to the stored position completely. On the
to three different configurations per front driver’s side, also wait for the steering
seat. wheel and exterior rear view mirrors to
Each memory position button on the driver’s move to the stored position.
side can store all of the following settings:
Controls in detail
RSeat
i Releasing the memory position button
position
stops movement to the stored positions
RSteering wheel position immediately.
RExterior rear view mirrors’ position
G Warning! Lighting
Do not activate the memory function while
Notes
driving. Activating the memory function while
driving could cause the driver to lose control i If you drive in countries with left-hand
of the vehicle. driving, you must have the headlamps
modified for symmetrical low beams.
Each memory position button on the front
Relevant information can be obtained at
passenger side can store the setting of the
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
seat position.
i Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon
headlamps:
The active Bi-Xenon headlamps increase
usable illumination over conventional
headlamps because they follow the
curvature of the road ahead. The beams of
the active Bi-Xenon headlamps shift to
either side according to the vehicle’s
steering angle and speed.
Storing positions into memory

X Adjust the seats.
X On the driver’s side, also adjust the
steering wheel and exterior rear view
mirrors to the desired positions.
X Press memory button M once and within
3 seconds press memory position button
1, 2 or 3.
When the settings are stored to the
selected position, an acknowledgement
signal sounds.

Lighting 93
Exterior lamp switch ! Failure to switch off the parking lamps

when leaving the vehicle may result in a
discharged battery.
Low-beam headlamps
The low-beam headlamps can be switched on
and off with the exterior lamp switch.
Controls in detail
X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
switch to position L.
The following lamps come on:
1 W Standing lamps, left RLow-beam headlamps
2 X Standing lamps, right RTail lamps

3 $ Off RParking lamps
Daytime running lamp mode
RLicense plate lamps
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode
Daytime running lamp mode RSide marker lamps
5T Parking lamps (also tail lamps, RInstrument panel lamps
license plate lamps, side marker RGreen indicator lamp L in the
lamps and instrument panel lamps)
instrument cluster
6L Low-beam headlamps or high-beam
headlamps X Switching off: Turn the exterior lamp
7N Front fog lamps switch to position $.
8R Rear fog lamp
Automatic headlamp mode
i The exterior lamps (except standing The following lamps come on and go out
lamps or parking lamps) go out automatically depending on the brightness of
automatically when you remove the the ambient light:
SmartKey from the starter switch or open
RLow-beam headlamps
the driver’s door with the ignition switched
off. RTail lamps
When the parking lamps or the rear fog RParking lamps
lamp are switched on and you remove the
RLicense plate lamps
SmartKey from the starter switch and open
the driver’s door, an acoustic signal RSide marker lamps
sounds.
In addition the message Switch Off G Warning!
Lights appears in the multifunction If the exterior lamp switch is set to Ã, the
display. headlamps will not automatically come on
under foggy conditions.
Switch off the parking lamps or the rear fog
lamp manually. To minimize risk to you and to others, activate
headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to
L when driving or when traffic and/or
Z
94 Lighting
ambient lighting conditions require you to do daytime running lamp mode on or off (USA
so. only)” (Y page 133).
In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
from position Ã to L with the vehicle $ or Ã.
at a standstill in a safe location. Switching When the engine is running, the low-beam
from Ã to L will briefly switch off the headlamps come on.
headlamps. Doing so while driving in low In low ambient lighting conditions, the
ambient lighting conditions may result in an following lamps will come on additionally:
Controls in detail
accident. RTail lamps

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid
RParking lamps
to the driver. The driver is responsible for the
operation of the vehicle’s lights at all times. RLicense plate lamps
RSide marker lamps
X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
switch to position Ã. With the daytime running lamp mode
activated and the engine running, you cannot
The following lamps come on and go out
switch off the low-beam headlamps manually.
depending on the brightness of the ambient
light with the SmartKey in starter switch Canada only
position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO start/stop With the exterior lamp switch in position
button pressed once: $ or Ã, you cannot switch on the high-
Rtail lamps beam headlamps.
Rparking lamps The high-beam flasher is available at all times.
Rlicense X For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
plate lamps
switch to position L to permit activation
Rside marker lamps of the high-beam headlamps.
When the engine is running, the low-beam When the engine is running, and you
headlamps will also come on and turn off
Rshift from a driving position to park
automatically.
position P with the vehicle at a standstill or
Canada only: High-beam headlamps are only the parking brake is engaged, the low-beam
available with the exterior lamp switch in headlamps will go out with a delay of
position L. 3 minutes
Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position
Daytime running lamp mode
T, the low-beam headlamps, the tail
In Canada, the daytime running lamp mode is and parking lamps, the license plate lamps
mandatory and therefore in a constant mode. and the side marker lamps come on
In the USA, the daytime running lamp mode Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position
is deactivated by default. L, the manual headlamp mode has
X Activate the daytime running lamp mode priority over the daytime running lamp
using the control system, see “Switching mode
The corresponding exterior lamps come on
(Y page 93).

Lighting 95
USA only X Switching on rear fog lamp: Pull out the

You can only switch on the high-beam exterior lamp switch to second stop.
headlamps in low ambient lighting conditions. The rear fog lamp, the front fog lamps, the
The high-beam flasher is available at all times. green and the yellow indicator lamp R
in the exterior lamp switch come on.
X For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
X Switching off front fog lamps/rear fog
switch to position L or Ã to permit
lamp: Push in the exterior lamp switch to
activation of the high-beam headlamps.
its stop.
Controls in detail
When the engine is running, and you turn the
exterior lamp switch to position T or
L, the manual headlamp mode has Locator lighting and night security
priority over the daytime running lamp mode. illumination
The corresponding exterior lamps come on Locator lighting and night security
(Y page 93). illumination are described in the “Control
system” section, see “Switching locator
Fog lamps lighting on or off” (Y page 133) and
“Switching night security illumination
Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the (Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on or
exterior lamp switch in position Ã. off” (Y page 134).
G Warning!
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
Combination switch
only switch from position Ã to L with
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from Ã to L will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions may
result in an accident.
Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps

and/or the low-beam headlamps on. Fog
lamps should only be used in conjunction with
low-beam headlamps. Consult your State or
Province Motor Vehicle Regulations
regarding permissible lamp operation.
Turn signals
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position X Press the combination switch in direction
T or L (Y page 93). of arrow ; or ?.
X Switching on front fog lamps: Pull out the The corresponding turn signal indicator
exterior lamp switch to first stop. lamp ! or # in the instrument
The green indicator lamp N in the cluster flashes.
exterior lamp switch comes on. The combination switch resets automatically
after major steering wheel movements.
i To signal minor directional changes such
as changing lanes, press the combination
switch only to point of resistance and
Z
96 Lighting
release. The corresponding turn signal X Switching on: Press hazard warning
lamps will flash three times. flasher switch :.
All turn signal lamps are flashing.
High beam
i With the hazard warning flasher activated
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position and the combination switch set for either
L (Y page 93). left or right turn, only the respective left or
X Switching on: Push the combination right turn signals will operate when the
Controls in detail
switch in direction of arrow :. ignition is switched on.

The high-beam headlamp indicator lamp X Switching off: Press hazard warning
K in the instrument cluster comes on. flasher switch : again.
X Switching off: Pull the combination switch
in direction of arrow = to its original i If the hazard warning flasher has been
position. activated automatically, press hazard
warning flasher switch : to switch it off.
i Also note the information on high-beam
headlamps with activated automatic
headlamp mode (Y page 93) or the daytime Headlamp cleaning system
running lamp mode (Y page 94).
The headlamps will be cleaned with a high-
pressure water jet automatically when the
High-beam flasher engine is running and you have
X Switching on: Pull the combination switch Rswitched on the headlamps
briefly in direction of arrow =. and
Rthe windshield wipers have wiped the
windshield with washer fluid five times
Hazard warning flasher
The counter resets when you switch off the
The hazard warning flasher can be switched
headlamps.
on at all times, even with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch. For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
The hazard warning flasher comes on
cleaning system” (Y page 217).
automatically when an air bag deploys.
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps

The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
improve illumination of the area in the
direction into which you are turning.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
only operate
Rin low ambient lighting conditions
Rat vehicle speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h)

Lighting 97
Rwith the front fog lamps switched off Switching off

Rwhen the engine is running X Switch off the left or right turn signal.
or
Switching on
X Steer straight ahead.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
L or Ã. i There may be a brief delay before the
corner-illuminating front fog lamps go out.
or
Controls in detail
X Activate the daytime running lamp mode
(Y page 94). Interior lighting in the front
X Switch on the left or right turn signal,
depending on whether you are turning left
or right.
The respective front fog lamp comes on. If
you have switched on the turn signal for
one side but turn the steering wheel in the
other direction, the corner-illuminating
front fog lamp on the side of the turn signal
comes on.
or
X Turn the steering wheel in the desired
direction.
Driving forward: The front fog lamp on the
side of your steering direction comes on.
Driving in reverse: The front fog lamp
opposite to your steering direction comes
on.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
come on automatically depending on the : p Left front reading lamp on/off
steering angle, even if you did not switch on
; v Rear interior lighting on/off
either turn signal. If the corner-illuminating
front fog lamps came on automatically, they = ~ Automatic control on/off
will also go out automatically depending on ? c Front interior lighting on/off
the steering angle and vehicle speed. A p Right front reading lamp on/off
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps B Front interior lighting
temporarily come on on both sides of the C Front reading lamps
vehicle if you turn the steering wheel in one
D Front interior lighting
direction and then again in the other direction
shortly thereafter.
Automatic control
The corner-illuminating front fog lamp
remains lit for a short time only. It then goes X Activating: Press button ~.
out automatically. Button ~ disengages and sits flush with
the other buttons.
The interior lighting comes on when you
Z
98 Wipers
Runlock the vehicle Interior lighting in the rear

Rremove the SmartKey from the starter ! An interior lamp switched on manually
switch (Interior Lighting Delayed does not go out automatically.
Shut-off must be switched on
Leaving an interior lamp switched on for an
(Y page 135))
extended period of time with the engine
Ropen a door turned off could result in a discharged
Ropen the tailgate battery.
Controls in detail
The interior lighting goes out after a short

time.
i If a door remains open, the interior lamps
go out automatically after approximately
5 minutes when the SmartKey is removed
or in starter switch position 0.
X Deactivating: Press button ~.
Button ~ engages.
Manual control
X Switching rear reading lamps on/off:
! An interior lamp switched on manually Press reading lamp : where indicated by
does not go out automatically. the arrow.
Leaving an interior lamp switched on for an
extended period of time with the engine
turned off could result in a discharged Wipers
battery.
Notes
X Switching front interior lighting on/
off: Press switch c. ! Do not operate the wipers when the
X Switching rear interior lighting on/off: windshield/rear window is dry. Dust that
Press switch v. accumulates on a windshield/rear window
might scratch the glass and/or damage the
X Switching front reading lamps on/off: wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry
Press respective switch p. windshield/rear window. If it is necessary
to operate the wipers in dry weather
Emergency lighting conditions, always operate the wipers with
washer fluid.
The interior lighting comes on automatically
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
Switching off: Windshield wipers
X Press button ~. X Observe notes on page (Y page 98).
or
X Press hazard warning flasher switch
(Y page 96).
or
X Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.

Wipers 99
Switching on/off ! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on

the surface of the rain sensor or optical
effects may cause the windshield wipers to
wipe in an undesired fashion. This could
then damage the windshield wiper blades
or scratch the windshield. You should
therefore switch off the windshield wipers
when weather conditions are dry.
Controls in detail
X Turn the combination switch to position
Ä or Å.
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are controlled by the rain sensor
Combination switch
automatically.
1 $ Windshield wipers off
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the
2 Ä Slow intermittent wiping8
vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is
3 Å Fast intermittent wiping9 opened. This protects persons getting into or
4 ° Slow continuous wiping out of the vehicle from being sprayed.
5 ¯ Fast continuous wiping Intermittent wiping will be continued when all
B í Single wipe/ î Wiping with doors are closed and
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive
washer fluid
position D or reverse gear R
X Switch on the ignition. or
X Turn the combination switch to the desired Rthe wiper setting is changed using the
position, depending on the intensity of the combination switch
rain.
Single wipe
Intermittent wiping
X Press the combination switch briefly in
Only switch on intermittent wiping under wet direction of arrow B to the resistance
weather conditions or in the presence of point.
precipitation. The windshield wipers wipe one time
When you select intermittent wiping, the rain without washer fluid.
sensor is activated. The rain sensor sets a
suitable wiping interval depending on the
Wiping with washer fluid
wetness of the sensor surface automatically.
X Press the combination switch in direction
! Do not leave windshield wipers on an
of arrow B past the resistance point.
intermittent setting when the vehicle is
taken to an automatic car wash or during The windshield wipers operate with washer
windshield cleaning. Windshield wipers will fluid.
operate in the presence of water sprayed i To prevent smears on the windshield or
on the windshield, and windshield wipers noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with
may be damaged as a result. washer fluid every now and then even when
it is raining.
8 Rain sensor operation with low sensitivity.

9 Rain sensor operation with high sensitivity.
Z
100 Power windows
For information on filling up the washer Rear window wiper indicator B appears in
reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp the lower multifunction display when the rear
cleaning system” (Y page 217). window wiper is activated.
For information on cleaning the headlamps For information on filling up the washer
with washer fluid, see “Headlamp cleaning reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
system” (Y page 96). cleaning system” (Y page 217).
Controls in detail
Rear window wiper/washer Problems with wipers

X Observe notes on page (Y page 98). ! If anything blocks the wipers (leaves,
The rear window wiper engages automatically snow, etc.), switch them off immediately.
when the automatic transmission is shifted For safety reasons, do the following before
into reverse gear R with the windshield wipers attempting to remove any blockage:
switched on. RStop the vehicle in a safe location.
RRemove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
or
RTurn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and
open the driver’s door (with the driver’s
door open, starter switch is in position
0, same as with SmartKey removed from
starter switch).
REngage the parking brake.
Combination switch
: è Rear window wiper switch RRemove blockage.
2 ô Wiping rear window with washer RTurn the wipers on again.
fluid
If the windshield wipers fail to function at
3 I Intermittent wiping
all with the combination switch in position
4 0 Rear window wiper off Ä or Å,
5 ô Wiping rear window with washer Rset the combination switch to the next
fluid higher wiper speed
X Switch on the ignition. Rhave the windshield wipers checked at
X Turn rear window wiper switch : to the the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
desired position. Center
Power windows
Opening and closing
The door windows are opened and closed
electrically. The switches for all door windows
are located on the driver’s door control panel.
The switches for the respective door windows

Power windows 101
are located on the front passenger door and part of your body down between the window
on the rear doors. pane and the door frame and trap it there. If
i Operating the rear door windows from there is a risk of entrapment, release the
the rear is not possible when you activate switch and pull it to close the window.
the override switch (Y page 60).
i You can also open or close the door
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55. windows using the SmartKey, see
G Warning! “Summer opening feature” (Y page 102)
Controls in detail
and “Convenience closing feature”
When opening or closing the door windows,
(Y page 102).
make sure there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the opening/closing procedure. i After switching off the ignition or
The door windows are equipped with the removing the SmartKey from the starter
express operation and automatic reversal switch, you can operate the door windows
function. If in express operation mode a door until you open the driver’s or front
window encounters an obstruction that passenger door. If no door was opened you
blocks its path, the automatic reversal can operate the door windows for up to
function will stop the door window and open 5 minutes.
it slightly.
The door windows operate differently when
the switch is pulled and held. See the “Closing
when a door window is blocked” section in
this chapter for details.
The closing of the door windows can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch or,
if the switch was pulled past the resistance
point and released, by either pressing or
pulling the respective switch.
If a door window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing the door windows by pressing
and holding button & on the SmartKey or X Opening/closing: Press or pull and hold
by pressing and holding the lock button switch : to ? to the resistance point.
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO) on an outside The corresponding door window moves
door handle, the automatic reversal function downward or upward until you release the
will not operate. switch.
Activate the override switch when children X Express operation: Press or pull
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The switch : to ? past the resistance point
children may otherwise injure themselves, and release.
e.g. by becoming trapped in the door window The corresponding door window opens or
opening. closes completely.
X Stopping during express operation:
G Warning!
Press or pull the respective switch again.
Do not keep any part of your body up against
the window pane when opening a window. The
downward motion of the pane may pull that
Z
102 Power windows
Closing when a door window is blocked X Pull and hold switch :, ;, = or ?

(Y page 101) until the respective door
G Warning! window is closed.
Make sure that nobody can become trapped The door window opens again slightly.
and be seriously or even fatally injured when X Pull and hold the respective switch once
closing a door window with greater force or more immediately until the door window is
without automatic reversal function. closed completely.
X Hold the respective switch for
Controls in detail
If the upward movement of a door window is

blocked during the closing procedure, the approximately 1 second.
door window will stop and open slightly. The door window is synchronized.
X Immediately after the door window has
stopped because it was blocked, pull and
Summer opening feature
hold the respective switch upward until the
door window is fully closed. When the weather is warm, you can ventilate
The door window closes with greater force. the vehicle before driving off by
simultaneously
If the door window is blocked again and opens
slightly: Ropening the door windows
X Immediately after the door window was Ropening the tilt/sliding sunroof
blocked, pull and hold the respective Rswitching on the seat ventilation for the
switch upward until the door window is fully driver’s seat (Canada only)
closed.
The summer opening feature can only be
The door window closes without automatic
activated via the remote control of the
reversal function.
SmartKey. The SmartKey must be in close
G Warning! proximity to the driver’s outside door handle.
Pulling and holding the switch to close the X Aim the transmitter eye of the SmartKey at
door window immediately after it had been the driver’s outside door handle.
blocked two times will cause the door window X Press and hold button % on the
to close without any reversal function for as SmartKey until the door windows and the
long as you hold the switch. tilt/sliding sunroof have reached the
desired position.
The vehicle unlocks.
Synchronizing door windows X Release button % on the SmartKey to
The door windows must be synchronized after interrupt the opening procedure.
the battery has been disconnected or if the
door windows cannot be fully closed (express
operation). Convenience closing feature
Each door window must be synchronized When locking the vehicle, you can
separately. simultaneously close the door windows and
X Close all doors. the tilt/sliding sunroof.
G Warning!
When closing the door windows and the tilt/
sliding sunroof, make sure there is no danger

Driving and parking 103
of anyone being harmed by the closing Driving and parking

procedure.
Safety notes
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
RRelease button & to stop the closing G Warning!
procedure. To open, press and hold button Make sure absolutely no objects are
%. To continue the closing procedure obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
after making sure that there is no danger of Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
Controls in detail
anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure, press and hold button &. carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals
still have sufficient clearance.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
RRelease the lock button on the outside door the objects could get caught between the
handle to stop the closing procedure. pedals. You could then no longer brake or
RImmediately pull on the same outside door accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
handle and hold firmly. The door windows injury.
and the tilt/sliding sunroof will open for as
long as the door handle is held but the door G Warning!
not opened. With the engine not running, there is no power
assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
With SmartKey
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
The SmartKey must be in close proximity to effort is necessary to brake and steer the
the driver’s outside door handle. vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
X Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at the
G Warning!
driver’s outside door handle.
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
X Press and hold button & on the
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
SmartKey until the door windows and the Instructions included in your vehicle literature
tilt/sliding sunroof are closed completely. portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize
X Release button & on the SmartKey to potential danger.
interrupt the closing procedure.
With KEYLESS-GO Starting the engine

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be G Warning!
located outside the vehicle within Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door. health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
X Close all doors. monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
X Press and hold the lock button on an unconsciousness and possible death.
outside door handle (Y page 73) until the Do not run the engine in confined areas (such
door windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof as a garage) which are not properly ventilated.
are closed completely. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are
X Release the lock button on the outside door
entering the vehicle while driving, have the
handle to interrupt the closing procedure. cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
Z
104 Driving and parking
conditions, drive only with at least one X Diesel engine: Turn the SmartKey in the
window fully open at all times. starter switch to position 2 (Y page 79).
Preglow indicator lamp % in the
Automatic transmission instrument cluster comes on.
X As soon as preglow indicator lamp %
goes out, turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 3 and release it.
The engine starts automatically.
Controls in detail
i If the engine is at operating temperature,

preglow indicator lamp % may not stay
on and you can start the engine without
preglowing.
With KEYLESS-GO
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission G Warning!
: Button for selecting park position P
As long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle, the
j Park position vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave
k Reverse gear children unattended in the vehicle, as they
i Neutral position could otherwise accidentally start the engine.
h Drive position When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do
For more information on how to operate the not leave children unattended in the vehicle,
gear selector lever, see “Automatic or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A
transmission” (Y page 109). child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in result in an accident and/or serious personal
park position P. injury.
The transmission position indicator in the
multifunction display should be on P You can start your vehicle without the
(Y page 112). SmartKey in the starter switch using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
With SmartKey The SmartKey must be located in the vehicle.
X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.

X Gasoline engine: Turn the SmartKey in the
starter switch to position 3 (Y page 79) and
release it.
The engine starts automatically.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

: USA only
; Canada only

X Make sure the KEYLESS-GO start/stop X Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio
button is inserted in the starter switch signals from another source may be
(Y page 80). interfering with the KEYLESS-GO function.
X Repeat the starting procedure.
i To start the engine with the SmartKey
instead of the KEYLESS-GO function, If the engine does not start after several
remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button starting attempts:
from the starter switch. Proceed as X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
described in “With SmartKey”
Controls in detail
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
(Y page 104).
X Depress the brake pedal during the starting The engine does not start. You cannot
procedure. hear the starter.
X Do not depress the accelerator pedal. The battery may not be charged sufficiently.
X Get a jump start (Y page 336).
X Gasoline engine: Press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once. If the engine will not start despite a jump
The engine starts automatically. start:
X Diesel engine: Press the KEYLESS-GO X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
start/stop button once. Center or call Roadside Assistance.
The engine preglows and starts The starter has been exposed to excessive
automatically. temperatures.
i If the engine is at operating temperature, X Let the starter cool for about 2 minutes.
the time the engine needs to preglow is X Repeat the starting procedure.
reduced. If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts:
Starting difficulties
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
! Remember that extended starting Center or call Roadside Assistance.
attempts can drain the battery.
The engine does not start. You can hear
Driving off
the starter.
There could be a malfunction in the engine G Warning!
electronics or in the fuel supply system. On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
Carry out the following steps: order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
X If you are starting the engine with the
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
SmartKey: Turn the SmartKey in the starter
this type of loss of control.
switch to position 0 and repeat the starting
procedure.
! Do not run a cold engine at high engine
X If you are starting the engine with KEYLESS-
speeds. Running a cold engine at high
GO: Close any doors that may be open to
engine speeds may shorten the service life
allow for better detection of the SmartKey.
of the engine. This is not covered by the
or Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
ML 63 AMG: At engine temperatures below
button from the starter switch. 68‡ (20†), the engine’s maximum speed
Z
is restricted in order to protect it from ! Only shift the automatic transmission into
damage. Avoid driving your vehicle at full reverse gear R or park position P when the
speed when the engine is cold to prevent vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the
premature engine wear and/or diminished automatic transmission could be damaged.
comfort.
X Depress the brake pedal.
! If an acoustic warning sounds and the The gear selector lever can now be used.
message Release Parking Brake X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
Controls in detail
appears in the multifunction display when position D or reverse gear R.

driving off, you have forgotten to release
the parking brake. i Shifting the automatic transmission out of
Release the parking brake. park position P is only possible with the
brake pedal depressed.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may Without the brake pedal depressed, the
cause serious damage to the drivetrain gear selector lever can be moved up or
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz down. However, the parking pawl remains
Limited Warranty. engaged, not allowing shifting to occur.
! Simultaneously depressing the X Wait for the gear selection process to
accelerator pedal and applying the brakes complete before setting the vehicle in
reduces engine performance and causes motion.
premature brake and drivetrain wear which X If engaged, release the parking brake.
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz X Release the brake pedal.
Limited Warranty. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
i Once the vehicle is in motion, the After a cold start, the automatic transmission
automatic central locking function engages shifts at a higher engine speed. This allows
and the locking knobs in the doors move the catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or
down. the oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) to reach
The automatic central locking function can its operating temperature earlier.
be switched off (Y page 135). For more information on driving, see “Driving
instructions” (Y page 244).
Automatic transmission For information on off-road driving, see “Off-
road driving” (Y page 248).
G Warning!
It is dangerous to shift the automatic
transmission out of park position P or neutral Problems while driving
position N if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
The engine runs erratically and misfires
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate RGasoline engine: An ignition cable may be
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose damaged.
control of the vehicle and hit someone or RThe engine electronics may not be
something. Only shift into gear when the
operating properly.
engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal. RGasoline engine: Unburned gasoline may
have entered the catalytic converter and
damaged it.

X Give very little gas. Vehicle movement may result in serious

X Have the problem checked at an authorized personal injury or damage to the vehicle or
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. vehicle drivetrain. Therefore, always do the
following before turning off the engine and
The coolant temperature is above leaving the vehicle:
248‡ (120†) RKeep right foot on the brake pedal.
The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling REngage the parking brake.
Controls in detail
the engine. RShift the automatic transmission into park
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon position P.
as possible. RSlowly release the brake pedal.
X Turn off the engine immediately.
RWhen parked on an incline, always turn the
X Allow the engine and coolant to cool off.
front wheels towards the road curb.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant if
RTurn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
necessary (Y page 216).
position 0 and remove the SmartKey from
the starter switch, or press the KEYLESS-
In case of accident GO start/stop button.
If the vehicle is leaking fuel: RTake the SmartKey with you and lock the
X Do not start the engine under any vehicle when leaving.
circumstances.
X Exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the Parking brake
roadway.
G Warning!
X Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle
If the extent of the damage cannot be is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock
determined: up. You could lose control of the vehicle and
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz cause an accident. In addition, the vehicle’s
Center or call Roadside Assistance. brake lights do not light up when the parking
brake is engaged.
If no damage on major assemblies, fuel
system, and engine mount can be G Warning!
determined: When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
X Start the engine in the usual manner. SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
Parking access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could
release the parking brake and/or shift the
G Warning! automatic transmission out of park position
Do not park this vehicle in areas where P, either of which could result in an accident
combustible materials such as grass, hay or and/or serious personal injury.
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system. These materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Z
i Observe instructions if you want the

automatic transmission to remain in
neutral position N, see “Remaining in
neutral position N” (Y page 111).
With SmartKey
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
Controls in detail
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter

switch.
X Releasing: Pull on release handle :. When you turn off the engine using the
When the ignition is switched on or the SmartKey, and remove the SmartKey from
engine is running, the brake warning lamp the starter switch or open a front door, the
$ (USA only) or J (Canada only) in automatic transmission will shift into park
the instrument cluster goes out. position P automatically.
X Engaging: Step on parking brake
G Warning!
pedal ; firmly.
Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone
When the engine is running, the brake
only will shift the automatic transmission into
warning lamp $ (USA only) or J
neutral position N automatically.
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster
comes on. Always shift the automatic transmission into
park position P before turning off the engine.
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
Turning off the engine could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
G Warning!
Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle With KEYLESS-GO
has come to a complete stop. With the engine
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
not running, there is no power assistance for
the brake and steering systems. In this case, With the driver’s door closed, the starter
it is important to keep in mind that a switch is now in position 1. With the driver’s
considerably higher degree of effort is door opened, the starter switch is set to
necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. position 0, same as the SmartKey removed
from the starter switch (Y page 79).
i If the engine cannot be turned off as When you turn off the engine using the
described, see “Emergency engine KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open a
shutdown” (Y page 344). front door, the automatic transmission will
shift into park position P automatically.
X Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P. G Warning!
X Engage the parking brake. only will shift the automatic transmission into
i Always engage the parking brake in neutral position N automatically.
addition to shifting the automatic Always shift the automatic transmission into
transmission into park position P. park position P before turning off the engine.

Automatic transmission 109
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which ! Allow the engine to warm up under low
could result in an accident and/or serious load use. Do not place full load on the
personal injury. engine until the operating temperature has
been reached.
i In an emergency you can turn off the Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
engine while driving by pressing and extended period when driving off on
holding the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button slippery road surfaces.
for approximately 3 seconds. This may cause serious damage to the
Controls in detail
engine and the drivetrain which is not
If you have started the engine with the
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and cannot
Warranty.
turn it off as described above:
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop i During the brief warm-up, transmission
button from the starter switch. upshifting is delayed. This allows the
X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch. catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or
The engine turns off. The starter switch is oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) to heat up
in position 0 (Y page 79). more quickly to operating temperature.
Automatic transmission Gear selector lever
Introduction
For information on driving with an automatic
transmission, see “Driving and parking”
(Y page 103).
G Warning!
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
still have sufficient clearance. : Button for selecting park position P
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers j Park position
the objects could get caught between the k Reverse gear
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
i Neutral position
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
injury. h Drive position
G Warning!
G Warning!
It is dangerous to shift the automatic
transmission out of park position P or neutral
position N if the engine speed is higher than
Instructions included in your vehicle literature
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
potential danger.
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
Z
110 Automatic transmission
something. Only shift into gear when the Shifting into park position P
engine is idling normally and when your right X With the vehicle at a standstill, press
foot is firmly on the brake pedal. button : on the gear selector lever.
SmartKey: When you turn off the engine using
! The vehicle must be stopped when you
the SmartKey, and remove the SmartKey
shift the automatic transmission
from the starter switch or open a front door,
Rdirectly between drive position D and the automatic transmission will shift into park
reverse gear R
Controls in detail
position P automatically.
Rdirectly between reverse gear R and KEYLESS-GO: When you turn off the engine
drive position D using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and
open a front door, the automatic transmission
Rdirectly into park position P
will shift into park position P automatically.
Otherwise the automatic transmission
could be damaged. G Warning!
When trying to free a vehicle stuck in mud or
only will shift the automatic transmission into
snow, see “Rocking the vehicle”
neutral position N automatically.
(Y page 113).
Always shift the automatic transmission into
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P before turning off the engine.
park position P is only possible with the Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
brake pedal depressed. could result in an accident and/or serious
Without the brake pedal depressed, the personal injury.
gear selector lever can be moved up or
down, but the parking pawl remains i Moving the gear selector lever up or down
engaged, not allowing shifting to occur. shifts the automatic transmission out of
park position P.
i Depending on vehicle production date:
The automatic transmission will shift into
park position P automatically when
Shifting into neutral position N
Ryou X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
open the driver’s door while driving
at low speed, and brake pedal.
X Move the gear selector lever up or down to
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive
the resistance point to select neutral
position D or reverse gear R
position N.
After the vehicle has engaged park position When you turn off the engine, the automatic
P automatically, you can engage drive transmission will shift into neutral position
position D or reverse gear R again to N automatically.
override this locking feature purposely.
SmartKey: Removing the SmartKey from the
i The gear selector lever always returns to starter switch or opening a front door after
its original position. turning off the engine will shift the automatic
transmission into park position P
The current transmission position P, R, N,
automatically.
or D appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 112). KEYLESS-GO: Opening a front door after
turning off the engine will shift the automatic

transmission into park position P X Shift the automatic transmission into

automatically. neutral position N.
X Release the brake pedal.
Remaining in neutral position N
X If engaged, release the parking brake.
If you want the automatic transmission to
X Switch off the ignition and leave the
remain in neutral position N, e.g. when taking
the vehicle through an automatic conveyor- SmartKey in the starter switch.
type car wash, observe the following
Controls in detail
instructions. Shifting into reverse gear R
G Warning! X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
When leaving the SmartKey in the starter brake pedal.
switch, do not leave children unattended in X Move the gear selector lever up past the
the vehicle. It is possible for children to switch resistance point.
on the ignition which could result in
unsupervised use of vehicle equipment. Shifting into drive position D
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment could
result in an accident and/or serious personal X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
injury. brake pedal.
X Move the gear selector lever down past the
With SmartKey: resistance point.
X Make sure the ignition is switched on.
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal and keep it pressed. Shifting procedure
X Shift the automatic transmission into The automatic transmission selects individual
neutral position N. gears automatically, depending on
Rthe selected gear range (Y page 113)
X If engaged, release the parking brake. Rthe selected program mode:
X Switch off the ignition and leave the C/S (ML 63 AMG only) (Y page 114)
SmartKey in the starter switch. or
With KEYLESS-GO: M (ML 63 AMG only) (Y page 115)
X Make sure the ignition is switched on. Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the Rthe vehicle speed
brake pedal and keep it pressed. With drive position D selected, you can
X Shift the automatic transmission into park influence transmission shifting by
position P.
Rlimiting the gear range
Rextending the gear range
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button from the starter switch. Rchanging the gears manually (ML 63 AMG
X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch. only)
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
pressed.
Z
Transmission positions Effect

The current transmission position appears in B Park position
the multifunction display.
Shift the automatic transmission
into park position P only when the
vehicle is stopped. The park position
is not intended to serve as a brake
when the vehicle is parked. Rather,
Controls in detail
the driver should always engage the

parking brake in addition to shifting
the automatic transmission into
: Transmission position indicator park position P to secure the
If the current transmission position does not vehicle.
appear in the multifunction display due to a If the vehicle’s electrical system is
malfunction, for example, make sure that the malfunctioning, the automatic
automatic transmission is in the desired transmission could remain locked in
position. park position P.
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive X Have the vehicle’s electrical
position D. system checked at an authorized
X Select automatic program mode C Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
(ML 63 AMG only). possible.
X Do not limit the gear range.
C Reverse gear
X Drive off carefully.
Shift the automatic transmission
into reverse gear R only when the
vehicle is stopped.

Effect Rocking the vehicle
A Neutral position Rocking the vehicle by shifting the automatic

transmission directly between drive position
No power is transmitted from the D and reverse gear R can help free a vehicle
engine to the drive axle. When the stuck in mud or snow. The engine control
brakes are released, the vehicle can system of this vehicle electronically limits
be moved freely (pushed or towed). directly shifting the automatic transmission
To avoid damage to the between drive position D and reverse gear R
Controls in detail
transmission, never shift the to very low speeds, i.e. approximately 5 mph
automatic transmission into neutral (9 km/h). To shift the automatic transmission
position N while driving. directly between drive position D and reverse
Exception: If the ESP® is switched gear R, move the gear selector lever up or
off or malfunctioning, shift the down past the resistance point.
automatic transmission into neutral
position N if the vehicle is in danger Working on the vehicle
of skidding.
G Warning!
! Coasting the vehicle, or driving
When working on the vehicle, engage the
for any other reason with the parking brake and shift the automatic
automatic transmission in neutral transmission into park position P. Otherwise
position N can result in the vehicle could roll away which could result
transmission damage that is not in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Towing a trailer
7 Drive position
X When you tow a trailer, shift into a lower
The automatic transmission shifts
gear range manually if the automatic
automatically. All forward gears are
transmission hunts between gears on
available.
inclines.
A lower gear range and reduction of speed
reduces the potential to overload or to
Driving tips
overheat the engine.
Kickdown For more information on trailer towing, see
“Trailer towing” (Y page 254).
Use the kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
X U.S. vehicles except AMG vehicles: Gear ranges
Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
With the automatic transmission in drive
Depending on the engine speed the
position D, you can limit or extend the gear
automatic transmission shifts into a lower
gear. range, see “One-touch gearshifting”
(Y page 115).
X Canada vehicles and AMG vehicles:
Depress the accelerator pedal past the ML 63 AMG: You only can limit or extend the
point of resistance. gear range when driving in automatic
Depending on the engine speed the program mode C or S.
automatic transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
Z
The current gear range appears in the C Comfort For standard driving
multifunction display. (Y page 114)
S Sport For sporty driving
(Y page 114)
M Manual For manual gearshifting
(Y page 115)
Controls in detail
: Gear range indicator The current program mode appears in the

multifunction display.
Effect
= With this selection you can use the
braking effect of the engine.
5 Allows the use of the engine’s
braking effect when driving
Ron steep downgrades
: Program mode indicator
Rin mountainous regions
You should only change the program mode
Runder extreme operating when the automatic transmission is in park
conditions position P.
4 For maximum use of the engine’s The last selected automatic program mode
braking effect on very steep or (C or S) is active when the engine is restarted.
lengthy downgrades. X Press the program mode selector switch
repeatedly until the letter of the desired
program mode appears in the multifunction
Automatic shift program display.
The automatic shift program is available on Selecting program mode C means:
ML 63 AMG only. RThe vehicle starts out more gentle, both
forward and reverse, except when driving
off with full throttle.
RTraction and driving stability are improved
on icy roads.
RUpshifts occur earlier even when you give
more gas. The engine then operates at
lower revolutions and the wheels are less
likely to spin.
Selecting program mode S means that
upshifts occur later.
Program mode selector switch

One-touch gearshifting i To avoid overrevving the engine when

downshifting, the automatic transmission
With the automatic transmission in drive will not shift into a lower gear if the engine’s
position D, you can limit or extend the gear maximum speed would be exceeded.
range using the steering wheel gearshift
control.
Extending gear range
ML 63 AMG: You only can limit or extend the
gear range when driving in automatic X Briefly pull right gearshift control ;.
Controls in detail
program mode C or S. For information on The automatic transmission will shift into
using the steering wheel gearshift control in the next higher gear as permitted by the
manual program mode M, see “Manual shift shift program. This action simultaneously
program” (Y page 115). extends the gear range of the automatic
transmission.
i If you press on the accelerator pedal
when the engine has reached the
revolution limit of the current gear range,
the automatic transmission will upshift
beyond any gear range limit selected.
Canceling gear range limit

X Pull and hold right gearshift control ; until
the gear range indicator disappears from
Steering wheel gearshift control (example the multifunction display.
illustration) The automatic transmission will shift from
the current gear range directly into drive
i You cannot shift with the steering wheel
position D.
gearshift control when the automatic
transmission is in park position P, neutral
position N, or reverse gear R. Shifting into optimal gear range
X Pull and hold left gearshift control :.
Limiting gear range The automatic transmission will select the
gear range suited for optimal acceleration
G Warning!
and deceleration automatically. This will
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in involve shifting down one or more gears.
order to obtain braking action. This could
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
Manual shift program
The manual shift program is available on
X Briefly pull left gearshift control :. ML 63 AMG only.
The automatic transmission will shift into Manual program mode M differs with regard
the next lower gear as permitted by the to spontaneity, response time, and shifting
shift program. This action simultaneously smoothness from automatic program mode
limits the gear range of the automatic S.
transmission. In manual program mode M, system-
controlled automatic gearshifting is switched
off. You need to change the gears by manually
Z
upshifting or downshifting using the steering Upshifting

wheel gearshift control.
! In manual program mode M, the
automatic transmission will not upshift,
even if the engine has reached its
overrevving range. Shift up into the next
gear before the engine has reached its
overrevving range. Make absolutely certain
that the engine speed does not reach the
Controls in detail
red marking on the tachometer. Otherwise

the engine could be damaged which is not
Warranty.
Program mode selector switch X Briefly pull right gearshift control ;
C Comfort For standard driving (Y page 115).
The automatic transmission shifts into the
S Sport For sporty driving next higher gear.
M Manual For manual gearshifting Upshift indicator
The current program mode appears in the

multifunction display (Y page 114).
For information on automatic program mode
(C or S), see “Automatic shift program”
(Y page 114) and “One-touch gearshifting”
(Y page 115).
In manual program mode M, upshift
Activating manual shift program indicator ; in the multifunction display
X Press the program mode selector switch advises you to upshift before the engine
repeatedly until M appears in the reaches the overspeed range. Thus you can
multifunction display. drive at the maximum engine speed for each
The automatic transmission switches to gear without overrevving the engine.
manual program mode M. Automatic X Shift the automatic transmission from
shifting is switched off. The gear range is current gear : into the next higher gear.
not limited. The fuel supply will otherwise be
You can change the gears manually with drive interrupted to prevent the engine from
position D selected. You can upshift or overrevving.
downshift through the gears in succession.
i Manual program mode M will not be Downshifting
stored. When the engine is turned off with G Warning!
manual program mode M selected, the On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
automatic transmission will go to order to obtain braking action. This could
automatic program mode (C or S) when the result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
engine is restarted. control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent

Instrument cluster 117
X Briefly pull left gearshift control : X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
(Y page 115). position D (for second gear) or reverse gear
The automatic transmission shifts into the R.
next lower gear. X Have the automatic transmission checked
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
i For maximum acceleration, pull and hold
soon as possible.
the left gearshift control. Depending on the
engine speed the automatic transmission
Controls in detail
selects the optimal gear for maximum
acceleration. Transfer case
i When you brake or stop, the automatic This section applies to vehicles equipped with
transmission shifts down into a gear from all-wheel drive (4MATIC) only. Both the front
which you can easily accelerate or take off. and rear axles are powered at all times when
the vehicle is being operated.
Kickdown ! Only conduct operational or performance
Using the kickdown while driving in manual tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
program mode M is not possible. tests are necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
otherwise seriously damage the brake
Deactivating manual shift program
system or the transfer case which is not
X Press the program mode selector switch covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
repeatedly until C or S appears in the Warranty.
or ! Because the ESP® operates
X
automatically, the engine and ignition must
Restart the engine.
be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
The automatic transmission will go to
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop
automatic program mode (C or S).
button in position 0 or 1) when the parking
Manual program mode M is not stored. brake is being tested on a brake test
dynamometer. Such testing should be no
longer than 10 seconds.
Emergency operation (limp-home
mode) Active braking action through the ESP®
If vehicle acceleration becomes less system which is not covered by the
responsive or sluggish or the automatic Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
transmission no longer shifts, the automatic
transmission is most likely operating in limp-
home (emergency operation) mode. In this Instrument cluster
mode only second gear and reverse gear R
can be selected. Introduction
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location. For a full view illustration of the instrument
X Shift the automatic transmission into park cluster, see “Instrument cluster”
position P. (Y page 28).
X Turn off the engine.
X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting.
X Restart the engine.
Z
118 Instrument cluster
G Warning! Activating the instrument cluster

No messages will be displayed if either the The instrument cluster is activated when you
instrument cluster or the multifunction
Ropen the driver’s door
display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see Rswitch on the ignition
information about your driving conditions, Rpress button :, ; or =
such as
i Opening the driver’s door or pressing
Controls in detail
Rspeed
button :, ; or = without switching on
Routside temperature
the ignition activates the instrument
Rwarning/indicator lamps cluster illumination only for 30 seconds.
Rmalfunction/warning messages
Rfailure of any systems Adjusting the instrument cluster
Driving characteristics may be impaired. illumination
If you must continue to drive, do so with added X To brighten illumination: Press and hold
caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes- button = until the desired level of
Benz Center as soon as possible. illumination is reached.
X To dim illumination: Press and hold
G Warning!
button : until the desired level of
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating illumination is reached.
Instructions included in your vehicle literature i The instrument cluster illumination is
portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize dimmed or brightened automatically to suit
potential danger. ambient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will also
be adjusted automatically when you switch
on the vehicle’s exterior lamps.
i With the exterior lighting switched on, the

brightness of the switches in the center
console will also be adjusted when using
button : or =.
Resetting trip odometer

: To dim instrument cluster illumination X Make sure you are viewing the standard
; Reset button display (Y page 122) in the multifunction
= To brighten instrument cluster display.
illumination X Press and hold the reset button in the
For information on changing the instrument instrument cluster (Y page 117) until the
cluster settings, e.g. the language, see trip odometer is reset.
(Y page 130).

Control system 119
Tachometer G Warning!
The red marking on the tachometer HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
(Y page 29) denotes excessive engine speed. the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize
as it may result in serious engine damage potential danger.
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty. The control system relays information to the
Controls in detail
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is
interrupted if the engine is operated within
the red marking.
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display and
Control system the settings in the control system are
controlled by using the buttons on the
Introduction multifunction steering wheel.
The control system is activated as soon as the
starter switch is in position 1 (Y page 79).
The control system enables you to call up
information about your vehicle and to change
vehicle settings.
For example, you can use the control system
to find out when your vehicle is next due for
maintenance service, to set the language for
messages in the instrument cluster display,
and much more.
G Warning!
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others,
selecting features through the multifunction : Multifunction display
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions permit ; Press button
it to be done safely. ~ to end a call
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
to reject an incoming call
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
6 to answer a call
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second. to dial10
to redial10
10 Function only available in telephone menu.
Z
120 Control system
Press button wheel will alter what appears in the

W to select submenus in the
The information available in the multifunction
X Settings menu
display is arranged in menus and
to set values accompanying functions and submenus.
to operate the RACETIMER11 The individual functions are then found within
to set the volume the relevant menu (radio or CD operations
under Audio/DVD menu, for example).
Controls in detail
Press button These functions serve to call up relevant

? to turn Voice Control System information or to customize the settings for
on12, see separate operating your vehicle.
instructions It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being
= Press button arranged in a circular pattern.
V to select next or previous menu X Press button V or U repeatedly to
U pass through each menu one after the
other.
Press button briefly
X Press button * or & repeatedly to
& to move within a menu pass through each function display, one
* Within Audio/DVD menu to after the other, in the current menu.
select previous or next track, In the Settings menu, instead of functions,
scene or stored station you will find a number of submenus for calling
Within Telephone menu to up and changing settings. For instructions on
switch to the phone book and using these submenus, see “Settings menu”
select a name or number (Y page 129).
The number of menus available in the system
Press and hold button
depends on which optional equipment is
& Within Audio/DVD menu to installed in your vehicle.
* select previous or next track
with quick search or to select
previous or next station in
station list or wave band
Within Telephone menu to
start the quick search in the
phone book
Press button
A to turn Voice Control System
off12, see separate operating
instructions
Depending on the selected menu, pressing

the buttons on the multifunction steering
11 AMG vehicles only.

12 Vehicles without Voice Control System: Button without function.

Control system 121
Multifunction display = Transmission position/gear range

indicator
? Automatic transmission program mode
indicator13
A Outside temperature or digital
speedometer
For more information on menus displayed in
Controls in detail
the multifunction display, see “Menus and
submenus” (Y page 121).
: Trip odometer
; Main odometer
Menus and submenus
i The headings used in the menus table are Function

designed to facilitate navigation within the
system and are not necessarily identical to : Standard display menu
those shown in the multifunction display. (Y page 122)
The first function displayed in each menu ; AMG14 menu (Y page 123)
will automatically show you which part of
the system you are in. = Off-road Mode14 menu
(Y page 125)
Z
122 Control system
Function The following functions are available:

RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning
? Audio/DVD menu (Y page 126) system (Y page 223) (Canada only)
A Navigation menu (Y page 127) RChecking tire inflation pressure with the
Advanced TPMS (Y page 223) (USA only)
B AIRMATIC/Compass menu
(Y page 127) RChecking coolant temperature
(Y page 122)
Controls in detail
C Distronic menu (Y page 128)

RCalling up digital speedometer or outside
D Vehicle status message temperature (Y page 123)
memory15 menu (Y page 128) RCalling up maintenance service indicator
E Settings menu (Y page 129) display (Y page 259)
F Vehicle configuration menu Checking coolant temperature

(Y page 137)
G Warning!
G Trip computer menu (Y page 138)
Driving when your engine is overheated can
H Telephone menu (Y page 139) cause some fluids which may have leaked into
the engine compartment to catch fire. You
could be seriously burned.
Standard display menu Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns which can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
Standard display
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
In the standard display, trip odometer : and
the coolant temperature appears in the
main odometer ; appear in the
X If you see another display, press button
V or U repeatedly until the standard
display appears.
X Press button & or * to select the
functions in the Standard display menu.
During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-

and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may
rise close to 248‡ (120†).
! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a
warning in the multifunction display.
15 The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.

Control system 123
The engine should not be operated with a AMG menu

coolant temperature above 248‡
(120†). Doing so may cause serious This function is only available in AMG
engine damage which is not covered by the vehicles.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the AMG menu appears in the
Calling up digital speedometer or multifunction display.
outside temperature
Controls in detail
You can select whether the digital
speedometer or the outside temperature
appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 131).
G Warning!
The outside temperature indicator is not The main screen of the AMG menu shows you
designed to serve as an ice-warning device the gear currently engaged : as well as the
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. engine oil temperature ;.
Indicated temperatures just above the
The engine oil temperature flashes if the
freezing point do not guarantee that the road
engine oil temperature has not yet reached
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
80†. During this time, avoid driving at full
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
engine speed.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until If the engine reaches the overspeed range in
the digital speedometer or the outside the manual shift program, the menu will be
temperature appears in the multifunction shown in red. In addition, you will see UP next
display. to gear indicator : as a reminder to upshift.
Use buttons & or * to select the
following functions in the AMG menu:
RVehicle supply voltage (Y page 123)
RRACETIMER (Y page 124)
ROverall analysis (Y page 125)
RLap analysis (Y page 125)
Digital speedometer
Vehicle supply voltage
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the AMG menu appears in the
X Press button & repeatedly until the
vehicle supply voltage appears in the
Outside temperature
Z
124 Control system
X Starting: Press button W.

X Displaying intermediate time: Press
button X while the timer is running.
The intermediate time is shown for
5 seconds.
X Stopping: Press button W.
: Vehicle supply voltage indicator When you stop the vehicle and turn the
Controls in detail
SmartKey to position 1 (Y page 79) or, in

RACETIMER vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, turn off the
engine and do not open the driver’s door, the
G Warning! RACETIMER stops timing. Timing is resumed
The RACETIMER feature is only for use on when you press button W after switching
roads and in conditions where high speed the ignition back on or restarting the engine.
driving is permitted. Racing on public roads is
prohibited under all circumstances. The driver
Saving lap time and starting a new lap
is and must always remain responsible for You can save up to nine laps.
following posted speed limits. X Press button X while the timer is
running.
The RACETIMER allows you to time and save
The intermediate time will be shown for
driving stretches.
5 seconds.
X Press button X within 5 seconds.
the AMG menu appears in the The intermediate time shown will be saved
multifunction display. as a lap time.
X Press button & repeatedly until the
The RACETIMER begins timing the new lap.
RACETIMER appears in the multifunction The new lap begins to be timed as soon as
display. the intermediate time is called up.
: RACETIMER : RACETIMER
; Lap number ; Best lap time
You can start the RACETIMER when the = Lap number
engine is running or the starter switch is in
position 2 (Y page 79). Resetting current lap
While the RACETIMER is being displayed, you X Press button W while the timer is
cannot adjust the audio volume using buttons running.
W or X. The timer stops.
X Press button X.
The lap time is reset to “0”.

Control system 125
Deleting all laps X Press button V or U repeatedly until

It is not possible to delete a single saved lap. the AMG menu appears in the
When you turn off the engine, the RACETIMER multifunction display.
will be reset to “0” after 30 seconds. All laps X Press button & repeatedly until the lap
are deleted. analysis appears in the multifunction
X Press button W while the timer is display.
running. Each lap is shown in its own submenu. The
The timer stops. fastest lap is indicated by flashing
Controls in detail
X Press the reset button in the instrument symbol :.
cluster twice (Y page 118).
X Press button W.
The timer starts. The saved laps are
deleted.
Overall analysis
This function is only available if you have : Lap number
saved at least one lap and have stopped the ; Lap time
RACETIMER. = Maximum speed during lap
X Press button V or U repeatedly until ? Lap length
the AMG menu appears in the A Average speed during lap
X Press button & repeatedly until the X Press button & or * to see other lap
overall analysis appears in the analyses.
Off-road Mode menu

This function is only available in AMG
vehicles.
Use this function to switch the off-road
driving program (Y page 155) On or Off.
: Overall analysis of RACETIMER
; Overall driving time
= Maximum speed
? Overall distance driven
A Average speed
Lap analysis
This function is only available if you have
saved at least two laps and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
Z
126 Control system
X Press button V or U repeatedly until For more information on HD Radio with

the Off-road Mode menu appears in the SIRIUS Satellite Radio, refer to separate
multifunction display. COMAND system operating instructions.
Additional optional satellite radio equipment
and a subscription to a satellite radio service
provider are required for satellite radio
operation. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for details and availability for
Controls in detail
your vehicle.
X Switch on the COMAND system and select
X Press button W or X to switch the radio. Refer to separate COMAND system
off-road driving program On or Off. operating instructions.
The symbol Ç appears in the lower X Press button V or U repeatedly until
multifunction display. the currently tuned station appears in the
The setting is stored when you turn off the

engine. Example illustration
: Wave band setting and stored memory
position
Audio/DVD menu ; Station frequency
The functions in the Audio/DVD menu X Selecting next or previous stored

operate the audio or video equipment which station: Press button * or & briefly
you have currently switched on. to select a stored station.
The following functions are available: X Selecting next or previous station in the
RSelecting radio station (Y page 126) station list: Press and hold button * or
ROperating
& to select a station.
audio devices/audio media
(Y page 127) X Selecting next or previous station in
wave band (Only if no station list is
ROperating video DVD (Y page 127) available): Press and hold button * or
If no audio equipment is currently switched & to select a station.
on, the message AUDIO Off appears in the You can only store new stations using the
multifunction display. corresponding feature on the radio. Refer to
separate COMAND system operating
Selecting radio station instructions.
The HD Radio with SIRIUS Satellite Radio is You can also operate the radio in the usual
treated as a radio application. manner.

Control system 127
Operating audio devices/audio media X Press button * or & to select a

X
scene.
Switch on the COMAND system and select
the audio device or audio media. Refer to
separate COMAND system operating
instructions. Navigation menu
X Press button V or U repeatedly until The Navigation menu contains the functions
the Audio/DVD menu appears in the needed to operate your navigation system.
Controls in detail
multifunction display. X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Navigation menu appears in the
The message shown in the multifunction
display depends on the status of the
navigation system:
RWith the COMAND system switched off,
the message NAVI Off appears in the
Example illustration multifunction display.
: Disc number RWith the COMAND system switched on
; Current track but route guidance not activated, the
direction of travel and, if applicable, the
X Selecting next or previous track: Press
name of the street currently traveled on
button * or & briefly.
appear in the multifunction display.
X Selecting a track from the track list
RWith the COMAND system switched on
(quick search): Press and hold button
and route guidance activated, the
* or &.
direction of travel and maneuver
The current track does not appear during instructions appear in the multifunction
Audio AUX mode operation. display.
Operating video DVD Please refer to separate COMAND system

operating instructions for instructions on how
X Switch on the COMAND system and select to activate the route guidance system.
DVD-Video. Refer to separate COMAND
system operating instructions.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until AIRMATIC/Compass menu
the Audio/DVD menu appears in the The AIRMATIC/Compass menu displays the
multifunction display. messages for air suspension and the
direction into which you are currently driving.
one of the following messages appears in
: Disc number
; Current scene
Z
128 Control system
Vehicles with steel suspension: G Warning!

Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are
intentionally not very detailed. The
malfunction and warning messages are
simply a reminder with respect to the
operation of certain systems. They do not
replace the owner’s and/or driver’s
Controls in detail
Vehicles with air suspension or ML 63 AMG: responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s

operating safety. Have all required
maintenance and safety checks performed on
the vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to address the
malfunction and warning messages.
G Warning!
For information on air suspension, see “Air
suspension program” (Y page 155).
For information on the compass, see portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize
“Compass” (Y page 207). potential danger.

Distronic menu the Vehicle status message memory
Use the Distronic menu to display the menu appears in the multifunction display.
current settings for your Distronic system. If conditions have occurred causing status
The information shown in the multifunction messages to be recorded, the number of
display depends on whether the Distronic messages appears in the multifunction
system is activated or deactivated. display.
Please refer to the “Driving systems” section
of this manual (Y page 144) for instructions
on how to activate Distronic.
Vehicle status message memory

menu
Use the Vehicle status message memory X Press button & or *.
menu to scan malfunction and warning The stored messages will now be displayed
messages that may be stored in the memory. in the order in which they have occurred.
Such messages appear in the multifunction For malfunction and warning messages,
display and are based on conditions or see “Vehicle status messages in the
system status the vehicle’s system has multifunction display” (Y page 272).
recorded.
The Vehicle status message memory menu i After you have scrolled through all
only appears if messages have been stored. recorded status messages, the first
recorded message appears again.

Control system 129
Should the vehicle’s system record any The following message appears in the
conditions while driving, the number of multifunction display:
messages will reappear in the multifunction Settings
display when the SmartKey in the starter Cannot be
switch is turned to position 0 or removed completely reset
from the starter switch. With KEYLESS-GO, to factory settings
the number of messages will reappear when when engine is running.
you turn off the engine by pressing the X Press button V or U repeatedly until
Controls in detail
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open the the Settings menu appears in the
driver’s door. multifunction display.
Except for high-priority messages, the vehicle
status message memory will be cleared when
you switch off the ignition.
Settings menu
Introduction
In the Settings menu there are two X Press the reset button in the instrument
functions: The function To reset, press cluster (Y page 117) for approximately
reset button for 3 seconds, with which 3 seconds.
you can reset all the settings to the original The request to press the reset button once
factory settings and a collection of submenus more to confirm appears in the
with which you can make individual settings multifunction display.
for your vehicle.
The following settings and submenus are
available in the Settings menu:
RResetting to factory settings
(Y page 129)
RSubmenus in the Settings menu
(Y page 130)
RInstrument X Press the reset button once more.
cluster submenu
(Y page 130) The settings you have changed will not be
reset unless you confirm the action by
RTime/Date submenu (Y page 132)
pressing the reset button a second time. After
RLighting submenu (Y page 133) approximately 5 seconds, the Settings
RVehicle submenu (Y page 135) menu reappears in the multifunction display.
RComfort submenu (Y page 135)
Resetting to factory settings

You can reset the settings of all submenus to
the factory settings.
For safety reasons, the function Lamp
Circuit Headlamp in the Lighting
submenu cannot be reset while driving.
Z
130 Control system
Submenus in the Settings menu RSelecting language (Y page 131)

X Press button V or U repeatedly until RSelecting display (digital speedometer or
the Settings menu appears in the outside temperature) for status indicator
multifunction display. (Y page 131)
X Press button &.
Time/Date submenu
The collection of the submenus appears in RSetting the time (Y page 132)
the multifunction display. There are more
Controls in detail
submenus than can be displayed RSetting the date (Y page 132)

simultaneously.
Lighting submenu
RSwitching daytime running lamp mode on
or off (USA only) (Y page 133)
RSwitching locator lighting on or off
(Y page 133)
RSwitching night security illumination
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on or
X Press button X. off (Y page 134)
The selection marker moves to the next RSwitching interior lighting delayed shut-off
submenu. on or off (Y page 135)
X Scroll down with button X, scroll up
Vehicle submenu
with button W.
RSwitching automatic central locking on or
X With the selection marker on the desired
off (Y page 135)
submenu, use button & to access the
individual functions within that submenu. Comfort submenu
X Once within the submenu, use button RActivating easy-entry/exit feature
& to move to the next function or button (Y page 136)
* to move to the previous function RActivating/deactivating seat belt
within that submenu.
adjustment feature (Y page 136)
X Use button W or X to change the
RSwitching fold-in function for exterior rear
settings of the respective function.
view mirrors on or off (Y page 137)
The following lists show what settings can be
changed within the various menus. Detailed
instructions on making individual settings can Instrument cluster submenu
be found on the following pages. Access the Instrument Cluster submenu
Instrument cluster submenu via the Settings menu. Use the
Instrument Cluster submenu to change
RSelecting speedometer/odometer display
the instrument cluster display settings.
mode (Y page 131) (Canada only)
The following functions are available:
RSelecting digital speedometer display
RSelecting speedometer/odometer display
mode (Y page 131)
mode (Y page 131) (Canada only)
RSelecting digital speedometer display
mode (Y page 131)

Control system 131
RSelecting language (Y page 131) Speedometer appears in the multifunction

RSelecting display (digital speedometer or display.
outside temperature) for status indicator The selection marker is on the current
(Y page 131) setting.
Selecting speedometer/odometer
display mode (Canada only)
Controls in detail
the Settings menu appears in the
X Press button &.
X Move the selection marker with button X Press button W or X to set digital
W or X to the Instrument speedometer unit to Km or Miles.
Cluster submenu.
Selecting language
the message Display Unit X Press button V or U repeatedly until
Speedometer/Odometer appears in the the Settings menu appears in the

multifunction display. multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current X Press button &.
setting. X Move the selection marker with button
W or X to the Instrument
Cluster submenu.
the message Language appears in the
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
X Press button W or X to set
speedometer/odometer unit to Km or
Miles.
Selecting digital speedometer display

mode
the Settings menu appears in the X Press button W or X to select the
multifunction display. language to be used for the multifunction
X Press button &. display messages.
X Move the selection marker with button
W or X to the Instrument Selecting display (digital speedometer or
Cluster submenu. outside temperature) for status indicator
X Press button & or * repeatedly until X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the message Display Unit Digital the Settings menu appears in the
X Press button &.
Z
132 Control system
X Move the selection marker with button X Press button V or U repeatedly until
W or X to the Instrument the Settings menu appears in the
Cluster submenu. multifunction display.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until X Press button &.
the message Status Line Display X Move the selection marker with button
appears in the multifunction display. W or X to the Time/Date submenu.
The selection marker is on the current X Press button & or * repeatedly until
setting.
Controls in detail
the message Clock Set Hour or Clock

Set Minute(s) appears in the
setting.
X Press button W or X to select the

desired setting.
The selected display is then shown
continuously in the status indicator (lower
display). Example illustration for setting the hour
The other display now appears in the X Press button W or X to set the hours
Standard display menu (Y page 122). or minute(s).
Time/Date submenu Setting the date

Access the Time/Date submenu via the This function is not available if your vehicle is
Settings menu. Use the Time/Date equipped with the COMAND system and
submenu to change the time and date display navigation module.
settings. X Press button V or U repeatedly until
The following functions are available: the Settings menu appears in the
RSetting the time (Y page 132)
X Press button &.
RSetting the date (Y page 132) X Move the selection marker with button
If your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND W or X to the Time/Date submenu.
system and navigation module, see separate X Press button & or * repeatedly until
COMAND system operating instructions for
the message Date Set Month, Date Set
information on how to set the time and date.
Day, or Date Set Year appears in the
Setting the time multifunction display.
This function is not available if your vehicle is The selection marker is on the current
equipped with the COMAND system and setting.
navigation module.

Control system 133
Example illustration for setting the month

X Press button W or X to switch the
Controls in detail
X Press button W or X to set the daytime running lamp mode On or Off.
month, day, or year. With daytime running lamp mode switched on
and the exterior lamp switch in
Lighting submenu position $ or Ã, the low-beam
headlamps are switched on when the engine
Access the Lighting submenu via the is running.
Settings menu. Use the Lighting submenu
In low ambient light conditions the following
to change the lamp and lighting settings on
lamps will come on additionally:
your vehicle.
RParking lamps
RSwitching RTail lamps
daytime running lamp mode on
or off (USA only) (Y page 133) RLicense plate lamps
RSwitching locator lighting on or off RSide marker lamps
(Y page 133)
For more information on the daytime running
RSwitching night security illumination on or lamp mode, see (Y page 94).
off (Y page 134) For safety reasons, changing the setting for
RSwitching interior lighting delayed shut-off the daytime running lamp mode is not
on or off (Y page 135) possible while the vehicle is in motion.
The following message appears in the
Switching daytime running lamp mode on multifunction display:
or off (USA only) Settings can only be made with
X Press button V or U repeatedly until engine off.
the Settings menu appears in the For safety reasons, resetting all the functions
multifunction display. of all submenus to the factory settings while
X Press button &. driving (Y page 129) will not deactivate the
X Move the selection marker with button daytime running lamp mode.
W or X to the Lighting submenu. Switching locator lighting on or off
X Press button & or * repeatedly until With the locator lighting feature activated, the
the message Daytime Running Lamps exterior lamp switch in position Ã and the
appears in the multifunction display. interior lighting in automatic mode, the
The selection marker is on the current following lamps will come on during darkness
setting. when the vehicle is unlocked using button
% on the SmartKey:
RParking lamps
RTail lamps
Z
134 Control system
RLicense plate lamps With the headlamps delayed shut-off feature

RSide marker lamps activated and the exterior lamp switch in
position Ã before the engine is turned off,
RFront fog lamps the following lamps will come on when the
The locator lighting goes out when the driver’s engine is turned off:
door is opened. RParking lamps
If you do not open the driver’s door after RTail lamps
unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey, the
Controls in detail
lamps will go out automatically after RLicense plate lamps

approximately 40 seconds. RSide marker lamps
X Press button V or U repeatedly until RFront fog lamps
multifunction display. If, after turning off the engine, you do not
open a door or do not close an opened door,
X Press button &.
the lamps will automatically go out after
X Move the selection marker with button 60 seconds.
W or X to the Lighting submenu. X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the message Surround Lighting multifunction display.
Function appears in the multifunction X Press button &.
display.
setting. W or X to the Lighting submenu.
the message Headlamp Delayed Shut-
off appears in the multifunction display.
setting.

locator lighting function On or Off.
Ã when exiting the vehicle.
The locator lighting feature is activated.
Switching night security illumination headlamps delayed shut-off feature On or
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on Off.
or off X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
Use this function to set whether you would Ã before turning off the engine.
like the exterior lamps to remain on for The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is
15 seconds during darkness after exiting the activated.
vehicle and closing all doors.

Control system 135
You can temporarily deactivate the Vehicle submenu

headlamps delayed shut-off feature:
Access the Vehicle submenu via the
X Before exiting the vehicle, turn the Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu
SmartKey in the starter switch to position to set the automatic central locking.
0.
X Then turn it to position 2 and back to
Switching automatic central locking on or
position 0. off
The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is Use this function to switch the automatic
Controls in detail
deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as central locking on or off. With the automatic
you start the engine. central locking activated, the vehicle is
locked centrally at a vehicle speed of
Switching interior lighting delayed shut- approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
off on or off X Press button V or U repeatedly until
Use this function to set whether you would the Settings menu appears in the
like the interior lighting to remain on for multifunction display.
10 seconds during darkness after you have X Press button &.
removed the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
W or X to the Vehicle submenu.
the message Automatic Door Locking
appears in the multifunction display.
X Press button &.
X Move the selection marker with button setting.
W or X to the Lighting submenu.
the message Interior Lighting
Delayed Shut-off appears in the
setting.
automatic central locking On or Off.
Comfort submenu
Access the Comfort submenu via the
Settings menu.
interior lighting delayed shut-off feature
On or Off.
Z
136 Control system

RActivating easy-entry/exit feature
(Y page 136)
RActivating/deactivating the seat belt
adjustment feature (Y page 136)
RSwitching fold-in function for exterior rear
view mirrors on or off (Y page 137) X Press button W or X to activate (On)
Controls in detail
or deactivate (Off) the easy-entry/exit

Activating easy-entry/exit feature
feature.
Use this function to activate and deactivate
the easy-entry/exit feature (Y page 87). Activating/deactivating seat belt
G Warning! adjustment feature
You must make sure no one can become Use this feature to set the seat belts to be
trapped or injured by the moving steering adjusted automatically with the driver’s or
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is front passenger seat belt fastened and the
activated. starter switch in position 2.
To stop steering wheel movement do one of For more information on the seat belt
the following: adjustment feature, see (Y page 51).
RMove steering wheel adjustment stalk.
RPress one of the memory position buttons. multifunction display.
RPress memory button M. X Press button &.
Do not leave children unattended in the X Move the selection marker with button
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. W or X to the Comfort submenu.
Children could open the driver’s door and X Press button & or * repeatedly until
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit the message Belt Adjustment appears in
feature, which could result in an accident the multifunction display.
and/or serious personal injury. The selection marker is on the current
setting.
X Press button &.
W or X to the Comfort submenu.
the message Easy-entry Function X Press button W or X to active (On) or
deactivate (Off) the seat belt adjustment
feature.
setting.

Control system 137
Switching fold-in function for exterior Distance warning function

rear view mirrors on or off
In vehicles equipped with Distronic, you can
Use this function to set the exterior rear view determine whether the distance warning
mirrors to be folded in automatically when function is to be enabled or disabled. With this
you lock your vehicle. function set to On, the system will alert you
With this function set to On and the exterior when recognizing a stationary obstacle or a
rear view mirrors folded in using the button slower vehicle moving in your vehicle’s path
on the door control panel (Y page 91), the and the danger of a collision exists, even
Controls in detail
exterior rear view mirrors will not fold out when the Distronic is switched off.
when you switch on the ignition. You will then X Press button V or U repeatedly until
have to fold out the exterior rear view mirrors
the vehicle configuration menu appears
using the button on the door control panel
in the multifunction display.
(Y page 91).
Make sure both exterior rear view mirrors are
folded out completely before driving off. the message Distance Warning appears
the Settings menu appears in the setting.
X Press button &.
W or X to the Comfort submenu.
the message Fold In Mirrors When
Locking appears in the multifunction
display. X Press button W or X to switch the
The selection marker is on the current distance warning function On or Off.
setting.
: Symbol for activated distance warning

X Press button W or X to switch the function
function On or Off. If the distance warning function is switched
on you will see the symbol Ä in the
Standard display. When the distance warning
Vehicle configuration menu function is switched off the symbol Ä will
Use the Vehicle configuration menu to not appear.
activate/deactivate the Distance warning
function (Y page 137) or to set the DSR
speed (Y page 138).
Z
138 Control system
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) RResetting fuel consumption statistics

programmed default speed (Y page 139)
Use this function to program the default RDistance to empty (Y page 139)
speed the DSR is set to when it is activated. RCurrent fuel consumption (Y page 139)
You can program the default speed between When you enter the Trip computer menu,
3 - 10 mph (Canada: 4- 18 km/h). The set you will always see the fuel consumption
value is increased in 1 mph (Canada: statistics since start first.
2 km/h) increments.
Controls in detail
X Press button V or U repeatedly until Fuel consumption statistics since start

the Vehicle configuration menu appears
X Press button U or V repeatedly until
the message From Start appears in the
the message DSR Speed appears in the
setting.
: Distance driven since start

; Time elapsed since start
= Average speed since start
? Average fuel consumption since start
X Press button W or X repeatedly until
the desired speed is shown in the All statistics stored since the last engine start
multifunction display. will be reset approximately 4 hours after the
When DSR is switched on, DSR will use the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
programmed default speed to regulate the position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
vehicle’s speed. Resetting will not occur if you turn the
Once DSR is switched on, you can adjust the SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this
set speed using the cruise control lever time period.
(Y page 154).
Fuel consumption statistics since last
reset
Trip computer menu
X Press button U or V repeatedly until
Use the Trip computer menu to call up the message From Start appears in the
statistical data on your vehicle. multifunction display.
The following information is available: X Press button & or * repeatedly until
RFuel consumption statistics since start the message From Reset appears in the
(Y page 138) multifunction display.
RFuel consumption statistics since last reset
(Y page 138)

Control system 139
: Distance driven since last reset
Controls in detail
; Time elapsed since last reset Current fuel consumption
= Average speed since last reset X Press button U or V repeatedly until
? Average fuel consumption since last reset the message From Start appears in the
Resetting fuel consumption statistics X Press button & or * repeatedly until
X
the message Consumption appears in the
Press button U or V repeatedly until
the message From Start appears in the
The current fuel consumption appears in
the reading that you want to reset appears
X Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster until the respective
values are reset to 0.
The fuel consumption statistics reset
automatically to 0 after 99 999 miles or
9 999 hours, whichever occurs first.
Telephone menu
Distance to empty
G Warning!
X Press button U or V repeatedly until A driver’s attention to the road must always
the message From Start appears in the be his/her primary focus when driving. For
multifunction display. your safety and the safety of others, we
X Press button & or * repeatedly until recommend that you pull over to a safe
the message Range: appears in the location and stop before placing or taking a
multifunction display. telephone call. If you choose to use the
The calculated remaining driving range telephone while driving, please use the hands-
based on the current fuel tank level free device and only use the telephone when
appears in the multifunction display. weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
If only very little fuel is left in the tank, a Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
vehicle at the fuel pump C appears using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
instead of the remaining driving range. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
You can connect your telephone to the

COMAND system via Bluetooth®, see
Z
140 Control system
separate COMAND system operating Dialing a number from the phone book
instructions.
When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
X Switch on the COMAND system. you may select and dial a number from the
Refer to separate COMAND system phone book at any time.
operating instructions. X Press button U or V repeatedly until
X Press button U or V repeatedly until the message TEL appears in the
the message TEL appears in the multifunction display.
Controls in detail

One of the following messages will appear the desired name appears in the
in the multifunction display: multifunction display.
RNo Service: No network is available.
If you press and hold button & or
RBluetooth Ready: The telephone has * for longer than 1 second, the system
not been connected to the COMAND scrolls rapidly through the list of names
system via Bluetooth® yet. until you release the button again.
X Connect the telephone to the The stored names are displayed in
COMAND system via Bluetooth®. alphabetical order.
RReady or name of the network provider
(if available): The telephone has found a
network and is ready for use. You can
operate it using the control system.
Answering a call
: Selected name from the phone book
When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you can answer a call at any time. In the X Press button 6.
multifunction display you will then see the The control system dials the selected
following message, or if available, the caller phone number.
ID (number or name):
If the connection is successful and this
feature is supported by your network
provider, the name of the party (if stored in
your phone book) you are calling will
appear in the multifunction display.
The control system stores the dialed
number in the redial memory.
or
X Press button 6. X Press button ~ if you do not want to
You have answered the call. make the call.
Ending a call or rejecting an incoming

call
X Press button ~.

Driving systems 141
Redialing Cruise control

The control system stores the most recently The cruise control maintains the speed you
dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the set for your vehicle automatically.
need to search through your entire phone The use of the cruise control is recommended
book. for driving at a constant speed for extended
X Press button U or V repeatedly until periods of time.
the message TEL appears in the The currently set speed or last set speed
Controls in detail
multifunction display. (“Resume” function) appears in the status
X Press button 6. indicator of the multifunction display:
The first number in the redial memory RUSA only: e.g. Cruise 55 Miles
RCanada only: e.g. ¯ 90 Km/h
the desired number or name appears in the i The cruise control should not be activated
multifunction display. during off-road driving.
X Press button 6.
G Warning!
The control system dials the selected
The cruise control is a convenience system
phone number.
designed to assist the driver during vehicle
operation. The driver is and must always
remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
Driving systems and for safe brake operation.
Introduction Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic,
and weather conditions make it advisable to
This section describes the following driving
travel at a constant speed.
systems of your vehicle:
RThe use of the cruise control can be
RCruise control dangerous on winding roads or in heavy
RDistronic traffic because conditions do not allow safe
RDistance driving at a constant speed.
warning function (only available
with Distronic) RThe use of the cruise control can be
RHill-start dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid
assist system
changes in tire traction can result in wheel
RDownhill Speed Regulation (DSR) spin and loss of control.
ROff-road driving program RDeactivate the cruise control when driving
RAir suspension program (Adaptive in fog.
Damping System (ADS) and vehicle level The “Resume” function should only be
control) operated if the driver is fully aware of the
RAll-wheel drive (4MATIC) previously set speed and wishes to resume
RParktronic
this particular preset speed.
system
RRear view camera
The driving safety systems ABS, BAS, EBP,
ESP® and 4-ETS are described in the “Safety
and security” section (Y page 61).
Z
142 Driving systems
G Warning! The vehicle speed displayed in the

When the cruise control is braking, the brake speedometer can briefly vary from the speed
pedal is retracted (i.e. depressed setting for the cruise control system.
automatically). The pedals’ range of motion
must not be impeded by any obstacles: Setting current speed
RDo not place any objects in the footwell. X Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
RMake
speed.
sure that the floormats and carpets
Controls in detail
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in

are securely in place.
direction of arrow : or press in direction
RDo not rest your foot underneath the brake
of arrow ;.
pedal, as it could otherwise be trapped.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
You could otherwise cause an accident and pedal.
injure yourself and/or others.
i On uphill grades, the cruise control may
not be able to maintain the set speed. Once
the grade eases, the set speed will be
resumed.
On downhill grades, the cruise control
maintains the set speed by braking with the
vehicle’s brake system. In addition, on
longer downhill grades the automatic
transmission will downshift automatically.
Canceling cruise control

: Setting current or higher speed X Depress the brake pedal.
; Setting current or lower speed or
= Canceling the cruise control X Briefly push the cruise control lever in
? Activating the cruise control or resuming direction of arrow =.
to last set speed The last set speed is stored for later use.
The last stored speed is deleted from memory
Activating cruise control when the engine is turned off.
You can activate the cruise control at a The cruise control switches off automatically
vehicle speed above 20 mph (30 km/h). when you depress the brake pedal or you
engage the parking brake.
You cannot activate the cruise control
The cruise control switches off automatically
Rwhen you brake and an acoustic warning will sound when
Rwhen you have engaged the parking brake Rthe vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park (30 km/h)
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral Rthe ESP® is in operation
position N
Rthe ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
Rthe ESP® is switched off or has switched off
switch
due to a malfunction

Driving systems 143
Rthe ESP® has switched off due to a X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
malfunction lever up to the resistance point in direction
Ryou shift the automatic transmission into of arrow :.
neutral position N while driving X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
control lever down to the resistance point
Observe additional messages in the
in direction of arrow ;.
multifunction display that may appear.
X Release the cruise control lever.
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
Controls in detail
deactivate the cruise control. After a brief
accelerate or decelerate.
acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise
control will resume the last set speed. Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada:
10 km/h) increments
Changing the set speed
i The set speed value is increased or
G Warning! decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment increments each time you lift or press the
until the vehicle has made the necessary cruise control lever up or down past the
adjustments. resistance point.
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
a value that the prevailing road conditions and lever up past the resistance point in
legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden direction of arrow :.
and unexpected acceleration or deceleration
X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
of the vehicle could cause an accident and/
or serious injury to you and others. control lever down past the resistance
point in direction of arrow ;.
You can increase or decrease the set speed X Release the cruise control lever.
in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in The new speed is set and the vehicle will
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments. accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that
When you use the cruise control lever to it may take a brief moment until the vehicle
decelerate, the brake system will brake the has reached the set speed.
vehicle automatically if the engine’s braking
power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently. Setting stored speed (Resume
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: function)
1 km/h) increments G Warning!
i The set speed value is increased or The set speed stored in memory should only
decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) be set again if prevailing road conditions and
increments each time you lift or press the legal speed limits permit. Possible
cruise control lever up or down to the acceleration or deceleration differences
resistance point. arising from returning to the preset speed
could cause an accident and/or serious injury
to you and others.
Z
144 Driving systems
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever in G Warning!

direction of arrow ?. When the Distronic is braking, the brake pedal
If no speed is stored, the current speed is is retracted (i.e. depressed automatically).
set and stored. The pedals’ range of motion must not be
X Remove your foot from the accelerator impeded by any obstacles:
pedal. RDo not place any objects in the footwell.
The last stored speed is deleted from memory
RMake sure that the floormats and carpets
when the engine is turned off.
Controls in detail
are securely in place.

RDo not rest your foot underneath the brake
Distronic pedal, as it could otherwise be trapped.
Safety notes You could otherwise cause an accident and
injure yourself and/or others.
When activated, the Distronic adaptive cruise
control increases the driving convenience G Warning!
afforded by the cruise control while traveling The Distronic is a convenience system. Its
on expressways and other major roadways. speed adjustment reduction capability is
RIf the Distronic distance sensor detects a intended to make cruise control more
slower moving vehicle directly ahead, your effective and usable when traffic speeds vary.
vehicle speed will be reduced so that you It is not however, intended to, nor does it,
follow that vehicle at your preset following replace the need for extreme care.
distance. The responsibility for the vehicle’s speed,
RIf there is no vehicle directly ahead of you, distance to the preceding vehicle and, most
the Distronic will function in the same way importantly, brake operation to ensure a safe
as standard cruise control (Y page 141). stopping distance, always remains with the
driver.
G Warning! The Distronic cannot take street and traffic
The Distronic requires familiarity with its conditions into account. Complex driving
operational characteristics. We strongly situations are not always fully recognized by
recommend that you review the following the Distronic. This could result in wrong or
information carefully before operating the missing distance warnings.
system.
G Warning!
G Warning! The Distronic adaptive cruise control is not a
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read substitute for active driving involvement. It
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating does not react to pedestrians or on stationary
Instructions included in your vehicle literature objects, nor does it recognize or predict the
portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize lane curvature or the movement of preceding
potential danger. vehicles.
The Distronic can only apply 20% of the
maximum braking power of the vehicle.
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to the road, weather and traffic
conditions. Additionally, the driver must
provide the steering, braking and other driving

Driving systems 145
inputs necessary to remain in control of the previously set speed and wishes to resume
vehicle. this particular preset speed.
High-frequency sources such as toll stations,
speed measuring systems etc. can cause the G Warning!
Distronic system to malfunction. Close attention to road and traffic conditions
is imperative at all times, regardless of
G Warning! whether or not the Distronic is activated.
The Distronic cannot take road and traffic Use of the Distronic can be dangerous on
Controls in detail
conditions into account. Only use the winding roads or in heavy traffic because
Distronic if the road, weather and traffic conditions do not allow safe driving at a
conditions make it advisable to travel at a constant speed.
constant speed. The Distronic will not react to stationary
objects in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle
G Warning! in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). The
Use of the Distronic can be dangerous on Distronic will also not respond to oncoming
slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction vehicles.
can result in wheel spin and loss of control. Switch off the Distronic:
The Distronic does not function in adverse
Rwhen changing from the left to the right
sight and distance conditions. Do not use the
lane if vehicles are moving more slowly in
Distronic during conditions of fog, heavy rain,
the left lane
snow or sleet.
Rwhen entering a turn lane or highway off
G Warning! ramp
The Distronic cannot take weather conditions Rin complex driving situations, such as in
into account. Switch off the Distronic or do highway construction zones
not switch it on if:
In these situations, the Distronic will continue
Rroads are slippery or covered with snow or to maintain the set speed unless deactivated.
ice. The wheels could lose traction while
The Distronic is designed and intended only
braking or accelerating, and the vehicle
to maintain a set speed and keep a set
could skid.
distance from moving objects in front of it.
Rthe Distronic system sensor cover is dirty
or visibility is diminished due to snow, rain i This device has been approved by the FCC
or fog, for example. The distance control as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar
system functionality could be impaired. sensor is intended for use in an automotive
Always pay attention to surrounding traffic radar system only. Removal, tampering, or
conditions even while the Distronic is altering of the device will void any
switched on. Otherwise, you may not be able warranties, and is not permitted by the
to recognize dangerous situations until it is FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
too late. This could cause an accident in which any non-approved way.
you and/or others could be injured. Any unauthorized modification to this
G Warning! operate the equipment.
The “Resume” function should only be
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
Z
146 Driving systems
Distronic displays in the speedometer The intermittent warning sound ceases and
the distance warning lamp · goes out
when the necessary distance to the vehicle
ahead is established again.
G Warning!
An intermittent warning sounds and the
distance warning lamp · in the instrument
Controls in detail
cluster is illuminated if the Distronic system

calculates that the distance to the vehicle
ahead and your vehicle’s current speed
indicate that the Distronic will not be capable
of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain
When the Distronic is activated, one or two
the preset following distance, which creates
cruise control speed segments come on
a danger of a collision.
around set speed :.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
The vehicle speed displayed on the
your distance to the preceding vehicle. The
speedometer can briefly vary from the speed
warning sound is intended as a final caution
setting on the Distronic system.
in which you should intercede with your own
braking inputs to avoid a potentially
dangerous situation. Do not wait for the
operation of the warning signal to intercede
with your own braking. This will result in
potentially dangerous emergency braking
which will not always result in an impact being
avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
G Warning!
The Distronic brakes your vehicle with a
When the Distronic detects a vehicle directly maximum deceleration of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2).
ahead, the cruise control speed This corresponds to approximately 20% of the
segments ; appear in the speedometer. maximum deceleration of your vehicle.
These segments represent the difference
You must also apply the brakes yourself to
between the set speed of your vehicle : and
avoid a collision. The Distronic brakes the
the speed of the preceding vehicle =.
vehicle in an effort to restore the preset
If the Distronic calculates that there is a distance or to maintain the set speed. The
danger of collision, the distance warning lamp brake pedal is automatically applied as this
· in the instrument cluster comes on and happens which results in the brake pedal
an intermittent warning sounds. moving
X Immediately apply the brakes to avoid a Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times,
collision. including the area under the brake pedal.
Under no circumstances should the driver Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
await the intermittent warning sound movement which could interfere with the
before braking. braking ability of the Distronic system.
Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
– your foot could become caught.

Driving systems 147
Distronic menu in the control system

Use the DISTRONIC menu to display the
current settings for your Distronic system.
The information shown in the multifunction
display depends on whether the Distronic
system and/or the distance warning function
are activated or deactivated. After approximately 5 seconds the currently
Controls in detail
i To activate or deactivate the Distronic set speed ; appears in the status indicator
system, see (Y page 147) or see of the multifunction display:
(Y page 149). DTR XXX Miles
To activate or deactivate the Distance
warning function, see (Y page 137). Cruise control lever
X Press button V or U repeatedly until The Distronic system is operated by means of
one of the following two displays appears the cruise control lever.
Distronic deactivated
When the Distronic is deactivated, you will
see the standard Distronic display in the
: Setting current or higher speed

; Setting current or lower speed
= Deactivating the Distronic
: Preceding vehicle, if detected ? Activating the Distronic or resuming to
; Actual distance to the preceding vehicle the last set speed
= Preset distance threshold to the
preceding vehicle Activating Distronic
? Your vehicle
You can activate the Distronic when the
vehicle speed is between 20 mph (30 km/h)
Distronic activated and 110 mph (180 km/h).
When the Distronic is activated :, you will When the Distronic is activated, one or two
see the set speed ; in the multifunction cruise control speed segments around the set
display for approximately 5 seconds. The speed in the speedometer dial are
following display appears in the multifunction illuminated. The multifunction display will
display. show a message such as
DISTRONIC 55 MPH
(Canada: DISTRONIC 90 km/h).
Z
148 Driving systems
After approximately 5 seconds the currently Changing the set speed

set speed appears in the status indicator of
the multifunction display: G Warning!
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
RUSA only: e.g. DTR 55 Miles
until the vehicle has made the necessary
RCanada only: e.g. DTR 90 km/h adjustments.
If the Distronic is not activated after the Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to
cruise control lever is pulled in direction of a value that the prevailing road conditions and
Controls in detail
arrow ? (Y page 147), you will see the legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden
message DISTRONIC Off in the and unexpected acceleration or deceleration
multifunction display. of the vehicle could cause an accident and/
In the following cases you cannot activate the or serious injury to you and others.
Distronic: You can increase or decrease the set speed
Rup to 2 minutes after starting the engine in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in
Rwhen you brake 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments.
When you use the cruise control lever to
Rwhen you have engaged the parking brake decelerate, the brake system will brake the
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park vehicle automatically if the engine’s braking
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
position N
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada:
Rwhen the ESP® is switched off or has 1 km/h) increments
switched off due to a malfunction
i The set speed value is increased or
The vehicle speed displayed on the decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
speedometer can briefly vary from the speed increments each time you lift or press the
setting on the Distronic system. cruise control lever up or down to the
resistance point.
Setting the current speed
X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
X Accelerate or decelerate to the desired lever up to the resistance point in direction
speed. of arrow : (Y page 147).
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
direction of arrow : or depress in
control lever down to the resistance point
direction of arrow ; (Y page 147). in direction of arrow ; (Y page 147).
pedal. The new speed is set and the vehicle will
i If you do not take your foot off of the accelerate or decelerate.
accelerator pedal and continue to
Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada:
accelerate past the set speed, the following
10 km/h) increments
message will appear in the multifunction
display: i The set speed value is increased or
DISTRONIC Override decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
The distance to a slower moving vehicle in increments each time you lift or press the
front of you will not be set. Your vehicle cruise control lever up or down past the
speed will then be determined only by the resistance point.
accelerator pedal position.

Driving systems 149
X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control engage the parking brake. In this case, the
lever up past the resistance point in cruise control speed segments in the
direction of arrow : (Y page 147). speedometer dial will go out.
X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise The Distronic also switches off automatically
control lever down past the resistance when
point in direction of arrow ; Rthe vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
(Y page 147). (30 km/h)
Controls in detail
Rthe ESP® is in operation
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that Rthe ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
it may take a brief moment until the vehicle switch
has reached the set speed. Rthe ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunction
Setting stored speed (Resume function) Ryou shift the automatic transmission into
G Warning! neutral position N while driving
The set speed stored in memory should only The cruise control speed segments in the
be set again if prevailing road conditions and speedometer dial goes out and an acoustic
legal speed limits permit. Possible warning will sound. Observe additional
acceleration or deceleration differences messages in the multifunction display that
arising from returning to the preset speed may appear.
could cause an accident and/or serious injury
G Warning!
to you and others.
Distronic switches off and releases the brakes
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever in when the vehicle decelerates below the
direction of arrow ? (Y page 147). minimum speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) by
If no speed is stored, the current speed is operation of the system. At that time the
set and stored. driver must apply the brakes in order to
reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a
stop.
pedal.
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
Deactivating Distronic deactivate the Distronic. After a brief
acceleration (e.g. for passing), the Distronic
X Depress the brake pedal. will resume the last set speed.
or
X Briefly push the cruise control lever in Setting the following distance in
direction of arrow = (Y page 147). Distronic
The cruise control speed segments in the
You can set the specified following distance
speedometer dial will go out and the
for Distronic by varying the time setting
following message appears briefly in the
between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using this time
multifunction display: DISTRONIC Off
setting and the current speed of your vehicle,
The last set speed is stored for later use. Distronic calculates and sets the required
The last stored speed is deleted from memory following distance to the preceding vehicle.
when the engine is turned off. The set distance will be shown in the
The Distronic switches off automatically multifunction display.
when you depress the brake pedal or you
Z
150 Driving systems
G Warning! This means that:

It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to RYour vehicle can pass another vehicle after
select the appropriate setting given road you have changed lanes.
conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
RWhile in a sharp turn or if the preceding
style and applicable laws and driving
vehicle is in a sharp turn, the Distronic
recommendations for safe following distance.
could lose sight of the preceding vehicle.
Your vehicle could then accelerate to the
Controls in detail
previously selected speed.

The Distronic regulates only the distance
between your vehicle and those directly
ahead of it, but does not register stationary
objects in the road, e.g.:
Ra stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
Ra disabled vehicle
Ran oncoming vehicle
The driver must always be alert, observe all
X Increasing distance: Turn distance traffic and intercede as required by means of
setting switch : in direction of arrow =. steering or braking the vehicle.
Increasing the distance setting tells
Distronic to maintain a greater following G Warning!
distance to the preceding vehicle. The Distronic should not be used in snowy or
icy road conditions.
X Decreasing distance: Turn distance
setting switch : in direction of arrow ;. The most likely cause for a malfunctioning
Decreasing the distance setting tells system is a dirty Distronic system sensor
Distronic to maintain a shorter following cover (located in the hood grille), especially
distance to the preceding vehicle. at times of snow and ice or heavy rain.
In such a case, the Distronic will switch off,
Driving with Distronic and the message DISTRONIC Currently
Unavailable – See Operator’s Manual
This section describes a number of driving appears in the multifunction display.
situations where special precaution is For cleaning and care of the Distronic system
required on the part of the driver. Be prepared sensor cover, see (Y page 263).
to brake in such situations. Braking will
deactivate the Distronic system. i If the message DISTRONIC Available
Again appears during driving, the dirt (e.g.
G Warning! slush) has dissolved; the Distronic works
The Distronic works to maintain the speed again, if you reactivate it (Y page 147).
selected by the driver unless a moving
obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g.
following another vehicle ahead of you at your
set distance).

Driving systems 151
Turns and bends The Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes. There will be insufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle.
Narrow vehicles
Controls in detail
In turns or bends, the Distronic may not
detect a moving vehicle in front, or it may
detect one too soon. This may cause your
vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly.
Because of their narrow profile, the vehicles
Offset driving traveling near the outer edges of the lane
have not yet been detected by the Distronic.
There will be insufficient distance to the
preceding vehicles.
Distance warning function

This function warns you at a vehicle speed of
above approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) in
the following cases:
RAt the current speed, the distance between
your vehicle and the preceding vehicle is
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset from too low for several seconds. The distance
your direct line of travel may not be detected warning lamp · in the instrument
by the Distronic. There will be insufficient cluster comes on.
distance to the preceding vehicle. RYou are gaining on a preceding vehicle
rapidly. An intermittent warning sounds
Lane changing
and the distance warning lamp · in the
instrument cluster comes on.
If these warnings are issued, you must apply
the brakes to maintain a safe distance and
avoid a collision with the preceding vehicle.
When depressing the brake pedal, the
warning sound ceases. The warning sound
will also cease when the distance to the
preceding vehicle is sufficient again without
applying the brakes. In this case, the distance
warning lamp · will also go out.
Z
152 Driving systems
G Warning! X Release the brake pedal.

If the distance warning lamp · in the X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
instrument cluster comes on while driving The hill-start assist system is inactive
and/or an intermittent warning sounds, Rwhen starting off on a level road or downhill
immediate attention on the part of the driver grades
is required. As required by the traffic
Rwith the automatic transmission in neutral
situation, apply the brakes and navigate
around a possible obstacle. However, do not position N
Controls in detail
drive by relying on the distance warning Rwith the parking brake engaged
function, as this will result in an emergency Rif the ESP® has switched off due to a
braking application. This will not always
malfunction
enable you to avoid a collision, especially
when traveling on varying road surface
conditions and with varying driver reaction.
Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR)
Complex driving situations are not always
fully recognized by the distance warning For information on off-road driving, see “Off-
function. This could result in wrong or missing road driving” (Y page 248).
distance warnings. The DSR is an aid for driving downhill. The
DSR regulates your vehicle’s speed when
X Activating/deactivating: Activate or driving downhill to the value set in the control
deactivate the distance warning function in system (Y page 138). The steeper the
the control system (Y page 137). downhill gradient is, the greater the brake
When activated, the distance warning application. On flat road surfaces, the DSR
function indicator Ä appears in the brakes only slightly or not at all.
G Warning!
The Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) is a
Hill-start assist system convenience system designed to assist the
driver during vehicle operation. The system
G Warning! must be set to be appropriate for the
The hill-start assist system is not designed to topographical and weather conditions
function as a parking brake. It does not encountered which can change quickly. The
prevent the vehicle from moving when parked driver is and must remain at all times
on an incline. responsible for the vehicle speed and for safe
Always engage the parking brake in addition brake operation.
to shifting the automatic transmission into Depending on the programmed speed, actual
park position P. vehicle speed and gradient, switching on the
DSR while driving can cause the vehicle to
On uphill grades, the hill-start assist system slow down rapidly and you may hear a sound
maintains the pressure in the brake system which is caused by the activation of the
for approximately 1 second after you have vehicle’s brake system through the DSR.
released the brake pedal. Therefore, you can Sudden and unexpected deceleration can
start off smoothly without the vehicle moving result in loss of vehicle control, causing an
immediately after releasing the brake pedal. accident and/or serious personal injury to
X Depress the brake pedal. you and others. Do not switch on the DSR in
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
position D or reverse gear R.

Driving systems 153
a circumstance where rapid deceleration Switching the DSR on/off

could result in a loss of vehicle control.
The DSR regulates the vehicle’s speed in

automatic transmission positions D, or R.
i In addition, make use of the engine’s
braking effect by shifting the automatic
transmission into a lower gear.
Controls in detail
You can drive slower or faster than the set
speed at any time by braking the vehicle or
depressing the accelerator pedal.
i Whenever the DSR is switched on, the
G Warning!
DSR will use the programmed default
speed to regulate the vehicle’s speed. The If the accelerator pedal is depressed while the
default speed programmed at the factory is Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) is activated,
4 mph (Canada: 6 km/h). The default speed the vehicle can drive faster than the
can be reprogrammed using the control programmed set speed. You should therefore
system (Y page 138). The next time the drive downhill with particular caution as it
DSR is switched on, the DSR will use the could otherwise lead to an accident and/or
newly programmed default speed to serious injury to you or others. Keep in mind
regulate the vehicle’s speed. that as soon as you remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal with the DSR switched on,
Once the DSR is switched on, you can
the DSR will start regulating the vehicle’s
adjust the set speed using the cruise
speed including use of brakes if required.
control lever (Y page 142). Keep in mind
Depending on the programmed set speed,
that adjusting the set speed using the
actual vehicle speed and gradient, the DSR
cruise control lever with the DSR switched
can cause the vehicle to slow down rapidly.
on will not change the programmed default
Sudden and unexpected deceleration can
speed. If the DSR is switched off and then
result in loss of vehicle control, causing an
switched on again, the DSR will use the
accident and/or serious personal injury to
programmed default speed.
you and others.
Depending on the road surface and level of
downhill grade, the DSR may not be able to Switching on the DSR
maintain the set speed. To maintain the set The DSR can only be switched on if the vehicle
speed, apply the brakes if necessary. speed is below 20 mph (Canada: 30 km/h).
X Press DSR switch :.
Indicator lamp ; comes on.
The message DSR and the set speed appear
Z
154 Driving systems
i If the DSR is switched on at a speed above Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)

20 mph (Canada: 30 km/h), the message increments
DSR Max. Speed 20 MPH (Canada: i The set value is increased or decreased in
30 km/h) appears in the multifunction 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments each
display. time you lift or depress the cruise control
For information on how to program the set lever to the resistance point.
speed while driving, see “Adjusting the DSR
speed” (Y page 154). Increase set speed:
Controls in detail
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to the

Switching off the DSR
resistance point in direction of arrow :.
X Press DSR switch :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle speed increases in increments
The message DSR Off appears in the of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).
Reduce set speed:
i At a speed above approximately 21 mph X Briefly press the cruise control lever down
(Canada approximately: 35 km/h), the DSR to the resistance point in direction of
is automatically switched off. The message arrow ;.
DSR Off appears in the multifunction X Release the cruise control lever.
display and an acoustic signal sounds. For
The vehicle speed decreases in increments
information on how to switch the DSR on
of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).
again, see “Switching on the DSR”
(Y page 153). Each time the set speed is changed, DSR
will appear in the multifunction display and
the changed set speed is shown.
Adjusting the DSR speed
The set speed is canceled when the DSR is
With the DSR switched on (Y page 153), the switched off. If the DSR is switched on again,
speed setting can be changed using the the DSR will use the programmed default
cruise control lever. speed (Y page 138).
Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
increments
i The set value is increased or decreased in
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each
time you lift or depress the cruise control
lever past the resistance point.
Increase set speed:
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever up past
the resistance point in direction of
Cruise control lever arrow :.
You can change the set speed between X Release the cruise control lever.
3-10 mph (Canada: 4-18 km/h). The vehicle speed increases in increments
You can increase or reduce the set speed in of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
two ways.

Driving systems 155
Reduce set speed:

X Briefly press the cruise control lever down
past the resistance point in direction of
arrow ;.
The vehicle speed decreases in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
Controls in detail
Each time the set speed is changed, DSR
will appear in the multifunction display and
the changed set speed is shown.
The new speed is set and the vehicle will Example illustration: All models, except
ML 63 AMG
accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that
it may take a brief moment until the vehicle i In AMG vehicles you can switch the Off-
has reached the new set speed. road driving program on or off via the
The set speed is canceled when the DSR is control system (Y page 125).
switched off. If the DSR is switched on again,
the DSR will use the programmed default X Switching on: Press switch :.
speed (Y page 138). Indicator lamp ; comes on. The symbol
Ç appears in the lower multifunction
display.
Off-road driving program
The off-road driving program is designed to
assist the driver when driving off-road in
terrain and crossing water. The off-road
driving program adjusts the engine power and
shifting of the automatic transmission to be
more suitable for the off-road use of the
vehicle. In addition, the ABS, ESP®, and 4-ETS X Switching off: Press switch : again.
designed for off-road use are automatically
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The symbol
activated.
Ç disappears.
In the following situations you should switch
to the off-road driving program:
Rduring off-road driving Air suspension program
Rwhen crossing water (Y page 251) The system lets you select the chassis and
Rwhen towing up or down on steep gradients suspension setup. The chassis and
suspension setup adjusts the damping
behavior and the ride height for your vehicle.
The system consists of two components. The
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
(Y page 156) and the vehicle level control
(Y page 156).
Z
156 Driving systems
ML 63 AMG
The air suspension program is part of the ML
63 AMG standard equipment range.
Due to the vehicle’s sportier suspension
tuning, in comparison with standard vehicles,
the level positions in the ADS settings as well
as the speed thresholds for raising and
lowering the vehicle have been modified.
Controls in detail
From the highway/high-speed level, the

vehicle is lowered to the ADS SPORT level
approximately 20 seconds after it is locked. The following settings are available:
From the raised level, the vehicle is not RAUTO (for normal driving situations)
lowered after it is locked. When the engine is
Indicator lamps ; and = are off.
started, the previously selected setting, e.g.
ADS COMF, is selected again. RSPORT (for sporty driving)
Indicator lamp ; comes on.
! Be sure to observe this vehicle’s differing
values for ground clearance and vehicle With the ADS SPORT setting, the vehicle is
height in comparison to standard vehicles. lowered approximately 0.6 in (15 mm).
You could otherwise damage the vehicle. ML63 AMG:
Observe the values for With the ADS SPORT setting, the vehicle is
Ropening the tailgate lowered approximately 0.3 in (8 mm).
RCOMF (for comfort driving)
Rdriving off-road
Indicator lamp = comes on.
Rthe vehicle’s main dimensions in the
ML63 AMG:
“Technical data” section
The vehicle is raised approximately 0.28 in
(7 mm).
Adaptive Damping System (ADS) X Start the engine.
X Press ADS switch : repeatedly until the
The Adaptive Damping System (ADS) is
controlled electronically and operates desired suspension tuning is reached.
continuously. It adjusts the damping The setting remains stored when you turn off
characteristics to the current operating and the engine.
driving conditions. The damping is adjusted
individually for each wheel. Driving safety and
tire comfort are increased. Vehicle level control
The fine tuning of the damping is dependent Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride
on: height to increase vehicle safety and to
Ryour driving style reduce fuel consumption.
Rroad
Changes to the vehicle level should be made
surface conditions
while the vehicle is moving. The vehicle will
Ryour personal settings then reach the set level as fast as possible.
When you park the vehicle and the ambient
temperature changes, the vehicle level may
change visibly. When the temperature drops,

Driving systems 157
the vehicle lowers. When the temperature changing the vehicle level. The ESP® cannot
rises, the vehicle raises. prevent accidents, including those resulting
The vehicle automatically regulates its ride from excessive speed. The ESP® cannot
height based on the set vehicle height and the prevent the natural laws of physics from
current speed: acting on the vehicle.
RAs your driving speed increases, the vehicle
is lowered by increments until it reaches ! Keep in mind that in rough or uneven
highspeed level. terrain, adjusting the vehicle to a lower
Controls in detail
RVehicles
level may cause the vehicle underbody to
with ADS: If you are driving with
come in contact with the ground and result
the ADS setting COMF or AUTO, the
in damage to the vehicle underbody.
vehicle is raised back to highway level as
Always make sure the vehicle has sufficient
your driving speed decreases.
ground clearance before adjusting it to a
RVehicles with ADS: You can select the lower level.
highspeed level via the ADS setting
SPORT. In ADS SPORT, the vehicle is ! Before jacking up the vehicle with
lowered directly to highspeed level as your equipment that lifts one or more of the
driving speed increases. wheels completely off of the ground,
The vehicle begins adjusting to the set vehicle remove the SmartKey from the starter
level as soon as the doors or tailgate are switch.
unlocked or opened or closed with the vehicle For information on off-road driving, see “Off-
unlocked. road driving” (Y page 248).
In order to operate the vehicle level control
switch (Y page 157), however, the engine
must be running.
G Warning!
Make sure no one is near the wheel housing
or under the vehicle when you lower the
vehicle while it is standing still. Limbs could
become wedged into or under the vehicle.
For safety reasons, the vehicle can only be
lowered with all doors and the tailgate closed.
Lowering is interrupted if a door or the tailgate
is opened and will continue after the door is Basic settings (except ML 63 AMG)
closed again.
The following vehicle chassis ride heights can
G Warning! be selected using vehicle level control
switch : in the center console:
Please be aware that by raising the vehicle
level, the center of gravity also rises.
Therefore, always ensure that the vehicle
level is as low as possible. With higher ride
height the ESP® may activate earlier in certain
situations.
Adapt your speed and driving to possible
changed driving behavior of the vehicle after
Z
158 Driving systems
Level Driving situation Level Driving situation

Raised level For off-road driving or Raised level For off-road driving or
driving in rough terrain. driving in rough terrain.
Indicator lamp ; is on. Indicator lamp ; is on.
Highway For driving on paved roads Highway For driving on paved roads
level in fair or better condition. level in fair or better condition.
Indicator lamp ; is off. Indicator lamp ; is off.
Controls in detail
i The third available level is the highspeed i The third available level is the highspeed
level that is set automatically. level that is set automatically.
The following is the approximate change in How much the vehicle is lowered or raised
ride height for each of the level settings: depends on the ADS setting selected. At the
raised level, the vehicle is 2.9 in (73 mm)
Level Ride height
higher than at the highway level with ADS
Raised level +2.3 in (60 mm) AUTO.
Highway +/-0 in (0 mm) Raised level

level16
Only select the raised level if appropriate for
Highspeed -0.6 in (-15 mm) the driving situation encountered. Otherwise
level the fuel consumption may increase and/or
the handling characteristics of the vehicle
may be unfavorable.
i Vehicles with ADS:
Depending on the ADS setting i You can select the raised level at speeds
(Y page 156), the vehicle will be lowered to up to 40 mph (64 km/h). At higher speeds,
the highspeed level when traveling at the message Á Level Selection
higher speeds. At speeds below 40 mph Not Permitted appears in the
(64 km/h) at the latest, it will be returned multifunction display.
to the highway level. X Start the engine.
i The highspeed level is not available when When indicator lamp ; is off:
towing a trailer. For more information on X Press vehicle level control switch :.
towing a trailer, see “Trailer towing”
Indicator lamp ; flashes. The vehicle
(Y page 254).
adjusts to the raised level.
Basic settings (ML 63 AMG) The following message appears in the
multifunction display while the level is
The following vehicle chassis ride heights can being set:
be selected using vehicle level control
switch : in the center console:
16 Ground clearance: 7.9 in (201 mm)

Driving systems 159
i The message can be cleared by pressing i The message can be cleared by pressing
Controls in detail
the V, U, & or * button on the V, U, & or * button on
the multifunction steering wheel. the multifunction steering wheel.
When the raised level is reached, indicator When the highway level is reached, indicator
lamp ; comes on continuously and the lamp ; goes out and the following message
following message appears in the appears in the multifunction display for
multifunction display for approximately approximately 5 seconds:
5 seconds:
The vehicle is lowered to the highway level

automatically if the vehicle speed is above
Highway level 55 mph (88 km/h) or if the vehicle speed
! Keep in mind that on rough or uneven stays between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 55 mph
roads, adjusting the vehicle to a lower level (88 km/h) for approximately 20 seconds.
may cause the vehicle underbody to come
in contact with the road and result in
damage to the vehicle underbody. Always All-wheel drive (4MATIC)
make sure the vehicle has sufficient ground In vehicles with all-wheel drive (4MATIC),
clearance before adjusting it to a lower both axles are powered at all times when the
level. vehicle is being operated. The 4MATIC
improves traction in conjunction with the
X Start the engine.
ESP® (Y page 63) and the Electronic Traction
When indicator lamp ; is on: System (ETS/4-ETS) (Y page 64).
X Press vehicle level control switch :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes. The vehicle
adjusts to the highway level.
The following message appears in the
multifunction display while the level is
being set:
Z
160 Driving systems
G Warning! The Parktronic system is activated

If a drive wheel is spinning due to insufficient automatically when
traction: Ryou switch on the ignition
RWhile driving off, apply as little throttle as and
possible. Ryou release the parking brake
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator and
pedal. Rthe automatic transmission is in drive
Controls in detail
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the position D, reverse gear R, or neutral
prevailing road conditions. position N
Failure to observe these guidelines could The Parktronic system deactivates at speeds
cause the vehicle to skid. above approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). At
The 4MATIC cannot prevent accidents lower speeds, the Parktronic system
resulting from excessive speed. activates again.
The Parktronic system also deactivates when
! Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so you shift the automatic transmission into
could damage the transfer case, which is park position P or engage the parking brake.
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited The Parktronic system monitors the
Warranty. All wheels must be on or off the surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors
ground. Observe instructions for towing the in the front bumper and four sensors in the
vehicle with all wheels on the ground. rear bumper.
! Only conduct operational or performance
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
tests are necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
system and/or the transfer case which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
i In winter operation, the maximum

effectiveness of the 4MATIC is only
achieved with winter tires (Y page 242) or To function properly, sensors : must be free
snow chains as required. of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean
sensors : regularly. Be careful not to
scratch or damage sensors :, see “Cleaning
Parktronic system the driving systems sensors” (Y page 263).
The Parktronic system is an electronic G Warning!
parking aid with ultrasonic sensors designed The Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
to assist the driver during parking maneuvers. not intended to, nor does it replace, the need
The Parktronic system indicates the relative for extreme care. The responsibility during
distance between the vehicle and an obstacle parking and other critical maneuvers always
visually and audibly. remains with the driver.

Driving systems 161
G Warning!
Make sure no persons or animals are in or
near the area in which you are parking/
maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be
injured.
! Special attention must be paid to objects

with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
Controls in detail
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts,
elevated crossbars or road curbs). Such
objects may not be detected by the system
and can damage the vehicle. Front sensors
During parking maneuvers, pay special Center approx. 40 in (100 cm)
attention to objects located above or below
the height of the sensors (e.g. street curbs, Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm)
painted posts, or trailer hitches etc.). The
Rear sensors
Parktronic system will not detect such
objects at close range and damage to your Center approx. 48 in (120 cm)
vehicle or the object may result.
Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm)
! Ultrasonic signals from outside sources
(e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or Minimum distance
jackhammers) may impair the operation of Center approx. 8 in (20 cm)
the Parktronic system.
Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm)
Range of the sensors
If the Parktronic system detects an obstacle
in this range, all the distance warning
segments illuminate and you hear a warning
signal. If the obstacle is closer than the
minimum distance, the actual distance may
no longer be indicated by the Parktronic
system.
Warning indicators
Visual signals indicate the relative distance
between the sensors and an obstacle.
Z
162 Driving systems
RFront area: An intermittent acoustic

warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds
will sound as the first red distance segment
illuminates. A constant acoustic warning
lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound
for the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the automatic
transmission is shifted into park
Controls in detail
position P or the parking brake is engaged.

RRear area: An intermittent acoustic
Front area warning indicators warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds
will sound as the first red distance segment
illuminates. A constant acoustic warning
lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound
for the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the automatic
transmission is shifted into drive
position D, or park position P, or the
parking brake is engaged.
Switching the Parktronic system on/

off
Rear area warning indicators The Parktronic system switches on
Each warning indicator is divided into five automatically when the ignition is switched
yellow and two red distance segments for left on.
side : and right side ; of the vehicle. The
Parktronic system is ready to measure when
the yellow readiness indicators = are
illuminated.
The current transmission position determines
which warning indicator will be activated.
Current Warning indicator
transmission
position
D Front area activated Example illustration: All models, except ML 450
R or N Front and rear area HYBRID
activated X Switching off: Press Parktronic
switch :.
As your vehicle approaches an object, one or Indicator lamp ; comes on.
more distance segments will illuminate, X Switching on: Press Parktronic switch :
depending on the distance. When the seventh again.
distance segment illuminates, you have
reached the minimum distance.

Driving systems 163
Trailer towing The area behind the vehicle appears in the

COMAND system display as a mirror image,
The rear Parktronic sensors will be
like in the rear view mirror.
deactivated when you have established the
electrical connection between your vehicle In addition, the rear view camera contains
and the trailer you are about to tow. guidelines to help you with driving in reverse.
! The distance between the sensors in the G Warning!

bumpers and an obstacle is referred to as Make sure no persons or animals are in or
Controls in detail
the minimum range of the Parktronic. A near the area in which you are parking/
trailer hitch will reduce the distance to an maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be
obstacle. Keep this in mind to avoid any injured.
damage.
G Warning!
Parktronic system malfunction The rear view camera is only an aid and may
display obstacles
There is a malfunction in the Parktronic
Rfrom a distorted perspective
system, if only the red distance segments
illuminate and an acoustic warning sounds. Rinaccurately
The Parktronic system will switch off Rmay not display obstacles at all
automatically after 20 seconds and indicator
lamp ; in Parktronic switch : comes on. The rear view camera does not relieve you of
the responsibility to be cautious. Take care
X Have the Parktronic system checked at an and pay careful attention. The rear view
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon camera may not show objects which are
as possible.
Rvery close to the rear bumper
If only the red distance segments illuminate
and no acoustic warning sounds, the Runder the rear bumper
Parktronic system sensors are dirty (e.g. dirt, Rabove the tailgate handle
ice, snow and slush). Another cause could be
interference from other radio or ultrasonic You are responsible for safety at all times and
signals (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or must continue to pay attention to the
jackhammers). The Parktronic system will immediate surroundings when parking and
switch off automatically after 20 seconds and maneuvering. This includes the area behind,
indicator lamp ; in Parktronic switch : in front of, and beside the vehicle. Otherwise
you could endanger yourself and/or others.
comes on.
X Switch off the ignition. G Warning!
X Clean the Parktronic system sensors The rear view camera either will not function
(Y page 263). or will not function to its full capability if
X Switch on the ignition. Rthe tailgate is open
or Rit is raining very hard, snowing or foggy
X Check the Parktronic system operation at
Rit is night or you are parking/maneuvering
another location to rule out interference
your vehicle in an area where it is very dark
from outside radio or ultrasonic signals.
Rthe camera is exposed to a very bright white
light
Rear view camera
The rear view camera is an optical parking aid.
Z
164 Driving systems
Rthe immediate surroundings are Switching on/off

illuminated with fluorescent light (the X Switching on: Switch on the ignition.
display may flicker)
X Switch on the COMAND system.
Rthere is a sudden change in temperature, X Shift the automatic transmission to reverse
e.g. if you drive into a heated garage from gear R.
the cold (lens condensation) The COMAND system display will show the
Rthe camera lens is dirty or covered area behind the vehicle with guidelines.
Controls in detail
Rthe rear of your vehicle is damaged

G Warning!
In this case, have the position and setting Please note that objects which do not touch
of the camera checked by a qualified the ground may appear to be further away
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz than they actually are, for example:
recommends that you contact a Mercedes-
Rthe bumper of a vehicle parked behind you
Benz Center for this purpose.
Ra trailer hitch
Do not use the rear view camera in these
situations. Otherwise you could injure Rthe back of a truck
yourself or others and/or damage property
In such cases, you should not use the
including your vehicle while parking/
guidelines to judge the distance. You may
maneuvering.
misjudge the distance which increases the
risk of impacting the objects.
G Warning!
Use of rear view camera can be dangerous if Even when the object you approach is directly
you are color-blind or have impaired color on the ground do not approach the object any
vision. closer than the red guideline.
Only use rear view camera if you can see and
distinguish all colored guidelines shown by
rear view camera on the COMAND system
display.
Red guideline = indicates an approximate

distance of 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the
vehicle. Yellow guidelines ; indicate an
approximate distance of 3 ft (1 m) from the
Camera lens : must be free of dirt, ice, rear of the vehicle. Blue guidelines :
snow, and slush to function properly. Clean indicate the approximate width required for
the camera lens regularly. Being careful not the vehicle.
to scratch or damage the camera lens, see i The image from the rear view camera will
“Cleaning the rear view camera lens” no longer be displayed if you select another
(Y page 263). function on the COMAND system while

Overview of climate control system functions and air vents 165
reverse gear R is engaged. To display the X Switching off: Shift the automatic
image again, disengage and reengage transmission into park position P, neutral
reverse gear R. position N, or drive position D.
Overview of climate control system functions and air vents
Your vehicle is equipped with either of the following climate control systems:
Controls in detail
Climate control (Y page 167) 3-zone automatic climate control
USA only (Y page 173)
Canada only (Y page 175)

The climate control combines an automatic The 3-zone automatic climate control
heating and ventilation system with a cooling combines an automatic heating and
system. You can adjust the automatic ventilation system with a cooling system.
climate control separately for the driver’s You can adjust the 3-zone automatic climate
and passenger side. control separately for each zone in the
vehicle.
Z
166 Overview of climate control system functions and air vents
Rear automatic climate Center air vents

control (Y page 177)
Controls in detail
: Left center air vent, adjustable

The rear automatic climate control allows ; Right center air vent, adjustable
separate climate settings for the rear = Thumbwheel for air volume control for
compartment. adjustable right center air vent
? Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable left center air vent
Air vents
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheels =
G Warning! and ? in the required direction.
When operating the climate control, the air
that enters the passenger compartment
Side air vents
through the air vents can be very hot or very
cold (depending on the set temperature). This
may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected
skin in the immediate area of the air vents.
Always keep sufficient distance between
unprotected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
adjustment to direct the air to air vents in the
vehicle interior that are not in the immediate
area of unprotected skin.
For best possible performance of the climate

control: Example illustration driver’s side
: Left side defroster air vent, fixed
X Keep the air intake grille in front of the
; Left side air vent, adjustable
windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, and
any other debris. = Thumbwheel for air volume control for
X Always keep all air vents and grilles in the
adjustable left side air vent
passenger compartment free from X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel = in
obstruction. the required direction.
i For draft-free ventilation, move the
adjustable center and side air vents to the
middle position.

Climate control 167
Rear center console air vents When the front climate control panel is
switched on or off, the air supply through the
rear center air vents is also switched on or
off.
Controls in detail
: Left rear center air vent, adjustable
; Right rear center air vent, adjustable
= Rear climate control panel
Climate control
Control panel
Function Recommendation/Notes
: Temperature control, driver’s i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 170)
side (22†).
; Air distribution and air volume i Switches on the automatic (Y page 170)
(automatic mode) mode. The indicator lamp in
button Ã comes on.
Z
168 Climate control
= Front defroster i Keep this setting selected (Y page 171)
only until the windshield or the
side windows are clear again.
? Increasing air volume (Y page 171)
A Air distribution (directs air (Y page 171)
Controls in detail
through the windshield and side

air vents)
B AC cooling on/off i Switches on the air (Y page 169)
conditioning. The indicator
lamp in button Á comes
on.
Residual heat/ventilation i With the engine turned off, it (Y page 172)
is possible to continue to heat
or ventilate the interior.
C Temperature control, passenger i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 170)
side (22†).
D ± Rear climate control on/
off or air supply for rear
passenger compartment on/off
(USA only)
^ Rear climate control on/
off or air supply for rear
passenger compartment on/off
(Canada only)
E Air distribution (directs air (Y page 171)
through center and side air
vents)
F Air distribution (directs air (Y page 171)
through the footwells and side
air vents)
G Air volume display
H Decreasing air volume (Y page 171)
I Rear window defroster (Y page 183)
J Air recirculation i Only use this function for a (Y page 172)
short time, e.g. in a tunnel.
Otherwise, the windows can
fog up due to lack of fresh air.

Climate control 169
K Interior temperature sensor
L Climate control on/off i Switches on the climate (Y page 169)
control system. The indicator
lamp in button ^ goes out.
Controls in detail
Notes on climate control opening feature” (Y page 102). The climate
control will then adjust the interior
The climate control is operational whenever temperature to the set value much faster.
the engine is running. You can operate the
climate control system in either the
automatic or manual mode. The system cools Deactivating the climate control
or heats the interior depending on the system
selected interior temperature and the current
outside temperature. G Warning!
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors When the climate control system is switched
are filtered out before outside air enters the off, the outside air supply and circulation are
passenger compartment through the air also switched off. Only choose this setting for
distribution system. a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog
up, impairing visibility and endangering you
G Warning! and others.
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before X Deactivating: Press button ^.
its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
filter will reduce the air volume to the interior X Reactivating: Press button Ã.
and the windows could fog up, impairing
visibility and endangering you and others. i You can also press button ^ on the
Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as climate control panel.
possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
If you press button ¦ to reactivate the
Center.
climate control system, the defrosting
The air conditioning will not engage (no mode is activated.
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
(Y page 169). Deactivating the rear climate control
from the front
G Warning!
X Deactivating: Press button ±.
Follow the recommended settings for heating
and cooling given on the following pages. The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Otherwise the windows could fog up, X Reactivating: Press button ±.
impairing visibility and endangering you and The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
others.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the

Air conditioning
windshield free of snow and debris.
The air conditioning is operational while the
i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the
engine is running and cools the interior air to
interior before driving off, see “Summer
Z
170 Climate control
the temperature set by the operator. In Automatic mode

addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies
the interior air and helps prevent window When operating the climate control system in
fogging. automatic mode, the interior air temperature,
air volume and air distribution are adjusted
G Warning! automatically.
If you switch off the air conditioning, the In automatic mode, cooling with
vehicle will not be cooled when weather dehumidification is switched on. This function
Controls in detail
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up can be switched off if necessary.
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
visibility and endanger you and others. G Warning!
If you switch off the air conditioning, the
i Condensation may drip out from vehicle will not be cooled when weather
underneath the vehicle. This is normal and conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
not an indication of a malfunction. more quickly. Window fogging may impair
visibility and endanger you and others.
Deactivating X Set the desired temperature
It is possible to deactivate the air (Y page 170).
conditioning. The interior air will then no X Activating: Press button Ã.
longer be cooled or dehumidified. The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X Press button Á. The air volume and air distribution are
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. adjusted automatically.
The cooling function switches off after a i The settings for the passenger side are
short delay. also used for the rear passenger
compartment.
Activating X Deactivating: Press button I or K.
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can The indicator lamp in button Ã goes out.
dehumidify the interior air with the air The automatic operation of air volume
conditioning. switches off. The selected blower speed is
X Press button Á again. shown in air volume display G
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. (Y page 167).
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant or
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which X Press air distribution button ¯, P, or
are harmful to the ozone layer. O.
! If the air conditioning cannot be activated The indicator lamp in button Ã goes out.
again, this indicates that the air The automatic operation of air distribution
conditioning is losing refrigerant. The switches off.
compressor has turned off.
Have the air conditioning checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Setting the temperature
You can adjust the air temperature on each
side of the passenger compartment. You
should raise or lower the temperature setting

Climate control 171
in small increments, preferably starting at Front defroster

72‡ (22†).
You can use this setting to defrost the
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
windshield, for example if it is iced up.
temperature control : and/or C
You can also defog the windshield and the
(Y page 167) slightly clockwise or
side windows.
counterclockwise.
i Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield or the side windows are clear
Controls in detail
Adjusting air distribution again.
The air distribution can be adjusted manually. Activating
The symbols on the buttons represent the
following functions: X Press button ¦.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Symbol Function The climate control switches to the
¯ Directs air to the windshield and following functions automatically:
side air vents Rmost efficient blower speed and heating
power, depending on outside
P Directs air through the center temperature
and side air vents
Rair flows onto the windshield and the
O Directs air to the footwells and front door windows (side air vents must
side air vents be open)
Rthe air conditioning compressor
X Press the desired air distribution button switches on at outside temperatures
¯, P, or O. above approximately 41‡ (5†) for air-
The indicator lamp in button Ã goes out. drying
The automatic mode is switched off. Air
distribution is controlled according to the Adjustments
desired button. You can adjust the air volume and the
temperature when the front defroster is
switched on. The air flow will remain on the
Adjusting air volume windshield and front door windows.
X X Press button I to decrease or button
Decreasing/increasing: Press button
I or K. K to increase air volume to the desired
The automatic mode is switched off. The level.
selected blower speed is shown in air The air volume decreases/increases to the
volume display G (Y page 167). next lower/higher blower speed and
When using the Voice Control System, the heating switches to the temperature that
blower speed reduces automatically. When was set before the front defroster was
the Voice Control System is not used switched on.
anymore, the blower speed increases to the
previously selected level.
Z
172 Climate control
The indicator lamp in button ¦ goes out. G Warning!

The indicator lamp in button Á comes Fogged windows impair visibility,
on. endangering you and others. If the windows
or begin to fog on the inside, switching off the
X Turn temperature control : and/or C air recirculation mode immediately should
(Y page 167) slightly in any direction. clear interior window fogging. If interior
Heating switches to the temperature that window fogging persists, make sure the air
was set before the front defroster was conditioning is activated, or press button
Controls in detail
switched on. ¦.
The indicator lamp in button ¦ goes out. X Activating: Press button d.
The indicator lamp in button Á comes The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
on.
i The air recirculation mode is activated
i The air conditioning compressor remains automatically at high outside
on even if the indicator lamp in button temperatures.
¦ goes out. This helps to prevent the
The indicator lamp in button d is not lit
windshield from fogging.
when the air recirculation mode is switched
on automatically.
Deactivating
A quantity of outside air is added after
X Press button ¦ again. approximately 30 minutes.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. If you have turned off the air conditioning
Defrosting is turned off. or the outside temperature is below 41‡
The previous settings are once again in (5†), the air recirculation mode will not
effect. The air conditioning compressor switch on automatically.
remains switched on.
X Deactivating: Press button d.
i To deactivate, you can also press button The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
^ or Ã.
i The manually selected air recirculation
Windshield fogged on the outside mode is deactivated automatically:
Rafter 5 minutes if the outside
X Switch the windshield wipers on
temperature is below approximately
(Y page 98).
41‡ (5†)
X Press air distribution button P or O. Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning and
air-drying are turned off
Air recirculation mode
temperature is above approximately
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent 41‡ (5†)
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside (e. g. before driving through
a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of Residual heat and ventilation
outside air and recirculates the air in the
passenger compartment. With the engine switched off, it is possible to
continue to heat or ventilate the interior for
up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of
the residual heat produced by the engine.

3-zone automatic climate control 173
i How long the system will provide heating The residual heat is deactivated automatically
depends on the coolant temperature and Rwhen the ignition is switched on
the battery voltage.
Rafter approximately 30 minutes
Regardless of the temperature and air
volume set on the climate control panel, an Rif the battery voltage drops
interior temperature is aimed at by 72‡ Rif the coolant temperature is too low
(22†) and the blower runs on low speed to
protect the vehicle battery.
Controls in detail
X Activating: Switch off the ignition.
X Press button Á.
X Deactivating: Press button Á again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
3-zone automatic climate control

Control panels
USA only
Z
174 3-zone automatic climate control
side (22†).
button Ã comes on.
Controls in detail
= Front defroster i Keep this setting selected (Y page 181)

? Increasing air volume (Y page 181)
A Air distribution (directs air (Y page 180)
through the windshield and side
air vents)
B AC cooling on/off i Switches on the air (Y page 178)
on.
Residual heat/ventilation i With the engine turned off, it (Y page 183)
C Temperature control, passenger i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 179)
side (22†).
D Operating the rear climate (Y page 178)
control from the front
E Air distribution (directs air (Y page 180)
through center and side air
vents)
F Air distribution (directs air (Y page 180)
through the footwells and side
air vents)
G Air volume display
H Decreasing air volume (Y page 181)
I Rear window defroster (Y page 183)
J Air recirculation i Only use this function for a (Y page 182)

K Interior temperature sensor
L Climate control on/off i Switches on the climate (Y page 178)
control system. The indicator
Controls in detail
Canada only
side (22†).
button Ã comes on.
= Air distribution, driver’s side (Y page 180)
(directs air through the
windshield and side air vents)
? Front defroster i Keep this setting selected (Y page 181)
A Increasing air volume (Y page 181)
B Rear window defroster (Y page 183)
Z
C Air distribution, passenger side (Y page 180)
(directs air through the
windshield and side air vents)
D Operating the rear climate (Y page 178)
control from the front
Controls in detail
E Temperature control, passenger i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 179)

side (22†).
F Automatic climate control on/ i Switches on the climate (Y page 178)
off control system. The indicator
G Air distribution, passenger side (Y page 180)
(directs air through the footwells
and side air vents)
H Air distribution, passenger side (Y page 180)
(directs air through center and
side air vents)
I AC cooling on/off i Switches on the air (Y page 178)
on.
Residual heat ventilation i With the engine turned off, it (Y page 183)
J Display
K Decreasing air volume (Y page 181)
L Air recirculation i Only use this function for a (Y page 182)
M Air distribution, driver’s side (Y page 180)
(directs air through center and
side air vents)
N Air distribution, driver’s side (Y page 180)
(directs air through the footwells
and side air vents)

O Interior temperature sensor
P Adopting driver’s side settings (Y page 183)
for all zones
Rear automatic climate control Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors
Controls in detail
are filtered out before outside air enters the
passenger compartment through the air
distribution system.
G Warning!
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before
its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged
filter will reduce the air volume to the interior
and the windows could fog up, impairing
visibility and endangering you and others.
Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as
: Increasing air volume
possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
; Temperature control Center.
= Air distribution and air volume (automatic
mode) The air conditioning will not engage (no
? Air distribution (directs air through the cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
side air vents) (Y page 178).
A Air distribution (directs air through the G Warning!
footwells and side air vents) Follow the recommended settings for heating
B Rear automatic climate control on/off and cooling given on the following pages.
C Decreasing air volume Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
Notes on 3-zone automatic climate
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
control
windshield free of snow and debris.
With the help of a sun sensor, the automatic i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the
climate control determines the relation of the
interior before driving off, see “Summer
sun to the vehicle and automatically adjusts
opening feature” (Y page 102). The climate
the inside temperature for every individual
control will then adjust the interior
zone.
temperature to the set value much faster.
The automatic climate control is operational
whenever the engine is running. It cools the
vehicle’s interior according to the angle and
intensity of the sun’s rays, the outside
temperature and the selected temperature.
You can operate the automatic climate
control in either the automatic or manual
mode.
Z
Deactivating the climate control The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
system In display J, you will see the Y symbol
followed by ON and MODE. The MODE display
G Warning! is cleared and the indicator lamp in button
When the climate control system is switched X goes out after approximately
off, the outside air supply and circulation are 3 seconds.
also switched off. Only choose this setting for
The rear climate control switches on.
a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog
Controls in detail
up, impairing visibility and endangering you

and others. Deactivating the rear climate control
from the rear
Deactivating the front climate control X Deactivating: Press button ^.
X Deactivating: Press button ^. The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. X Reactivating: Press button Ã.
Canada only: Display J (Y page 175) is The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
cleared.
X Reactivating: Press button Ã.
Air conditioning
i You can also press button ^ on the The air conditioning is operational while the
climate control panel. engine is running and cools the interior air to
If you press button ¦ to reactivate the the temperature set by the operator. In
climate control system, the defrosting addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies
mode is activated. the interior air and helps prevent window
fogging.
Deactivating the rear climate control
from the front G Warning!
If you switch off the air conditioning, the
USA only vehicle will not be cooled when weather
X Deactivating: Press button ±. conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. more quickly. Window fogging may impair
X Reactivating: Press button ±.
i Condensation may drip out from
Canada only underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
X Deactivating: Press button X. not an indication of a malfunction.
In display J (Y page 175), you will see the
Deactivating
Y symbol followed by MODE for It is possible to deactivate the cooling
approximately 3 seconds. function of the climate control system. The
X Within these 3 seconds press button interior air will then no longer be cooled or
^. dehumidified.
In display J, you will see the Y symbol X Press button Á.
followed by OFF. The indicator lamp in the button goes out.

The rear climate control is switched off. The cooling function switches off after a
X Reactivating: Press button X.
short delay.

Activating i The settings for the passenger side are

also used for the rear passenger
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
compartment.
dehumidify the interior air with the air
conditioning. X Deactivating: Press button I or K.
X Press button Á again.

The indicator lamp in button Ã goes out.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. The automatic air volume is switched off
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant and is controlled according to the desired
setting. The automatic air distribution
Controls in detail
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which
are harmful to the ozone layer. remains switched on.
or
! If the air conditioning cannot be activated X Press an air distribution button Z17,
again, this indicates that the air
conditioning is losing refrigerant. The M17, \17, P, ¯18, c17 or
compressor has turned off. O.
The indicator lamp in button Ã goes out.
Have the air conditioning checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The automatic air distribution is switched
off and is controlled according to the
desired position. The automatic air volume
Automatic mode remains switched on.
You can switch the climate control system on Automatic mode with rear climate
and off for each zone of the passenger control panel
compartment as desired.
X Activating: Press button Ã.
When operating the climate control system in
automatic mode, the interior air temperature, The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
air volume and air distribution are adjusted The temperature, air volume and air
automatically. distribution are adjusted automatically.
In automatic mode, cooling with X Deactivating: Press button I or K.
dehumidification is switched on. This function The automatic air volume is switched off
can be switched off if necessary. and is controlled according to the desired
setting. The automatic air distribution
G Warning! remains switched on.
If you switch off the air conditioning, the or
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
X Press button M or P.
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
The automatic air distribution is switched
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
off and is controlled according to the
desired position. The automatic air volume
X Set the desired temperature remains switched on.
(Y page 179).
X Activating: Press button Ã.
Setting the temperature
You can set the air temperature for each of
the 3 zones separately.You should raise or
lower the temperature setting in small
17 Canada only
18 USA only
Z
increments, preferably starting at 72‡ Rear temperature with rear climate

(22†). control panel
temperature control ; (Y page 177)
slightly clockwise or counterclockwise.
Adjusting air distribution

Controls in detail
USA only
The air distribution can be adjusted manually.
The symbols on the buttons represent the
following functions:
Front temperature with front climate
control panel Symbol Function
¯ Directs air to the windshield and
USA only
side air vents
temperature control : and/or C P Directs air through the center
(Y page 173) slightly clockwise or and side air vents
counterclockwise. O Directs air to the footwells and
side air vents
Canada only
X Press the desired air distribution button
temperature control : and/or E
(Y page 175) slightly clockwise or ¯, P, or O.
counterclockwise. The automatic mode is switched off. The
indicator lamp in the desired button comes
on.
Rear temperature with front climate
control panel
Canada only
USA only
The air distribution can be adjusted
X Press button ±. separately on each side of the passenger
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn compartment.
temperature control C (Y page 173) The symbols on the buttons represent the
slightly clockwise or counterclockwise. following functions:
Canada only
X Press button X.
In display J (Y page 175) you will see the
Y symbol.
temperature control E (Y page 175)
slightly clockwise or counterclockwise.

Symbol Symbol Function When using the Voice Control System, the
blower speed reduces automatically. When
Driver’s Passenger
the Voice Control System is not used
side side
anymore, the blower speed increases to the
Z M Directs air to previously selected level.
the windshield
and side air
vents Front defroster
Controls in detail
\ P Directs air You can use this setting to defrost the
through the windshield, for example if it is iced up.
center, side You can also defog the windshield and the
and rear side windows.
passenger i Keep this setting selected only until the
compartment windshield or the side windows are clear
air vents again.
c O Directs air to
the footwells Activating
and side air X Press button ¦.
vents
The climate control switches to the
X Press the desired air distribution button following functions automatically:
Z, \, or c for the driver’s side, Rmost efficient blower speed and heating
or M, P, or O for the passenger power, depending on outside
side. temperature
The automatic mode is switched off. The Rair flows onto the windshield and the
indicator lamp in the desired button comes
front door windows (side air vents must
on.
be open)
Rthe air conditioning compressor
Adjusting air volume switches on at outside temperatures
above approximately 41‡ (5†) for air-
USA only drying
X Decrease/increase: Press button I or
K. Adjustments
The automatic mode is switched off. The You can adjust the air volume and the
selected blower speed is shown in air temperature when the front defroster is
volume display G (Y page 173). switched on. The air flow will remain on the
windshield and front door windows.
Canada only
X Press button I to decrease or button
X Decrease/increase: Press button I or K to increase air volume to the desired
K. level.
The automatic mode is switched off. The
The air volume decreases/increases to the
selected blower speed appears in display
next lower/higher blower speed and
J (Y page 175).
heating switches to the temperature that
Z
was set before the front defroster was X Press buttons O/c19 and P/
switched on. \19.
The indicator lamp in button ¦ goes out.
The indicator lamp in button Á comes
on. Air recirculation mode
or Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
X Turn temperature control : and/or C unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
(USA only) (Y page 173) or : and/or E
Controls in detail
from the outside (e. g. before driving through

(Canada only) (Y page 175) slightly in any a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of
direction. outside air and recirculates the air in the
Heating switches to the temperature that passenger compartment.
was set before the front defroster was
G Warning!
switched on.
Fogged windows impair visibility,
The indicator lamp in button ¦ goes out.
endangering you and others. If the windows
The indicator lamp in button Á comes begin to fog on the inside, switching off the
on. air recirculation mode immediately should
i The air conditioning compressor remains clear interior window fogging. If interior
on even if the indicator lamp in button window fogging persists, make sure the air
¦ goes out. This helps to prevent the conditioning is activated, or press button
windshield from fogging. ¦.
X Activating: Press button d.

Deactivating
X Press button ¦ once more.
i The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically at high outside
Defrosting is turned off.
temperatures.
The previous settings are once again in
The indicator lamp in button d is not lit
effect. The air conditioning compressor
when the air recirculation mode is switched
remains switched on.
on automatically.
i To deactivate, you can also press button A quantity of outside air is added after
^ or Ã. approximately 30 minutes.
If you have turned off the air conditioning
Windshield fogged on the outside or the outside temperature is below 41‡
X
(5†), the air recirculation mode will not
Switch the windshield wipers on
switch on automatically.
(Y page 98).
X Press button Ã. X Deactivating: Press button d.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Air volume and air distribution are
controlled separately for each zone.
If the automatic air volume and air
distribution are switched off:
19 Canada only

Rear window defroster 183
i The manually selected air recirculation Using driver-side settings for all
mode is deactivated automatically: temperature zones
This feature is only available in Canada
temperature is below approximately vehicles.
41‡ (5†) You can use the settings of the driver’s side,
Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning and such as temperature, air volume and air
air-drying are turned off distribution, for all temperature zones. These
Controls in detail
Rafter 30 minutes if the outside settings only need to be made once and the
temperature is above approximately climate control system will automatically
41‡ (5†) regulate the settings for all temperature
zones quickly and comfortably.
At outside temperatures above 79‡ (26†) X Activating: Adjust the air temperature, air
the system will not automatically switch back volume and air distribution.
to outside air. A quantity of outside air is
X Press button ¸.
added after approximately 30 minutes.
The driver-side settings are used for all
Residual heat and ventilation temperature zones.
X Deactivating: Press button ¸ again.
With the engine switched off, it is possible to
continue to heat or ventilate the interior for The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of
the residual heat produced by the engine. i If you manually set the temperature, air
volume or air distribution for the passenger
i How long the system will provide heating side or the rear passenger compartment
depends on the coolant temperature and when the MONO setting is active, the
the battery voltage. MONO setting will be switched off.
Regardless of the temperature and air
volume set on the climate control panel, an
interior temperature is aimed at by 72‡ Rear window defroster
(22†) and the blower runs on low speed to
protect the vehicle battery. G Warning!
X Activating: Switch off the ignition. Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driving.
X Press button Á.
Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.
X Deactivating: Press button Á again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. The rear window defroster uses a large
The residual heat is deactivated amount of power. To keep the battery drain
automatically: to a minimum, switch off the defroster as
soon as the rear window is clear. The
Rwhen the ignition is switched on defroster is switched off automatically after
Rafter approximately 30 minutes some time of operation depending on the
Rif the battery voltage drops outside temperature.
Rif the coolant temperature is too low
Z
184 Power tilt/sliding sunroof
X Switch on the ignition. shatter. This may result in an opening in the

X Switching on: Press button ª on the roof.
respective climate control panel. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. their seat belts or not wearing them properly
X Switching off: Press button ª again. may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
opening also presents a potential for injury for
The rear window defroster switches off when
occupants wearing their seat belts properly as
the battery voltage is too low. The indicator
entire body parts or portions of them may
Controls in detail
lamp in button ª flashes. Too many

protrude from the passenger compartment.
electrical consumers may be operating
simultaneously.
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not
X Switch off consumers that are currently not
transport any objects with sharp edges
needed if required. which can stick out of the tilt/sliding
sunroof.
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there
Power tilt/sliding sunroof is snow or ice on the roof, as this could
Opening and closing result in malfunctions.
If you cannot open or close the tilt/sliding
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55. sunroof due to a malfunction contact
G Warning! Roadside Assistance or an authorized
When opening or closing the tilt/sliding
sunroof, make sure there is no danger of ! Please keep in mind that weather
anyone being harmed by the opening/closing conditions can sometimes change rapidly.
procedure. Make sure to close the tilt/sliding sunroof
The tilt/sliding sunroof is equipped with the when leaving the vehicle. If water enters
express operation and automatic reversal the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics
function. If the movement of the tilt/sliding could be damaged which is not covered by
sunroof is blocked during the closing the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will stop
and open slightly. i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
The tilt/sliding sunroof operates differently sunroof using the SmartKey or the
when the sunroof switch is pressed and held. KEYLESS-GO function, see “Summer
See the “Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroof opening feature” (Y page 102) and
is blocked” section for details. “Convenience closing feature”
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/ (Y page 102).
sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by
i After switching off the ignition or
releasing the sunroof switch or, if the sunroof
removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch was moved past the resistance point
switch, you can operate the tilt/sliding
and released, by moving the sunroof switch in
sunroof until you open the driver’s or front
any direction.
passenger door. If no door was opened you
G Warning! can operate the tilt/sliding sunroof for up
to 5 minutes.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
In the event of an accident, the glass may

Power tilt/sliding sunroof 185
i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open,

resonance noises may result in addition to
the usual wind noises. They are caused by
minimal pressure changes in the passenger
compartment. To reduce or eliminate these
noises, change the position of the tilt/
sliding sunroof or open a window slightly.
Controls in detail
Raising
X Raising manually: Press and hold the
Sunroof switch sunroof switch to the resistance point in
With the sunroof closed or raised, you can direction of arrow :.
slide the sunroof screen forward and back. X Release the sunroof switch when the
desired position is reached.
X Express operation: To raise the tilt/
sliding sunroof completely, press the
sunroof switch past the resistance point in
direction of arrow : and release.
X Stopping during express operation:
Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
i Express raising is not available when the
tilt/sliding sunroof is open. The tilt/sliding
sunroof must be closed first.
Sunroof screen
Closing
X Closing manually: Pull and hold the
Opening sunroof switch to the resistance point in
direction of arrow =.
X Opening manually: Press and hold the X Release the sunroof switch when the
sunroof switch to the resistance point in desired position is reached.
direction of arrow ;.
X Express operation: To close the tilt/
X Release the sunroof switch when the
sliding sunroof completely, pull the sunroof
desired position is reached. switch past the resistance point in
X Express operation: To open the tilt/ direction of arrow = and release.
sliding sunroof completely, press the X Stopping during express operation:
sunroof switch past the resistance point in Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
direction of arrow ; and release.
X Stopping during express operation: Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroof is
Move the sunroof switch in any direction. blocked
i Express opening is not available when the G Warning!
tilt/sliding sunroof is raised. The tilt/ Make sure that nobody can become trapped
sliding sunroof must be closed first. and be seriously or even fatally injured when
Z
186 Loading and storing
closing the tilt/sliding sunroof with greater X Vehicles with SmartKey: Switch off the
force or without automatic reversal function. ignition and remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch.
If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Switch off the
blocked during the closing procedure (e.g. by ignition and open the driver’s door. This
ice or pollution), the tilt/sliding sunroof will puts the starter switch in position 0, same
stop and open slightly. as with the SmartKey removed from the
X Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof starter switch. The driver’s door then can
Controls in detail
has stopped and opened because it was be closed again.

blocked, pull and hold the sunroof switch X Remove the fuse for the tilt/sliding sunroof
in direction of arrow = until the tilt/sliding from the fuse box (Y page 342).
sunroof is fully closed. X Reinsert the fuse in the fuse box.
The tilt/sliding sunroof closes with greater X Switch on the ignition.
force.
X Press and hold the sunroof switch in
If the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked again and direction of arrow : (Y page 185) until the
opens slightly: tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the
X Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof rear.
was blocked and has opened, pull and hold X Keep holding the sunroof switch in
the sunroof switch in direction of arrow direction of arrow : for approximately
= until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully 1 second.
closed. X Check the express operation feature
The tilt/sliding sunroof closes without (Y page 185).
automatic reversal function. If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens and closes
completely, the roof is synchronized.
G Warning!
Otherwise repeat the above steps.
Pulling and holding the sunroof switch to
close the tilt/sliding sunroof immediately
after it had been blocked two times will cause
the tilt/sliding sunroof to close without any
Loading and storing
reversal function for as long as you hold the Loading instructions
sunroof switch.
G Warning!
Always fasten items being carried as securely
Synchronizing as possible. Use cargo tie-down rings and
fastening materials appropriate for the weight
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized and size of the load.
Rafter the battery has been disconnected or In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
discharged maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
Rafter a malfunction inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
vehicle occupants unless the items are
Rif the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
securely fastened in the vehicle.
smoothly
To help avoid personal injury during a collision
! If the tilt/sliding sunroof cannot be closed or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
or synchronized, contact an authorized transporting cargo. Do not pile luggage or
Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside cargo higher than the seat backrests.
Assistance.

Loading and storing 187
The cargo compartment is the preferred place The handling characteristics of a fully loaded
to carry objects. Always use cargo tie-down vehicle depend greatly on the load
rings, and if so equipped, always use the cargo distribution. It is therefore recommended to
net when transporting cargo. load the vehicle according to the illustration
Never drive a vehicle with the tailgate open. shown. The heaviest items are to be placed
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may towards the front of the vehicle.
enter vehicle interior resulting in i The cargo compartment is the preferred
unconsciousness and death. place to carry objects. The expanded cargo
Controls in detail
volume (Y page 189) should only be used
Load distribution for items which do not fit in the cargo
compartment alone.
Please pay attention to and comply with the
following instructions when loading the
vehicle and transporting cargo:
RAlways place items being carried against
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
them as securely as possible.
RThe heaviest portion of the cargo should
always be kept as low as possible against
front or rear seat backrests.
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the weight
of the vehicle including:
Rfuel
Rtools
Rspare wheel
Rinstalled accessories
Rpassengers
Rluggage/cargo
It must never exceed the load limit and the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) for your For additional safety when transporting cargo
vehicle. The load limit and the GVWR are while the rear seats are unoccupied, fasten
specified on the placard located on the the outer seat belts crosswise into the
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 227). opposite side buckles.
In addition, the load must be distributed so
that the weight on each axle never exceeds
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the Carriers
front and rear axle. The GVWR and GAWR for For information about further carriers,
your vehicle are indicated on the certification contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
label located on the driver’s door B-pillar Center.
(Y page 227).
For more information, see “Tire and Loading
Information” (Y page 227).
Z
G Warning! G Warning!
Only use carriers when the basic carrier bars Parcel nets are intended for storing light-
have been completely mounted. The left and weight items only, such as road maps, mail,
right roof rails are only stabilized by means of etc.
the basic carrier bars mounted. Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, or
Follow the manufacturer’s installation fragile objects may not be transported in the
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly parcel nets. In an accident, during hard
attached carrier or its load could become braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
Controls in detail
detached from the vehicle. thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of injury to vehicle occupants.
220 lb (100 kg). Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods
Take into consideration that when the roof is in the event of an accident.
loaded, the handling characteristics are
Parcel nets are located in the front passenger
different from those when operating the
footwell and on each of the front seat
vehicle without the roof loaded.
backrests.
Make sure
Ryou can raise the tilt/sliding sunroof at the
Cargo tie-down rings
rear completely
Ryou
Your vehicle is equipped with six cargo tie-
can open the tailgate completely
down rings.
Always follow loading instructions
(Y page 186).
Carefully secure cargo by applying even load
on all the cargo tie-down rings with a rope of
sufficient strength to hold down the cargo.
: Roof rails
Parcel nets
G Warning!
Vehicles with Occupant Classification System Cargo tie down rings, cargo compartment
(OCS)
Do not place objects with a combined weight
of more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg) into the parcel net
on the back of the front passenger seat.
Otherwise, the OCS may not be able to
properly approximate the occupant weight
category.

In an accident, during hard braking or sudden

maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
Always use the cargo tie-down rings.
G Warning!
Controls in detail
Never drive a vehicle with the tailgate open.
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
Cargo tie down rings, second-row footwell enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
Hooks Folding rear seat backrest forward

Four hooks are located on the rear ! Always release the seat cushion and fold
compartment trim panels, two on each side. it up before folding the seat backrest
Use the hooks to secure light-weight items forward. The seat backrest may otherwise
only. The maximum permissible weight per be damaged.
hook is 9 lbs (4 kg). When the seat backrest is folded forward,
the front seats may not be moved to the
rearmost position. Otherwise you could
damage the front and second-row seats.
Expanding cargo volume

You can separately fold the left and right rear
X Pull release loop :.
seat backrests to expand the cargo volume.
X Fold seat cushion ; forward.
G Warning!
When expanding the cargo volume, always
fully fold the corresponding seats and, if so
equipped, always use the cargo net when
transporting cargo.
Unless you are transporting cargo, the seat
backrests must remain properly locked in the
upright position.
Z
X Fold seat backrest : rearward until it

engages.
Red indicator A should no longer be
visible.
X Fold seat cushion ; rearward until it locks
into position.
X Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on seat backrest :.
Controls in detail
G Warning!
If a red indicator is visible with the seat
X Lower the rear seat head restraints backrest up, then the seat backrest is not
completely (Y page 84). properly locked into position.
X Pull release handle =.
Always lock seat backrest in its upright
A red indicator A will be visible and seat position when the rear seats are occupied, or
backrest ? is released. the extended cargo compartment is not in
use. Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the seat backrest.
X Adjust the rear seat head restraints, if

necessary (Y page 83).
Cargo compartment cover blind

The cargo compartment cover blind can be
installed behind the rear seats.
! With the cargo compartment cover blind
X Fold seat backrest ? forward. installed, do not pile luggage higher than
the lower edges of the rear side windows.
Returning rear seat backrest to original
position
! Make sure that the seat belt is not

pinched when folding rear seat backrest.

X Rolling out: Pull cargo compartment cover Cargo net

blind on handle : across the cargo
compartment. G Warning!
X Guide cargo compartment cover blind into Make sure the cargo net is properly engaged
mounts ; and release. at top and bottom position and the tightening
belts are securely fastened.
X Rolling up: Disengage cargo compartment Never use a damaged cargo net.
cover blind and guide retraction by its
Always use cargo net when transporting
Controls in detail
handle :.
cargo. This helps to avoid personal injury from
Before removing or installing cargo smaller objects being thrown around in the
compartment cover blind behind the rear occupant compartment during a collision or
seats, fold the left or right rear seat forward sudden maneuver.
(Y page 189). Afterwards, return the left or
The cargo net cannot prevent the movement
right rear seat into its original position.
of large, heavier objects into the passenger
compartment in an accident. Such items must
be properly secured using the cargo tie-down
rings in the cargo compartment floor.
Passenger use of seats behind installed cargo
net is restricted because of the footwell being
taken up by the net.
Use of the cargo net is a particularly

important safety factor when the vehicle is
loaded higher than the top of the seat
backrests with smaller objects. For your
X Removing: Roll up cargo compartment safety, always use the cargo net when
cover blind. transporting cargo.
X Push release button =. The cargo net can be installed behind the
B-pillar or the C-pillar.
X Pull cargo compartment cover blind ? to
the left.
X Remove cargo compartment cover blind.
X Installing: Make sure release button =

faces up and handle : is to the rear before
inserting the cargo compartment cover
blind.
X Place left side of cargo compartment cover
blind in left mount.
X Position right side of cargo compartment
cover blind over right mount.
RWith the cargo volume expanded
X Press release button = and guide cargo
(Y page 189), use holders : behind
compartment cover blind into mount. B-pillars and the cargo tie-down rings in the
X Make sure cargo compartment cover blind second-row footwell (Y page 189).
is securely fastened.
RWithout the cargo volume expanded, use
holders ; behind C-pillars and the cargo
Z
tie-down rings in the cargo compartment X Hook belt hook : into cargo tie-down
(Y page 188). ring ; in direction of arrow.
X Open the hook and loop fasteners on the X Pull tightening belt = by the loose end in
cargo net package. direction of arrow until the cargo net is
X Roll out the cargo net. pulled tight.
X Unfold the cargo net. X After driving a short distance, make sure
X Engage the upper cargo net bar.

the cargo net is still tight and, if necessary,
pull it tight again.
Controls in detail
The cargo net bar must engage audibly.
Installing the cargo net Loosening the cargo net
Belt hook attached behind the rear seat backrests

Cargo net installed behind the C-pillar
X Loosen the tightening belt by pulling
X Hang cargo net bar ; on holder : as
buckle : upward in direction of arrow.
indicated by the arrow.
X Remove belt hook ; from cargo tie-down
X Push cargo net bar ; forward into
holder : in direction of arrow. ring =.
X Engage lower cargo net bar.
The cargo net bar must engage audibly. Removing and storing the cargo net
X Take cargo net bar ; (Y page 192) out of
Pulling the cargo net tight holder : (Y page 192).
X Press the red button on the upper and lower
cargo net bar.
X Fold the cargo net.
X Roll up the cargo net.
X Close the hook and loop fasteners on the
cargo net package.
Front storage compartments

G Warning!
Belt hook attached behind the rear seat backrests
To help avoid personal injury during a collision
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when

storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or

cargo in the cargo compartment if possible.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
seat backrests.
If so equipped, always use the cargo net when
transporting cargo. The cargo net cannot
secure hard or heavy objects.
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy
Controls in detail
objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown 1 Glove box unlocked
about and injuring vehicle occupants during 2 Glove box locked
Rbraking
Rvehicle maneuvers Storage compartment in front center

console
Ran accident
Glove box
Depending on vehicle equipment, an AUX
socket or a media interface is located in the
glove box. For information on Audio AUX
mode or on media interface, see separate
COMAND system operating instructions.
X Press the front of the cover briefly.

The cover opens automatically.
Front armrest storage compartment
X Opening: Pull glove box lid release :.

X Closing: Push glove box lid ; upwards
until it engages.
You can lock the glove box, e.g. when the

vehicle is in the shop for service.
The glove box can only be locked or unlocked
with the mechanical key. i The Roadside Assistance button º
(Y page 201) and the Information button
Z
194 Useful features
E (Y page 202) are located in the Useful features

storage compartment.
Cup holders
X Opening storage compartment: Pull
button : and lift up armrest. G Warning!
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment,
only use containers that fit into the cup
holder. Use lids on open containers and do
Controls in detail
not fill containers to a height where the

contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants
may cause serious personal injury. Liquids
spilled on vehicle equipment may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Coin holders = are located in front of storage
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed.
compartment ;.
An open cup holder may cause injury to you
or others when contacted during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.
Rear storage compartments
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
Depending on vehicle equipment, your holder may come loose during braking,
vehicle may not be equipped with three vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
storage compartments in the front of the rear thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects
seats. thrown around in the vehicle interior may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Cup holder in front center console

A cup holder and a removable card/ticket
holder are located in the front center console.
The cup holder can be removed for cleaning
purposes.
: Storage compartment
; Storage compartment cover
= Release button
? Storage compartment
X Briefly press release button = on storage

compartment cover ;.
The storage compartment opens
automatically.

Useful features 195
X Removing: Hold cup holder at its

bridge ; and pull out bridge in direction of
arrow.
X Pull cup holder : out in direction of arrow.
X Reinstalling: First, insert cup holder :
and then insert bridge ;.
Controls in detail
Cup holder in rear armrest
X Fold down the rear armrest.
: Sun visor
; Additional sun visor
= Vanity mirror lamp
? Vanity mirror cover
A Holder, e.g. for gas cards
B Vanity mirror
C Mounting
Glare through the windshield

X Flip sun visor : down when you
! Do not sit on or lean your body weight experience glare.
against the armrest when it is folded down,
as you could otherwise damage it. Glare through a door window
X Close vanity mirror cover ? if opened.
Sun visors X Disengage sun visor : from mounting C.
X Pivot sun visor : to the side.
G Warning!
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors
closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected
glare can endanger you and others.
X Adjust sun visor : by pushing or pulling in

direction of arrows.
X Flip down additional sun visor ; when you
experience additional glare through the
windshield.
Z
196 Useful features
Vanity mirror
Vanity mirror lamp = only functions when
sun visor : is engaged in mounting C.
X Flip sun visor down.
X Lift up vanity mirror cover ?.
Vanity mirror lamp = comes on.
Controls in detail
Ashtrays
Center console ashtray X Opening: Press cover ; briefly.
i A storage compartment is located under X Removing ashtray insert: Grab ashtray
the ashtray insert. insert : on the sides and pull it out

upwards.
! The storage compartment is not heat- X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Install
proof. Therefore, do not stub cigarettes in ashtray insert :.
the storage compartment. X Closing: Push cover ;.
Cigarette lighter
G Warning!
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
Make sure any children traveling with you do
not injure themselves or start a fire with the
X Opening: Press cover ; briefly. hot cigarette lighter.
X Removing ashtray insert: Grab ashtray
insert : on the sides and pull it out If the engine is off and the cigarette lighter is
being used extensively, the vehicle battery
upwards.
may become discharged.
X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Install
X Open the ashtray (Y page 196).
ashtray insert :.
X Closing: Push cover ;.
Rear center console ashtray

! Close the ashtray when not in use and
before folding the rear seats. Otherwise
you could damage the ashtray.

Useful features 197
minimum level, the power outlets are

automatically switched off, to help
preserve engine starting power.
12V Power outlets

! If you use all power outlets in the vehicle,
make sure that the maximum current
Controls in detail
drawn does not exceed 55 A.
! The power outlets in the front passenger

footwell and cargo compartment are not
X Switch on the ignition. designed for use with the electric air pump.
X Push in cigarette lighter :. Use the power outlet in the second-row
Cigarette lighter : will pop out footwell for electric air pump operation.
automatically when hot.
The power outlets can be used to
X Take out cigarette lighter :. accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories
X Reinsert cigarette lighter : in its socket (e.g. mobile phone chargers, auxiliary lamps)
after use. up to a maximum of 20 A (240 W).
! The lighter socket can be used to
accommodate 12V DC electrical
accessories (up to a maximum of 180 W)
designed for use with the standard
“cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in mind,
however, that connecting accessories to
the lighter socket (for example extensive
connecting and disconnecting, or using
plugs that do not fit properly) can damage
the lighter socket. With the socket
damaged, the lighter may not function Front passenger footwell
properly any longer.
! The cigarette lighter is not designed for

use with the electric air pump. Use the
power outlet in the second-row footwell for
electric air pump operation.
Power outlets
i You can use the power outlets even if the
ignition is switched off.
An emergency shut-off feature is designed Second-row footwell
to prevent the vehicle’s on-board voltage
from dropping below a minimum level. If
the on-board voltage drops to this
Z
198 Useful features
Controls in detail
Cargo compartment The 115V AC socket : provides an

alternating current of 115 volts, which
115V AC Socket enables you to connect small electrical
devices with a combined received power of
G Warning!
150 W at most. You can connect small
The 115V AC socket operates at high voltage. devices such as game consoles, mobile
Use the 115V AC socket in the vehicle with phone chargers, laptops, etc.
the same caution and prudence that you
Prerequisites for operation:
exercise when using power outlets at home.
Keep any fluids away from the 115V AC RThe 12V power outlets in the second-row
socket. Do not clean the socket with fluids or footwell and cargo compartment
tapered objects. Keep the 115V AC socket (Y page 197) are operational.
cover in the closed position, when not in use. RThe plug of the small device must be
Otherwise, you could suffer an electric shock inserted fully into 115V AC socket :.
and be seriously or even fatally injured.
RThe on-board voltage of the vehicle is within
G Warning! the permissible voltage range.
A device that you connect must have a RThe specified wattage of the small device
suitable plug that complies with U.S. is identical or lower than the maximum
standards. Never pull on the cable to unplug permissible wattage (150 W) of the 115V
a plug from the 115V AC socket. Do not use AC socket :.
a damaged connection cable. The 115V AC
X Operation: Open cover =.
socket may not be connected to another
115V AC power source. Do not use converters X Insert the plug of the small device into
to a grounding plug with the 115V AC socket. 115V AC socket :.
This could cause serious personal injury to LED ; comes on.
you and/or others. If LED ; does not come on, refer to the
section on possible nonoperation causes.
G Warning!
X Switching off: Pull the plug out of 115V AC
If the 115V AC socket is damaged or torn out
socket :.
of the trim, do not use or touch the 115V AC
socket. Using a 115V AC socket that is Do not pull on the cable.
damaged or torn out of the trim could cause X Close cover =.
serious personal injury to you and/or others. Possible nonoperation causes:
RThe on-board voltage of the vehicle is not
within the permissible voltage range.

Useful features 199
X Start the engine. monitoring services, connection and

RThe
cellular air time
temperature of the DC/AC inverter is
temporarily too high. Rvehicle battery power is available
X Pull the plug of the small device out of Rthe relevant cellular phone network and
115V AC socket : and plug it in again GPS signals are available and pass the
after waiting a few minutes. information on to the Customer Assistance
Center
RSome small devices have a continuous
Controls in detail
power rating of less than 150 W but a very i Location of the vehicle on a map is only
high switch-on current. Such devices will possible if the vehicle is able to receive
not operate. When connecting such a signals from the GPS satellite network and
device, 115V AC socket : will not provide pass the information on to the Customer
power. Assistance Center.
If LED ; still does not come on, contact an
The Tele Aid system
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three types
Tele Aid of response:
! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a RAutomatic and manual emergency
subscriber agreement must be completed. RRoadside Assistance
To ensure your system is activated and
RInformation
operational, please press Information
button E to perform the acquaintance To adjust the speaker volume during a Tele
call. Failure to complete either of these Aid call do the following:
steps may result in a system that is not
X Press button W or X on the
activated.
multifunction steering wheel.
If you have any questions regarding
activation, please call the Customer or
Assistance Center at X Use the adjustment button on your
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) COMAND system.
(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada Be sure to check “Owner’s Online” at
only). www.mbusa.com (USA only) for more
Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid information and a description of all available
acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID features.
and password in the mail. You may use this
password to access the Tele Aid section in System self-test
“Owner’s Online” at www.mbusa.com (USA The system performs a self-test after you
only). The “My Tele Aid” section will give you have switched on the ignition.
access to account information, remote door
unlock and more. G Warning!
The Tele Aid system is available if A malfunction in the system has been
detected if any or all of the following
Rit has been activated and is operational.
conditions occur:
Activation requires a subscription for
Z
200 Useful features
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does An emergency call is initiated automatically
not come on during the system self-test. following an accident in which the Emergency
RThe
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) or air bags have
indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
deployed.
button º does not come on during the
system self-test. i An automatically initiated Tele Aid
RThe
emergency call cannot be canceled.
indicator lamp in Information button
E does not come on during the system An emergency call can also be initiated
Controls in detail
self-test. manually (Y page 201).

RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button, Once the emergency call is in progress, the
Roadside Assistance button º, or indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to
Information button E remains flash. The message Connecting Call
illuminated constantly in red after the appears in the multifunction display and the
system self-test. COMAND system is muted. When the
connection is established, the message
RThe message Tele Aid Inoperative or Call Connected appears in the
Tele Aid Not Activated appears in the multifunction display.
multifunction display after the system self-
All information relevant to the emergency,
test
such as the location of the vehicle
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, (determined by the GPS satellite location
the system may not operate as expected. In system), vehicle model, identification number
case of an emergency, help will have to be and color are generated.
summoned by other means. A voice connection between the Customer
Have the system checked at the nearest Assistance Center and the occupants of the
Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the vehicle will be established automatically soon
Customer Assistance Center at after the emergency call has been initiated.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) The Customer Assistance Center will attempt
(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada only) to determine the nature of the emergency
as soon as possible. more precisely, provided they can speak to
an occupant of the vehicle.
Emergency calls i If no vehicle occupant responds, an
! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a ambulance will be sent to the vehicle
subscriber agreement must be completed. immediately.
To ensure your system is activated and G Warning!
operational, please press Information If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
button E to perform the acquaintance flashing continuously and there was no voice
call. Failure to complete either of these connection to the Customer Assistance
steps may result in a system that is not Center established, then the Tele Aid system
activated. could not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the
If you have any questions regarding relevant cellular phone network is not
activation, please call the Customer available).
Assistance Center at The message Call Failed appears in the
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) multifunction display for approximately
(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada 10 seconds.
only).

Useful features 201
Should this occur, assistance must be X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on

summoned by other means. the multifunction steering wheel.
or
i The “911” emergency call system is a X Press the respective button for ending a
public service. Using it without due cause telephone call on the COMAND system.
is a criminal offense.
Initiating an emergency call manually Roadside Assistance button
Controls in detail
X Open the front armrest storage
compartment (Y page 193).
X Briefly press on cover : to open.

X Press SOS button ; briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; will X Press and hold Roadside Assistance
flash until the emergency call is concluded. button : for longer than 2 seconds.
X Wait for a voice connection to the A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
Customer Assistance Center. Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The
X Close cover : after the emergency call is indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
concluded. button : will flash while the call is in
progress. The message Connecting
G Warning! Call will appear in the multifunction
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the display and the COMAND system is muted.
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, When the connection is established, the
vehicle in a dangerous road location), please message Call Connected appears in the
do not wait for voice contact after you have multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will
pressed the emergency button. Carefully transmit data generating the vehicle
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. identification number, model, color and
The Customer Assistance Center will location (subject to availability of cellular and
automatically contact local emergency GPS signals).
officials with the vehicle’s approximate
i The COMAND system display indicates
location if they receive an automatic SOS
signal and cannot make voice contact with the
that a Tele Aid call is in progress. While the
vehicle occupants.
call is connected you can change to the
navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
button on the COMAND system. Spoken
commands are not available.
Z
202 Useful features
A voice connection between the Roadside

Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of
the vehicle will be established.
X Describe the nature of the need for
assistance.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow
Controls in detail
your vehicle to the nearest authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such as
labor and/or towing, charges may apply.
Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for X Press and hold Information button : for
more information. longer than 2 seconds.
Sign and Drive services (USA only): A call to the Customer Assistance Center
Services such as a jump start, a few gallons will be initiated. The indicator lamp in
of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with Information button : will flash while the
the vehicle spare wheel are obtainable at no call is in progress. The message
charge. Connecting Call will appear in the
multifunction display and the COMAND
i If the indicator lamp in Roadside system is muted.
Assistance button : is flashing When the connection is established, the
continuously and there was no voice message Call Connected appears in the
connection to the Customer Assistance multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will
Center established, then the Tele Aid transmit data generating the vehicle
system could not initiate a Roadside identification number, model, color and
Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular location (subject to availability of cellular and
phone network is not available). The GPS signals).
message Call Failed appears in the
multifunction display. i The COMAND system display indicates
that a Tele Aid call is in progress. While the
X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on call is connected you can change to the
the multifunction steering wheel. navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
or button on the COMAND system. Spoken
X Press the respective button for ending a commands are not available.
telephone call on the COMAND system. A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
Information button occupants of the vehicle will be established.
Information regarding the operation of your
X Open the front armrest storage vehicle, the nearest authorized Mercedes-
compartment (Y page 193). Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products
and services is available to you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com (USA
only), log in to “Owner’s Online” and visit the
“My Tele Aid” section to learn more.

Useful features 203
i If the indicator lamp in Information Destination Download allows you access to a

button : is flashing continuously and database of over 10 million points of interest
there was no voice connection to the (POIs) that can be downloaded to your
Customer Assistance Center established, vehicle’s navigation system. If you know the
then the Tele Aid system could not initiate destination, the address can be downloaded,
an Information call (e.g. the relevant or can be provided with points of interests
cellular phone network is not available). near your location.
The message Call Failed appears in the
Route guidance
Controls in detail
You will be prompted to confirm that route
X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on guidance to the entered address is to be
the multifunction steering wheel. started.
or X Select Yes using button = or ; on
X Press the respective button for ending a the COMAND system.
telephone call on the COMAND system. X Press button 9 on the COMAND system
to confirm.
Call priority The system calculates the route and
If other service calls such as a Roadside subsequently starts the route guidance to the
Assistance call or Information call are active, defined address.
an emergency call is still possible. In this i If you select No, you can save the address
case, the emergency call will take priority and to your address book.
override all other active calls.
The indicator lamp in the respective button i The Destination Download feature is
flashes until the call is concluded. Automatic available if the relevant mobile phone
initiated emergency calls can only be network is available and data connection is
terminated by a Customer Assistance Center possible.
representative. All other calls can be
terminated by pressing button ~ on the Search & Send
multifunction steering wheel or the
“Search & Send” is a navigation destination
respective button for ending a telephone call
address entry service. For more information
on the COMAND system.
on “Search & Send”, refer to separate
i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, COMAND system operating instructions.
the COMAND system audio is muted. The
mobile phone is no longer connected to the Remote door unlock
COMAND system. If you must use this
phone, we recommend that you use it only In case you have locked your vehicle
with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
location. and the reserve SmartKey is not available:
X Contact the Customer Assistance Center
Destination Download to the COMAND at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
system (1-800-367-6372) (USA only) or
1-888-923-8367 (Canada only).
i The components and operating principles You will be asked to provide your password.
of the COMAND system can be found in the X Then return to your vehicle at the time
separate COMAND system operating arranged and pull the tailgate recessed
instructions. handle (Y page 75) for a minimum of
Z
204 Useful features
20 seconds until the indicator lamp in the Garage door opener

SOS button is flashing.
The message Connecting Call appears in The integrated remote control can operate up
the multifunction display. to three separately controlled devices
compatible with HomeLink® or some other
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle
systems.
via Internet in the “My Tele Aid” section of
“Owner’s Online”, using your ID and password G Warning!
(USA only). Before programming the integrated remote
Controls in detail
i The remote door unlock feature is control to a garage door opener or gate
available if the relevant cellular phone operator, make sure people and objects are
network is available. out of the way of the device to prevent
potential harm or damage. When
The SOS button will flash and the message
programming a garage door opener, the door
Call Connected will appear in the
moves up or down. When programming a gate
multifunction display to indicate receipt of
operator, the gate opens or closes.
the door unlock command.
Do not use the integrated remote control with
If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled
any garage door opener that lacks safety stop
for more than 20 seconds before door
and reverse features as required by U.S.
unlock authorization was received by the
federal safety standards (this includes any
Customer Assistance Center, you must
garage door opener model manufactured
wait 15 minutes before pulling the tailgate
before April 1, 1982). A garage door that
recessed handle again.
cannot detect an object - signaling the door
to stop and reverse - does not meet current
Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services U.S. federal safety standards.
In the event your vehicle was stolen: When programming a garage door opener,
X Report the incident to the police. park vehicle outside the garage.
The police will issue a numbered incident Do not run the engine while programming the
report. integrated remote control. Inhalation of
X Pass this number on to the Customer exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All
Assistance Center along with your exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO),
password. and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness
The Customer Assistance Center will then and possible death.
attempt to covertly contact the vehicle’s
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is
located, the Customer Assistance Center
will contact the local law enforcement and
you. The vehicle’s location will only be
provided to law enforcement.
i If the anti-theft alarm stays on for more
than 30 seconds, the Tele Aid system will
notify the Customer Assistance Center
automatically.
Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote

control

Useful features 205
Hand-held remote control A is not part of the X Step 5: After indicator lamp : changes
vehicle equipment. from a slow to a rapidly flashing light,
release the hand-held remote control
Programming the integrated remote button and the signal transmitter button.
control X Step 6: Press and hold the just-trained
X Step 1: Switch on the ignition. signal transmitter button (;, = or ?) and

observe indicator lamp :.
X Step 2: If you have previously programmed
If indicator lamp : stays on constantly,
Controls in detail
a signal transmitter button and wish to
retain its programming, proceed to step 3. programming is complete and your device
should activate when the respective signal
or transmitter button (;, = or ?) is pressed
X If you are programming the integrated
and released.
remote control for the first time, press and
hold the two outer signal transmitter i If indicator lamp : flashes rapidly for
buttons ; and ? and release them when approximately 2 seconds and then turns to
indicator lamp : begins to flash after a constant light, continue with
approximately 20 seconds. programming steps 8 through 12 as your
Do not hold the buttons for longer than garage door opener may be equipped with
30 seconds. the “rolling code” feature.
This procedure erases any previous X Step 7: To program the remaining two
settings for all three channels and signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
initializes the memory. If you later wish to above starting with step 3.
program a second and/or third hand-held
transmitter to the remaining two signal Rolling code programming
transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step To train a garage door opener (or other rolling
and begin directly with step 3. code devices) with the rolling code feature,
X Step 3: Hold the end of hand-held remote follow these instructions after completing the
control A of the device you wish to train “Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) of
approximately 2 to 12 in (5 to 30 cm) away this text. For your convenience and to
from the signal transmitter button (;, = complete the procedure faster, you might
or ?) to be programmed, while keeping want to have someone assist you.
indicator lamp : in view. X Step 8: Locate the “training” button on the
X Step 4: Using both hands, simultaneously garage door opener motor head unit.
press hand-held remote control button B i Exact location and color of the button may
and the desired signal transmitter button vary by garage door opener brand.
(;, = or ?). Do not release the buttons Depending on manufacturer, the “training”
until step 5 is completed. button may also be referred to as “learn” or
Indicator lamp : will flash, first slowly and “smart” button. If there is difficulty locating
then rapidly. the transmitting button, refer to the garage
door opener Operator’s Manual.
i Indicator lamp : flashes immediately
the first time the signal transmitter button X Step 9: Press the “training” button on the
is programmed. If this button has already garage door opener motor head unit.
been programmed, the indicator lamp will The “training light” is activated.
start flashing after 20 seconds. You have 30 seconds to initiate the
following two steps.
Z
206 Useful features
X Step 10: Return to the vehicle and firmly Repeat this sequence on the hand-held
press, hold for 2 seconds and release the remote control until the frequency signal
programmed signal transmitter button (;, has been learned.
= or ?). Upon successful training, indicator
X Step 11: Press, hold for 2 seconds and lamp : will flash slowly and then rapidly
release same signal transmitter button a after several seconds.
second time to complete the training X Proceed with programming step 5 and
process. step 6 to complete.
Controls in detail
i Some garage door openers (or other i Upon completion of programming the
rolling code equipped devices) may require integrated remote control, make sure you
you to press, hold for 2 seconds and retain the hand-held remote control that
release the same signal transmitter button came with the garage door opener, gate
a third time to complete the training operator or other device. You may need it
process. for use in other vehicles, for future
X Step 12: Confirm the garage door
programming of an integrated remote
control, or simply for continued use as a
operation by pressing the programmed
hand-held remote control to operate the
signal transmitter button (;, = or ?).
respective device in other situations.
X Step 13: To program the remaining two
signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps Reprogramming a single signal
above starting with step 3. transmitter button
Gate operator/Canadian programming To program a device using a signal
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter button previously trained, follow
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) these steps:
after several seconds of transmission which X Switch on the ignition.
may not be long enough for the integrated X Press and hold the desired signal
signal transmitter to pick up the signal during transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do not
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, release the button.
some U.S. gate operators are designed to Indicator lamp : will begin to flash after
“time-out” in the same manner.
20 seconds.
If you live in Canada or if you are having X Without releasing the signal transmitter
difficulties programming a gate operator
button, proceed with programming starting
(regardless of where you live) by using the
with step 3.
programming procedures, replace step 4 with
the following:
Operation of integrated remote control
X Step 4: Press and hold the signal
transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do not X Switch on the ignition.
release this button until it has been X Select and press the appropriate
successfully trained. integrated signal transmitter button (;,
X While still holding down the signal = or ?) to activate the remote controlled
transmitter button (;, = or ?), “cycle” device.
your hand-held remote control button B The integrated remote control transmitter
as follows: Press and hold button B for continues to send the signal as long as the
2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds, button is pressed – up to 20 seconds.
and again press and hold it for 2 seconds.

Useful features 207
Erasing the integrated remote control i Certain types of garage door openers are
memory incompatible with the integrated remote
control. If you should experience further
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of difficulties with programming the
all three channels. integrated remote control, contact an
X Switch on the ignition. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
X Simultaneously press and hold outer signal
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
transmitter buttons ; and ?, for Center (USA only) at
Controls in detail
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372),
approximately 20 seconds, until indicator
lamp : flashes rapidly. Do not hold for or the HomeLink® Hotline (USA only) at
1-800-355-3515, or the Customer Service
longer than 30 seconds.
(Canada only) at 1-800-387-0100.
The codes of all three channels are erased.
i USA only:
Programming tips This device complies with Part 15 of the
If you are having difficulty programming the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
integrated remote control, here are some following two conditions:
helpful tips: 1. This device may not cause harmful
RCheck the frequency of hand-held remote interference, and
control A (typically located on the reverse 2. this device must accept any
side of the remote). The integrated remote interference received, including
control is compatible with radio-frequency interference that may cause undesired
devices operating between 280-390 MHz. operation.
RPut a new battery in hand-held remote Any unauthorized modification to this
control A. This will increase the likelihood device could void the user’s authority to
of the hand-held remote control sending a operate the equipment.
stronger and more accurate signal to the
integrated remote control. i Canada only:
RWhile performing step 3, hold hand-held Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
remote control A at different lengths and the following two conditions:
angles from the signal transmitter button
(;, = or ?) you are programming. 1. This device may not cause interference,
and
Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2
to 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) away or the same 2. this device must accept any
angle at varying distances. interference received, including
RIf
another hand-held remote control is
operation of the device.
available for the same device, try the
programming steps again using that other Any unauthorized modification to this
hand-held remote control. Make sure new device could void the user’s authority to
batteries are in the hand-held remote operate the equipment.
control before beginning the procedure.
RStraighten the antenna wire from the
Compass
garage door opener assembly. This may
help improve transmitting and/or receiving X Calling up the compass: Press button
signals. V or U on the multifunction steering
Z
208 Useful features
wheel repeatedly until the AIRMATIC/ X Removing: Pull floormat off of retainer
Compass menu appears in the pins :.
multifunction display. X Installing: Press floormat eyelets ; onto
The compass displays the direction into retainer pins :.
which the vehicle is currently traveling: N,
NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW.
Infrared reflecting windshield
Controls in detail
Infrared reflecting glass reduces the amount

of radiated heat entering the vehicle interior
through the windows.
The infrared reflecting glass also prevents the
transmission of signals through the glass by
in-vehicle electronic devices, e.g. electronic
i If your vehicle is not equipped with air toll collection devices.
suspension program, the multifunction
display will show the compass only.
Floormats
G Warning!
Whenever you are using floormats, make sure
there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely fastened
using the fastening equipment. To allow the use of these devices in the
Before driving off, check that the floormats vehicle, infrared transparent areas : are
are securely in place and adjust them if placed in the windshield.
necessary. A loose floormat could slip and
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
Do not place several floormats on top of each
other as this may impair pedal movement.
X Move the driver’s seat or front passenger

seat as far to the rear as possible.

209
Vehicle equipment ............................ 210

The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ....... 210
At the gas station ............................. 210
Engine compartment ........................ 212
Tires and wheels ............................... 218
Winter driving ................................... 242
Driving instructions .......................... 244
Maintenance ...................................... 258
Vehicle care ....................................... 260
Operation

210 At the gas station
Vehicle equipment first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) after the engine,
the transfer case, the front differential or the
i This Operator’s Manual describes all rear differential have been replaced.
features, standard or optional, potentially i Always obey applicable speed limits.
available for your vehicle at the time of
purchase. Please be aware that your
vehicle might not be equipped with all At the gas station
features described in this manual.
Refueling
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) G Warning!

Operation
Gasoline and diesel fuels are highly flammable

The more cautiously you treat your vehicle and poisonous. They burn violently and can
during the break-in period, the more satisfied cause serious injury.
you will be with its performance later on. Never allow sparks, flames or smoking
RDrive your vehicle during the first materials near gasoline or diesel fuel!
1 000 miles (1 500 km) at varying but Turn off the engine before refueling.
moderate vehicle and engine speeds. Whenever you are around gasoline or diesel
RDuring this period, avoid heavy loads (full fuel, avoid inhaling fumes and any skin or
throttle driving) and excessive engine clothing contact. Extinguish all smoking
speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm materials.
in each gear). Direct skin contact with fuels and the
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
RAvoid accelerating by kickdown. health.
RDo not attempt to slow the vehicle down by
shifting to a lower gear using the gear G Warning!
selector lever. Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
RSelect gear ranges 3, 2 or 1 (Y page 113) pressure in the system which could cause a
gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
only when driving at moderate speeds (for
spray back out when removing the fuel pump
hill driving).
nozzle, which could cause personal injury.
After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) you may
gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds G Warning!
to the permissible maximum. Do not fill diesel tanks with gasoline. Do not
! Additional instructions for ML 63 AMG: mix diesel fuel with gasoline. Otherwise the
fuel system and engine could be damaged. In
RDuring the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km),
addition, the vehicle could catch fire.
do not exceed a speed of 85 mph
(140 km/h). G Warning!
RDuring this period, avoid engine speeds HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
above 4 500 rpm in each gear. the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
RShift gears in a timely manner. Instructions included in your vehicle literature
portfolio. You may otherwise not receive all
RSelect C as the preferred shift program
necessary safety information and warning for
for the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km). the operation of your vehicle.
All of the above instructions, as may apply to
your vehicle type, also apply when driving the

At the gas station 211
! Never refuel vehicles with gasoline engine HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm
with diesel fuel. Never refuel vehicles with SULFUR MAXIMUM).
diesel engine with gasoline. Even small The use of such non-approved fuels and/or
amounts of incorrect fuel will damage the special additives is not covered by the
fuel system and engine. Damage resulting Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
from the use of non-approved fuels or fuel
additives or resulting from mixing gasoline i Gasoline engine:
with diesel fuel or vice versa is not covered Only use premium unleaded gasoline with
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91
(average of 96 RON/86 MON).
! If you have accidentally filled the tank Information on gasoline quality can
Operation
with incorrect or non-approved fuel, do not normally be found on the fuel pump. Please
switch on the ignition. Otherwise the contact gas station personnel in case
incorrect or non-approved fuel will get into labels on the pump cannot be found.
the fuel lines. The fuel system must be
For more information on gasoline, see
drained completely. Contact an authorized
“Premium unleaded gasoline (gasoline
Mercedes-Benz Center to have the fuel
engine)” (Y page 360), see “Fuel
system drained completely.
requirements” (Y page 360), or contact an
! Gasoline engine: authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or visit
www.mbusa.com (USA only).
To prevent damage to the catalytic
converters, only use premium unleaded i Diesel engine:
gasoline in this vehicle. Only use commercially available vehicular
Any noticeable irregularities in engine ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL
operation should be repaired promptly. FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM).
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may Information on diesel quality can normally
reach the catalytic converter, causing it to be found on the fuel pump. Please contact
overheat and potentially start a fire. gas station personnel in case labels on the
pump cannot be found.
! Diesel engine:
For more information on diesel fuels, see
When filling the diesel fuel tank using fuel “Fuel requirements” (Y page 360), or
containers, place a filling filter, a suede contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
cloth or a clean flannel cloth as a filter. Center, or visit www.mbusa.com (USA
Otherwise, particles from the fuel container only).
could clog the fuel lines and/or the diesel
injection system. i Diesel engine:
If you have driven the vehicle until the tank
! Diesel engine: is empty, the fuel system needs to be bled
The engine is more susceptible to wear and (Y page 331).
damage if you use
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the
Rmarine diesel fuel
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO automatically
Rheating oil locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.
Radditives i In case the central locking system does
The exhaust aftertreatment device will be not release the fuel filler flap, see “Fuel filler
seriously damaged if you use any other flap” (Y page 308).
diesel fuel than ULTRA-LOW SULFUR
Z
212 Engine compartment
The fuel filler flap is located on the right-hand X Closing: Turn fuel filler cap ; clockwise
side of the vehicle towards the rear. until it audibly engages.
i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
vehicle. Otherwise the flap locking pin will
prevent closing the fuel filler flap.
X Close fuel filler flap :.
Low outside temperatures (diesel

engine)
Operation
! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not

blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosene.
X
The fuel system and engine will otherwise
Turn off the engine.
be damaged, which is not covered by the
i Leaving the engine running and the fuel Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
filler cap open can cause the yellow fuel To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with
tank reserve warning lamp to flash and the improved cold flow characteristics is offered
malfunction indicator lamp ! (USA in the winter months. Check with your fuel
only) or ; (Canada only) to illuminate. retailer.
For more information, see also “Practical
hints” (Y page 303).
Check regularly and before a long trip
switch. For information on quantities and
KEYLESS-GO: Open the driver’s door. This requirements of operating agents, see “Fuels,
puts the starter switch in position 0, same coolants, lubricants, etc.” (Y page 356).
as with the SmartKey removed from the Check the following:
starter switch. The driver’s door then can REngine oil level (Y page 214)
be closed again. RTire inflation pressure (Y page 221)
X Opening: Press fuel filler flap : at the
point indicated by the arrow.
RCoolant level (Y page 216)
X Turn fuel filler cap ; counterclockwise. RVehicle lighting (Y page 311)
X Take off fuel filler cap ;. RWasher system and headlamp cleaning
system (Y page 217)
! The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel RBrake fluid (Y page 217)
filler neck. Do not drop the cap. It could
damage the vehicle paint finish.
X Set fuel filler cap ; on fuel filler flap :. Engine compartment
X Fully insert filler nozzle unit and refuel.
Hood
X Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit
cuts out – do not top off or overfill. G Warning!
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle
is in motion. Otherwise the hood could be
forced open by passing air flow.

Engine compartment 213
This could cause the hood to come loose and G Warning!

injure you and/or others. Vehicles with gasoline engine:
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
G Warning! ignition system. Because of the high voltage
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read it is dangerous to touch any components
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
Instructions included in your vehicle literature socket) of the ignition system
Rwith the engine running
the operation of your vehicle. Rwhile starting the engine
Operation
Rwhen the ignition is switched on and the
Opening engine is turned manually
G Warning!
G Warning!
Do not open the hood when the engine is
Vehicles with diesel engine:
overheated. You could be seriously injured.
The engine is equipped with a high-voltage
Observe the coolant temperature display to
electronic control unit for the injection
determine whether the engine may be
system. Because of the high voltage it is
overheated. If you see flames or smoke
dangerous to touch any components of the
coming from the engine compartment, move
injection system (injectors, electrical wires)
away from the vehicle. Wait until the engine
has cooled. If necessary, call the fire Rwith the engine running
department. Rwhile starting the engine
G Warning! Rwhen the ignition is switched on

You could be injured when the hood is open –
even when the engine is turned off.
Parts of the engine can become very hot. To
prevent burns, let the engine cool completely
before touching any components on the
vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety
precautions.
G Warning!
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running.
X Pull hood lock release lever :.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
approximately 30 seconds or may even The hood is unlocked.
restart after the engine has been turned off. ! Never open the hood if the wiper arms are
Stay clear of fan blades. folded forward away from the windshield.
Otherwise the windshield wipers or the
hood could be damaged.
Z
may be inaccurate. Some of theses

readings are required by law and must be
accurate at all times.
Engine oil
G Warning!
Operation
X
Press and hold handle ;.
The hood is unlocked.
the operation of your vehicle.
X Pull up on the hood in direction of arrow
and then release it. The amount of oil your engine consumes will
The hood will be held open at shoulder depend on a number of factors, including
height by gas-filled struts automatically. driving style. Increased oil consumption can
occur when the vehicle is new or the vehicle
Closing is driven frequently at higher engine speeds.
Engine oil consumption checks should only
G Warning! be made after the vehicle break-in period.
When closing the hood, use extreme caution
! Do not use any special lubricant additives,
not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that
as these may damage the drive assemblies.
you do not close the hood on anyone.
Using special additives not approved by
Make sure the hood is securely engaged Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not
before driving off. Do not continue driving if covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
the hood can no longer engage after an Warranty.
accident, for example. The hood could
For further information contact an
otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in
motion and injure you and/or others.
X Let the hood drop from a height of Notes on checking engine oil level
approximately 8 in (20 cm). When checking the oil level the vehicle must
X Check to make sure the hood is fully be parked on level ground and the vehicle
closed. must have been stationary for at least
If you can raise the hood at a point above 5 minutes with the engine turned off.
the headlamps, then it is not properly
closed. Open it again and let it drop with Checking engine oil level
somewhat greater force. X Open the hood (Y page 213).
Radiator
i Vehicles with diesel engine:
Do not cover the radiator, for example with
a winter front or bug cover. Otherwise the
readings of the on-board diagnostic system

For more information on engine oil, see

“Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.”
(Y page 356).
For information on messages in the
multifunction display concerning engine oil,
see the “Practical hints” section
(Y page 291).
Adding engine oil

! Only use approved engine oils and oil
Operation
Example illustration: Gasoline engine filters required for vehicles with
Maintenance System. For a listing of
approved engine oils and oil filters, contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
The following will result in engine or
emission control system damage not
Warranty:
RUsing engine oils and oil filters of
specification other than those expressly
required for the Maintenance System.
Example illustration: Diesel engine
RChanging of oil and oil filter at change
X Pull out oil dipstick :. intervals longer than those called for by
X Wipe oil dipstick : clean. the Maintenance System.
X Slowly insert oil dipstick : fully into the RUsing any oil additives.
dipstick guide tube.
X Pull out oil dipstick : again after
approximately 3 seconds to obtain
accurate reading.
The oil level is correct when it is between
lower (min) mark = and upper (max)
mark ; of oil dipstick :.
i All models (except ML 63 AMG):
The filling quantity between the upper and
lower marks on the oil dipstick is
approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
Example illustration: ML 350 BlueTEC (ML 350,
ML 63 AMG: ML 550 similar)
The filling quantity between the upper and
lower marks on the oil dipstick is
approximately 1.6 US qt. (1.5 l).
X If necessary, add engine oil.
Z
G Warning!
In order to avoid any potentially serious burns:
RUse extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system, or
if the coolant temperature display indicates
that the coolant is overheated.
RDo not remove the cap on the coolant
expansion tank if the coolant temperature
is above 158‡ (70†). Allow the engine to
Operation
ML 63 AMG cool down before removing the cap. The

X Unscrew filler cap : from filler neck. coolant expansion tank contains hot fluid
and is under pressure.
X Add engine oil as required. Be careful not
to overfill with oil. RUsing a rag, slowly open the cap
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil pressure. If opened immediately, scalding
entering the ground or water. hot fluid and steam will be blown out under
pressure.
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
RDo not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
off. It could cause damage to the engine
and emission control system not covered Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts.
X Screw filler cap : back on filler neck.
For more information on engine oil, see the
“Technical data” section (Y page 356) and
(Y page 359).
Transmission fluid level

The transmission fluid level does not need to
be checked. If you notice transmission fluid
loss or gearshifting malfunctions, have an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the
transmission.
X Using a rag, slowly open cap ;
approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess
Coolant level pressure.
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and X Continue turning cap ; counterclockwise
anticorrosion/antifreeze. and remove it.
When checking the coolant level, the vehicle
must be parked on level ground, and the
coolant temperature must be below 158‡
(70†).

The coolant level is correct if the level

Rfor cold coolant: reaches marking
bar : in coolant expansion tank =
Rfor warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) higher
X Add coolant as required.
X Screw cap ; back on and tighten it.
For more information on coolant, see the

“Technical data” section (Y page 358) and
Operation
(Y page 362). Fluid for the washer system, rear window
washer system, and the headlamp cleaning
system is supplied from the washer fluid
Washer system and headlamp reservoir.
cleaning system
During all seasons, use MB Windshield
G Warning! Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit”. Mix it
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly with water or premixed washer solvent/
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/ antifreeze depending on the ambient
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may temperature (Y page 364).
ignite and burn. You could be seriously X Opening washer fluid reservoir: Pull tab
burned. of cap : upwards.
X Refill the washer fluid reservoir.
! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze X Closing washer fluid reservoir: Press
where temperatures may fall below cap : onto filler hole until it engages.
freezing point. Failure to do so could result
For more information, see “Washer system
in damage to the washer system/fluid
and headlamp cleaning system”
reservoir.
(Y page 358).
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can
damage the plastic lenses of the Brake fluid level
headlamps. ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum
! Do not use distilled or deionized water in
mark or below, have the brake system
the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the checked for brake pad thickness and leaks
washer fluid level sensor could be immediately. Contact an authorized
damaged. Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Do
not add brake fluid as this will not solve the
problem. For more information, see
“Practical hints”.
When checking the brake fluid level, the
vehicle must be parked on level ground.
Z
218 Tires and wheels
Retreaded tires are not tested or

recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
previous damage cannot always be
recognized on retreads. The operating safety
of the vehicle cannot be assured when such
tires are used.
G Warning!
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible
damage to your vehicle has occurred, you
Operation
The brake fluid level is correct when it is should turn on the hazard warning flashers,
between lower mark (MIN) ; and upper carefully slow down, and drive with caution to
mark (MAX) : of the brake fluid reservoir. an area which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
Tires and wheels appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the
Safety notes nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
tire dealer for repairs.
for information on tested and recommended G Warning!
rims and tires for summer and winter Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
operation. They can also offer advice the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
concerning tire service and purchase. could lose control of the vehicle. Continued
G Warning! driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed
with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
Replace rims or tires with the same
up and possibly a fire.
designation, manufacturer and type as shown
on the original part. For further information
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If incorrectly sized rims and tires are Important guidelines
mounted, the wheel brakes or suspension ROnly use sets of tires and rims of the same
components can be damaged. Also, the type and make.
operating clearance of the wheels and the RTires must be of the correct size for the rim.
tires may no longer be correct.
RBreak in new tires for approximately
G Warning! 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire RRegularly check the tires and rims for
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tire
the tires have sustained damage, replace inflation pressure loss and damage to the
them. tire beads.
When replacing rims, only use genuine RIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the inflation pressure and correct as required.
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result
RDo not allow your tires to wear down too
in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident. far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are

Tires and wheels 219
sharply reduced at tread depths of less warm tires and adjust the tire pressure only
than 1/8 in (3 mm). if the tire inflation pressure is too low for the
current operating conditions. If you check the
RWhen replacing individual tires, you should
tire inflation pressure when the tires are
mount new tires on the front wheels first
warm, the reading will be higher than the cold
(on vehicles with same-sized wheels all
reading. This is normal. Do not let air out to
around).
match the specified cold tire inflation
pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be
underinflated.
Recommended tire inflation pressure Follow recommended cold tire inflation
G Warning! pressures listed on Tire and Loading
Operation
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Information placard on the driver’s door
B-pillar.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely Keeping the tires properly inflated provides
affect handling and fuel economy, and are the best handling, tread life and riding
more likely to fail from being overheated. comfort.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can In addition to the Tire and Loading
adversely affect handling and ride comfort, Information placard on the driver’s door
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, B-pillar, also consult the tire inflation
and result in sudden deflation (blowout) pressure label on the inside of the filler flap
because they are more likely to become for any additional information pertaining to
punctured or damaged by road debris, special driving situations. For more
potholes etc. information, see “Important notes on tire
inflation pressure” (Y page 220).
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire i Data shown on Tire and Loading
and Loading Information placard on the Information placard example are for
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires illustration purposes only. Tire data are
can overheat them, possibly causing a specific to each vehicle and may vary from
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result data shown in the following illustration.
in handling or steering problems, or brake Refer to Tire and Loading Information
failure. placard on vehicle for actual data specific
to your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and
Loading Information placard located on the
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 227).
The tire inflation pressure should be checked
regularly. Only adjust the tire inflation
pressure on cold tires. The tires can be
considered cold if the vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km). Depending on the ambient
temperature, the driving speed and the tire
load, the tire temperature changes. When the
tire temperature changes by 18‡ (10†), the
tire inflation pressure will change by The Tire and Loading Information placard lists
approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar). Keep this in the recommended cold tire inflation
mind when checking tire inflation pressure on
Z
pressures : for maximum loaded vehicle For the tire inflation pressure for spare
weight. The tire inflation pressures listed wheels such as Minispare wheels or spare
apply to the tires installed as original wheels with collapsible tire refer to
equipment. Rthe yellow label on the spare wheel rim
Rthe “Technical data” section of this
Important notes on tire inflation
Operator’s Manual (Y page 356)
pressure
Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard on
G Warning! the driver’s door B-pillar
If the tire inflation pressure drops repeatedly,
Unless specified otherwise, the tire inflation
check the tires for punctures from foreign
Operation
pressures on the tire inflation pressure label

objects and/or whether air is leaking from the
are valid for all approved, factory-equipped
valves or from around the rim.
tires.
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure i Data shown on tire inflation pressure
are also increased while driving, depending label examples are for illustration purposes
on the driving speed and the tire load. only. Tire inflation pressure data are
If you will be driving your vehicle at high specific to each vehicle and may vary from
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, data shown in the following illustrations.
where it is legal and conditions allow, consult Refer to the tire inflation pressure label on
the tire inflation pressure label on the inside vehicle for actual data specific to your
of the fuel filler flap on how to adjust the cold vehicle.
tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the
tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
build up and result in sudden tire failure.
If you are not sure about the proper tire
inflation pressure, contact an authorized
i Driving comfort may be reduced when the
tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the
value for speeds above 100 mph
(160 km/h) as specified on the tire inflation
pressure label located on the inside of the
fuel filler flap. Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures for all
approved, factory equipped tires
Make sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure for normal driving speeds. When a tire size is specified, the tire inflation
pressure that follows applies to that
Supplemental tire inflation pressure
particular tire size only.
information for different loading conditions of
the vehicle can be found on the tire inflation
pressure label. The tire inflation pressure
label is located on the inside of the fuel filler
flap.

Underinflated tires can

Rcause excessive and uneven tire wear
Radversely affect fuel economy
Rlead to tire failure from being overheated
Radversely affect handling characteristics
Overinflated tires
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Operation
Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures for Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
particular tire sizes
adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
Some tire inflation pressure labels may only wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
show the rim diameter instead of the entire and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
tire size, e.g. R 18 or 18". because they are more likely to become
The rim diameter is part of the tire size as punctured or damaged by road debris,
specified on the tire sidewall (Y page 236). potholes etc.
Overinflated tires can

Radversely affect handling characteristics
Rcause uneven tire wear
Rbe more prone to damage from road
hazards
Radversely affect ride comfort
Rincrease stopping distance
Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures

specific to rim diameter Checking tire inflation pressure
i When towing a trailer, inflate the tires to Safety notes

the tire inflation pressure as specified for a G Warning!
fully loaded vehicle. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
Potential problems associated with
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
underinflated and overinflated tires
affect handling and fuel economy, and are
Underinflated tires more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
G Warning!
adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely because they are more likely to become
affect handling and fuel economy, and are punctured or damaged by road debris,
more likely to fail from being overheated. potholes etc.
Z
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the see a corresponding warning message in the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire multifunction display.
and Loading Information placard on the The tire pressure loss warning system may
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires function in a restricted manner or with a delay
can overheat them, possibly causing a Rwhen snow chains are mounted to the
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result vehicle
in handling or steering problems, or brake
Rin the presence of ice and snow
failure.
Rwhen you are driving on a loose surface
Check the tire inflation pressure at least once
(e.g. sand or gravel)
a month.
Operation
Rwhen you are driving in a very sporty

Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are cold (Y page 219). manner (involving rapid acceleration or
high speeds in curves)
Checking tire inflation pressure G Warning!
manually When the multifunction display shows the
Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire message Tire Pressure Check Tires, one
inflation pressure: or more of your tires are significantly
X Remove the cap from the valve on one tire. underinflated. You should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
X Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.
them to the proper tire inflation pressure as
X Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
indicated on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading
gauge and check against the Information placard or on the tire inflation
recommended tire inflation pressure on the pressure label.
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 227). If
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
necessary, add air to achieve the
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
recommended tire inflation pressure.
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
X If you have overfilled the tire, release tire
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
inflation pressure by pushing the metal
Each tire, including the spare, should be
stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen.
checked at least once a month when cold.
Then recheck the tire inflation pressure
Inflate the tires to the recommended tire
with the tire gauge.
inflation pressure as specified on
X Install the valve cap.
Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard on
X Repeat this procedure for each tire.
the driver’s door B-pillar
or
Tire pressure loss warning system
Rthe tire inflation pressure label located on
(Canada only)
the inside of the fuel filler flap
While the vehicle is being driven, the tire
pressure loss warning system monitors the
set tire inflation pressures by evaluating each
wheel’s rotational speed. This allows the
system to detect a significant loss of pressure
in a tire. If a wheel’s rotational speed changes
due to falling tire inflation pressure, you will

i The recommended tire inflation pressures G Warning!

for your vehicle can be found on The tire pressure loss warning system can
Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard only warn you in a reliable manner if you have
located on the driver’s door B-pillar set the correct tire inflation pressures for
(Y page 227) each tire.
Rthe tire inflation pressure label on the If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was set,
inside of the fuel filler flap the system will monitor the pressure
according to the incorrect value.
The tire inflation pressures are not listed in
the Operator’s Manual. X Switch on the ignition.
Operation
G Warning! X Make sure the standard display appears in
The tire pressure loss warning system does the multifunction display (Y page 122).
not provide a warning for wrongly selected tire X Press button * or & on the
inflation pressures. Always adjust tire multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
inflation pressure according to the Tire and until the following message appears in the
Loading Information placard on the driver’s multifunction display:
door B-pillar or on the tire inflation pressure Run Flat Indicator
label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Active
The tire pressure loss warning system does Menu: R-Button
not replace regular checks of the tire inflation X Press the reset button (Y page 118).
pressures since a gradual pressure loss in The following message will appear in the
more than one tire cannot be detected by the multifunction display:
tire pressure loss warning system. Restart
The tire pressure loss warning system is not Run Flat Indicator?
able to issue a warning due to a sudden X If you wish to confirm: Press button
dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure (e.g. W.
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In The following message will appear in the
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully multifunction display:
applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt Run Flat Indicator
steering maneuvers. Restarted
Restarting the tire pressure loss warning After a certain “learning phase”, the tire
system pressure loss warning system checks the
set pressure values for all four tires.
The tire pressure loss warning system must
X If you wish to cancel: Press button X.
be restarted in the following situations:
Rafter you have changed the tire inflation
pressure Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (Advanced TPMS), (USA only)
Rafter you have replaced the wheels or tires
Rafter you have installed new wheels or tires
Your vehicle is equipped with the Advanced
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced
X Using the Tire and Loading Information TPMS). It measures the tire inflation pressure
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if in the vehicle’s tires and issues warnings in
available, the tire inflation pressure label on case of pressure loss in one or more of the
the inside of the fuel filler flap, make sure tires.
the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is
correct.
Z
The TPMS is equipped with a combination low system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
tire pressure/ TPMS malfunction telltale in pressure telltale when one or more of your
the instrument cluster. Depending on how the tires are significantly underinflated.
telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
pressure condition or a malfunction in the telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
TPMS system itself: your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
RIf the telltale illuminates continuously, one them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
or more of your tires is significantly significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
underinflated. There is no malfunction in to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
the TPMS. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
Operation
RIf the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
then stays illuminated, the TPMS system handling and stopping ability. Please note that
itself is not operating properly. the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
The TPMS only functions on wheels that are responsibility to maintain correct tire
equipped with the proper electronic sensors. pressure, even if underinflation has not
G Warning! reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
adjust tire inflation pressure according to the TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
Tire and Loading Information placard or the the system is not operating properly. The
supplemental tire inflation pressure TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
information on the inside of the fuel filler flap. the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
flash for approximately 1 minute and then
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. tire
remain continuously illuminated. This
blowout caused by a foreign object). In this
sequence will continue upon subsequent
case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt
exists. When the malfunction indicator is
steering maneuvers.
illuminated, the system may not be able to
G Warning! detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
should be checked at least once a month reasons, including the installation of
when cold and inflated to the inflation incompatible replacement or alternate tires
pressure recommended by the vehicle or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
manufacturer on the Tire and Loading TPMS from functioning properly. Always
Information placard on the driver’s door B- check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
pillar or the tire inflation pressure label on the replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
tires of a different size than the size indicated alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
on the Tire and Loading Information placard continue to function properly.
or the tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure i If a condition causing the TPMS to
for those tires. malfunction develops, it may take up to
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has 10 minutes for the system to signal a
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring

malfunction using the TPMS telltale as the tire inflation pressure values cannot be
flashing and illumination sequence. allocated to the individual wheels, the
The telltale extinguishes after a few message Tire Pressure Monitor Active
minutes driving if the malfunction has been appears. Despite this message, the tire
corrected. inflation pressure values are monitored
already.
Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
multifunction display. The current tire i With a spare wheel mounted, the system
inflation pressure for each tire appears in the may still indicate the tire inflation pressure
multifunction display after a few minutes of of the removed road wheel for some
driving. minutes. If this happens, keep in mind that
Operation
the indicated value where the spare wheel
i Possible differences between the
is mounted does not reflect the actual
readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air
spare tire inflation pressure.
hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and the
vehicle’s control system can occur. The tire i Operating radio transmission equipment
pressure displayed by the control system (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in
apply to sea level. In high-altitude or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS
locations, the reading on a tire pressure to malfunction.
gauge will be higher than the reading issued
by the vehicle’s control system. Do not i This device complies with Part 15 of the
reduce the tire inflation pressure under FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
such circumstances. following two conditions:
X Switch on the ignition. 1. This device may not cause harmful
X Press button V or U on the interference, and
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly 2. this device must accept any
until the standard display appears in the interference received, including
multifunction display (Y page 122). interference that may cause undesired.
X Press button & or * until the current Any unauthorized modification to this
inflation pressure for each tire appears in device could void the user’s authority to
the multifunction display. operate the equipment.
Tire inflation pressure warnings
If the system detects a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure in one or more than one
tire, a message appears in the multifunction
display. In addition, an acoustic warning
sounds and the low tire pressure telltale in the
instrument cluster comes on.
Example illustration
When the vehicle has been parked for longer
than 20 minutes, the message Tire
pressure displayed after driving
for a few minutes. appears in the
The TPMS recognizes new wheels or sensors
automatically after the learn-in phase. As long Example illustration
Z
The respective tire is indicated by a red Tire pressure

rectangle. displayed after
driving for
Restarting Advanced TPMS a few minutes.
G Warning! X Press the reset button (Y page 117).
It is the driver’s responsibility to set the tire The following message will appear in the
inflation pressure to the recommended cold multifunction display:
tire inflation pressure. Underinflated tires Restart tire
affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. pressure monitor?
You might lose control over the vehicle. X If you wish to confirm: Press button
Operation
When you restart the TPMS, the system sets W.

new reference values for each tire. The following message will appear in the
multifunction display:
The TPMS must be restarted when you have
Tire Pressure Monitor
adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new
Restarted
level (e.g. because of different load or driving
conditions). The TPMS is then recalibrated to After driving a few minutes the system
the current tire inflation pressures. verifies that the current tire inflation
pressures are within the system’s specified
Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tire
range. Afterwards the current tire inflation
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure
pressures are accepted as reference values
recommended for the vehicle operating
and then monitored.
condition. Tire pressure should only be
X If you wish to cancel: Press button X.
adjusted on cold tires. Observe the
recommended tire inflation pressure on the i When the wheel positions have been
Tire and Loading Information placard on the changed, the inflation pressure of a tire
driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may have may be displayed for the wrong position
supplemental tire pressure information for temporarily. After driving for a few minutes,
driving at high speeds or for vehicle loads less the inflation pressure will be shown for the
than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. correct position.
If such information is provided, it can be
found on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
X Using the Tire and Loading Information Maximum tire inflation pressure
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(Y page 227) or the supplemental tire G Warning!
inflation pressure information on the inside Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
inflation pressure of all four tires is correct. pressures.
X Switch on the ignition. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
X Press button V or U on the wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly affect handling and fuel economy, and are
until the standard display appears in the more likely to fail from being overheated.
multifunction display (Y page 122). Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
X Press button & or * repeatedly until adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
you see the current inflation pressures for wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
each tire appear in the display or the and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
following message appears in the because they are more likely to become
multifunction display:

punctured or damaged by road debris, you about the front and rear axle weight
potholes etc. capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR).
The GAWR is the total allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or
GAWR for either the front axle or rear
axle.
Operation
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure : for the tire.
Always follow the recommended tire inflation
pressure (Y page 219) for proper tire
inflation.
Loading the vehicle

: Driver’s door B-pillar
Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry. Following is a discussion on how to work with
the information contained on the Tire and
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
Loading Information placard with regards to
can be found on the driver’s door
loading your vehicle.
B-pillar. This placard tells you important
information about the number of people
that can be in the vehicle and the total Tire and Loading Information
weight that can be carried in the vehicle. G Warning!
It also contains information on the proper
size and recommended tire inflation
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
pressures for the original equipment tires
and Loading Information placard on the
on your vehicle.
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
(2) The certification label, also found on the can overheat them, possibly causing a
driver’s door B-pillar. It tells you about the blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
gross weight capacity of your vehicle, in handling or steering problems, or brake
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating failure.
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo. The certification label also tells
Z
Tire and Loading Information placard

i Data shown on Tire and Loading
Information placard example are for
illustration purposes only. Load limit data
are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in the following
illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading
Information placard on vehicle for actual
data specific to your vehicle.
Operation
The seating capacity gives you important

information on the number of occupants that
can be in the vehicle. Observe front and rear
seating capacity. The Tire and Loading
Information placard showing seating
capacity : is located on the driver’s door
B-pillar (Y page 227).
Steps for determining correct load limit

The following steps have been developed as
The Tire and Loading Information placard required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
showing load limit information : is located Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
on the driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 227). pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor
X Locate the statement “The combined Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
weight of occupants and cargo should X Step 1: Locate the statement “The
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.” combined weight of occupants and cargo
on the Tire and Loading Information should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.”
placard. on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
The combined weight of all occupants, Information placard.
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (if X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
applicable) should never exceed the weight the driver and passengers that will be riding
referenced in that statement. in your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
Seating capacity the driver and passengers from
i Data shown on Tire and Loading XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
Information placard example are for X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
illustration purposes only. Seating capacity available amount of cargo and luggage load
data are specific to each vehicle and may capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
vary from data shown in the following equals 1 400 lbs and there will be five
illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
Information placard on vehicle for actual amount of available cargo and luggage load
data specific to your vehicle. capacity is 650 lbs
(1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will
be towing a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (Y page 231).
Operation
The following table shows examples on how
to calculate total and cargo load capacities
with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. The following
examples use a load limit of 1 500 lbs. This
is for illustration purposes only. Make sure
you are using the actual load limit for your
vehicle stated on the vehicle’s Tire and
Loading Information placard (Y page 228).
Z
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 1 Combined weight limit 1 500 lbs 1 500 lbs 1 500 lbs
of occupants and cargo
from Tire and Loading
Information placard

Step 2 Number of occupants 5 3 1
(driver and passengers)
Operation
Seating configuration front: 2 front: 1 front: 1

rear: 3 rear: 2
Occupants weight Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1:
150 lbs 200 lbs 150 lbs
Occupant 2: Occupant 2:
180 lbs 190 lbs
Occupant 3: Occupant 3:
160 lbs 150 lbs
Occupant 4:
140 lbs
Occupant 5:
120 lbs
Combined weight of all 750 lbs 540 lbs 150 lbs
occupants

Step 3 Available cargo/ 1 500 lbs - 1 500 lbs - 1 500 lbs -
luggage and trailer 750 lbs = 540 lbs = 150 lbs =
tongue weight (total 750 lbs 960 lbs 1 350 lbs
load limit from Tire and
Loading Information
placard minus
combined weight of all
occupants)
The higher the weight of all occupants, the Certification label

less cargo and luggage load capacity is
Even after careful determination of the
available.
combined weight of all occupants, cargo and
For more information, see “Trailer tongue the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
load” (Y page 231). (Y page 231) as to not exceed the
permissible load limit, you must make sure
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle. You can obtain the GVWR and
GAWR from the certification label. The
certification label can be found on the driver’s
door B-pillar, see the “Technical data” section
(Y page 346).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all
cargo, and the trailer tongue load (if
applicable) must never exceed the GVWR.
Operation
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
allowable weight that can be carried by a on tires are specific to each vehicle and
single axle (front or rear). may vary from data shown in above
To assure that your vehicle does not exceed illustration.
the maximum permissible weight limits The maximum tire load rating : is the
(GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle), maximum weight the tires are designed to
have the loaded vehicle (including driver, support.
passengers and all cargo and, if applicable,
For more information on tire load rating, see
trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitable
(Y page 236).
commercial scale.
For information on calculating total and cargo
Trailer tongue load load capacities, see (Y page 228).
The tongue load of any trailer is an important

weight to measure because it affects the load Direction of rotation
you can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer is
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages,
towed, the tongue load must be added to the
such as better hydroplaning performance. To
weight of all occupants riding and any cargo
benefit, however, you must make sure the
you are carrying in the vehicle. The tongue
tires rotate in the direction specified.
load typically is between 8% and 15% of the
trailer weight and everything loaded in it. An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation of the tire.
Spare wheels may be mounted against the
Maximum tire load direction of rotation (spinning) even with a
unidirectional tire for temporary use only until
G Warning! the regular drive wheel has been repaired or
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the replaced. Always observe and follow
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire applicable temporary use restrictions and
and Loading Information placard on the speed limitations indicated on the spare
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires wheel.
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
in handling or steering problems, or brake MOExtended system
failure.
The MOExtended system allows you to
continue driving your vehicle even if there is
a total loss of pressure in one or more tires.
Z
You may only use the MOExtended system in Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
conjunction with the tire pressure loss periodically for condition and inflation. Spare
warning system (Y page 222) or the tires will age and become worn over time even
Advanced TPMS (Y page 223). if never used, and thus should be inspected
and replaced when necessary.
i Vehicles with MOExtended system are
not factory-equipped with a TIREFIT kit.
When retrofitting with tires that do not have Life of tire
run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires, G Warning!
you should also equip your vehicle with a
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
TIREFIT kit. TIREFIT kits are available at any
6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Operation

For information on driving in case of pressure The service life of a tire is dependent upon
loss in one or more tires (emergency mode), varying factors including but not limited to:
see the “Practical hints” section RDriving style
(Y page 330). RTire inflation pressure
RDistance driven
Tire care and maintenance
Tread depth
G Warning!
Regularly check the tires for damage. G Warning!
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation Although the applicable federal motor vehicle
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose safety laws consider a tire to be worn when
control of your vehicle. the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if recommend that you do not allow your tires
the tires have sustained damage, replace to wear down to that level. As tread depth
them. approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion
Check the tire inflation pressure at least once properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.
a month. For more information on checking Depending upon the weather and/or road
tire inflation pressure, see “Recommended surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
tire inflation pressure” (Y page 219). widely.
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.

Tire inspection
Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply
Every time you check the tire inflation reduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in
pressure, you should also inspect your tires (3 mm).
for the following: Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
Rexcessive treadwear (Y page 232) law. These indicators are located in six places
Rcord or fabric showing through the tire’s on the tread circumference and become
rubber visible at a tread depth of approximately
1/ in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is
16
Rbumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the
considered worn and should be replaced.
tread or side of the tire
The recommended minimum tire tread depth
Replace the tire if you find any of the above for summer tires is 1/8 in (3 mm). The
conditions.

recommended minimum tire tread depth for regarding tire performance. Tire
winter tires is 1/6 in (4 mm). manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors:
treadwear :, traction ;, and temperature
resistance =. Although not a Government of
Canada requirement, all tires made for sale in
North America have these grades branded on
the sidewall.
Operation
illustration.
Quality grades can be found, where
Treadwear indicator : appears as a solid
applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
band across the tread. shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Storing tires
Treadwear Traction Temperature
! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible. 200 AA A
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease
and fuels. All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
Cleaning tires these grades.
! Never use a round nozzle to power wash
Treadwear
tires. The intense jet of water can result in
damage to the tire. The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
Always replace a damaged tire. based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
U.S. Government test course. For example, a
Uniform Tire Quality Grading tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
Standards (1 1/2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction
G Warning!
The Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a U.S. The traction grade assigned to this tire is
Government requirement designed to give based on straight-ahead braking traction
drivers consistent and reliable information
Z
tests, and does not include acceleration, excessive heat build-up and possible tire
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction failure.
characteristics.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the generation of heat and its ability to
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as dissipate heat when tested under controlled
measured under controlled conditions on conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
specified government test surfaces of asphalt test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor cause the material of the tire to degenerate
traction performance. and reduce tire life, and excessive
Operation
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

G Warning! The grade C corresponds to a level of
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will performance which all passenger car tires
be substantially reduced. Under such weather must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
conditions, drive, steer and brake with Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
extreme caution. represent higher levels of performance on the
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy laboratory test wheel than the minimum
road is always lower than on a dry road. required by law.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
Rotating tires
temperature is close to the freezing point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires G Warning!
(Y page 242) with a minimum tread depth of Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels are of the same dimension.
for the winter season to ensure normal If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
balanced handling characteristics. On tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear),
packed snow, they can reduce your stopping tire rotation is not possible.
distance compared to summer tires.
Stopping distance, however, is still G Warning!
considerably greater than when the road is Have the tightening torque checked after
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise changing a wheel. The wheels could come
appropriate caution. loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
cause serious damage to the drivetrain Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz specified for your vehicle’s rims.
Limited Warranty. Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
with tires of the same dimension all around.
Temperature If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the
same dimension all around, tires can be
G Warning!
rotated, observing a front-to-rear rotation
The temperature grade for this tire is
pattern that will maintain the intended
established for a tire that is properly inflated
rotation (spinning) direction of the tire
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
(Y page 231).
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause In some cases, such as when your vehicle is
equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire

dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not

possible.
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire
configuration, tires can be rotated according
to the tire manufacturer’s recommended
intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature
portfolio. If none is available, tires should be
rotated every 3 000 to 6 000 miles (5 000 to
10 000 km), or sooner if necessary, according
to the degree of tire wear. The same rotation
Operation
(spinning) direction must be maintained.
Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear
on front tires and tread center wear on rear
tires).
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels (Y page 233)
and brake disks, i.e. the inner side of the
; DOT, Tire Identification Number
wheels/tires, during each rotation. Check for
(Y page 238)
and ensure proper tire inflation pressure.
= Maximum tire load (Y page 231)
For information on wheel change, see “Flat
tire” (Y page 319). ? Maximum tire inflation pressure
(Y page 226)
A Manufacturer
Tire labeling B Tire ply material (Y page 239)
Besides tire name (sales designation) and C Tire size designation, load and speed
manufacturer name, a number of markings rating (Y page 236)
can be found on a tire. D Load identification (Y page 238)
Following are some explanations for the E Tire name
markings on your vehicle’s tires:
illustration.
For more information, see “Rims and tires”
(Y page 352).
Z
Tire size designation, load and speed Aspect ratio

rating Aspect ratio ; is the dimensional
relationship between tire section height and
section width and is expressed in percentage.
The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing
section height by section width.
Tire code
Tire code = indicates the tire construction
type. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter
“D” means diagonal or bias ply construction;
Operation
letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction.

At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
: Tire width with a speed capability above 149 mph
; Aspect ratio in % (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
= Radial tire code designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). For
additional information, see “Tire speed
? Rim diameter
rating” (Y page 237).
A Load index
B Speed symbol Rim diameter
Rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data seat, not the diameter of the rim edge. The
on tires are specific to each vehicle and rim diameter is indicated in inches (in).
illustration. Load index
General: Depending on the design standards G Warning!
used, the tire size molded into the sidewall The tire load rating must always be at least
may have no letter or a letter preceding the half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Otherwise,
tire size designation. tire failure may be the result which may cause
No letter preceding the size designation (as an accident and/or serious injury to you or
illustrated above): Passenger car tire based others.
on European design standards. Always replace rims and tires with the same
Letter “P” preceding the size designation: designation, manufacturer and type as shown
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design on the original part.
standards.
G Warning!
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
standards.
and Loading Information placard on the
Letter “T” preceding the size designation: driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
Temporary spare tires which are high can overheat them, possibly causing a
pressure compact spares designed for blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
temporary emergency use only. in handling or steering problems, or brake
Tire width failure.
Tire width : indicates the nominal tire width Load index A is a numerical code associated
in millimeters. with the maximum load a tire can support.

For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds Index Speed rating

to a maximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) the
tire is designed to support. See also ZR...(..Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h)
“Maximum tire load” (Y page 231) where the
ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h)
maximum load associated with the load index
is indicated in kilograms and lbs.
RAt the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
For additional information on the load index,
see “Load identification” (Y page 238). with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
Speed symbol designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18).
G Warning! To determine the maximum speed
Operation
capability of the tire, the service
Even when permitted by law, never operate a
description for the tire must be referred to.
vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum
speed rating of the tires. The service description is comprised of
load index A and speed symbol B.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires
are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
causing loss of vehicle control and possibly designation and no service description is
resulting in an accident and/or serious given, the tire manufacturer must be
personal injury and possible death, for you consulted for the maximum speed
and for others. capability.
If a service description is given, the speed
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local capability is limited by the speed symbol in
speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent the service description. Example:
driving speeds appropriate to prevailing 245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y”
conditions. is the service description. The letter “Y”
Speed symbol B indicates the approved designates the speed rating and the speed
maximum speed (tire speed rating) for the capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph
tire. (300 km/h).
Summer tires RAny tire with a speed capability above
Index Speed rating 186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR”
in the size designation AND the service
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) description must be placed in parenthesis.
Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)”
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
speed symbol in parenthesis designates
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) the maximum speed capability of the tire
as being above 186 mph (300 km/h).
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) maximum permissible speed of the tire.
All-season and winter tires
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Index Speed rating
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Q M+S20 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
T M+S20 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
20 or M+Sifor winter tires
Z
Index Speed rating Load identification
H M+S20 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S20 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
i Not all M+S rated tires provide special

winter performance. Make sure the tires
you use show M+S and the mountain/
snowflakeimarking on the tire
Operation
sidewall. These tires meet specific snow

traction performance requirements of the
Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)
and the Rubber Association of Canada
(RAC) and have been designed specifically
for use in snow conditions.
illustration.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
In addition to the load index, special load
vehicle from exceeding a speed of:
identification : may be molded into the tire
RAllmodels except ML 63 AMG: sidewall following the letter designating the
130 mph (210 km/h) speed symbol B (Y page 236).
RML 63 AMG: RNo specification given: absence of any text
155 mph (250 km/h) (like in above example) indicates a
RML 63 AMG with increased top speed: standard load (SL) tire.
171 mph (275 km/h) RXL or Extra Load: designates an extra load
The factory equipped tires on your vehicle (or reinforced) tire.

may have a tire speed rating above the RLight Load: designates a light load tire.
maximum speed permitted by the electronic RC, D, E: designates load range associated
speed limiter.
with the maximum load a tire can carry at
Make sure your tires have the required tire a specified pressure.
speed rating as specified for your vehicle in
the “Technical data” section (Y page 352),
for example when purchasing new tires.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
If you are uncertain about the correct reading
of the information given on a tire’s sidewall, U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN
glad to assist you. into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced.
20 or M+Sifor winter tires

Tire type code

Tire type code ? may, at the option of the
manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code
for identifying significant characteristics of
the tire.
Date of manufacture
The date of manufacture A identifies the
week and year of manufacture.
Operation
The first two figures identify the week,
The TIN is a unique identifier. The TIN
starting with “01” to represent the first full
facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to
week of the calendar year. The second two
notify purchasers in recall situations or other
figures represent the year.
safety matters concerning tires. It gives
purchasers the means to easily identify such For example, “3208” represents the 32nd
tires. week of 2008.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
identification mark” ;, “Tire size” =, “Tire
Tire ply material
type code” ? and “Date of manufacture”
A.
illustration.
DOT (Department of Transportation)

Tire branding symbol : denotes that the tire
meets requirements of the U.S. Department
of Transportation.
Manufacturer’s identification mark on tires are specific to each vehicle and
Manufacturer’s identification mark ; illustration.
denotes the tire manufacturer.
This marking tells you about the type of cord
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
and number of plies in the sidewall : and
Retreaded tires have a mark with four under the tread ;.
symbols. For more information on retreaded
tires, see (Y page 218).
Tire and loading terminology
Tire size
Accessory weight
Code = indicates the tire size.
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats,
Z
radio, and heater, to the extent that these GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
items are available as factory-installed
The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle
equipment (whether installed or not).
weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle
must never exceed the GAWR for the front
Air pressure and rear axle indicated on the certification
The amount of air inside the tire pressing label located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air
pressure is expressed in pounds per square GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
inch (psi), kilopascal (kPa), or bar.
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, equipment, luggage etc.
Operation
Aspect ratio loaded on the trailer.

Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width expressed GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
in percentage.
The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle
including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed
Bar accessories, passengers and cargo and, if
Metric unit for air pressure. There are applicable, trailer tongue load. The GVW must
14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to never exceed the GVWR indicated on the
1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar. certification label located on the driver’s door
B-pillar.
Bead
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. This is the maximum permissible vehicle
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
Cold tire inflation pressure the vehicle including all options, passengers,
fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has tongue load). It is indicated on the
been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no certification label located on the driver’s door
more than 1 mile (1.6 km). B-pillar.
Curb weight Kilopascal (kPa)

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard Metric unit for air pressure. There are 6.9 kPa
equipment including the maximum capacity to 1 psi; another metric unit for air pressure
of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, is bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to
air conditioning and additional optional 1 bar.
equipment, but without passengers and
cargo. Load index
DOT (Department of Transportation) Numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire
meets requirements of the U.S. Department Maximum load rating
of Transportation.
The maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight Rim

The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
total load limit, and production options assembly upon which the tire beads are
weight. seated.
Maximum permissible tire inflation Sidewall

pressure
The portion of a tire between the tread and
This number is the greatest amount of air the bead.
pressure that should ever be put in the tire.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Operation
Normal occupant weight
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by
The number of occupants the vehicle is tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in
designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms recall situations or other safety matters
(150 lb). concerning tires and gives purchasers the
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is
Occupant distribution comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification
mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at of manufacture”.
their designated seating positions.
Tire ply composition and material used
Production options weight
This indicates the number of plies or the
The combined weight of those installed number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
regular production options weighing over the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those manufacturers also must indicate the ply
standard items which they replace, not materials in the tire and sidewall, which
previously considered in curb weight or include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
Tire speed rating
battery, and special trim.
Part of tire designation (speed symbol);
PSI (Pounds per square inch) indicates the speed range for which a tire is
approved.
A standard unit of measure for air pressure.
Total load limit
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Rated cargo and luggage load plus
The recommended tire inflation pressure for 68 kilograms (150 lb) times the vehicle’s
normal driving conditions is listed on the Tire designated seating capacity.
and Loading Information placard located on
the driver’s door B-pillar. It provides best
Traction
handling, tread life and riding comfort.
Supplemental information pertaining to The adhesive friction of a tire on a surface on
special driving situations can be found on the which it moves. The amount of grip provided.
tire inflation pressure label on the inside of
the fuel filler flap.
Z
242 Winter driving
Tread Winter tires

The portion of a tire that comes into contact G Warning!
with the road.
Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
6
Treadwear indicators
longer suitable for winter operation.
Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars”
that show across the tread of a tire when only G Warning!
1/ in (1.6 mm) of tread remains. If you use your spare wheel when winter tires
16
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may very
Operation
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)

well impair turning stability and that overall
Maximum permissible weight on trailer driving stability may be reduced. Adapt your
tongue. driving style accordingly.
Have the spare wheel replaced by a regular
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards road wheel with a winter tire at the nearest
A tire information system that provides authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
Always use winter tires at temperatures
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
below 45‡ (7†) and whenever wintry road
determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.
conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires
government testing procedures. The ratings
provide special winter performance. Make
are molded into the sidewall of the tire.
sure the tires you use show the mountain/
snowflakeimarking on the tire sidewall.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire These tires meet specific snow traction
Load on an individual tire that is determined performance requirements of the Rubber
by distributing to each axle its share of the Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the
maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and
it by two. have been designed specifically for use in
snow conditions. Use of winter tires is the
only way to achieve the maximum
Winter driving effectiveness of your vehicle’s driving safety
systems such as the ABS and the ESP® in
General information winter operation.
Have your vehicle winterized at an authorized For safe handling, make sure all mounted
Mercedes-Benz Center. winter tires are of the same make and have
i Vehicles with diesel engine: the same tread design.
Do not cover the radiator, for example with For information on winter tires for your
a winter front. Otherwise the readings of vehicle model, see the “Technical data”
the on-board diagnostic system may be section (Y page 352).
inaccurate. Some of theses readings are Always observe the speed rating of the winter
required by law and must be accurate at all tires installed on your vehicle.
times.

Winter driving 243
After installing winter tires: and state laws before installing snow
X Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust chains.
it if necessary (Y page 221). RDo not use snow chains on the spare wheel.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning
i When driving with snow chains, you may
system (Y page 222) or the Advanced Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (Y page 223). wish to switch off the ESP® (Y page 63)
before setting the vehicle in motion. This
will improve the vehicle’s traction.
Snow chains
Winter driving instructions
Operation
! Vehicles with Adaptive Damping System
(ADS):
G Warning!
When driving with snow chains, do not
select SPORT mode as this may result in If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
damage to your vehicle.
and from around the vehicle with the engine
! Some tire sizes do not leave adequate running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide
clearance for snow chains. To help avoid (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
serious damage to your vehicle or tires, resulting in unconsciousness and death.
make sure the use of snow chains is To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open
permissible as specified in the “Technical a window slightly on the side of the vehicle
data” section of this Operator’s Manual. not facing the wind.
Snow chains should only be driven on snow- G Warning!
covered roads at speeds not to exceed
The outside temperature indicator is not
30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
as possible when driving on roads without
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
snow.
Indicated temperatures just above the
Observe the following guidelines when using
freezing point do not guarantee that the road
snow chains:
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
RUse of snow chains is not permissible with especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
all wheel/tire combinations (Y page 352).
RUse snow chains in pairs and on rear G Warning!
wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’s On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
mounting instructions. order to obtain braking action. This could
! If snow chains are mounted to the front control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
wheels, they may scrape against the body this type of loss of control.
or axle components. The tires or the vehicle
could be damaged as a result. The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt
ROnly use snow chains that are approved by
acceleration, braking and steering
Mercedes-Benz. Any authorized Mercedes- maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
Benz Center will be glad to advise you on system under such conditions.
this subject.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, shift
RUse of snow chains may be prohibited
the automatic transmission to neutral
depending on location. Always check local
Z
244 Driving instructions
position N. Try to keep the vehicle under Drinking and driving

control by corrective steering action.
G Warning!
i For information on driving with snow
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
chains, see “Snow chains” (Y page 243).
driving are very dangerous combinations.
Road salts and chemicals can adversely Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal affect your reflexes, perceptions and
force may become necessary to produce the judgment.
normal brake effect. The possibility of a serious or even fatal
Depressing the brake pedal periodically when accident are greatly increased when you drink
traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can or take drugs and drive.
Operation
bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
back to normal. anyone to drive who has been drinking or
If the vehicle is parked after being driven on taking drugs.
salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency
should be tested as soon as possible after
driving is resumed. Pedals
Make sure not to endanger any other road Make sure absolutely no objects are
users when carrying out these braking obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
maneuvers. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
carpets in the footwell, make sure that the
Driving instructions pedals still have sufficient clearance.
Drive sensibly – save fuel During sudden driving or braking maneuvers,
the objects could get caught between the
To save fuel you should: pedals. You could then no longer brake or
RKeep tires at the recommended inflation accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
pressures. injury.
RRemove unnecessary loads.
RRemove carriers when not in use. Power assistance
RAllow engine to warm up under low load
use. G Warning!
RAvoid
There is no power assistance for the steering
frequent acceleration and
and the brake when the engine is not running.
deceleration.
Steering and braking requires significantly
RHave all maintenance work performed at more effort and you could lose control of the
the intervals specified in the Maintenance vehicle and cause an accident as a result.
Booklet and as required by the
Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle is
Maintenance system. Contact an
in motion.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving
in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on
short trips and in mountainous areas.

Driving instructions 245
Brakes considerable force prior to parking. The heat

generated serves to dry the brakes.
Downhill grades
! When driving down long and steep Salt-covered roads
grades, relieve the load on the brakes by G Warning!
shifting into a lower gear to use the
A layer of salt on the brake discs and the brake
engine’s braking power. This helps prevent
linings may cause a delay in the braking
overheating of the brakes and reduces
effect, resulting in a significantly increased
wear.
braking distance, which could lead to an
When using the engine’s braking power, a accident.
Operation
drive wheel may not spin for an extended
To avoid this danger, you should:
period of time, e.g. on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damage Roccasionally brake carefully when you are
to the drivetrain which is not covered by the driving on salt-covered roads, so that any
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. layer of salt that may have built up on the
brake discs and the brake linings is
Continuous or hard braking removed without putting other road users
at risk
G Warning! Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will ahead and drive with particular care
cause excessive and premature wear of the
Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a
brake pads.
trip and immediately after commencing a
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
new trip, so that salt residues are removed
thereby significantly reducing their
from the brake disc
effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop
the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an
accident. Brake service
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on ! The brake fluid level in the reservoir may
for some time, rather than immediately park, be too low if the brake warning lamp in the
so that the air stream will cool down the instrument cluster comes on and an
brakes faster. acoustic warning sounds although the
parking brake is released. Observe
Wet roads additional messages in the multifunction
display that may appear.
G Warning! Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
After driving in heavy rain for some time be the reason for low brake fluid in the
without applying the brakes or through water reservoir.
deep enough to wet brake components, the Have the brake system inspected
first braking action may be somewhat immediately. Contact an authorized
reduced and increased pedal pressure may be Mercedes-Benz Center.
necessary to obtain expected brake effect.
Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in All checks and service work on the brake
front. system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact an authorized
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after Mercedes-Benz Center.
driving on wet or salt-covered roads, it is
advisable to brake the vehicle with
Z
Only install brake pads and use brake fluid system which is not covered by the
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
G Warning! If your brake system is only subjected to
If other than recommended brake pads are moderate loads, you should occasionally test
installed, or other than recommended brake the effectiveness of the brakes by applying
fluid is used, the braking properties of the above-normal braking pressure at higher
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe speeds. This will also enhance the grip of the
braking is substantially impaired. This could brake pads.
result in an accident. G Warning!
Make sure not to endanger any other road
Operation
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: users when carrying out these braking

Only conduct operational or performance maneuvers.
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
tests are necessary, contact an authorized Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could System (BAS) (Y page 63).
system or the transfer case which is not High-performance brake system
The high-performance brake system is only
Warranty.
available on ML 63 AMG.
! Vehicles without 4MATIC: G Warning!
Because the ESP® operates automatically, New vehicle brake pads and disks, and
the engine and ignition must be shut off replacement brake pads and disks may take
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or several hundred miles of driving until they
1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in provide optimum braking efficiency. Until that
position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is time, you may need to use increased brake
being tested on a brake test dynamometer pedal pressure while braking. Please be aware
or the vehicle is being towed with one axle of this and adjust your driving and braking
raised. accordingly during this break-in period.
Active braking action through the ESP® Excessive high-demand braking will cause
may otherwise seriously damage the brake correspondingly high brake wear. Please be
system which is not covered by the attentive to the brake warning lamp in the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. instrument cluster and brake condition
messages in the multifunction display.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: Especially for high-performance driving, it is
Because the ESP® operates automatically, important to maintain and have the brake
the engine and ignition must be shut off system checked regularly.
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or
1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in The high-performance brake system is
position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is designed to operate under the extremely high
being tested on a brake test dynamometer. operating demands required to
Such testing should be no longer than 10 accommodate the performance capabilities
seconds. of the vehicle.
Active braking action through the ESP®

The brakes may produce a squeaking-type ! When driving off on a slippery surface, do
noise depending on the not allow a drive wheel to spin for an
Rvehicle speed extended period with the ESP® switched
off. Doing so may cause serious damage to
Rbrake force applied the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Rambient conditions, e.g. temperature and Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
humidity
! Simultaneously depressing the
As with any brake system, the wear of
accelerator pedal and applying the brakes
individual brake system components such as
reduces engine performance and causes
brake pads or disks strongly depends on your
premature brake and drivetrain wear which
Operation
driving style and the conditions under which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driving style
Limited Warranty.
calling for high-demand braking will cause
your vehicle’s brakes to wear more quickly.
Hydroplaning
Parking brake
Depending on the depth of the water layer on
When driving on wet roads or dirt covered the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low
surfaces, road salt and/or dirt can get into speeds and with new tires. In heavy rain or
the parking brake. when conditions indicate possible
To prevent corrosion and a reduction in the hydroplaning:
braking power of the parking brake, observe X Reduce vehicle speed.
the following:
X Avoid track grooves in the road.
X From time to time, lightly engage the X Apply brakes cautiously.
parking brake before driving off.
X Drive a distance of approximately 110 yds
(100 m) at a maximum speed of 12 mph Standing water
(20 km/h).
! Do not drive through flooded areas.
G Warning! Before driving through water, determine its
While performing this procedure please depth.
assure that the vehicle is stopped before If you must drive through standing water,
applying the parking brake. Otherwise the drive slowly to prevent water from entering
rear wheels could lock up. You could lose the passenger compartment or the engine
control of the vehicle and cause an accident. compartment. Water in these areas could
In addition, the vehicle’s brake lights do not cause damage to electrical components or
light up when the parking brake is engaged. wiring of the engine or transmission, or
Make sure not to endanger any other road could result in water being ingested by the
users when you engage the parking brake. engine through the air intake causing
severe internal engine damage. Any such
damage is not covered by the Mercedes-
Driving off Benz Limited Warranty.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place i Vehicles with air suspension program:
full load on the engine until the operating
Select the raised level (Y page 156) before
temperature has been reached.
driving through standing water.
Z
For more information, see “Driving through Familiarize yourself with the vehicle
water” (Y page 251). characteristics and gear changing before you
attempt any difficult terrain off-road driving.
We recommend that you start out with easy
Off-road driving off-road travel.
G Warning! Special driving features for off-road
Do not load items on the basic carrier bars. It driving
may cause instability during some maneuvers
which could result in an accident. The following driving features are available for
Drive slowly in unknown terrain. This will specific kind of operation:
Operation
make it easier to recognize unexpected ROff-road ABS (Y page 63)

obstacles and avoid damage to the vehicle. ROff-road ESP® (Y page 65)
To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, never
turn it around on steep inclines. If the vehicle
ROff-road 4-ETS (Y page 64)
cannot complete the attempted climb, back it RHill-start assist system (Y page 113)
down in reverse gear. RDownhill Speed Regulation (DSR)
Do not drive along the side of a slope. The (Y page 152)
vehicle might otherwise rollover. If in doing so ROff-road driving program (Y page 155)
the vehicle begins to show a tendency to roll,
immediately steer into a line of gravity RAir suspension program (Y page 155)
(straight up or downhill).
Never let the vehicle roll backwards in idle. Off-road driving rules
You may lose control of the vehicle if you use REngage the off-road driving program
only the service brake. For information on
(Y page 155) before driving under off-road
driving downhill, see “Driving downhill”.
conditions.
G Warning! RVehicles with air suspension program:
Sand, dirt, mud and other material having Make sure you select a vehicle level
friction property can cause exceptional wear (Y page 156) appropriate to the
and tear as well as brake failure. topographical conditions. Always make
Have the brakes checked for dirt build-up and sure the vehicle has enough ground
cleaned. There is otherwise a risk that full clearance.
braking power may not be available in an RFasten items being carried as securely as
emergency. possible (Y page 186).
RAlways navigate gradients with the engine
G Warning!
on and with the transmission engaged in a
Vehicles with air suspension program: Please gear. Switch on the DSR (Y page 152) to
be aware that by raising the vehicle level, the help maintain a preset speed.
center of gravity also rises. Therefore, always
ensure that the vehicle level is as low as
possible. With higher ride height the ESP®
may activate earlier in certain situations.
Read this chapter carefully before you begin

off-road travel.

! Observe the following during off-road Checklist before off-road driving

driving:
Engine oil level
RKeep doors, tailgate, windows, and tilt/
RCheck the engine oil level (Y page 214).
sliding sunroof closed whenever driving
off-road. Only with a proper oil level can the vehicle
obtain a trouble-free oil supply, even on
RAdjust vehicle speed to condition of steep gradients.
terrain. The more uneven, rutty and
steeper the terrain, the lower the speed ! If the engine oil level warning lamp comes
should be. Drive through water slowly at on while driving, stop the vehicle in a safe
an even speed, avoiding a bow wave. location or as soon at is safe to do so.
Operation
RBe especially careful when driving in Check the engine oil level.
unknown territory. It may be necessary The engine oil level warnings should not be
to get out of the vehicle and scout the ignored. Extended driving with the symbol
path you intend to take. displayed could result in serious engine
RWatch
damage that is not covered by the
out for obstacles, such as rocks,
holes, tree stumps and ruts.
RBefore driving through water, determine Tires
its depth. RCheck the tread depth and maintain
RDo not stop vehicle while immersed in specified tire inflation pressure. A placard
water, and do not shut off the engine. with the recommended tire inflation
pressures is located on the driver’s door B-
RIn sandy soil, drive at a steady speed as pillar (Y page 228).
allowed by conditions. This helps
RCheck tires for possible damage and
overcome the vehicle rolling resistance
and reduces the likelihood of the vehicle remove foreign objects.
sinking into the ground. RReplace missing valve caps.
RDo not initiate jumps with the vehicle. It Rims
interrupts the forward momentum of the
RDented or bent rims can cause tire inflation
vehicle.
pressure loss and damage the tire beads.
RAlways drive onto slopes with the engine
For this reason, check and, if necessary,
running and the vehicle in gear. change rims before driving off-road.
RDo not shift automatic transmission into
neutral position N. Vehicle tool kit
RCheck if the jack (Y page 270) is
G Warning! functional.
Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure RAlways take the vehicle tool kit, a strong
before driving through sand. However, if you tow rope, a shovel and a small plank (to put
do so, remember to correct the tire inflation under the jack on sandy soil) with you.
pressure before continuing your trip. Driving
with reduced tire inflation pressure increases
the risk of losing control of the vehicle and
rolling over.
Z
Driving in steep terrain climbing ability of the vehicle depends on

terrain conditions.
RShift automatic transmission into gear
range 1 (Y page 113).
RDrive slowly.
RAvoid excessive engine speeds – drive with
moderate engine speeds (max. 3 000 rpm).
RUtilize the engine’s braking power when
descending a slope, observe the engine
Operation
speed (do not overrev the engine). Apply

the service brake as needed.
Slope angle
: Overhang angle, front
i For maximum engine speed, see
“Tachometer” (Y page 119) and see vehicle
; Overhang angle, rear
specification for your vehicle
Vehicles with (Y page 348).
: :21 ;
steel RCheck the brakes after a lengthy
suspension downgrade drive.
27° 22° 26° G Warning!
Never turn the vehicle around on steep
Vehicles with : inclines. The vehicle might roll over. If the
:21 ;
air suspension vehicle cannot complete the attempted climb,
program back it down in reverse gear.
Raised level 31° 25° 29° i The hill-start assist system supports you
Highway 25° 18° 24° when driving uphill.
For more information, see “Hill-start assist
system” (Y page 152).
ML 63 AMG : ;
Traction in steep terrain
Raised level 26° 28° The maximum vehicle climbing ability is a
Highway 21° 24° 100% grade which is equivalent to a slope
angle of 45°. Keep in mind that the climbing
RComply with the warnings (Y page 248) and
ability of the vehicle depends on terrain
conditions.
rules for off-road driving (Y page 248).
Be easy on the accelerator and watch for
RDriving on embankments, slopes and other
continuous wheel traction when driving in
steep inclines should only be done straight steep terrain.
up or downhill, i.e. in the line of gravity.
Maximum vehicle climbing ability is a i The 4-ETS helps greatly when starting out
100% grade which is equivalent to a slope on a steep incline when the front wheels
angle of 45°. Keep in mind that the have then the tendency to slip due to the
weight shifting towards the rear axle.
21 Vehicles with AMG Sport-Package

The 4-ETS recognizes the situation and Remember that, when stopped, the front
limits the torque for the front wheels by wheels slide across a surface and thus lose
braking them. their ability to steer the vehicle.
Simultaneously the torque for the rear
wheels is increased. Driving through water
Driving across a hilltop

Decelerate just ahead of a hilltop (do not shift
automatic transmission into neutral position
N), to prevent the vehicle from speeding up
Operation
too much after climbing a hill.
Use the momentum of the vehicle to drive
across the hilltop.
After climbing a hill, driving in this manner
prevents the vehicle from:
Rlosing ground contact when cresting hills : Fording depth
Rlosing its forward momentum
Vehicles with steel :
Rspeeding up too much after climbing the hill suspension or air
suspension
Driving downhill program (raised
level)
RDrive slowly.
RDo not drive at an angle to the incline. Steer
20 in (50 cm)
into the line of gravity and drive with the
RBefore driving through water, determine its
front wheels pointing straight downhill.
Otherwise, the vehicle may slide sideways depth.
off the path and roll over. ! The water depth must not exceed the
RShift automatic transmission into gear respective value listed in the table. The
range 1 (Y page 113). ground under the water might not be firm
ROn
which could result the water being deeper
steep inclines, use the Downhill Speed
than expected when driving the vehicle
Regulation (Y page 152).
through it. Please note that the water level
RUtilize the engine’s braking power to is correspondingly lower for flowing water.
reduce vehicle speed. RVehicles with air suspension program:
If this is insufficient, apply the brakes Select the highest vehicle level possible
gently. Make sure the vehicle is moving in (Y page 156).
the line of gravity.
RSwitch to off-road driving program
RCheck the brakes after a lengthy (Y page 155) before driving through water.
downgrade drive.
i The special Off-road ABS (Y page 63) range 1 or 2 (Y page 113).
setting allows for precise and brief RAvoid high engine speeds.
(cyclical) blocking of the front wheels,
REnter and leave the water only at a shallow
permitting them to dig into loose ground.
spot, driving at walking speed.
Z
! Never accelerate before driving into the adequate ground clearance when you cross
water. The bow wave could force water into obstacles with your vehicle. The person
the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus assisting you outside the vehicle should
damaging them. always be a safe distance away from the
RDrive through the water slowly and at a vehicle and positioned so that he or she
constant speed. cannot get hurt in case of any unexpected
vehicle movement.
RDo not stop vehicle while immersed in
After off-road driving or crossing obstacles,
water, and do not shut off the engine. inspect vehicle for any damage, especially
! Do not open any of the vehicle’s doors vehicle underbody and suspension
components. Failure to do so can adversely
Operation
while driving through water. Water could

otherwise enter the vehicle interior and affect the vehicle’s future performance,
damage the vehicle’s electronics, as well as including increased chance of an accident.
the interior equipment. When driving over tree stumps, big rocks and
RThere is a very high level of driving other obstacles, observe the following rules:
resistance in water. The surface is slippery RMake sure the off-road driving program
and may not be firm, making pulling away (Y page 155) is switched on.
in water difficult and dangerous. RAvoid high engine speeds.
RMake sure that only small bow waves are
formed when driving the vehicle through
range 1 (Y page 113).
water.
RCheck the vehicle clearance before
RClean mud off the tire tread after driving
crossing obstacles.
through water.
RCross obstacles (e.g. tree stumps or big
RTo dry the brakes, apply pressure to the
rocks) very slowly by aiming one of the front
brake pedal several times while driving
wheels at the center of the obstacle, and
after leaving the water.
repeat same with the rear wheel.
Crossing obstacles ! Special attention is needed when you

cross obstacles on a steep incline.
The vehicle could slide sideways as a result
of its possible slanted position which in turn
may result in the vehicle tipping or rolling
over.
Driving on sand
G Warning!
Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure
before driving through sand. However, if you
do so, remember to correct the tire inflation
! Obstacles can damage the vehicle pressure before continuing your trip. Driving
underbody or suspension components. If with reduced tire inflation pressure increases
possible use the assistance of a second the risk of losing control of the vehicle and
person outside the vehicle to scout the rolling over.
path you intend to take and check for

When driving on sand, observe the following Returning from off-road driving
rules:
RVehicles with air suspension program: G Warning!
Set the raised level (Y page 156). If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
RAvoid
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible
high engine speeds.
damage to your vehicle has occurred, you
RShift automatic transmission into a gear should turn on the hazard warning flashers,
range that is appropriate for the terrain. carefully slow down, and drive with caution to
RIn sandy soil, drive at a steady speed as an area which is a safe distance from the road.
conditions permit. This helps overcome the Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
vehicle rolling resistance and reduce the for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
Operation
likelihood of the vehicle sinking into the appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the
ground. nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
RDrive in tracks of other vehicles if they are tire dealer for repairs.
not too deep and you have sufficient Off-road driving increases strain on the
clearance. vehicle.
We recommend that you inspect the vehicle
Ruts for possible damage after each off-road trip.
A number of off-road tracks or other byways Recognizing any damage and a subsequent
have deep ruts which can cause the timely repair reduces the chance of a possible
underbody to come in contact with the breakdown or accident later on.
ground. Proceed as follows:
RMake sure the off-road driving program RSwitch off the off-road driving program
(Y page 155) is switched on. (Y page 155).
RVehicles with air suspension program: RSwitch off the DSR (Y page 153).
Set the raised level (Y page 156). RVehicles with air suspension program:
! Check that the ruts are not too deep and Lower the vehicle back to a level suitable
your vehicle’s clearance is sufficient. for road conditions, e.g. highway/high-
Otherwise: speed level (Y page 156).
RClean all exterior lamps and check for
Ryour vehicle may be damaged
possible damage.
Rthe underbody of the vehicle may come
RClean the front and rear license plate.
in contact with the ground and you may
get stuck RRemove excessive dirt from tires, wheels,
RAvoid
wheel housings, and underbody.
high engine speeds.
For instance, after driving in mud, clean the
RShift automatic transmission into gear radiator, chassis, engine, brakes, and
range 1 (Y page 113). wheels from extreme dirt using a strong jet
RDrive next to the ruts rather than through of water.
them if at all possible. RCheck tires for possible damage.
RIf the ruts are too deep to drive in, drive with RInspect vehicle underbody, oil pan, brake
one side of the vehicle on the grassy center hoses, etc., as well as vehicle underbody
strip if the route permits. for possible damage.
Z
RCheck for brush or branches caught in the Electrical connections

underbody.
The vehicle is prewired to accept the seven-
! Brush or branches could increase the wire harness included in the Mercedes-Benz
possibility of a fire, as well as cut fuel and/ approved trailer hitch receiver kit.
or brake lines, puncture rubber bellows of
i A four-pole conversion plug is available
the axles or drive shafts.
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
RAfter continued operation in mud, sand, Center as a spare part.
water or other dirty conditions clean the
For further information, contact an
brake discs, wheels, brake pads and check
and clean axle joints.
Operation
RConduct a brake test.

Vehicle and trailer weights and ratings
The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the weight
Trailer towing of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo,
equipment, luggage, etc. loaded on the
G Warning! trailer. The maximum permissible GTW to be
Failure to use proper equipment and driving towed:
technique can result in a loss of vehicle RVehicles with 4MATIC: 7 200 lb (3 265 kg)
control when towing a trailer. RVehicles without 4MATIC: 4 630 lb
Improper towing or failure to follow the (2 100 kg)
instructions in this manual can result in
vehicle damage and/or serious personal Trailer Tongue Weight Rating (TWR) is the
injury. Follow the guidelines below carefully maximum permissible weight on the trailer
to assure safe trailer operation. tongue:
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center RVehicles with 4MATIC: 576 lb (261 kg) limit
should you require an explanation of for Mercedes-Benz approved hitch receiver
information contained in this manual. RVehicles without 4MATIC: 370 lb (168 kg)
limit for Mercedes-Benz approved hitch
Trailer hitch receiver
ROnly install a trailer hitch receiver approved
Loading a trailer
for your vehicle.
RWhen loading a trailer, you should observe
For information on availability and that neither the permissible GTW, nor the
installation, contact an authorized Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) are
Mercedes-Benz Center. exceeded. The GVWR is indicated on the
RThe bumpers on your vehicle are not certification label located on the driver’s
designed for use with clamp-type hitches. door B-pillar (Y page 227).
Do not attach rental hitches or other Maximum permissible values are listed on
bumper-type hitches to them. the safety compliance certification labels
RTo reduce the possibility of damage, for the vehicle and for the trailer to be
remove the hitch ball adapter from the towed.
receiver when not in use.

The lowest value listed must be selected Observe maximum permitted trailer
when determining how the vehicle and dimensions (width and length).
trailer are loaded. Most states and all Canadian provinces
RThe tongue weight at the hitch ball must be require
added to the rear axle weight to prevent Rsafety chains between the towing vehicle
exceeding the rear Gross Axle Weight and the trailer
Rating (GAWR). The GAWR is indicated on The chains should be criss-crossed under
the certification label located on the the trailer tongue. They must be attached
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 227). to the hitch receiver, and not to the
i Mercedes-Benz recommends loading the vehicle’s bumper or axle.
Operation
trailer in such a manner that it has a tongue Make sure to leave enough slack in the
weight between 8 % and 15 % of the GTW. chains to permit turning corners.
Ra separate brake system at various trailer
i The weight of other accessories, weights
passengers and cargo will reduce the
Ra break-away switch on trailers with a
maximum trailer weight and tongue weight
your vehicle can tow. separate brake system.
Check with your local state laws for specific
Checking weights of vehicle and trailer requirements.
RTo assure that the towing vehicle and trailer The switch activates the trailer brakes in
are in compliance with the maximum the possible event that the trailer might
permissible weight limits, have the loaded separate from the tow vehicle.
rig (towing vehicle including driver,
passengers and cargo, trailer fully loaded) ! Do not connect a trailer brake system (if
weighed on a commercial scale. trailer is so equipped) directly to the
vehicle’s hydraulic brake system, as your
RCheck the vehicle’s front and rear gross vehicle is equipped with antilock brakes. If
axle weight, the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) you do, neither the vehicle’s brakes nor the
and tongue weight. trailer’s brakes will function properly.
The values as measured must not exceed
the weight limits listed under “Vehicle and i The provided vehicle electrical wiring
trailer weights and ratings” (Y page 254). harness for trailer towing has a brake signal
wire for hook-up to a brake controller.
Coupling a trailer X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
G Warning! park position P (Y page 110).
Vehicles with air suspension program: While X Engage the parking brake for the vehicle
you are coupling or decoupling a trailer, make (Y page 107).

sure nobody locks or unlocks the vehicle and/ X Start the engine (Y page 103).
or opens or closes doors or the tailgate. X Vehicles with vehicle level control:
The vehicle’s level could change and you Select the highway level (Y page 156).
could endanger yourself and/or others as a X Vehicles with Adaptive Damping System
result. (ADS):
Make sure that you do not operate the ADS Set the ADS to AUTO or COMF
switch or the vehicle level control system (Y page 156).
when coupling/decoupling the trailer. X Turn off the engine (Y page 108).
Z
X Close all doors and the tailgate. apply only the trailer brake controller by
X Attach the trailer. hand to make sure the brakes are working
X Plug in all electrical connectors. properly.
RAlways secure items in the trailer to
i Vehicles with vehicle level control: prevent load shifts while driving.
When you are towing a trailer, the vehicle RWhen towing a trailer, check occasionally
level always remains in the highway setting.
to make sure the load is secure, and that
The following applies additionally when trailer lighting and brakes (if so equipped)
towing a trailer: are functioning properly.
RThe vehicle is lowered to the highway
RTake into consideration that when towing a
Operation
level when it reaches a speed of 5 mph trailer, the handling characteristics are
(8 km/h) if not set to highway level. different and less stable from those when
RThe highspeed level is not available. operating the vehicle without a trailer.
The restrictions that apply to towing also It is important to avoid sudden maneuvers.
apply when using accessories that are RThe vehicle and trailer combination is
connected to the trailer power socket, such heavier, and therefore limited in
as a bicycle rack. acceleration and climbing ability, and has a
larger braking distance.
Towing a trailer It is more prone to reacting to cross wind
There are many different laws, including gusts, and requires more sensitive steering
speed limit restrictions, having to do with input.
trailer towing. Make sure your rig will be legal, RIf possible, do not brake abruptly, but
not only for where you reside, but also for rather engage the brake slightly at first to
where you will be driving. A good source for permit the trailer to activate its brake. Then
this information can be the police or local increase the braking force.
authorities.
! If the trailer should begin to sway, reduce
Note the following, when driving with a trailer: the vehicle’s speed immediately.
RIn order to gain skill and an understanding Do not attempt to straighten out the tow
of the vehicle’s behavior, you should vehicle and trailer by increasing the speed.
practice turning, stopping and backing up
RIf the transmission shifts between gears on
in an area which is free of traffic.
inclines repeatedly, shift to a lower gear
RBefore you start driving check the range manually (Y page 113). Select 4, 3,
- trailer hitch 2 or 1.
- break-away switch A lower gear and reduction of speed
reduces the chance of engine overloading
- safety chains and/or overheating.
- electrical connections ROn very steep inclines, not manageable
- lighting with automatic transmission in gear range
- tires 1, switch on off-road driving program
(Y page 155).
RAdjust the mirrors (Y page 89) to permit RWhen going down an incline, shift into a
unobstructed view beyond rear of trailer. lower gear and use the engine’s braking
RIf the trailer has electric brakes, start your effect.
vehicle and trailer moving slowly, and then

Avoid riding the brakes, thus overheating G Warning!

the vehicle and trailer brakes (if so Vehicles with air suspension program: As
equipped). soon as you disconnect the electrical
RIf the engine coolant rises to an extremely connection between the trailer and the
high temperature when the air conditioning vehicle, the vehicle will lower. To help avoid
is on, turn off the air conditioning system. personal injury, make sure no one is near the
Engine coolant heat can be additionally wheel housing or underneath the vehicle
vented by opening the windows, switching before the electrical connection is
the climate control fan speed to high and disconnected.
setting the temperature control to the When you decouple the trailer, the vehicle is
Operation
maximum. temporarily raised because the springs are
RDuring a passing maneuver extreme care relieved of load. Be especially careful during
must be exercised since your vehicle with this process, as you could otherwise injure
a trailer will require additional passing yourself and/or others. Make sure that any
distance ahead than when driving without persons remaining in the vehicle do not press
a trailer. the switches for vehicle level control or the
ADS.
Because your vehicle and trailer is longer
than your vehicle alone, you will also need X Disconnect all electrical plug connectors.
to go much farther ahead of the passed
X Decouple the trailer.
vehicle before you can return to your lane.
X Make sure that the trailer coupling is free
of load.
Decoupling a trailer
X Turn off the engine (Y page 108).
G Warning!
Vehicles with air suspension program: While
you are coupling or decoupling a trailer, make Driving abroad
sure nobody locks or unlocks the vehicle and/ If you plan to drive the vehicle outside the U.S.
or opens or closes doors or the tailgate. or Canada, you should request dealer
The vehicle’s level could change and you network information for your destination from
could endanger yourself and/or others as a any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
result.
Make sure that you do not operate the ADS
switch or the vehicle level control system Control and operation of radio
when coupling/decoupling the trailer. transmitter
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in Safety notes

park position P (Y page 110).
G Warning!
X Engage the parking brake for the vehicle
Please do not forget that your primary
(Y page 107). responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
X Start the engine (Y page 103). attention to the road must always be his/her
X Close all doors and the tailgate. primary focus when driving. For your safety
X Engage the parking brake for the trailer. and the safety of others, we recommend that
you pull over to a safe location and stop
before placing or taking a telephone call.
Z
258 Maintenance
If you choose to use the telephone22 while cause determined and corrected
driving, please use the hands-free device and immediately. If you must drive under these
only use the telephone when road, weather conditions, drive only with at least one
and traffic conditions permit. Some window fully open at all times.
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
mobile telephone while driving a vehicle.
Only operate the COMAND22 (Cockpit Maintenance
Management and Data System) if road,
Notes
weather and traffic conditions permit.
Otherwise, you may not be able to observe The Maintenance System in your vehicle
Operation
traffic conditions and could endanger yourself tracks the distance driven and the time
and others. elapsed since the last maintenance service.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph It calculates other maintenance service work
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is required, and calls for the next maintenance
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately service accordingly.
14 m) every second. We strongly recommend that you have your
vehicle serviced at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center. Have it serviced in accordance
Emission control with the Maintenance Booklet at the times
called for by the maintenance service
Certain systems of the engine serve to keep indicator.
the toxic components of the exhaust gases
within permissible limits required by law. i Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
These systems will function properly only accordance with the Maintenance Booklet
when maintained strictly according to factory and maintenance service indicator at the
specifications. Any adjustments on the designated times/mileage will result in
engine should, therefore, be carried out only vehicle damage not covered by the
by qualified Mercedes-Benz Center Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
authorized technicians.
Engine adjustments should not be altered in
Maintenance service indicator
any way. Moreover, the specified service
message
procedures must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing Information on maintenance work and
requirements. For details refer to the maintenance intervals are specified in the
Maintenance Booklet. Maintenance Booklet. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, or visit
G Warning! www.mbusa.com (USA only) for additional
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your information.
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon The maintenance service indicator message
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause will notify you when the next maintenance
unconsciousness and possible death. service is required.
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such Starting approximately 1 month before the
as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. next maintenance service is required, one of
If you think that exhaust gas fumes are the following messages will appear in the
entering the vehicle while driving, have the multifunction display. The messages will
22 Observe all legal requirements.

Maintenance 259
appear while you are driving or when you Maintenance service term exceeded
switch on the ignition (example service A):
If you have exceeded the suggested
Service A In XXXXX Miles (km) maintenance service term, you will see the
Service A In XX Days following message in the multifunction
Service A In X Day display:
Service A Due Now Service A Exceeded By XXXXX Miles
(Km)
Service A Exceeded By XXX Days
Service A Exceeded By X Day
In addition, a signal sounds when the
Operation
message appears.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
reset the maintenance service indicator
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing of following a completed maintenance service.
maintenance services and intervals they need
to be performed at.
Calling up the maintenance service
Clearing the maintenance service indicator display
indicator message
i The menu overview can be found on
The maintenance service indicator message (Y page 121).
is cleared automatically
You can call up the maintenance service
Rafter approximately 10 seconds when you indicator display at any time to check when
switch on the ignition the next maintenance service is required.
Rafter approximately 10 seconds when X Switch on the ignition.
reaching the service threshold while driving X Press button V or U on the
Rafter approximately 30 seconds, once the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
suggested maintenance service term has until the standard display (Y page 122)
passed appears in the multifunction display.
X Press button * or & on the
multifunction steering wheel until the
maintenance service indicator display with
the service symbol ¯ and the
maintenance service deadline appears in
i If the battery was disconnected, the days
of disconnection will not be included in the
count shown by the maintenance service
indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance
service deadline, you will need to subtract
X Clearing the maintenance service these days from the days shown in the
indicator message manually: Press reset maintenance service indicator message or
button : on the instrument cluster. maintenance service indicator display.
The standard display appears in the
Z
260 Vehicle care
Do not confuse the maintenance service vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning the
indicator with the engine oil level indicator inside.
4. Never use fluids or solvents that are not
designed for cleaning your vehicle.
Always lock away cleaning products and keep
Resetting the maintenance service
them out of reach of children.
indicator
In the event that the maintenance service on ! When cleaning the vehicle, do not use
your vehicle is not carried out at an authorized scouring agents. Never apply strong force
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can have the and only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge.
Operation
maintenance service indicator reset. Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
The automotive maintenance facility carrying surface to be cleaned.
out the maintenance service will find the While in operation, even while parked, your
information for resetting the maintenance vehicle is subjected to varying external
service indicator in the maintenance-relevant influences which, if gone unchecked, can
literature for your vehicle. attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle
Such literature is available at any authorized underbody and cause lasting damage.
Mercedes-Benz Center or directly from Such damage is caused not only by extreme
Mercedes-Benz. and varying climatic conditions, but also by:
! If the maintenance service indicator was RAir pollution
reset inadvertently, have an authorized
RRoad salt
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
RTar
Only reset the maintenance service
indicator if the proper maintenance service RGravel and stone chipping
has been performed. Not following the
To avoid paint damage, you should
proper maintenance service as described
immediately remove:
in the Maintenance Booklet will result in
engine damage and/or other vehicle RGrease and oil
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz RFuel
Limited Warranty.
RCoolant
RBrake fluid
Vehicle care RBird droppings
Cleaning and care of the vehicle RInsects
RTree resins etc.

Notes
Regular and proper care will help to maintain Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates
the value of your vehicle. the aggressiveness and potency of the above
adverse influences.
G Warning!
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the
particular container. Always open your

Vehicle care 261
More frequent washings are necessary to Power washer

deal with unfavorable conditions:
! Follow the instructions provided by the
Rnear the ocean power washer manufacturer on
Rin industrial areas (smoke, exhaust maintaining a distance between the vehicle
emissions) and the nozzle of the power washer.
Rduring winter operation Never use a round nozzle to power-wash
tires. The intense jet of water can result in
You should check your vehicle from time to damage to the tire.
time for stone chipping or other damage. Any
Always replace a damaged tire.
damage should be repaired as soon as
Always keep the jet of water moving across
Operation
possible to prevent corrosion.
the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of
parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other
the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough
rubber parts.
check is a washing of the underbody followed
by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
need to be re-undercoated. If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory water, and a SmartKey is within
with a wax-base rustproofing in the body approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, it
cavities which will last for the lifetime of the could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither
necessary nor recommended by Mercedes- Tar stains
Benz because of the possibility of
incompatibility between materials used in the Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and
production process and others applied later. become more difficult to remove. A tar
We have selected vehicle-care products and remover is recommended.
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and which Paintwork, painted body components
always reflect the latest technology. You can ! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape
obtain Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care or similar materials to painted body
products at an authorized Mercedes-Benz components may damage the paintwork.
Center.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should
damage due to negligent or incorrect care be applied when water drops on the paint
cannot always be removed or repaired with surface do not “bead up”. This should
the vehicle-care products recommended normally be done every 3 to 5 months,
here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at an depending on the climate and washing
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. detergent used.
The following topics deal with the cleaning Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
and care of your vehicle and give important should be applied if the paint surface shows
“how-to” information as well as references to signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss).
Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care Do not apply any of these products or wax if
products. your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood
is still hot.
X Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for
quick and provisional repairs of minor paint
Z
262 Vehicle care
damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the
doors, etc.). finish.
Automatic car wash

Engine cleaning
You can have your vehicle washed in an
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment, automatic car wash from the start. Brushless
make sure to protect electrical components car washes are preferable.
and connectors from contact with water and X To protect the filter system, activate the air
cleaning agents.
recirculation mode using button d on
Corrosion protection, such as MB the climate control panel.
Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the
Operation
engine compartment after every engine ! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic
cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage touchless car wash which uses caustic
bushings and joints should be lubricated. The spray. Caustic spray will damage the paint
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be or ornamental moldings.
protected from any wax. If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before
running it through the automatic car wash.
Vehicle washing
! Make sure the combination switch is set
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of to wiper setting $. Otherwise, the rain
road salt as soon as possible. sensor could activate and cause the wipers
When washing the vehicle underbody, do not to move unintentionally. This may lead to
forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels. vehicle damage.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of exterior rear view mirrors prior to running
water, and a SmartKey is within the vehicle through an automatic car wash
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, it to prevent damage to the mirrors.
could be inadvertently locked or unlocked. X When taking the vehicle through an
Hand-wash automatic conveyor-type car wash:
X Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
Make sure the automatic transmission
in direct sunlight. remains in neutral position N. Observe
instructions, see “Remaining in neutral
X Only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge to
position N” (Y page 111).
clean the vehicle.
When leaving the automatic car wash, make
X Only use a mild vehicle wash detergent,
sure the mirrors are folded out.
such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo. After running the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the
X Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a
windshield and the wiper blade inserts. This
diffused jet of water. will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise
X Do not spray directly towards the which can be caused by residual wax on the
ventilation intake. windshield.
X Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge
and chamois frequently. Ornamental moldings
X Rinse with clean water and dry with a
X For regular cleaning and care of ornamental
chamois thoroughly.
moldings, use a damp cloth.

Vehicle care 263
! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental X Switch off the ignition.

moldings. Although ornamental moldings X Clean Distronic system sensor cover : by
may have chrome appearance, they could hand.
be made of anodized aluminum that will be To clean Distronic system sensor cover :
damaged when cleaned with chrome
and the bumper area near sensors ; observe
cleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to clean
the following:
those ornamental moldings.
RUse a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
For very dirty ornamental moldings of
which you are sure are chrome-plated, use Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
a chrome cleaner. If in doubt whether an with plenty of water.
ornamental molding is chrome-plated, RUse a soft, non-scratching cloth.
Operation
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. ! If you use a power washer to clean the
sensor covers, observe the following:
Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps, RFollow the instructions provided by the
side markers, turn signal lenses power washer manufacturer.
X Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as RMaintain a distance between the sensor
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, covers and the nozzle of the power
with plenty of water. washer.
! Only use window cleaning solutions that

Cleaning the rear view camera lens
are suitable for plastic lamp lenses.
Window cleaning solutions which are not
suitable may damage the plastic lamp
lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not
use abrasives, solvents or cleaners that
contain solvents.
Cleaning the driving systems sensors
X Only use clean water and a soft, non-

scratching cloth to clean rear view camera
lens :.
Be careful not to apply wax to rear view
camera lens : when waxing the vehicle. If
necessary, remove the wax using the
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo with
plenty of water.
Z
264 Vehicle care
! Do not clean the camera and the area containing solvents. Do not touch the
around the camera inside of the windows with hard objects
Rwith a high-pressure cleaner such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may
damage the windows.
Rwith a dry cloth and strong pressure
Rwith aggressive cleaning agents Light alloy wheels

You could otherwise damage the camera. If possible, clean wheels once a week.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care,
Cleaning the windows and the wiper a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of
blades water for cleaning the light alloy wheels.
Operation
! Never open the hood when the wiper arms ! Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
are folded forward. Acid may cause corrosion or damage the
G Warning! clear coat.
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
! The vehicle should not be parked for an
remove SmartKey from starter switch before
extended period of time immediately after
cleaning the windshield and/or the wiper
it has been cleaned. This applies especially
blades. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make
after the wheel rims have been cleaned
sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics have
with wheel rim cleaner. Wheel rim cleaners
status 0. Otherwise, the wiper motor could
can lead to increased corrosion of the
suddenly turn on and cause injury.
brake disks and brake pads. Non-approved
wheel cleaners may also damage the wheel
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. paint if the vehicle is not driven after
They could tear. cleaning.
X Fold the wiper arms forward until they snap Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system
into place. should always be warmed-up before it is
X Clean the windshield and the wiper blade parked after cleaning. Drive your vehicle for
inserts with a clean cloth and mild several minutes to allow the brakes to dry.
detergent solution. When applying Mercedes-Benz approved
Tire Care and Mercedes-Benz approved
X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window
Wheel Care products, take care not to
cleaning solution on all outside and inside
spray them on the brake disks.
glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is Plastic and rubber parts
recommended.
X Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild
! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing
the windshield before turning the SmartKey solution.
in the starter switch or pressing the X Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. solution.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper The surface may temporarily change color.
arm back. If released, the force of the If this is the case, wait for it to dry.
impact from the tensioning spring could
crack the windshield. G Warning!
Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays
! To clean the window interior, do not use containing solvents to clean the cockpit or the
a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners

Vehicle care 265
steering wheel. Cleaners containing solvents seat belts at temperatures above 176‡
will make the surface porous and vehicle (80†) or in direct sunlight.
occupants could suffer serious injuries from
G Warning!
plastic parts coming loose in the event of air
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
bag deployment.
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
Upholstery
surface.
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
Hard plastic trim items
Operation
clothing that have the tendency to give off
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the
on a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with light upholstery to become permanently
pressure. discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will
COMAND display be prevented.
! You must switch off the COMAND display G Warning!

and allow it to cool prior to cleaning. Only use seat or head restraint covers which
have been tested and approved by Mercedes-
! Do not use any liquids or cleaning agents. Benz for your vehicle model.
These can damage or even destroy the Using other seat or head restraint covers may
COMAND display screen. interfere with or prevent
X Use a standard microfiber cloth and apply Rdeployment of the front side impact air
with light pressure. bags
Rdeployment of the rear side impact air bags
Steering wheel Ractivation of the NECK-PRO active front
X Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly head restraints
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Leather Care. for availability.
Carpets Leather upholstery

Please note that leather upholstery is a
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet and natural product and is therefore subject to a
Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets. natural aging process. Leather upholstery
may also react to certain ambient influences
Headliner such as high humidity or high temperature by
showing wrinkles for example.
X Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo
cleaner in case of excessive dirt. X Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-
Benz approved Leather Care.
Seat belts
X Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap.
! The seat belts must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the
Z
266 Vehicle care
! To avoid damage to leather upholstery:

RWipe with light pressure only.
RDo not clean with abrasive cleaning

agents such as scouring milk or powder.
RDo not soak the leather upholstery.
As leather is a natural product, it could

otherwise harden or become porous.
RExercise particular care when cleaning
perforated leather as its underside
Operation
should not become wet.
MB Tex upholstery
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care
onto a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with
light pressure for cleaning the upholstery.
Wood trims
X Only use water and a damp cloth to clean
wood trims in your vehicle.
! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
these may be abrasive.
Chrome-plated exhaust tip

Regular cleaning and care of chrome-plated
exhaust tips will help to maintain their shine
and the classy appearance.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Chrome
Polishing Paste each time the vehicle has
been washed, especially during the winter.
! Do not use alkaline cleaners such as
wheel cleaners as they could cause
corrosion.

267

Where will I find ...? .......................... 268
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display ....................... 272
What to do if … .................................. 297
Unlocking/locking manually ........... 306
Resetting activated NECK-PRO
active front head restraints ............. 309
Replacing SmartKey batteries ......... 309
Replacing bulbs ................................. 311
Replacing wiper blades .................... 318
Practical hints
Flat tire .............................................. 319
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel
engine only) ....................................... 331
AdBlue® (diesel engine only) ........... 331
Battery ............................................... 334
Jump starting .................................... 336
Towing the vehicle ............................ 338
Fuses .................................................. 342

268 Where will I find ...?
Vehicle equipment The vehicle tool kit includes:

RAlignment bolt 23
i This Operator’s Manual describes all
features, standard or optional, potentially
RCollapsible wheel chock 23
available for your vehicle at the time of RElectric air pump24
purchase. Please be aware that your RFuse chart
vehicle might not be equipped with all
features described in this manual. RJack23
RReversible ratchet for jack23

Where will I find ...? RTIREFIT kit25
RTowing eye bolt
First aid kit
RWheel wrench23
Practical hints
i Check expiration dates and contents for

completeness at least once a year and RSpare wheel bolts26
replace missing/expired items. X Removing: Open the tailgate (Y page 75).
The first aid kit is located on the driver’s side
in the cargo compartment behind the cover.
X Push in floor handle ; as indicated by

arrow.
X Turn lock : by 90° in direction of the X Lift cargo compartment floor : using floor
arrow. handle ;.
X Fold down cover ;.
The first aid kit can be removed.
Vehicle tool kit

The vehicle tool kit is located in the space
underneath the cargo compartment floor.
23 Vehicles with spare wheel only.

24 ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC (Canada vehicles) factory equipped with 20" wheels and vehicles with spare wheel
with collapsible tire only.
25 ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC (Canada vehicles) factory equipped with 20" wheels only.
26 Vehicles with Minispare wheel only.

Where will I find ...? 269
a wheel change such as a jack or a wheel

wrench. Some tools required for a wheel
change are specific to your vehicle.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to obtain the tools approved for
your vehicle. The illustration shows the
vehicle retrofitted with the necessary tools
for a wheel change.
X Release securing hook = (located below

the floor handle) from holder.
Practical hints
: Towing eye bolt
; Alignment bolt
= Jack
? Fuse chart
A Electric air pump27
X Engage securing hook = on upper cargo B TIREFIT kit27
compartment lip ?.
C Wheel wrench
! With the cargo compartment cover blind D Collapsible wheel chock
installed behind the rear seats, disengage E Reversible ratchet for jack
cargo compartment cover blind and flip it
forward. Otherwise the strap of the
securing hook could damage the cargo
compartment cover blind.
! To prevent damage, always disengage the

securing hook from upper cargo
compartment lip and lower the cargo
compartment floor before closing the
tailgate.
Vehicles without spare wheel

i Vehicles without spare wheel are not
factory-equipped with the tools required for
27 ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC (Canada vehicles) factory equipped with 20" wheels only.
Z
270 Where will I find ...?
Vehicles with spare wheel Collapsible wheel chock

The collapsible wheel chock serves to secure
the vehicle, e.g. while changing a wheel.
X Take the collapsible wheel chock from the
vehicle tool kit (Y page 268).
Example illustration
Practical hints
: Electric air pump28

; Storage well casing
= Alignment bolt
? Towing eye bolt
X Setting up: Tilt both plates upward :.
A Wheel wrench
X Fold the lower plate outward ;.
X To access remaining tools: Remove X Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way
storage well casing ; (if so equipped). into the openings of base plate =.
X Remove the spare wheel (Y page 271). For information on where to place wheel
chocks when changing a wheel, see “Lifting
the vehicle” (Y page 324).
Jack
G Warning!
Only use the jack supplied with your vehicle
to lift the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. If
you use the jack for any other purpose, you or
others could be injured, as the jack is
designed only for the purpose of changing a
Example illustration wheel.
B Jack When using the jack, observe the safety notes
C Collapsible wheel chock in the “Mounting the spare wheel” section and
D Fuse chart the notes on the jack.
E Spare wheel bolts29 X Take the jack from the vehicle tool kit
F Reversible ratchet for jack (Y page 268).
28 Vehicles with spare wheel with collapsible tire only.

29 Vehicles with Minispare wheel only.

Where will I find ...? 271
vehicles that are factory equipped with 20''

wheels come with TIREFIT.
The spare wheel is located in the space
underneath the cargo compartment floor.
X Removing: Open the tailgate (Y page 75).
X Lift the cargo compartment floor and
secure it on the upper cargo compartment
lip (Y page 268).
! To prevent damage, always disengage the
Storage position securing hook from upper cargo
compartment lip and lower the cargo
X Take the reversible ratchet from the vehicle compartment floor before closing the
Practical hints
tool kit (Y page 268). tailgate.
X Remove the storage well casing (if so
equipped) (Y page 270).
Operational position
X Attach reversible ratchet ; to jack : in
such a way that the word UP can be seen. Example illustration
Before placing the jack and the reversible X Remove retaining screw : by turning it
ratchet back into the vehicle tool kit: counterclockwise.
X Fully collapse the jack (storage position). X Remove spare wheel ;.
X Remove the reversible ratchet.
For information on mounting the spare wheel,
see “Flat tire” (Y page 319).
Spare wheel Storing the spare wheel after use

G Observe Safety notes, see page 319. X Place spare wheel ; into the spare wheel
i USA only: well (Y page 271).
The ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC does not have X Secure spare wheel ; by turning retaining
a spare wheel. screw : clockwise (Y page 271).
X Place the storage well casing (if so
i Canada only: equipped) into the spare wheel
The ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC does not have (Y page 270).
a spare wheel. ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC
Z
272 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Vehicle status messages in the and, where a malfunction is indicated,

multifunction display addressed as soon as possible at an
Notes
Failure to repair the condition noted may
Warning and malfunction messages appear in cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-
the multifunction display located in the Benz Limited Warranty, or result in property
instrument cluster. damage or personal injury.
Certain warning and malfunction messages
are accompanied by an audible signal. G Warning!
Address these messages accordingly and No messages will be displayed if either the
follow the additional instructions given in this instrument cluster or the multifunction
Operator’s Manual. display is inoperative.
Selecting the Vehicle status message As a result, you will not be able to see
Practical hints
memory menu in the control system information about your driving conditions,
(Y page 128) displays both cleared and such as
uncleared messages. Rspeed
High-priority messages appear in the Routside temperature

multifunction display in red color. Rwarning/indicator lamps
Certain messages of high priority cannot be
Rmalfunction/warning messages
cleared from the multifunction display using
the reset button (Y page 118) or button Rfailure of any systems
&, *, U or V on the Driving characteristics may be impaired.
multifunction steering wheel.
If you must continue to drive, do so with added
Other messages of high priority and caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
messages of less immediate priority can be Benz Center as soon as possible.
cleared from the multifunction display using
the reset button or button &, *, G Warning!
U or V on the multifunction steering HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
wheel. They are then stored in the Vehicle the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
status message memory menu Instructions included in your vehicle literature
(Y page 128). Remember that clearing a portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize
message will only make the message potential danger.
disappear. Clearing a message will not
correct the condition that caused the On the pages that follow, you will find a
message to appear. compilation of the most important warning
and malfunction messages that may appear.
G Warning! For your convenience the messages are
All categories of messages contain important divided into text messages (Y page 273) and
information which should be taken note of symbol messages (Y page 283).

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 273
Text messages
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ABS ABS, ESP The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
Inoperativ malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the ESP®, and the PRE-
e SAFE® system are unavailable.
See X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
Operator’s during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
Manual
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Practical hints
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.
ABS ABS, ESP The self-diagnosis may not be completed yet.
Unavailabl The display will clear after driving a short distance at a vehicle
e speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
See
Operator’s
Manual
ABS ABS, ESP The brake system still functions normally but due to
Unavailabl insufficient power supply, the ABS, the BAS, the ESP®, and
e See the PRE-SAFE® system are unavailable.
Operator’s When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS,
Manual the BAS, the ESP®, and the PRE-SAFE® system are
operational again and the message should disappear.
X If the message does not disappear: Have the system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
ESP Inoperativ In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp d comes on.
e See The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
Operator’s malfunction the BAS, the ESP®, and the PRE-SAFE® system
Manual are unavailable.
The ABS may not be operational.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
accident.
Z

ESP Unavailabl The brake system still functions normally but due to
e See insufficient power supply the ESP®, the BAS, and the
Operator’s PRE-SAFE® system are unavailable.
Manual X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
When the voltage is above the required value again, the
ESP®, the BAS, and the PRE-SAFE® system are operational
again and the message in the multifunction display should
disappear.
If the message in the multifunction display does not
Practical hints
disappear:
X Have the alternator and the battery checked.
ESP Unavailabl If the yellow ESP® warning lamp d flashes while driving
e See and this message appears, the Electronic Traction System
Operator’s (ETS/4-ETS) has switched off to prevent overheating of the
Manual drive wheel brakes.
As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the Electronic Traction
System (ETS/4-ETS) switches on again.
The message in the multifunction display disappears and the
ESP® warning lamp d goes out.
ESP Unavailabl The self-diagnosis may not be completed yet.
e See The display will clear after driving a short distance at a vehicle
Operator’s speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
Manual
PRE-SAFE Inoperativ The PRE-SAFE® system has failed. All other occupant safety
e See systems, such as the air bags, are still available.
Operator’s X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Manual possible.


Front USA only:
Passenger The front passenger front air bag is activated while driving
Airbag even though a child, small individual, or object below the
Enabled system’s weight threshold is on the front passenger seat, or
See the front passenger seat is empty. Objects on the seat or
Operator’s forces acting on the seat may make the system sense
Manual supplemental weight.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition.
Practical hints
X Open the front passenger door.
X Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat
and properly secure the child in rear seat employing the
child restraint if necessary.
X Remove any other items from on and around the front
passenger seat and make sure the parcel net on the back
of the front passenger seat is empty.
X Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat are
present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged
behind or around the seat, head restraints pushing against
roof etc.). The system may recognize such forces as
supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the
front passenger seat is of a greater weight than actually
present.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door
and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 42 indicator lamp in the center
console (Y page 45) and the multifunction display in the
instrument cluster (Y page 28) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
Rthe 42 indicator lamp in the center console
should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that
the OCS (Y page 42) has deactivated the front passenger
front air bag.
Rthe message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Operator’s Manual or the message Front Passenger
Airbag Disabled See Operator’s Manual should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is
unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to
complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction display.
Z

If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front
passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger
classification sensed by the OCS, the 42
indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working
properly. Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
G Warning!
If the 42 indicator lamp remains out even after performing the above corrective
steps, do not have any children 12 years old and under and other small individuals use the front
Practical hints
passenger seat until the system has been repaired.


Front USA only:
Passenger The front passenger front air bag is deactivated while driving
Airbag even though an adult or someone larger than a small
Disabled individual is occupying the front passenger seat. Forces
See acting on the seat may make the system sense a decrease in
Operator’s weight.
Manual X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.
X Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the
Practical hints
vehicle.
X Adjust the seat height to a higher position (Y page 82).
X Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat are
present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged
underneath, behind or around the seat). Such forces may
cause the system to sense that an occupant of a lesser
weight than actually present is on the front passenger seat.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door
and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 42 indicator lamp in the center
console (Y page 45) and the multifunction display in the
instrument cluster (Y page 28) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
Rthe 42 indicator lamp in the center console
should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that
the OCS (Y page 42) has deactivated the front passenger
front air bag.
Rthe message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Operator’s Manual or the message Front Passenger
Airbag Disabled See Operator’s Manual should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is
unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to
complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front
passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger
classification sensed by the OCS, the 42
indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working
properly. Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Z
G Warning!
If the 42 indicator lamp remains illuminated with an adult occupant on the front
passenger seat even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any passenger use
the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Driving systems

Cruise Inoperativ The cruise control is malfunctioning.
Control e X Have the cruise control checked at an authorized
Practical hints
Cruise - - - MPH One of the activation conditions for cruise control has not
Control been fulfilled. You may have attempted to set a speed below
20 mph (30 km/h).
X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) if the situation allows
and set the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 142).
DISTRONIC - - - Km/h One of the activation conditions for Distronic has not been
(Canada fulfilled. You may have attempted to set a speed below
only) 20 mph (30 km/h).
X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) if the situation allows
and set the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for Distronic
(Y page 147).
DISTRONIC Inoperativ The Distronic or the display are malfunctioning.

e X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
DISTRONIC Override You have accelerated. The Distronic has switched off.
X Stop accelerating.
DISTRONIC Available Distronic had been deactivated and is available again.

Again X Activate Distronic (Y page 147).


DISTRONIC Currently Distronic is deactivated because:
Unavailabl RThe Distronic cover in the radiator grille is dirty.
e
RThe functionality is impaired by heavy precipitation or fog.
See
Operator’s RThe system is overheated.
Manual
X If necessary, clean the Distronic cover in the area of the
radiator grille (Y page 263).
X If necessary, wait until the system has cooled down.
X Restart the vehicle.
Distronic becomes operational again without the engine being
Practical hints
restarted when:
Rdirt on the radiator grille has fallen off while driving (e.g.
slush or snow)
Rthe system recognizes full sensor availability (due to
lessening rain or the road surface drying)
Rthe message in the multifunction display disappears
You can then operate Distronic as usual again.
DISTRONIC Currently Distronic is deactivated because the functionality is impaired
Unavailabl by external interferences, e.g. high-frequency sources such
e as toll stations, speed measuring systems etc.
See X Leave the area of the external interference.
Operator’s X
Activate Distronic again (Y page 147) when the message
Manual
DISTRONIC Available Again appears.
Distronic is deactivated because the Distronic sensor has not

sensed any other vehicles or objects, e.g. road sign or such,
for a long time.
X Activate Distronic again (Y page 147) when the message
DISTRONIC Available Again appears.
G Warning! the system is able to detect a dirty sensor. The

Distronic cannot take weather conditions into message DISTRONIC Currently
account. Switch off Distronic or do not turn it Unavailable See Operator’s Manual will
on if the sensor is dirty or visibility is be displayed in the multifunction display and
diminished as a result of snow, rain or fog. The Distronic will be turned off.
distance control may be impaired even before
Z
Vehicle

Depress You have attempted to shift the automatic transmission into
brake to drive position D, reverse gear R or neutral position N without
shift out depressing the brake pedal.
of P. X Depress the brake pedal.
Door Open Vehicle You have opened the driver’s door and the automatic
Not In transmission is still in drive position D, reverse gear R or
Park neutral position N.
X Before you leave the vehicle, make sure the automatic
Practical hints
transmission is in park position P and the parking brake is

engaged.
Drive to The automatic transmission cannot be shifted out of the

workshop current transmission position because of a malfunction.
without If the automatic transmission is in drive position D:
shifting X Without shifting the automatic transmission out of drive
gears.
position D, drive to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the automatic transmission is set to neutral position N,
reverse gear R or park position P:
X Do not drive.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Only You have attempted to shift the automatic transmission into

shift to park position P although the vehicle was still in motion.
P when X Stop the vehicle.
vehicle
is at a
standstill
.
Shift to You have attempted to start the engine with the KEYLESS-GO
P or N to start/stop button while the automatic transmission was in
start reverse gear R or drive position D.
engine. X Shift the automatic transmission into park position P or
neutral position N. Make sure the brake pedal is depressed.
Auxiliary Malfunctio The backup battery for the automatic transmission is no

Battery n longer charging.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Tires

Check then There has been a warning message about a loss in the tire
tires, restart inflation pressure and the tire pressure loss warning system
Run Flat was not restarted yet.
Indicator. X Make sure the correct tire inflation pressure is set for each
tire.
X Then restart the tire pressure loss warning system
(Y page 222).
Run Flat Inoperativ The tire pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning.
Indicator e
Practical hints
X Have the tire pressure loss warning system checked at an
Tire Check The tire pressure loss warning system indicates that the tire
Pressure Tires inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, change the wheel
(Y page 319).
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 221).
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system after
adjusting the tire inflation pressure values (Y page 222).
Tire driving The tire inflation pressure is being checked by the Advanced
pressure for a few TPMS.
displayed minutes. X Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.
after
Tire Inoperativ The Advanced TPMS is malfunctioning.
Pressure e X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Monitor Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire Inoperativ There are wheels without appropriate wheel sensors mounted
Pressure e No (e.g. winter tires).
Monitor Wheel X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Sensors Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Have the appropriate wheel sensors installed at an
Z

Tire Wheel At least one sensor is defect (e.g. battery is empty).
Pressure Sensor The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tire
Monitor Missing inflation pressure in the multifunction display.
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized
At least one wheel without appropriate wheel sensors is

mounted (e.g. spare tire).
The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tire
Practical hints
inflation pressure in the multifunction display.

X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized
Tire Currently The Advanced TPMS cannot monitor the tire inflation pressure
Pressure Unavailabl due to a nearby radio interference source or insufficient
Monitor e power supply.
As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been rectified,
the Advanced TPMS becomes active again automatically after
a few minutes of driving.
Tire The tire inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.
Pressure(s or
) Please The tire inflation pressures of the individual tires differ from
Correct each other significantly.
The tire inflation pressure values are shown in the
X Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 221).
X Restart the Advanced TMPS (Y page 226).
Caution: At least one tire is deflating.

Tire The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.
Defect X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 319).


Check The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantly
Tire(s) below the reference value.
The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
Practical hints
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Symbol messages
Brake
# Brake Wear The brake pads have reached their wear limit.
X Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible.
! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervals
specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
Z
$ EBV, ABS, The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
ESP malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the EBP, the ESP®, and the
(USA only) Inoperativ PRE-SAFE® system are unavailable.
J e See X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
(Canada Operator’s during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
only) Manual
X Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking
responsiveness.
$ Release You are driving with the parking brake engaged. In addition
Practical hints
Parking an acoustic warning sounds.

(USA only) Brake X Release the parking brake.
!
(Canada
only)
$ Check There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.

Brake Risk of accident!
(USA only) Fluid X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
J Level
to do so.
(Canada X Engage the parking brake
only)
X Do not drive any further.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.
G Warning!
Driving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately.
Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be
seriously burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark
or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.

Safety systems
G Tele Aid One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system are
Inoperativ malfunctioning.
e X Have the Tele Aid system checked at an authorized
+ Restraint The system is malfunctioning.

Sys. X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
Malfunctio Mercedes-Benz Center and have the system checked
n immediately.
Service
Practical hints
Required
G Warning! Center immediately to have the system

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not activated when needed in an accident, which
be operational. could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
For your safety, we strongly recommend that might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz which could also result in injury.
Driving systems
Á Level The selected vehicle level cannot be adjusted, because

Selection Ryou are driving too fast for the desired vehicle level
Not
Ryou are towing a trailer
Permitted
Ryou are using accessories that are connected to the trailer
power socket, e.g. a bicycle rack
X Reduce vehicle speed and set the desired vehicle level
again (Y page 156).
X Observe the notes on trailer towing (Y page 254).
Á Malfunctio The air suspension is malfunctioning.

n X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
Center.
Z
Á Compressor You have selected a higher vehicle level. Due to frequent level
Cooling changes within a short period, the compressor must cool
Down down first.
! When the message Compressor Cooling Down appears
in the multifunction display, driving is still possible. Keep in
mind that the ride height of the vehicle is not yet reached,
so you can damage the underbody of the vehicle.
X Let the compressor cool down until the message
disappears.
The selected level will be set once the compressor has
Practical hints
cooled down.
Ã Inoperativ Downhill Speed Regulation is malfunctioning.

e X Have the Downhill Speed Regulation checked at an
Vehicle
E You are driving with the hood or the tailgate open.

X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as it is safe to
do so.
X Close the hood (Y page 214) or the tailgate (Y page 75).
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
You are trying to lock the vehicle with the KEYLESS-GO
function with a door or the tailgate open.
X Close all doors and/or the tailgate (Y page 75).
; You are driving with at least one door open.

X Close all doors.
+ Key A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO left in the vehicle was

Detected recognized while trying to lock the vehicle from the outside.
In Vehicle X Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle.
+ Don’t This message appears for a maximum of 60 seconds if the

Forget driver’s door is opened with the engine turned off and no
Your Key SmartKey in the starter switch. This message is only a
reminder.
X Take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle.

+ Remove Key You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey.

X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
+ You need The SmartKey is malfunctioning.

a new key. X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
+ Key Does The SmartKey in the starter switch does not belong to the
Not vehicle.
Belong to X Find the SmartKey that belongs to the vehicle to operate
Vehicle the vehicle.
Practical hints
+ Change The batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO are
Key discharged.
Batteries X Replace the batteries (Y page 309).
+ Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not detected while the
Detected engine is running because the SmartKey is not in the vehicle.
(message X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
appears in X Engage the parking brake.
red)
X Search for the SmartKey.
The vehicle cannot be locked centrally nor can the engine
be started again after the engine is stopped.
+ Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not detected while the
Detected engine is running because there is strong radio-frequency
(message interference.
appears in X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
red) X Engage the parking brake.
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the starter switch
(Y page 80).
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.
+ Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is momentarily not detected.

Detected X Change the position of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
(message X If necessary, remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the
appears in
starter switch (Y page 80).
white)
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.
+ Pull The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is permanently not detected.

starting X Remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the starter switch
button (Y page 80).
out then X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.
insert
key.
Z
~ Bluetooth The telephone has not yet been connected to the COMAND
Ready system via Bluetooth®.
X Connect the telephone to the COMAND system via
Bluetooth®.
¥ Top Up The fluid level has dropped to approximately 1/3 of total

Washer reservoir capacity.
Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 217).
Engine
Practical hints
+ Top Up The coolant level is too low.

Coolant X Add coolant (Y page 216).
See X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the cooling
Operator’s
system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Manual
G Warning!
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn
if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You could be seriously burned.
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message
and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will
overheat causing major engine damage.

? Coolant The coolant is too hot.

Stop car, X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
switch X Turn off the engine immediately.
engine
off.
X Only start the engine again after the message disappears.
You could otherwise damage the engine.
X Observe the coolant temperature in the multifunction
display.
X If the temperature rises again: Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Practical hints
During severe operation conditions and stop-and-go city
traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248‡
(120†).
G Warning!
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the
engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the
engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†).
Doing so may cause serious damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Z
? Coolant The poly-V-belt could be broken.

Stop car, X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
switch X Turn off the engine immediately.
engine
X Check the poly-V-belt.
off.
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an
X If it is intact: Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this
message displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine
Practical hints
damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited

Warranty.
display.
X Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
? The radiator cooling fan is malfunctioning.

display.
If the coolant temperature is below 248‡ (120†), you may
continue driving to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine (e.g. by driving
uphill) as well as stop-and-go traffic.
X Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
# The battery is no longer charging.

Possible causes:
Ralternator malfunctioning
Rbroken poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronic system
X Stop immediately in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
to do so and check the poly-V-belt.
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an
X If it is intact: Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center immediately. Adjust driving to be consistent
with reduced braking responsiveness.

# Battery/ The battery is defective.

Alternator X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
Stop to do so.
Vehicle X Engage the parking brake.
X Do not continue to drive.
4 Check The engine oil level is too low.

engine X Check the engine oil level (Y page 214) and add engine oil
oil level as required (Y page 215).
at next
Practical hints
X If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine
refueling.
checked for possible leaks.
If the message Check engine oil level For information on approved engine oils
at next refueling. appears while the contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
engine is running and at operating or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
temperature, the engine oil level has dropped ! Engine oil level warnings should not be
to approximately the minimum level.
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol
The message will be stored in the vehicle displayed could result in serious engine
status message memory after you have damage that is not covered by the
cleared it from the multifunction display. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Visually check for oil leaks. If there are no
obvious oil leaks, drive to the nearest service
station to refill your engine oil to the required
level.
C The fuel level is low.

X Refuel at the next gas station.
8 Reserve The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.
Fuel X Refuel at the next gas station.
8 Ultra Low- Vehicles with diesel engine only:

sulfur The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.
Diesel X Refuel at the next gas station.
Fuel Only
X Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW
SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm SULFUR
MAXIMUM).
Z
8 Gas Cap A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The
Open fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may
be leaking.
X Check the fuel cap (Y page 212).
X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
¸ Replace The air filter is clogged.

air filter X Have the air filter checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Practical hints
· Clean There is water in the fuel filter.

Fuel X Have the water drained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Filter Center as soon as possible.
Ø Check The AdBlue® supply is almost depleted.

Additive X Have the AdBlue® tank refilled as soon as possible
See (Y page 331).
Operator's Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Manual
Ø Remaining The AdBlue® supply has dropped to the minimum level.

Starts: 20 X Have the AdBlue® tank refilled immediately (Y page 331).
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i When the message Remaining approximately 1 gal (3.79 l) AdBlue®

Starts: 20 appears in the multifunction (corresponds to approximately 2 refill
display, you can start the engine 20 more containers AdBlue®) or have the AdBlue®
times. If you do not add AdBlue®, the tank filled at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
engine cannot be started beyond that Center. After AdBlue® was refilled, the
point. Therefore, fill the AdBlue® tank with engine can be started again.

Lamps
b Active The active Bi-Xenon headlamp system is malfunctioning.

Headlamps X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Inoperativ possible.
e
b Reverse The left or right backup lamp is malfunctioning.

Lamp Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 311).
or
Reverse
Lamp Right
Practical hints
b Brake The left or right brake lamp is malfunctioning.
Lamp Left Rear lamps with bulbs: A substitute bulb is being used.
or Rear lamps with LEDs: This message will only appear if all
Brake LEDs have stopped working.
Lamp Right
X Rear lamps with bulbs: Replace the bulb as soon as
possible (Y page 311).
X Rear lamps with LEDs: Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center as soon as possible.
b 3rd Brake The high-mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning. This

Lamp message will only appear if all LEDs have stopped working.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
b Front The left or right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.

Foglamp X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Left possible.
or
Front
Foglamp
Right
b Marker The front left side or right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
Lamp X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 311).
Front Left
or
Marker
Lamp
Front
Right
Z
b Parking The left or right front parking lamp is malfunctioning. A

Lamp substitute bulb is being used.
Front Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 311).
or
Parking
Lamp
Front
Right
b High Beam The left or right high-beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Left X Halogen headlamp: Replace the bulb as soon as possible
or
Practical hints
(Y page 311).
High Beam X Bi-Xenon headlamp: Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Right
b License The left or right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.

Plate X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 311).
Lamp Left
or
License
Plate
Lamp Right
b AUTO The light sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps come on

Light automatically.
Inoperativ X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
e possible.
To switch off the headlamps (U.S. vehicles only):
X In the control system, set daytime running lamp mode to
manual (Y page 133).
X Switch off the headlamps using the exterior lamp switch
(Y page 93).
b Low Beam The left or right low-beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Left X Halogen headlamp: Replace the bulb as soon as possible
or (Y page 311).
Low Beam X Bi-Xenon headlamp: Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Right
b Foglamp The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.

Rear Left Rear lamps with LEDs: A substitute bulb is being used.
X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 311).

b Switch You have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch,
Off Lights opened the driver’s door and left the headlamps on or
removed the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO from the vehicle
and left the headlamps on.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to $ or Ã
(Y page 93).
or
X With the rear fog lamp switched on: Push in the exterior
lamp switch to its stop.
b Tail Lamp The left or right tail lamp is malfunctioning.
Practical hints
Left Rear lamps with bulbs: A substitute bulb is being used.
or Rear lamps with LEDs: This message will only appear if all
Tail Lamp LEDs have stopped working.
Right
X Rear lamps with bulbs: Replace the bulb as soon as
possible (Y page 311).
X Rear lamps with LEDs: Contact an authorized Mercedes-
b Cornering The left or right corner-illuminating front fog lamp is

Lamp Left malfunctioning.
or X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Cornering possible.
Lamp Right
b Trailer The left or right trailer brake lamp is malfunctioning.

Brake Lamp X Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
b Trailer The left or right trailer tail lamp is malfunctioning.

Tail Lamp X Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Left
or
Trailer
Tail Lamp
Right
b Trailer The left or right trailer turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

Turn X Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Signal
Left
or
Trailer
Turn
Signal
Right
Z
b Turn The left or right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A

Signal substitute bulb is being used.
Rear Left X Rear lamps with bulbs: Replace the bulb as soon as
or possible (Y page 311).
Turn X Rear lamps with LEDs: Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Signal
Rear Right
b Turn The left or right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A

Signal substitute bulb is being used.
Front Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 311).
or
Practical hints
Turn
Signal
Front
Right
b Turn The turn signal in the left or right exterior rear view mirror is
Signal malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all LEDs have
Left stopped working.
Mirror X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
or possible.
Turn
Signal
Right
Mirror
Tires
h Tire The tire inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.
pressure(s or
) Please The tire inflation pressure of the individual tires differ from
Correct each other significantly.
X Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 221).
h Tire At least one tire is deflating.

Pressure X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
Caution: steering and braking maneuvers.
Tire X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 319).
Defect

What to do if … 297
h Tire The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantly

Pressure below the reference value.
Check X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
Tires steering and braking maneuvers.
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
Practical hints
and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
What to do if … When you switch on the ignition, all lamps

(except low-beam headlamp indicator lamp,
Lamps in instrument cluster high-beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn
signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the
Notes
instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the
If any of the following lamps in the instrument instrument cluster fails to come on when the
cluster fails to come on during the bulb self- ignition is switched on, have it checked and
check when switching on the ignition, have replaced if necessary.
the respective bulb checked and replaced if
necessary.
Z
298 What to do if …
Brake
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! The yellow ABS The ABS has detected a malfunction and switched off. The BAS,
indicator lamp the ESP® and the PRE-SAFE® are also switched off.
comes on while The brake system is still functioning normally but without the
the engine is systems specified above available.
running.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as
the navigation system or the automatic transmission may also be
malfunctioning.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during
hard braking, reducing steering capability.
Practical hints
X Read and observe messages that may appear in the

accident.
! The yellow ABS The ABS has switched off due to insufficient power supply.
indicator lamp The battery might not be charged sufficiently.
comes on while When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS is
the engine is operational again. The ABS indicator lamp should go out.
running.
X If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out: Have the alternator
and the battery checked.
! The yellow ABS The self-diagnosis has not been completed yet.
indicator lamp The indicator lamp will go out after driving a short distance at a
comes on while vehicle speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
the engine is
running.


$ (USA only) The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP) switched off due to a
J (Canada only) malfunction.
! The ABS, the BAS, the ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are also switched off.
d X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
The red brake warning Center as soon as possible.
lamp comes on while Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
driving. In addition, the accident.
yellow ABS malfunction
indicator lamp, and the
yellow ESP® warning
lamp come on and an
Practical hints
acoustic warning
sounds.
$ (USA only) You are driving with the parking brake engaged.
J (Canada only) X Release the parking brake.
The red brake warning
lamp comes on while
driving and an acoustic
warning sounds.
$ (USA only) There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
J (Canada only) Risk of accident!
The red brake warning X Do not drive any further. Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
lamp comes on while soon as it is safe to do so.
the engine is running X Engage the parking brake.
and an acoustic
X Read and observe messages that may appear in the
warning sounds.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.
G Warning! the brake fluid catching fire. You can be

Driving with the brake warning lamp seriously burned.
illuminated can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately if the ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum
brake fluid before checking the brake system. mark or below, have the brake system
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and
Z
Safety systems

7 The red seat belt The seat belt telltale reminds you and your passengers to fasten
telltale comes your seat belts before driving off.
on for a X Fasten your seat belts.
maximum of
Regardless of whether the seat belts are fastened or not, the seat
6 seconds after
belt telltale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds after
starting the
starting the engine.
engine.
7 The red seat belt You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt.
telltale comes X Fasten your seat belt.
Practical hints
on. In addition The warning chime stops sounding.

you hear a
warning chime
for a maximum
of 6 seconds
after starting the
engine.
7 The red seat belt You and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your
telltale comes seat belts.
on while the X Fasten your seat belts.
vehicle is The seat belt telltale goes out.
standing still
and the engine is There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore
running or while the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.
driving. X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them
in a safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
7 The red seat belt The vehicle’s speed once exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) and you
telltale flashes and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat
while driving. In belts.
addition, an X Fasten your seat belts.
intermittent The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
warning chime sounding.
sounds with
increasing There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore
intensity. the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.
X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them
in a safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
sounding.

i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt the warning chime stops sounding and the
seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the
driver and front passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a front
door is opened.

+ The red SRS There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The air bags or
indicator lamp Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly
comes on while or fail to activate in an accident.
driving. X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Practical hints
G Warning! Center immediately to have the system
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not activated when needed in an accident, which
be operational. could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
For your safety, we strongly recommend that might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz which could also result in injury.

d The yellow ESP® The ESP® has been switched off.
warning lamp Risk of accident!
comes on while
When the ESP® is switched off it will not stabilize the vehicle if the
the engine is
system recognizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheel
running.
is spinning.
X Switch the ESP® back on.
Exceptions: (Y page 64).
X If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your speed and driving
to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
X If the ESP® cannot be switched back on: Have the system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
d The yellow ESP® The ESP® is not operational due to a malfunction.
warning lamp Risk of accident!
comes on while X
Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the
the engine is
running.
X Continue driving with added caution.
X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
Z

d The yellow ESP® The ESP® or the ETS/4-ETS has come into operation because of
warning lamp detected traction loss in at least one tire.
flashes while The cruise control is deactivated.
driving. X When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
X While driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal.
X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
X Do not deactivate the ESP®.
Exceptions: (Y page 64).

Practical hints
accident.
At least one wheel is spinning and the Electronic Traction System
(ETS/4-ETS) has switched off to prevent overheating of the drive
wheel brakes.
X Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the
As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the Electronic Traction
System (ETS/4-ETS) switches on again.
The message in the multifunction display disappears and the
ESP® warning lamp d goes out.
Driving systems

· The red distance You are too close to the vehicle in front of you to maintain selected
warning lamp speed.
comes on while X Apply the brakes immediately to increase the following
driving. distance.
· The red distance You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle ahead of you or the
warning lamp distance warning system has recognized a stationary obstacle on
comes on while your probable line of travel.
driving and an X Apply the brakes immediately.
acoustic X Carefully observe the traffic situation. You may need to brake
warning sounds.
or maneuver to avoid hitting an obstacle.

Vehicle

The yellow fuel tank The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark.
reserve warning lamp in X Refuel at the next gas station.
the fuel gauge comes
on while driving.
Engine

! (USA only) There may be a malfunction in
Practical hints
; (Canada only) Rthe fuel management system
The yellow engine Rthe ignition system
malfunction indicator
Rthe emission control system
lamp comes on when
the engine is running. Rsystems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and
may switch the engine to limp-home (emergency operation) mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an authorized
i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop as
soon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check
local requirements.
! (USA only) A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The fuel
; (Canada only) cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky.
The yellow engine X Check the fuel cap (Y page 210).
malfunction indicator X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
lamp comes on when X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked by an
the engine is running. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Diesel engine: Your fuel tank was driven empty.

X After refueling, start, turn off and restart the engine three or four
times in succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not need to have your
vehicle checked.
Z
Tires

h USA only: The Advanced TPMS detects a loss of pressure in at least one tire.
Combination X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and
low tire pressure braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
telltale/TPMS X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
malfunction (Y page 272).
telltale for the
If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has (have) been
Advanced TPMS
corrected, the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction
illuminates
telltale goes out after a few minutes of driving.
continuously.
Practical hints
h USA only: There is a malfunction in the Advanced TPMS.

Combination X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
low tire pressure (Y page 272).
telltale/TPMS X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized Mercedes-
malfunction Benz Center.
telltale for the
After the malfunction has been remedied, the combination low tire
Advanced TPMS
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after a few minutes
flashes 60
of driving.
seconds and
then stays
illuminated.
G Warning! your tires as soon as possible, and inflate

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
should be checked at least once a month significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
when cold and inflated to the inflation to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
pressure recommended by the vehicle Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
manufacturer on the Tire and Loading and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
Information placard on the driver’s door B- handling and stopping ability. Please note that
pillar or the tire inflation pressure label on the the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has maintenance, and it is the driver’s
tires of a different size than the size indicated responsibility to maintain correct tire
on the Tire and Loading Information placard pressure, even if underinflation has not
or the tire inflation pressure label, you should reached the level to trigger illumination of the
determine the proper tire inflation pressure TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
for those tires. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring the system is not operating properly. The
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
pressure telltale when one or more of your the low tire pressure telltale. When the
tires are significantly underinflated. system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure flash for approximately 1 minute and then
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check remain continuously illuminated. This

sequence will continue upon subsequent or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction TPMS from functioning properly. Always
exists. When the malfunction indicator is check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
illuminated, the system may not be able to replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
reasons, including the installation of continue to function properly.
incompatible replacement or alternate tires
Lamp in center console
Practical hints
Canada only: A BabySmartTM child seat is installed on the front passenger seat.
42 Therefore the front passenger front air bag is switched off.
The front passenger
The system is malfunctioning when there is no BabySmartTM child
front air bag off
seat installed on the front passenger seat.
indicator lamp
illuminates and X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
remains illuminated Mercedes-Benz Center.
(Y page 47).
Canada only: The system is malfunctioning.
42 X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat.
The front passenger X Check installation of the child seat (Y page 58).
front air bag off If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out:
indicator lamp does not
X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
illuminate or does not
remain illuminated with
a BabySmartTM child Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the
seat properly installed front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
on the passenger seat.
USA only: The system is malfunctioning.
42 X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
The front passenger Mercedes-Benz Center.
front air bag off X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and
indicator lamp follow corrective steps (Y page 272).
illuminates and
remains illuminated
with the weight of a
typical adult or
someone larger than a
small individual on the
front passenger seat.
Z
306 Unlocking/locking manually
G Warning! than a small individual on the front passenger

If the 42 indicator lamp seat, do not have any passenger use the front
illuminates and remains illuminated with the passenger seat until the system has been
weight of a typical adult or someone larger repaired.

USA only: The system is malfunctioning.
42 X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat
The front passenger and check installation of the child seat.
front air bag off X Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the
indicator lamp does not seat are present.
illuminate and/or does X Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat are present
Practical hints
not remain illuminated (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or
with the weight of a around the seat, head restraints pushing against roof etc.). The
typical 12-month-old system may recognize such forces as supplemental weight.
child in a standard child X
If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains
restraint or less on the
out, have the system checked as soon as possible at an
front passenger seat.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on
the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and
follow corrective steps (Y page 272).
G Warning! and
If the 42 indicator lamp does not Ropen the driver’s door
illuminate or remains out with the weight of a To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey into
typical 12-month-old child in a standard child the starter switch.
restraint or less on the front passenger seat,
do not transport a child on the front
Removing the mechanical key
passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
Unlocking/locking manually
Unlocking the vehicle
If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, unlock the
driver’s door using the mechanical key.
The anti-theft alarm system will trigger when
you SmartKey
Runlocking the driver’s door with the
mechanical key

Unlocking/locking manually 307
Locking the vehicle

If you cannot lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, lock it as
follows:
X Close the front passenger door, the right
rear door, and the tailgate.
X Open the driver’s door and the rear left
door.
X Press the central locking switch
(Y page 75).
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
The locking knobs of the front passenger
X Move locking tab : in the direction of door and the rear doors move down.
Practical hints
arrow. X If the vehicle battery is disconnected or
X Slide mechanical key ; out of the housing. drained: Press down the locking knobs on
the front passenger door and the rear
doors.
Unlocking the driver’s door
X Exit the vehicle.
X Close the driver’s door.
X Enter the vehicle through the rear left door.

X Press down the locking knob of the driver’s
door.
! To prevent inadvertent lockout, make
sure to have the SmartKey with you before
proceeding with the next step. The next
step will lock the vehicle.
X Exit the vehicle.
X Insert mechanical key ; into the driver’s X Close the rear left door.
door lock. The vehicle is locked.
X Turn mechanical key ; counterclockwise
to position 1. i This procedure does not arm the anti-
theft alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel
X Pull the door handle past the resistance
filler flap.
point until the locking knob moves up.
The driver’s door is unlocked.
X Pull the door handle once more to open the Unlocking and opening the tailgate
driver’s door.
X Turn mechanical key ; back and remove
If the tailgate can no longer be unlocked and
opened using button F on the SmartKey
it from the driver’s door lock.
or the KEYLESS-GO function, use the
emergency release lever to unlock and open
the tailgate.
The emergency release lever is located on the
inside of the tailgate.
Z
308 Unlocking/locking manually
A minimum height clearance of 7.2 ft Fuel filler flap

(2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate.
G Warning!
potential danger.
G Warning!
Avoid contact with the vehicle walls as they
may contain sharp edges. Otherwise, you
could injure yourself while releasing the fuel
Practical hints
filler flap.
X Remove cover ; from the trim on the
tailgate. In case the central locking system does not
X Push emergency release lever : all the release the fuel filler flap, you can open it
way to the left. manually.
The fuel filler flap release is located on the
! The tailgate swings open upwards passenger side in the cargo compartment
automatically. Always make sure there is behind the cover.
sufficient overhead clearance.
X Open the tailgate (Y page 75).
X Open the tailgate. X Open the cover on the passenger-side trim
panel (Y page 316).
i If the vehicle has previously been locked
from the outside using the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO, opening the tailgate from the
inside using the emergency release lever
will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the
following:
RInsert the SmartKey into the starter
switch.
RPress button % or & on the
SmartKey.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: X Pull yellow fuel filler flap release : in
RPull an outside door handle.
direction of arrow.
The SmartKey must be within 3 ft (1 m) The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
of the vehicle.
X Open the fuel filler flap (Y page 210).
RPress the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
X Close the cover.
button.
X Close the tailgate.
The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.
X Reinstall cover ;.

Replacing SmartKey batteries 309
Resetting activated NECK-PRO active X Firmly press the top of the head restraint
front head restraints cushion towards the head restraint cover in
direction of arrow = until it engages.
If the NECK-PRO active front head restraints X Repeat this procedure on the NECK-PRO
have been triggered in a rear-end collision, active front head restraint for the second
they must be reset. front seat.
You can tell that the NECK-PRO active front For information on NECK-PRO active front
head restraints have been triggered when head restraints, see “NECK-PRO active front
they have been moved forward and cannot be head restraints” (Y page 53).
adjusted.
G Warning!
Replacing SmartKey batteries
For safety reasons, have the NECK-PRO active
Practical hints
front head restraints checked at an If the batteries in the SmartKey are
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center after a discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
rear-end collision. locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an authorized
G Warning!
When pushing back the head restraint
cushion, make sure your fingers do not G Warning!
become caught between the head restraint Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive
cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may substances. Therefore, keep the batteries out
lead to injury. of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
i Pressing the head restraint cushion back immediately.
requires high force. If you encounter
difficulties when pushing the head restraint G Warning!
back, please have the procedure SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
performed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz material, which may require special handling
Center. and regard for the environment. Check with
your local government’s disposal guidelines.
California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
index.cfm.
Batteries contain materials that can harm the

environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred method
of disposal. Many states (USA only) or
provinces (Canada only) require sellers of
batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.
When inserting the batteries, make sure they
X Pull the top of the head restraint cushion in are clean and free of lint.
direction of arrow : as far as it will go. When replacing batteries, always replace
X Adjust the head restraint cushion both batteries.
downward in direction of arrow ; as far as
it will go.
Z
310 Replacing SmartKey batteries
i The required replacement batteries are X Slide mechanical key : back into the
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz SmartKey.
Center. X Check the operation of the SmartKey.
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
X Remove the mechanical key from the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
SmartKey (Y page 306).
SmartKey
Practical hints
X Insert mechanical key : into opening.

X Press mechanical key : in direction of
arrow.
Battery compartment ; is unlatched.
X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey X Pull battery compartment ; out of the
opening until battery compartment SmartKey housing.
cover : opens. Do not keep the cover
shut.
X Pull out batteries =.

X Insert new batteries = under contact
X Remove the battery compartment cover. springs ? with the positive terminal (+)
X Pat the SmartKey against the palm of your
side facing up.
hand until battery = falls out. X Return battery compartment ; into
X Insert the new battery with the positive
SmartKey housing until it locks into place.
terminal (+) facing up. Use a lint-free cloth. X Slide mechanical key : back into the
X Insert the tabs of the battery compartment
SmartKey.
cover into the housing and press the cover
X Check the operation of the SmartKey as
closed.
well as the KEYLESS-GO function.

Replacing bulbs 311
Replacing bulbs Wear eye and hand protection.

Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
Safety notes
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper lamp and its components. We recommend
exterior lighting and signaling to a large that you have such work done by a qualified
degree. technician.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and i Since replacing bulbs is a technically
readjusted at regular intervals and when a highly demanding process, we recommend
bulb has been replaced. Contact an to have them replaced at an authorized
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for Mercedes-Benz Center.
headlamp adjustment.
i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
G Warning!
Practical hints
fogged up on the inside as a result of high
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with
the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb. the lights on should clear up the fogging.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you
Rtouch or move it when hot
Rdrop the bulb
Rscratch the bulb
Z
312 Replacing bulbs
Bulbs
You can replace the following bulbs yourself:
Halogen headlamps Type
: Low-beam lamp: H7 55 W
; High-beam lamp/High-beam flasher
lamp: H7 55 W
= Parking and standing lamp: W 5 W
? Turn signal lamp: 3457A
A Side marker lamp: WY 5 W
Practical hints
Bi-Xenon headlamps Type

: High-beam flasher lamp/High-beam
flasher spot lamp: H7 55 W
; Parking and standing lamp: W 5 W
= Turn signal lamp: 3457A
? Side marker lamp: WY 5 W
Standard rear lamps Type

: Brake lamp: P 21 W
; Backup lamp: P 21 W
= Tail lamp, parking and standing lamp,
rear foglamp (driver’s side only): P 21 W
? Side marker lamp: P 21 W
A Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W

Replacing bulbs 313
LED rear lamps Type

: Backup lamp: W 16 W
; Rear foglamp (driver’s side only):
W 16 W
= Rear foglamp (driver’s side only):
W 16 W
Practical hints
License plate lamps Type
: License plate lamps: C 5 W
Notes on bulb replacement i Mercedes-Benz recommends using

Longlife (LL) bulbs.
! Do not replace LEDs or bulbs not
described in this section. You could
otherwise damage the LEDs, the bulbs or Replacing bulbs for front lamps
parts of the vehicle. Only have the LEDs and
bulbs replaced at an authorized Mercedes- Before you start to replace a bulb for a front
Benz Center. lamp, do the following:
ROnly use 12-volt bulbs of the same type and X Switch off the ignition.
with the specified watt rating. X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
RSwitch the lights off before changing a bulb $.

to prevent short circuits. X Open the hood (Y page 212).
RAlways use a clean lint-free cloth when

handling bulbs.
RYour hands should be dry and free of oil and
grease.
RIf the newly installed bulb does not come
on, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Z
314 Replacing bulbs
X Turn housing cover : counterclockwise

and remove it.
X Turn bulb socket B with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.
Example illustration: Driver’s side headlamp

: Housing cover for low-beam halogen or Bi-
Xenon headlamp
Practical hints
; Housing cover for high-beam halogen

bulb (high beam and high-beam flasher)
= Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp X Pull bulb E out of bulb socket B.
bulb
? Bulb socket for front turn signal lamp bulb
i Do not remove clip D from bulb socket
B.
A Bulb socket for side marker lamp bulb
X Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket
G Warning! B.
Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon X Place bulb socket B back into the housing
headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon
and turn it clockwise until it engages.
lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or
X Align housing cover : and turn it
repair the lamp and its components. It is
recommended to have such work done by a clockwise until it engages.
qualified technician.
High-beam and high-beam flasher bulb
Low-beam bulb (halogen headlamps (halogen headlamps only)/high-beam
only) flasher bulb (Bi-Xenon headlamps only)
B Bulb socket for low-beam headlamp C Bulb socket for high-beam headlamp

Replacing bulbs 315
X Turn housing cover ; counterclockwise Opening the driver’s side trim panel
and remove it.
X Turn bulb socket C with the bulb
X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket C.
X Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket
C.
X Place bulb socket C back into the housing
and turn it clockwise until it engages.
X Align housing cover ; and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
X Turn lock : counterclockwise by 90°.
Practical hints
Parking and standing lamp bulb, X Remove cover ;.
front turn signal lamp bulb,
side marker lamp bulb Removing storage compartment
X Turn respective bulb socket =, ? or A
(Y page 314) with the bulb
X Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
X Gently press the new bulb into the bulb
socket.
X Place bulb socket =, ? or A back into
the housing and turn it clockwise until it
engages.
Example illustration: Storage compartment

Replacing bulbs for rear lamps without sound system
Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear X Remove everything from storage
lamp, do the following: compartment ;.
X Insert a suitable object such as a coin into
the slot of lock :.
X Turn lock : by 90° in direction of the
$.
arrow.
X Remove storage compartment ;.
Tail lamp unit
To access the tail lamp units, you first have to
remove the cover in the corresponding side
trim panel of the cargo compartment.
X Open the tailgate.
Z
316 Replacing bulbs
Opening the passenger-side trim panel
Example illustration: LED rear lamp driver’s side

: Backup lamp bulb socket
Practical hints
; Rear fog lamp bulb sockets (driver’s side

the slot of lock :. only)
X Turn lock : by 90° in direction of the
X Depending on which bulb needs to be
arrow.
X Remove cover ;.
replaced, turn the respective bulb socket
counterclockwise.
Replacing bulbs X Pull the bulb socket out of the housing.
X Standard rear lamp: Gently press onto the
bulb and turn it counterclockwise out of its
bulb socket.
LED rear lamp: Pull the bulb out of its bulb
socket.
X Standard rear lamp: Gently press the new
bulb into its bulb socket and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
LED rear lamp: Gently press the new bulb
into its bulb socket.
X Align the bulb socket and turn it clockwise.
Example illustration: Standard rear lamp driver’s
side X Make sure the bulb socket is attached
: Brake lamp bulb socket properly.
; Rear turn signal lamp bulb socket X Close the respective cover in the cargo
= Side marker lamp bulb socket compartment.

? Tail lamp, parking and standing lamp and X Close the tailgate.
rear fog lamp (driver’s side only) bulb

socket
A Backup lamp bulb socket

Replacing bulbs 317
License plate lamps Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely

important. High beam adjustments
simultaneously aim the low beam. To check
and readjust a headlamp, follow the steps
described:
X Park the vehicle on a level surface 25 feet
(7.6 m) from a vertical test screen or wall.
X Make sure the vehicle has a normal tailgate
load.
X Switch on the low beam headlamps L.
If the beam does not show a beam pattern as

indicated in the figure left, then follow the
X Loosen screws : of lamp cover to be
Practical hints
steps below:
removed.
X Open the hood (Y page 212).
X Remove lamp cover ;.
X Replace the bulb.
X Reinstall lamp cover ;.
X Retighten screws :.
Adjusting headlamp aim
The adjustment screws are located under the

cover panel.
X Insert a suitable tool into the openings in
the panel cover. The direction of arrows
= and ? indicate the angle in which the
tool has to be inserted in oder to access the
adjustment screws.
: V Vertical centerline
X Always turn the adjustment screws equally
; H Horizontal mounting height, measured for vertical adjustment until the headlamp
from the center is adjusted as shown in :. Turn clockwise
for upward movement and
counterclockwise for downward
movement.
Graduations:
RScrew at arrow =: 0.67° pitch
RScrew at arrow ?: 0.50° pitch
The left and right headlamps must be
adjusted individually.
Z
318 Replacing wiper blades
i If it is not possible to obtain a proper Removing wiper blades

headlamp adjustment, have the system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Front wiper blades
Center. ! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.
They could tear.
Replacing wiper blades X Fold the wiper arms forward until they
engage.
Safety notes
G Warning!
For safety reasons, switch off the wipers and
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make sure the
Practical hints
vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0)

before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise, the
wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause
injury.
G Warning!
Wiper blades are components that are subject X Press tabs ; together.
to wear and tear. Replace the wiper blades
X Tilt wiper blade : away from wiper arm
twice a year, preferably in the spring and fall.
Otherwise the windows will not be wiped =.
properly. As a result, you may not be able to X Take off wiper blade : in direction of
observe surrounding traffic conditions and arrow.
could cause an accident.
Rear wiper blade
! Never open the hood when a front wiper
arm is folded forward. ! Do not pull on the wiper blade insert. It
Hold on to the wiper when folding a wiper could tear.
arm back. If released, the force of the
impact from the tensioning spring could
crack the windshield or the rear window.
Do not allow a wiper arm to contact the
windshield glass or the rear window
without a wiper blade inserted.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
this work carried out at an authorized
switch.
X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: window until it engages.
X Make sure the vehicle’s on-board X Turn wiper blade ; as far as it will go.
electronics have status 0 (Y page 80).

Flat tire 319
X Hold wiper arm : and disengage wiper Rear wiper blade

blade ; by carefully sliding it in direction
of arrow.
X Remove wiper blade ;.
Installing wiper blades

Front wiper blades
X Insert wiper blade ; into wiper arm :.
Practical hints
X Hold wiper arm : and engage wiper
blade ; by pushing it in direction of arrow
until it locks into place.
X Check whether the wiper blade is securely
fastened.
X Fold wiper arm : to rest on the rear
X With guide tab = sliding into opening ?, window.

Make sure to hold on to the wiper when
place wiper blade : onto wiper arm in
folding the wiper arm back.
direction of arrow.
X Fold wiper blade : towards wiper arm. ! Make sure the wiper blade is installed
Tabs ; (Y page 318) must engage into properly. An improperly installed wiper
both recesses of attachment ;. blade may cause rear window damage.
X Check whether the wiper blade is securely
fastened.
Flat tire
X Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the
windshield. Safety notes
Make sure you hold on to the wiper arm
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
when folding it back.
Ra Minispare wheel
! Make sure the wiper blades are installed
Ra spare wheel with collapsible tire
properly. Improperly installed wiper blades
may cause windshield damage. Ran MOExtended system (your vehicle does
not have a spare wheel or a TIREFIT kit)
Ra TIREFIT kit30 (your vehicle does not have
a spare wheel)
For information on your vehicle’s equipment,
see “Rims and tires” (Y page 352).
30 Canada only.
Z
320 Flat tire
G Warning! X Remove the SmartKey from the starter

The dimensions of the spare wheel are switch.
different from those of the road wheels. As a or
result, the vehicle handling characteristics X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the
change when driving with a spare wheel driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in
mounted. Adapt your driving style position 0, same as with the SmartKey
accordingly. removed from the starter switch). The
The spare wheel is for temporary use only. driver’s door can then be closed again.
When driving with a spare wheel mounted, Open doors only when conditions are safe
ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do to do so.
not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Remove the
(80 km/h). KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from the
Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes- starter switch.
Practical hints
Benz Center as soon as possible to have the X Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a
spare wheel replaced with a regular road safe distance from the roadway. Open
wheel. doors only when conditions are safe to do
Never operate the vehicle with more than one so.
spare wheel mounted.
i Vehicles with spare wheel with collapsible
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare tire or TIREFIT:
wheel is mounted.
Only use the power outlet in the second-
G Warning! row footwell for electric air pump
operation.
Vehicles with air suspension program:
Do not open or close any doors or the tailgate You can use the power outlet even when
while mounting a spare wheel. The vehicle the ignition is switched off, e.g. in order to
could rise or lower to a previously selected inflate the collapsible tire.
level. You or others could be injured as a An emergency shut-off feature is designed
result. to prevent the vehicle’s on-board voltage
from dropping below a minimum level. If
the on-board voltage drops to this
Preparing the vehicle minimum level, the power outlets are
switched off automatically to help preserve
X Vehicles with air suspension program: engine starting power.
Make sure the vehicle level is set to
highway level (Y page 155).
X Whenever possible, park the vehicle in a Sealing tires with TIREFIT
safe distance from moving traffic on a hard,
Small tire punctures, particularly those in the
flat surface.
tread, can be sealed with TIREFIT.
X Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
TIREFIT can be used in ambient temperatures
X Turn the steering wheel so that the front
down to -4‡ (-20†).
wheels are in a straight-ahead position.
X Engage the parking brake. G Warning!
X Shift the automatic transmission into park
TIREFIT is a limited repair device. TIREFIT
position P. cannot be used for cuts or punctures larger
than approximately 0.16 in (4 mm) and tire

Flat tire 321
damage caused by driving with extremely low G Warning!

tire inflation pressure, or on a flat tire, or a Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If
damaged wheel. swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
Do not drive the vehicle under such plenty of water and drink plenty of water.
circumstances. Do not induce vomiting!
Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes- Consult a physician immediately.
Benz Center for assistance or call Roadside
Assistance. i If sealant has leaked out, let it dry. You
can then peel it off.
X Foreign objects (e.g. screws or nails)
should not be removed from the tire. If clothing has come in contact with
TIREFIT, have it dry-cleaned with
X Take the TIREFIT kit, the sticker, and the
perchloroethylene as soon as possible.
electric air pump out of the cargo
Practical hints
compartment (Y page 268). G Warning!
Observe safety instructions on air pump label.
Your vehicle may be equipped with either of

two versions of the electric air pump:
RVersion 1: The air hose with pressure
gauge and the electrical plug are located
behind a flap.
RVersion 2: The pressure gauge is located
in the pump housing. The air hose and
electrical plug are located at the bottom of
the pump housing.
Two-part sticker
The following description applies to both
X Attach upper part : of the sticker where versions. Differences in usage are expressly
it will be easily seen by the driver on the declared.
instrument cluster.
X Attach lower part ; of the sticker to the
damaged tire (close to the tire valve).
G Warning!
Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT
to come in contact with hair, eyes or clothing.
TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed or
absorbed through the skin - causes skin, eye
and respiratory irritation.
Any contact with eyes or skin should be
flushed immediately with plenty of water. Version 1
If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT,
change clothing as soon as possible.
In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a
physician immediately.
Z
322 Flat tire
Version 2 Version 1
X X Version 1 only: Close vent screw F on
Version 1 only: Open flap C on the
Practical hints
electric air pump. pressure gauge G.

X Pull plug ? and air hose A out of the pump X Screw filler hose D onto tire valve E.
housing. X Insert electrical plug ? into the power

X Screw the air pump’s air hose A onto outlet in the second-row footwell
flange B of TIREFIT container :. (Y page 197).
X Stick TIREFIT container : upside down ! The cigarette lighter as well as the power
into notch ; of the electric air pump. outlets in the passenger footwell and cargo
compartment are not designed for use with
the electric air pump. Use the power outlet
in the second-row footwell for electric air
pump operation.
position 1.
or
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once. Do
not depress the brake pedal.
Example illustration X Press I on electric air pump switch =.
X Unscrew the valve cap of the damaged tire The electric air pump is switched on and
from tire valve E. inflates the tire.
i First, the sealing is pumped into the tire.
The pressure may briefly rise to up to 73 psi
(5 bar). This is normal and not an indication
of a malfunction. Do not switch off the
electric air pump.
X Let the electric air pump inflate the tire for
approximately 5 minutes.
The pressure gauge must display at least
26 psi (1.8 bar).

Flat tire 323
G Warning! detached from the tire valve. TIREFIT

The air hose can become hot during inflation. sealant may cause stains.
Please exercise appropriate caution. Therefore, cover the filler hose, e.g. by
inserting it into the plastic bag the TIREFIT
! Do not operate the electric air pump kit was packed in.
longer than 8 minutes without interruption. X Drive off immediately.
Otherwise it may overheat.
You may operate the air pump again after G Warning!
it has cooled off. Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not designed to
If the tire inflation pressure of at least operate at higher speeds.
26 psi (1.8 bar) is not attained:
The sticker must be attached on the
X Turn off the electric air pump by pressing
Practical hints
instrument cluster where it will be easily seen
0 on electric air pump switch =. by the driver.
X Detach filler hose D from tire valve E. Vehicle handling characteristics of a TIREFIT
X Drive vehicle back or forth very slowly repaired tire may change. Adapt your driving
approximately 30 ft (10 m). accordingly.
This serves to better distribute the TIREFIT
sealant material inside the tire.
X Inflate the tire again.
G Warning!
If a tire inflation pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar)
is not attained, the tire is too severely
damaged for TIREFIT to provide a reliable tire
repair.
In this case, TIREFIT cannot properly seal the
tire.
Do not drive the vehicle. Version 2
Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or X After driving the vehicle for an initial
call Roadside Assistance. 10 minutes, check the tire inflation
pressure using pressure gauge G on the
After attaining a tire inflation pressure of
air pump.
at least 26 psi (1.8 bar):
X Press 0 on electric air pump switch =. G Warning!
The electric air pump is switched off. If tire inflation pressure has fallen below
X Detach the TIREFIT kit from the tire valve. 20 psi (1.3 bar) do not continue to drive the
vehicle.
G Warning! Park your vehicle safely away from the
The air hose may still be hot. Exercise proper roadway and contact the nearest authorized
caution to avoid burning yourself when Mercedes-Benz Center or Roadside
detaching the electric air pump. Assistance.
Have the damaged tire replaced.
! Remaining TIREFIT sealant could escape
from the filler hose after it has been
Z
324 Flat tire
If the tire inflation pressure is at least 20 psi Ralignment bolt

(1.3 bar), inflate or deflate the tire to the Relectric air pump (required for vehicles
correct tire inflation pressure (see Tire and with spare wheel with collapsible tire
Loading Information placard on the driver’s only)
door B-pillar):
For information on where to find the
X To increase tire inflation pressure: respective items, see “Where will I find ...?”
Switch on the electric air pump. (Y page 268) and (Y page 271).
X To decrease tire inflation pressure:
i Vehicles without spare wheel are not
Version 1: Open vent screw F on
factory-equipped with the tools required for
pressure gauge G (Y page 322). a wheel change such as a jack or a wheel
Version 2: Press deflate button F located wrench. Some tools required for a wheel
at the end of the filler hose. change are specific to your vehicle.
Practical hints
X Drive to the nearest qualified workshop, Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, Center to obtain the tools approved for
to have the damaged tire replaced. your vehicle. This section describes the
wheel change using the tools approved and
X Recommended duration of use: A
recommended for your vehicle.
maximum of 300 miles (500 km) at 50 mph
(80 km/h) or below with the recommended
tire inflation pressure.
Lifting the vehicle
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz G Warning!
Center as soon as possible to obtain a new When jacking up the vehicle, only use the jack
TIREFIT kit. which has been specifically approved by
X Bring used TIREFIT materials to an Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up
proper disposal. the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built
X Replace your TIREFIT container every into both sides of the vehicle. Make sure the
4 years. Replacement containers are jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz bracket. The jack must always be vertical
Center. when in use, especially on inclines or
declines.
The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle
Mounting the spare wheel briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for
performing maintenance work under the
Introduction vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the
X Prepare the vehicle as described jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel
(Y page 320). change.
X Take the following out of the vehicle: Never get beneath the vehicle while it is
Rspare wheel supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet
away from the area under the lifted vehicle.
Rjack
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
Rwheel wrench capacity jackstands before working under the
Rcollapsible wheel chock vehicle.
Always engage the parking brake firmly and
block the wheels with wheel chocks or other

Flat tire 325
sizeable objects before raising the vehicle X Place a wheel chock or other sizeable
with the jack. Do not disengage the parking object in front of and another wheel chock
brake while the vehicle is raised. or other sizeable object behind the wheel
Make sure that the ground on which the that is diagonally opposite to the wheel
vehicle is standing and where you place the being changed.
jack is solid, level and not slippery. If
Changing a wheel on a slight decline
necessary, use a large underlay. On slippery
surfaces, such as tiled floors, you should use Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on
a non-slip underlay, for example a rubber mat. a level surface. However, should
circumstances require you to do so on a slight
Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects
decline:
to support the jack. Otherwise the jack may
not be able to achieve its load-bearing
capacity if it is not at its full height.
Practical hints
Never start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
Also observe the notes on the jack.
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by

blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other
sizeable objects.
When your vehicle is equipped with a wheel
chock, it is included with the vehicle tool kit Changing wheel on passenger side (example
(Y page 268). For information on setting up illustration)
the collapsible wheel chock, see X Place wheel chocks or other sizeable
(Y page 270).
objects on the downhill side in front of both
G Warning! wheels on the side opposite to the side on
Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or on which the wheel is to be changed.
slight inclines/declines. Otherwise, the Changing a wheel on a slight incline
vehicle could fall off the jack and injure you or
others. Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on
a level surface. However, should
Changing a wheel on a level surface circumstances require you to do so on a slight
incline:
Changing rear wheel on passenger side (example

illustration) Changing wheel on passenger side (example
illustration)
Z
326 Flat tire
X Place wheel chocks or other sizeable ! Do not position the jack on the body of
objects on the downhill side in front of both the vehicle, as this may cause damage to
wheels on the side opposite to the side on the vehicle.
which the wheel is to be changed.
Practical hints
X Attach reversible ratchet ? to jack = in

X On the wheel to be changed, loosen but do such a way that the word UP can be seen.
not yet remove the wheel bolts X Place jack = on firm ground.
(approximately one full turn with wheel
X Position jack = under take-up
wrench :).
X Assemble the jack (Y page 270).
bracket ; so that it is always vertical as
seen from the side, even if the vehicle is
parked on an incline.
The jack take-up brackets are located directly

behind the front wheel housings and in front
of the rear wheel housings. X Turn ratchet ? up and down until jack =
is fully seated in take-up bracket ; and the
G Warning!
jack base evenly meets the ground.
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up
X Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets. Make
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack
take-up bracket.
If you do not position the jack correctly in the
jack take-up bracket, the vehicle can fall off
the jack and seriously or fatally injure you or
others.

Flat tire 327
Removing the wheel This could cause an accident. Make sure to

use the correct wheel bolts.
G Warning!
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts.
Other wheel bolts may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
fall off the jack.
X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt and
Practical hints
remove it.
X Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
bolt :.
X Remove the remaining bolts.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.

This could result in damage to the wheel
bolts and wheel hub threads.
Wheel bolt : must be used for 18", 19", 20"
X Remove the wheel. and 21" light alloy wheels as well as the spare
wheel with collapsible tire. Wheel bolt ;
Attaching the spare wheel must be used for the Minispare wheel. The
wheel bolts for the Minispare wheel are
G Warning! located in vehicle tool kit.
Vehicles with spare wheel with collapsible tire ! Wheel bolts ; must be used when
only: Inflate collapsible tire only after the mounting the Minispare wheel. The use of
wheel is properly attached. any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts ;
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric for the Minispare wheel will damage the
air pump before lowering the vehicle. vehicle’s brakes.
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged Make sure to use the original length wheel
or rusted. bolts when remounting the original wheel
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts. after it has been repaired.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be
X Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel
repaired immediately. Do not continue to
hub.
drive under these circumstances! Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call ! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
Roadside Assistance. against hub and hold it there while
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened installing first wheel bolt.
wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off.
Z
328 Flat tire
Your vehicle may be equipped with either of

two versions of the electric air pump:
RVersion 1: The air hose with pressure
gauge and the electrical plug are located
behind a flap.
RVersion 2: The pressure gauge is located
in the pump housing. The air hose and
electrical plug are located at the bottom of
the pump housing.
The following description applies to both
X Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment versions. Differences in usage are expressly
bolt and push it on. declared.
Practical hints
X Insert the wheel bolts and tighten them

slightly.
X Unscrew the alignment bolt.
X Install the last wheel bolt and tighten it
slightly.
X Vehicles with spare wheel with
collapsible tire: Continue the procedure
by following the instructions under
“Inflating the collapsible tire”
(Y page 328) and then “Lowering the
vehicle” (Y page 329). Version 1
or
X Vehicles with Minispare wheel: Continue
the procedure by following the instructions
under “Lowering the vehicle”
(Y page 329).
Inflating the collapsible tire

G Warning!
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly attached.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric Version 2
air pump before lowering the vehicle.
X Version 1 only: Open flap : on electric
G Warning! air pump.
Observe safety instructions on air pump label. X Version 1 only: Pull out electrical plug
= and air hose with pressure gauge and
! Do not lower the vehicle before inflating vent screw ?.
the collapsible tire. Otherwise the rim may X Version 2 only: Pull electrical plug = and
be damaged. the air hose out of the pump housing
bottom.

Flat tire 329
X Version 1 only: Close vent screw on air inflation pressure on the yellow label
hose ?. located on the spare wheel rim.
X Remove the valve cap from the collapsible If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow
tire valve. label on the spare wheel rim differs from
X Screw union nut A onto the collapsible tire the values given in this Operator’s Manual,
valve. inflate the tire to the recommended tire
inflation pressure given on the yellow label
X Make sure air pump switch ; is set to 0.
on the spare wheel rim.
X Insert electrical plug = into the power
outlet in the second-row footwell X Press 0 on electric air pump switch ;.
(Y page 197). X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
! The cigarette lighter as well as the power
or
outlets in the passenger footwell and cargo
Practical hints
compartment are not designed for use with X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the
the electric air pump. Use the power outlet KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice. Do
in the second-row footwell for electric air not depress the brake pedal.
pump operation. X Version 1 only: If the tire inflation pressure
is above the recommended tire inflation
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to pressure as specified for your vehicle
position 1. (Y page 356), decrease tire pressure using
or the vent screw on air hose ?.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the X Version 2 only: If the tire inflation pressure
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once. Do is above the recommended tire inflation
not depress the brake pedal. pressure as specified for your vehicle
X Press I on electric air pump switch ;. (Y page 356), decrease tire pressure using
The electric air pump switches on and deflate button B.
inflates the collapsible tire. G Observe Safety notes, see page 221.
X Inflate the collapsible tire to the
X Detach the electric air pump.
recommended tire inflation pressure as
X Reinstall collapsible tire valve cap.
specified for your vehicle (Y page 356).
This should take approximately 5 minutes. X Version 1 only: Store electrical plug =
and air hose ? behind flap :.
G Warning! X Version 2 only: Store electrical plug =
The air hose and the union nut can become and the air hose back into the pump
hot during inflation. Exercise proper caution housing bottom.
to avoid burning yourself when using the
X Place the electric air pump back in its
equipment.
designated storage space.
X Lower the vehicle.
! Do not operate the electric air pump
longer than 8 minutes without interruption.
Otherwise it may overheat. Lowering the vehicle
You may operate the air pump again after G Warning!
it has cooled off.
Vehicles with spare wheel with collapsible tire
! Compare the recommended tire inflation only: Inflate collapsible tire only after the
pressure for your vehicle with the tire wheel is properly attached.
Z
330 Flat tire
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric Do not restart the tire inflation pressure
air pump before lowering the vehicle. monitor until a full size wheel/tire with
functioning sensor has been placed back
X Attach ratchet to vehicle jack so that the into service on the vehicle.
word DOWN can be seen.
Lower the vehicle until the vehicle is resting MOExtended system
fully on its own weight:
X
The MOExtended system allows you to
Turn ratchet in direction DOWN.
continue driving your vehicle even if there is
X Remove the jack. a total loss of pressure in one or more tires.
You may only use the MOExtended system in
conjunction with the tire pressure loss
warning system (Y page 222) or the
Practical hints
Advanced TPMS (Y page 223).

The maximum distance in emergency mode
depends on the vehicle’s load. It is 50 miles
(80 km) if the vehicle is partially loaded and
18 miles (30 km) if the vehicle is fully loaded.
The point at which the maximum driving
distance in emergency mode begins is when
the warning message appears in the
X Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, multifunction display indicating that there is
following the diagonal sequence illustrated a loss of tire inflation pressure.
(: to A), until all bolts are tight. Observe X Do not exceed the maximum speed of
a tightening torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm). 50 mph (80 km/h).
Have the tightening torque checked after In emergency mode, your vehicle’s driving
changing a wheel. The wheels could come characteristics are diminished in such
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of situations as:
110 lb-ft (150 Nm). Rdriving around curves
Rwhile braking
X Fully collapse the jack to storage position,
see (Y page 270). Rwhile accelerating rapidly
X Store the jack and the other vehicle tools Therefore, your driving style must be adapted
in the designated storage space. accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering and driving
For information on storing the spare wheel maneuvers, as well as driving over obstacles
after it has been replaced by a regular road (road curbs, potholes, or off-road areas). This
wheel, see (Y page 271). is especially important if the vehicle is heavily
i The damaged road wheel cannot be loaded.
stored in the spare wheel well under the The emergency driving distance that can be
cargo compartment floor. It should be achieved greatly depends on the demands
transported in the cargo compartment placed on the vehicle. Depending on speed,
wrapped in a protective wrap. load, driving maneuvers, road conditions,
outside temperature, etc., the distance can be
i USA only:

AdBlue® (diesel engine only) 331
significantly shorter or, if the vehicle is driven of 10 seconds or until the engine runs
cautiously, somewhat longer. surge-free.
Do not continue driving in emergency mode if If the engine does not start:
Ryou X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
notice knocking sounds
once more to position 2 for at least
Rthe vehicle starts to shake 10 seconds.
Rsmoke develops and you smell rubber X Return the SmartKey in the starter switch
RESP® is intervening continuously to position 0.
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
Ryou notice tears on the tire sidewalls
once more to position 3 and hold it there
After driving in emergency mode, you must for a maximum of 10 seconds or until the
have the rims inspected by an authorized engine runs surge-free.
Mercedes-Benz Center to check if they are
Practical hints
X If necessary, repeat the above steps.
suitable for further use. The failed tire must
be replaced in any case. If the engine still does not start after
3 attempts:
When replacing individual or all tires on the Do not make any further attempts to start the
vehicle, make sure only tires marked with engine. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
“MOExtended” are mounted in the size Benz Center or call Roadside Assistance
specified for your vehicle (Y page 352). (Y page 201).
i When the malfunction indicator lamp
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel = (USA only) or ; (Canada only) in
engine only) the instrument cluster has been illuminated
for the above condition, it will remain
Driving the vehicle until the fuel tank is empty illuminated until the engine was cycled on
is not recommended. Otherwise, air may be and off four times in a row.
sucked into the fuel system. If this happens,
the malfunction indicator lamp = (USA
only) or ; (Canada only) comes on and the AdBlue® (diesel engine only)
engine may not start immediately after
refueling the vehicle. The BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment
After refueling: system requires a reducing agent (AdBlue®)
in order to function properly. Refilling with
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
AdBlue® is part of the regular maintenance
park position P.
service work. A tankful of AdBlue® should
The transmission position indicator in the
suffice until the next maintenance service
multifunction display should be on P. under normal driving conditions.
X Do not depress the accelerator.
When the AdBlue® tank is low, the message
X If necessary, remove the KEYLESS-GO
Check Additive See Operator’s
start/stop button from the starter switch. Manual appears in the multifunction display.
When the AdBlue® level drops to the
position 2 for at least 10 seconds. minimum level, the message Remaining
X Return the SmartKey in the starter switch Starts: 20 appears in the multifunction
to position 0. display.
position 3 and hold it there for a maximum
Z
332 AdBlue® (diesel engine only)
i When the message Remaining Starts: If you and/or others have come into contact
20 appears in the multifunction display, you with AdBlue®:
can start the engine 20 more times. If you RIf AdBlue® has gotten into contact with
do not add AdBlue®, the engine cannot be
eyes, flush with plenty of water immediately
started beyond that point. Fill the
and seek medical help.
AdBlue® tank with approximately 1 gal
RClean affected skin immediately with plenty
(3.79 l) AdBlue® (corresponds to
approximately 2 AdBlue® refill containers) of water.
or have the AdBlue® tank filled by an RIf AdBlue® was swallowed, rinse mouth
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. immediately with plenty of water and drink
plenty of water. Consult a physician.
i For refilling outside the maintenance
service intervals, refill the AdBlue® tank G Warning!
Practical hints
with approximately 1 gal (3.79 l) AdBlue® When opening the filler cap of the AdBlue®
(corresponds to approximately 2 AdBlue® tank ammonia gas vapors may escape. Refill
refill containers). AdBlue® in a well ventilated area only.
Always use the particular AdBlue® refill Ammonia gas vapors have a pungent odor and
containers for refilling outside the are particularly irritating for your skin,
maintenance service interval. Contact an mucous membranes, and eyes. Inhaling
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call ammonia gas vapors will cause burning eyes,
Roadside Assistance if necessary nose, and throat, as well as coughing and
(Y page 201). watering eyes.
Additional information on BlueTEC exhaust
gas aftertreatment and AdBlue® is available ! Only use AdBlue® complying with
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ISO 22241. Do not add additives to
AdBlue® and do not dilute AdBlue® with
water. Otherwise, the BlueTEC exhaust gas
Refilling with AdBlue® aftertreatment system could be damaged.
Damage caused by using additives or
G Warning! diluting with water are not covered by the
Make sure Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
RAdBlue® does not come into contact with
! Rinse surfaces that have come into
skin, eyes, or clothing
contact with AdBlue®, or remove AdBlue®
Rto keep AdBlue® out of the reach of children
with a moist cloth and cold water
immediately. If AdBlue® has crystallized
already, use cold water and a sponge.
AdBlue® residues will crystallize and soil
the affected surfaces.
! AdBlue® is not a fuel additive and must

not be added to the diesel fuel tank. If
AdBlue® reaches the diesel fuel tank, the
engine could be damaged which is not
Warranty.

AdBlue® (diesel engine only) 333
For more information on AdBlue®, see

(Y page 361).
The AdBlue® filler neck is located under the
cargo compartment floor.
X Open the tailgate (Y page 75).
X Lift the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 268).
X Pull dust cap off of AdBlue® refill container

=.
Practical hints
X Place AdBlue® refill container = on the
filler neck as illustrated and tighten it
moderately (hand-tight) by turning it
clockwise.
! Make sure to tighten the AdBlue® refill
container only moderately, i.e. hand-tight,
X Turn AdBlue® filler cap cover : as you could otherwise damage it.
counterclockwise and remove it. X Push AdBlue® refill container = down.
The AdBlue® tank is filled. This may take up
to 1 minute.
i When you stop pushing the AdBlue® refill
container down, the filling process is
stopped and you can remove the refill
container.
X Release AdBlue® refill container =.
X Turn AdBlue® refill container =
X Place AdBlue® filler cap ; (Y page 332) on
X Turn AdBlue® filler cap ;
counterclockwise and open it. filler neck and turn it clockwise.
Filler cap ; is tethered with a plastic strap.
Z
334 Battery
X Place AdBlue® filler cap cover : as G Warning!

illustrated and turn it clockwise to its stop. Observe all safety instructions and
X Lower cargo compartment floor. precautions when handling automotive
X Close the tailgate. batteries.
X Drive the vehicle at a speed of at least Risk of explosion.
10 mph (16 km/h).
The message Check Additive See
Operator’s Manual disappears after Fire, open flames and
approximately 1 minute. smoking are prohibited
i If the message Check Additive See when handling batteries.
Operator’s Manual still appears in the Avoid creating sparks.
multifunction display, refill with one more Battery acid is caustic. Do
Practical hints
container of AdBlue®. not allow it to come into

contact with skin, eyes or
i Have the AdBlue® level checked and, if clothing.
necessary, filled completely afterward at Wear suitable protective
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. clothing, especially gloves,
apron and faceguard.
Wear eye protection.
Battery
Rinse any acid spills
Safety notes immediately with clear
water. Contact a physician
A battery should always be sufficiently if necessary.
charged in order to achieve its rated service
Keep children away.
life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery
maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for short-
distance trips, you will need to have the Follow the instructions in
battery charge checked more frequently. this Operator’s Manual.
When replacing a battery, always use a
battery approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle A battery contains materials that can harm
for an extended period of time, contact an the environment if disposed of improperly. A
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about large 12 V storage battery contains lead.
steps you need to observe. Recycling of the battery is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states (USA only)
G Warning! or provinces (Canada only) require sellers of
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read batteries to accept the old battery for
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating recycling.
portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize G Warning!
potential danger. Failure to follow these instructions can result
in severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting.
You might get injured.

Battery 335
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not The factory-equipped battery may only be
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, replaced with a battery that
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately Rhas the same security features
flush affected area with water and seek
Ris of identical size
medical help if necessary.
Ris of identical voltage
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep Ris of identical capacity
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables, ! As any other battery, the battery may
smoking etc. discharge if you do not operate the vehicle
for an extended period of time. Have the
G Warning! battery disconnected at a qualified
Do not place metal objects on the battery as workshop or an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Practical hints
this could result in a short circuit. Center in such a case. You may also
Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the risk connect an accessory battery charge unit
of acid burns in the event of an accident. expressly approved by Mercedes-Benz for
Take care that you do not become statically your vehicle model to maintain the battery
charged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or charge. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
rubbing against textiles. For this reason, you Benz Center for further information.
also should not pull or push the battery over The battery, the battery ventilation hose
carpets or other synthetic materials. and the lateral plug must always be
Never touch the battery first. First touch the securely installed when the vehicle is in
outside body of the vehicle in order to release operation.
any possible electrostatic charges.
! Never loosen or detach battery terminal
Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths. The
clamps while the engine is running or the
battery could explode if touched due to
SmartKey is in the starter switch or
electrostatic charge or due to spark
KEYLESS-GO button is in position 1.
formation.
Otherwise the alternator and other
electronic components could be severely
! The battery is a Valve-Regulated Lead damaged.
Acid (VRLA) battery, also referred to as
Have the battery checked regularly at an
“fleece” battery.
Such batteries do not require topping-up of
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for
the electrolyte level. VRLA batteries
maintenance intervals or contact an
therefore do not have cell caps and the
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
battery cover is non-removable. Do not
further information.
attempt to open the battery as otherwise
the battery will be damaged. i After battery power was interrupted, do
VRLA batteries do not require topping-up of the following:
the electrolyte level. They cannot be
RSet the clock (Y page 132).
opened to check the electrolyte level.
However, the battery condition must be Vehicles with COMAND system with
checked periodically by performing a navigation module: Time and date are set
battery conductance test. Refer to automatically.
Maintenance Booklet for battery condition RSynchronize the door windows
testing intervals. (Y page 102).
Z
336 Jump starting
RSynchronize the power tilt/sliding can lead to a battery explosion and severe
sunroof (Y page 186). injury or death.
RSynchronize the exterior rear view Never lean over batteries while connecting or
mirrors (Y page 91). jump starting. You might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
Charging the battery skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
G Warning! medical help if necessary.
Never charge a battery while still installed in A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
the vehicle unless the accessory battery which is flammable and explosive. Keep
charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
being used. Gases may escape during improper connection of jumper cables,
Practical hints
charging and could cause an explosion that smoking, etc.

may result in personal injury, paint damage or
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can
corrosion.
result in it exploding, causing personal injury.
An accessory battery charge unit specially
Read all instructions before proceeding.
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
G Warning!
available. It permits the charging of the
battery in its installed position. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
information and availability.
Charge battery in accordance with the potential danger.
separate instructions for the accessory
battery charger.
! Do not tow-start the vehicle. You could
Have the battery charged at an authorized otherwise seriously damage the automatic
Mercedes-Benz Center. If you charge the transmission which is not covered by the
battery yourself, follow the operating Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
instructions for your charging device.
! Jump starting should only be performed
Only use a battery charge unit with a
using the jump-start terminals located in
maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
the engine compartment.
X Charge battery in accordance with the
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting
instructions of the battery charger
attempts.
manufacturer.
Do not attempt to start the engine using a
battery quick-charge unit.
Jump starting If the engine does not run after several
unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
checked at the nearest authorized
G Warning! Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to follow these directions will cause
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
damage to the electronic components, and
repeated failed starting attempts may

Jump starting 337
damage the catalytic converter31 and may with a more powerful battery could damage
present a fire risk. the vehicle’s electrical system. Such
Make sure the jumper cables do not have damage will not be covered by the
loose or missing insulation. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch ROnly use jumper cables with sufficient
any other metal part while the other end is cross-section and insulated terminal
still attached to a battery. clamps.
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be RAlways make sure the jumper cables are
started with jumper cables and the fully not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts
charged battery of another vehicle or an that move when an engine is started or
equivalent starter pack. Observe the running.
following: RShould the battery be drained completely,
Practical hints
RAccess to the battery is not possible on all let the donating power source charge the
vehicles. If you cannot access the battery vehicle for several minutes before
of the other vehicle, provide jump start reattempting the starting process.
power by an external battery or starter The jump-start contacts are located in the
pack. engine compartment on the passenger side.
RJump starting should only be performed X Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.
when the engine and catalytic converter32 X Switch off all electrical consumers.
are cold. X Engage the parking brake.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first. park position P.
ROnly jump start from batteries with the X Open the hood (Y page 213).
same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting
31 Vehicles with gasoline engine only.

32 Vehicles with gasoline engine only.
Z
338 Towing the vehicle
Practical hints
Position C represents the charged battery of X Remove the jumper cables from negative
another vehicle or an equivalent starter pack. terminals ? and B first.
X Flip up cover : of positive terminal = in X Remove the jumper cables from positive
direction of arrow. terminals ; and =.
You can now switch on the headlamps.
! Never invert the terminal connections! X Close cover : of positive terminal =.
X Connect positive terminal ; of charged X Slide cover A back onto negative terminal
battery C with positive terminal = with a B.
jumper cable. Clamp the cable to positive X Have the battery checked at the nearest
terminal ; of charged battery C first. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Start engine of the vehicle with charged
battery C and run at idle speed.
X Slide cover A from negative terminal B in Towing the vehicle
direction of arrow.
Safety notes
X Connect negative terminal ? of charged
battery C with negative terminal B with Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle
a jumper cable. Clamp the cable to be transported with all wheels off the ground
negative terminal ? of charged battery using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly
equipment. This method is preferable to other
C first.
types of towing.
X Start engine of the vehicle with the
discharged battery and run at idle speed. G Warning!
You can now turn on the electrical HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
consumers. Do not switch on the the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
headlamps under any circumstances. Instructions included in your vehicle literature

Towing the vehicle 339
portfolio. You may otherwise not recognize i If the battery is disconnected or

potential danger. discharged
Rthe SmartKey will not turn in the starter
! To prevent damage during transport, do switch
not tie down vehicle by its chassis or Rthe automatic transmission will remain in
suspension parts.
park position P
If circumstances do not permit the
For more information see “Battery”
recommended towing methods, the vehicle
(Y page 334) or “Jump starting”
may be towed with all wheels on the ground
(Y page 336).
only so far as necessary to have the vehicle
moved to a safe location where the
recommended towing methods can be
Installing towing eye bolt
employed.
Practical hints
Depending on whether you are towing a
! Before towing the vehicle observe the
vehicle or you are being towed, the towing eye
following instructions:
bolt can be screwed into threaded holes
RDo not tow-start the vehicle. You could which are located behind covers on each
otherwise seriously damage the bumper.
automatic transmission which is not The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited vehicle tool kit, located in the cargo
Warranty. compartment underneath the cargo
RDo not tow with sling-type equipment. compartment floor (Y page 268).
Towing with sling-type equipment over X Take the towing eye bolt out of the space
bumpy roads will damage radiator and underneath the cargo compartment floor.
supports.
RTowing of the vehicle should only be Removing cover in front bumper
done using the properly installed towing
eye bolt. Never attach a tow cable, tow
rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis,
frame or suspension parts.
G Warning!
With the engine not running, there is no power
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
! Avoid pulling the vehicle abruptly or

diagonally, since it could result in damage
to the chassis alignment.
! Do not use the towing eye bolt for

recovery, as this could damage the vehicle.
If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
Z
340 Towing the vehicle
Vehicles with AMG Sport Package Vehicles with Sport Package

X Press mark on cover : as indicated by the
Practical hints
arrow.
X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded hole
for the towing eye bolt.
Removing cover in rear bumper

G Warning!
In order to avoid possible serious burns or
injury, use extreme caution when removing
the rear cover, because the rear exhaust pipe Vehicles with AMG Sport Package
is extremely hot.
X Press mark on cover : as indicated by the
arrow.
X Vehicles with Sport Package: Pry
cover : with a flat, blunt object as a lever.
X Vehicles with AMG Sport Package: Press
mark on cover : as indicated by the arrow.
X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded hole
for the towing eye bolt.

Towing the vehicle 341
Fixing towing eye bolt transfer case, which is not covered by the
All wheels must be on or off the ground.
Observe instructions for towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground.
When towing the vehicle with one axle raised,
the wheels on the ground have to move freely.
Therefore follow the respective steps below,
after the front or the rear axle being raised:
Towing with the front axle raised

Example illustration front bumper X Switch off the automatic central locking
Practical hints
(Y page 135).
X Take the towing eye bolt and, if so
X Switch on the hazard warning flasher
equipped, the wheel wrench from the
(Y page 96).
vehicle tool kit.
X Make sure the automatic transmission
X Screw towing eye bolt ; clockwise into
remains in neutral position N. Observe
threaded hole to its stop.
instructions, see “Remaining in neutral
X Insert wheel wrench into towing eye and
position N” (Y page 111).
tighten towing eye bolt ; by turning it
clockwise. ! Because the ESP® operates
or automatically, the engine and ignition must
X If your vehicle is not equipped with a wheel
be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop
wrench, use a suitable object to turn the
towing eye bolt. button in position 0 or 1) when the vehicle
is being towed with one axle raised.
Removing towing eye bolt Active braking action through the ESP®
X Loosen towing eye bolt ; by turning it system which is not covered by the
counterclockwise. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
X Unscrew towing eye bolt ;.
! Keep in mind that it is important for the
X Reinstalling cover: Engage cover :
SmartKey to be left in starter switch with
(Y page 339) at top and press at bottom. the ignition switched off. As soon as the
X Store the towing eye bolt ; and wheel SmartKey is removed from the starter
wrench back into the vehicle tool kit. switch the automatic transmission will shift
to park position P.
Towing with one axle raised

! The vehicle may be towed only for
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: Do not tow with

one axle raised. Doing so could damage the
Z
342 Fuses
Towing with the rear axle raised ! Keep in mind that it is important to have
X
the ignition switched on. Removing the
Switch off the ignition and remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch or
SmartKey from the starter switch.
opening a front door with the ignition
switched off will automatically shift the
(Y page 96). automatic transmission into park position
X Take the SmartKey or SmartKey with P.
KEYLESS-GO with you when leaving the
vehicle. ! The vehicle may be towed only for
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
Towing with all wheels on the ground
i While being towed with the hazard
G Warning! warning flasher in use, use the combination
Practical hints
If circumstances require towing the vehicle switch in the usual manner to signal turns.
with all wheels on the ground, always tow with Only the selected turn signal will operate.
a tow bar if: Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard
Rthe
warning flasher will operate again.
engine will not run
Rthere is a malfunction in the brake system
Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply Stranded vehicle
or in the vehicle’s electrical system Freeing a stranded vehicle, on which the
This is necessary to adequately control the wheels are dug into sand or mud, should be
towed vehicle. done with the greatest of care, especially if
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the vehicle is heavily loaded.
the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in Note the following when freeing a stranded
starter switch position 2. vehicle:
RAvoid pulling the vehicle abruptly or
G Warning! diagonally, since it could result in damage
With the engine not running, there is no power to the chassis alignment.
RNever try to free a vehicle that is still
in mind that a considerably higher degree of coupled to a trailer.
effort is necessary to brake and steer the RIf possible, a vehicle equipped with a trailer
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly. hitch receiver should be pulled backward in
its own previously made tracks.
X Make sure the ignition is switched on.
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal and keep it pressed. Fuses
X Shift the automatic transmission into
Introduction
neutral position N.
X Release the brake pedal. The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to
X If engaged, release the parking brake.
switch off malfunctioning power circuits.
If a fuse is blown, the components and
(Y page 96). systems secured by that fuse will stop
operating.

Fuses 343
G Warning! Fuse box in passenger compartment

Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz ! Do not use sharp objects such as a
with the specified amperage for the system in
screwdriver to open the fuse box cover in
question and do not attempt to repair or
the dashboard. You could damage the fuse
bridge a blown fuse. Using other than
box cover or the dashboard.
approved fuses or using repaired or bridged
fuses may cause an overload leading to a fire, The fuse box is located behind a cover in the
and/or cause damage to electrical dashboard on the front passenger side.
components and/or systems. Have the cause
determined and remedied by an authorized
A blown fuse must be replaced by an
Practical hints
appropriate spare fuse (recognizable by its
color or the fuse rating given on the fuse) of
the amperage recommended in the fuse
chart. Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad
to advise you on this subject.
i In case of a blown fuse contact Roadside
Assistance or an authorized Mercedes- X Open the front passenger door.
Benz Center. X Opening: Open the glove box.
If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have the X Opening: Insert flat, blunt object as a lever
cause determined and rectified by an into the edge of fuse box cover : at the
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. position indicated by the arrow.
The fuse chart is located in the cargo X Loosen fuse box cover : from the
compartment with the vehicle tool kit dashboard using the lever.
(Y page 268). The fuse chart explains the fuse
X Using your hands, pull fuse box cover :
allocation and fuse amperages.
out and remove.
X Closing: Hook fuse box cover : into
Before replacing fuses holders on the front of the dashboard.
X Press fuse box cover : back on until it
engages.
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P. ! The fuse box cover must be properly
The transmission position indicator in the positioned as described. Otherwise,
multifunction display should be on P. moisture or dirt could enter the fuse box
X Switch off all electrical consumers. and possibly impair fuse operation.
Fuse box in engine compartment
switch.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the X Open the hood.
driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in
position 0, same as with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch). The
driver’s door then can be closed again.
Z
344 Fuses
X Opening: Open the cargo compartment.

the slot of lock :.
X Turn lock : by 90° in direction of arrow.
X Remove cover ;.
X Closing: Install everything in reverse order.
Emergency engine shutdown

Example illustration fuse box ML 350 (ML 350 If the engine cannot be turned off as
BlueTEC, ML 550, ML 63 AMG similar) described (Y page 108), you may use the
following emergency procedure.
Practical hints
X With a dry cloth, remove any moisture from

X Take the fuse chart from the vehicle tool kit
fuse box cover :.
(Y page 268).
X Opening: Pull clamps ; in direction of
X Open the fuse box in engine compartment.
arrow.
X Remove fuse 120.
X Lift fuse box cover : up.
Find its location in the fuse chart.
X Closing: Make sure the sealing rubber is
positioned properly.
X Press fuse box cover : down and secure
with clamps ;.
! The fuse box cover must be properly
positioned as described. Otherwise,
moisture or dirt could enter the fuse box
and possibly impair fuse operation.
X Close the hood after checking or replacing
fuses.
Fuse box in cargo compartment

345

Parts service ..................................... 346
Warranty coverage ........................... 346
Identification labels .......................... 346
Vehicle specification ML 350 Blue-
TEC 4MATIC (164.125) ..................... 348
Vehicle specification ML 350
(164.156) ........................................... 348
4MATIC (164.186) ............................. 349
4MATIC (164.172) ............................. 350
Vehicle specification ML 63 AMG
(164.177) ........................................... 351
Technical data
Rims and tires ................................... 352
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ...... 356

346 Identification labels
Vehicle equipment accordance with the terms of the following

warranties:
i This Operator’s Manual describes all RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
features, standard or optional, potentially REmission System Warranty

available for your vehicle at the time of REmission Performance Warranty
purchase. Please be aware that your
vehicle might not be equipped with all RCalifornia,Connecticut, Maine,
features described in this manual. Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission
Control Systems Warranty33
Parts service RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
Laws)
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes-Benz Replacement parts and accessories are
Parts required for maintenance and repair covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
work. In addition, strategically located parts Accessories warranties, copies of which are
Technical data
distribution centers provide quick and available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz

reliable parts service. Center.
More than 300 000 different parts for
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subjected Information booklet
to stringent quality inspections. Each part has
been specifically developed, manufactured or Should you lose your Service and Warranty
selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz Information booklet, have an authorized
vehicles. Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts replacement. It will be mailed to you.
should be installed.
! Do not use non-genuine Mercedes-Benz Identification labels
parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz. Doing so could damage
the vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Also, it
could compromise the vehicle’s durability
or safety.
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the

warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exchange or repair any defective parts
originally installed in the vehicle in
33 Applicable to vehicles with gasoline engine only.

Identification labels 347
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) can data shown in the illustration. Refer to
be found certification label on vehicle for actual data
Ron certification label : on the driver’s door specific to your vehicle.
B-pillar
Ron passenger side underneath the rear seat
(Y page 347)
Ron the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 347)
Passenger-side rear seat
Technical data
X Fold seat cushion ? forward
(Y page 189).
X Fold carpet A forward in direction of
arrow.
Example certification label (U.S. vehicles) VIN B is now visible.
; Paintwork code
= VIN
C Emission control information label,

includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission standards
Example certification label (Canada vehicles)
D Engine number (engraved on engine)
; Paintwork code
E VIN (on lower edge of windshield)
= VIN
i When ordering parts, please specify
i Data shown on certification label are for
vehicle identification and engine number.
illustration purposes only. These data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
Z
348 Vehicle specification ML 350 (164.156)
Vehicle specification ML 350 BlueTEC Main dimensions

4MATIC (164.125) ΜL 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC
The quoted data apply only to the standard Overall vehicle 188.5 in (4 788 mm)
vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes- length
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all Overall vehicle 83.6 in (2 124 mm)
special bodies and special equipment.
width34
Engine ΜL 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC
Overall vehicle 71.5 in (1 815 mm)35
Engine, type 642 height
69.8 - 73.0 in
Mode of operation Diesel 4-stroke (1 774 - 1 854 mm)36
engine
Wheelbase 114.8 in (2 915 mm)
No. of cylinders 6
Track, front 63.7 in (1 619 mm)
Bore 3.27 in (83.00 mm)
Technical data
Track, rear 63.8 in (1 621 mm)

Stroke 3.62 in (92.00 mm)
Ground clearance 8.3 in (210 mm)35
Total piston 182.3 cu in
displacement (2 987 cm3) 7.3 - 10.3 in
(186 - 261 mm)36
Compression 16.5:1
ratio Turning circle 39.0 ft (11.6 m)
Output acc. to 210 hp/3 400 rpm

SAE J 1349 (157 kW/3 400 rpm) Weights ΜL 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC
Maximum torque 400 lb-ft/ Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
acc. to SAE J 1349 1 600 - 2 400 rpm
(543 Nm/
1 600 - 2 400 rpm) Vehicle specification ML 350
(164.156)
Maximum engine 4 500 rpm
speed The quoted data apply only to the standard
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
Poly-V-belt 2 035 mm special bodies and special equipment.
Engine ΜL 350
Electrical system
ΜL 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC Engine, type 272
Alternator 14 V/220 A Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,

gasoline injection
Starter motor 12 V/2.0 kW
No. of cylinders 6
Battery 12 V/95 Ah
34 Exterior
rear view mirrors folded out.
35 Vehicleswith steel suspension.
36 Depending on the set vehicle level (vehicles with air suspension program).

Vehicle specification ML 350 4MATIC (164.186) 349
Engine ΜL 350 Main dimensions ΜL 350

Bore 3.66 in (92.90 mm) Overall vehicle 188.5 in (4 788 mm)
length
Overall vehicle 83.6 in (2 124 mm)
width38
displacement (3 498 cm3)
Compression 10.7:1 height
ratio
Wheelbase 114.8 in (2 915 mm)
SAE J 134937 (200 kW/6 000 rpm) Track, front 64.0 in (1 627 mm)
Maximum torque 258 lb-ft/ Track, rear 64.1 in (1 629 mm)
acc. to SAE J 1349 2 400 - 5 000 rpm
Ground clearance 8.3 in (210 mm)
(350 Nm/
Technical data
2 400 - 5 000 rpm) Turning circle 39.0 ft (11.6 m)
speed Weights ΜL 350
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Poly-V-belt 2 398 mm
Vehicle specification ML 350 4MATIC

Electrical system ML 350 (164.186)
Alternator 14 V/180 A
The quoted data apply only to the standard
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Battery 12 V/70 Ah special bodies and special equipment.
Spark plugs, type Bosch Y 7 MPP33 Engine ΜL 350 4MATIC
Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm) Engine, type 272
electrode gap
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,
Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft gasoline injection
tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm)
No. of cylinders 6
Bore 3.66 in (92.90 mm)
37 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
38 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.
Z
350 Vehicle specification ML 550 4MATIC (164.172)
Engine ΜL 350 4MATIC Main dimensions ΜL 350 4MATIC

Compression 10.7:1 Wheelbase 114.8 in (2 915 mm)
ratio
(200 kW/6 000 rpm) Track, rear 64.1 in (1 629 mm)
SAE J 134939
Maximum torque 258 lb-ft/
acc. to SAE J 1349 2 400 - 5 000 rpm 7.3 - 10.3 in
(350 Nm/ (186 - 261 mm)42
2 400 - 5 000 rpm)
Turning circle 39.0 ft (11.6 m)
speed
Weights ΜL 350 4MATIC
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Technical data
Poly-V-belt 2 398 mm
Electrical system ML 350 4MATIC Vehicle specification ML 550 4MATIC

(164.172)
Alternator 14 V/180 A
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW The quoted data apply only to the standard
vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Battery 12 V/70 Ah Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
Spark plugs, type Bosch Y 7 MPP33
Engine ML 550 4MATIC
Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
electrode gap Engine, type 273
Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,
tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm) gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 8
Main dimensions ΜL 350 4MATIC
Bore 3.86 in (98.00 mm)
length Stroke 3.56 in (90.50 mm)
Overall vehicle Total piston 333.2 cu in

83.6 in (2 124 mm)
width40
Compression 10.7:1
ratio
height
69.8 - 73.0 in
(1 774 - 1 854 mm)42
40 Exteriorrear view mirrors folded out.
41 Vehicles with steel suspension.

Vehicle specification ML 63 AMG (164.177) 351
Engine ML 550 4MATIC Main dimensions ΜL 550 4MATIC

Output acc. to 382 hp/6 000 rpm Track, front 63.7 in (1 619 mm)
SAE J 134943 (285 kW/6 000 rpm)
Track, rear 63.8 in (1 621 mm)
Maximum torque 391 lb-ft/
acc. to SAE J 1349 2 800 - 4 800 rpm
(530 Nm/ 7.3 - 10.3 in
2 800 - 4 800 rpm) (186 - 261 mm)46
Maximum engine 6 500 rpm Turning circle 39.0 ft (11.6 m)
speed
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 Weights ΜL 550 4MATIC
Poly-V-belt 2 398 mm Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Technical data
Electrical system ML 550 4MATIC
Vehicle specification ML 63 AMG
Alternator 14 V/180 A (164.177)
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW
The quoted data apply only to the standard
Battery 12 V/95 Ah vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Spark plugs, type NGK PLKR 7A
Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
Engine ML 63 AMG
electrode gap
Engine, type 156
Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft
tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm) Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,
gasoline injection
Main dimensions ΜL 550 4MATIC No. of cylinders 8
Overall vehicle 188.5 in (4 788 mm) Bore 4.02 in (102.20 mm)
length
width44
Compression 11.3:1
height
69.8 - 73.0 in ratio
(1 774 - 1 854 mm)46 Output acc. to 503 hp/6 800 rpm
Wheelbase 114.8 in (2 915 mm) SAE J 134947 (375 kW/6 800 rpm)
44 Exteriorrear view mirrors folded out.
45 Vehicles with steel suspension.
Z
352 Rims and tires
Engine ML 63 AMG Weights ML 63 AMG

Maximum torque 465 lb-ft/5 200 rpm Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
acc. to SAE J 1349 (630 Nm/5 200 rpm)
speed Rims and tires
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 Notes
Poly-V-belt 2 360 mm ! Only use tires which have been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires
approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed
Electrical system ML 63 AMG to provide best possible performance in
conjunction with the driving safety systems
Alternator 14 V/180 A on your vehicle such as the ABS or the
Starter motor 12 V/2.1 kW ESP®. Tires specially developed for your
Technical data
vehicle and tested and approved by

Battery 12 V/95 Ah Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding
Spark plugs, type NGK ILZKAR 7A10 the following on the tire’s sidewall:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
Spark plugs, 0.039 in (1.0 mm) equipment tires
electrode gap
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft (tires with limited run-flat
tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm) characteristics) original equipment tires
Using tires other than those approved by
Main dimensions ML 63 AMG Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Overall vehicle 189.7 in (4 818 mm) Limited Warranty.
length
For information on driving with MOExtended
Overall vehicle 83.6 in (2 124 mm) tires, see the “Practical hints” section
width48 (Y page 330).
Overall vehicle 69.5 - 72.6 in i Vehicles with MOExtended system are
height (1 765 - 1 845 mm)49 not factory-equipped with a TIREFIT kit.
When retrofitting with tires that do not have
Wheelbase 114.8 in (2 915 mm) run-flat characteristics, you should also
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit.
TIREFIT kits are available at any authorized
Track, rear 65.6 in (1 667 mm) Mercedes-Benz Center.
Ground clearance 7.0 - 10.1 in ! Using tires other than those approved by
(177 - 257 mm)49 Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental
effects, such as
Turning circle 39.0 ft (11.6 m)
48 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.

49 Depending on the set vehicle level.

Rims and tires 353
Rpoor handling characteristics equipment, but can be purchased from an

Rincreased noise authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Rincreased
Equipping your vehicle with winter tires
fuel consumption
approved for your vehicle model may
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by require the purchase of rims of the
Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit recommended size for use with these
dimensional variations and different tire winter tires. This depends on vehicle model
deformation characteristics that could and the standard or optional factory-
cause them to come into contact with the equipped wheel rim/tire configuration on
vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the your vehicle. For more information contact
tires or the vehicle may be the result. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. The Tire and Loading Information
placard with the recommended tire
Technical data
inflation pressures for cold tires is located
on the driver’s door B-pillar. Supplemental
tire inflation pressure information for
driving at high speeds or for vehicle loads
less than the maximum loaded vehicle
condition can be found on the tire inflation
pressure label. The tire inflation pressure
label is located on the inside of the fuel filler
flap. The tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be
adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire
manufacturer’s maintenance
recommendation included with the vehicle.
For information on recommended tire
inflation pressure and supplemental tire
inflation pressure information for special
driving situations, see (Y page 219).
i Please keep in mind that the vehicle must
be equipped
Rwith wheels of identical dimensions on
each axle (left and right)
Rwith tires of identical characteristics all
around, i.e. summer tires, winter tires,
all-season tires, or MOExtended tires etc.
i The following pages also list the approved

rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle
with winter tires. Winter tires are not
available as standard or optional factory
Z
354 Rims and tires
Same size tires
Model ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC

ML 350 4MATIC
ML 350 4MATIC (Sport Package)
ML 550 4MATIC
18" wheels Rims (light alloy) 8 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 2.36 in (60 mm)
Winter tires50,51,52 255/55 R18 105H M+Si
All-terrain tires50,51,52 255/55 R18 105H M+S
Model ML 350
ML 350 4MATIC
Technical data
ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC53

All-season tires50 255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+S
Winter tires50,51 255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+Si
Model ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC53

MOExtended54
MOExtended54
50 Radial-ply tires.
51 Not available as factory equipment.
52 ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC: Standard tire without run-flat characteristics. Equipping the vehicle with TIREFIT
is strongly recommended.
53 ML 350 BlueTEC: Availabilty in Canada depending on vehicle production date.
54 Must be used in conjunction with Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System (U.S. vehicles) or tire pressure
loss warning system (Canada vehicles) only.

Rims and tires 355
Model ML 550 4MATIC (Sport Package)

19"wheels AMG rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 19 H2
Model ML 63 AMG
19" wheels AMG rims (light alloy) 9.5 J x 19 H2
Winter tires55,56 285/45 R19 107H M+Si
Technical data
Model ML 350 (Appearance Package)
ML 350 4MATIC (Appearance Package)
20" wheels Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 20 H2
Model ML 550 4MATIC (Sport Package)

20" wheels AMG rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 20 H2
All-season tires55,57 265/45 R20 108H XL (Extra Load) M+S
Model ML 63 AMG
20" wheels AMG rims (light alloy) 10 J x 20 H2
Summer tires55,57 295/40 ZR20 106Y
Model ML 63 AMG
21" wheels AMG rims (light alloy) 10 J x 21 H2
Summer tires55,57 295/35 ZR21 107Y XL (Extra Load)
55 Radial-plytires.
56 Notavailable as factory equipment.
57 Must not be used with snow chains.
Z
356 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Spare wheel
! Compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation
pressure on the yellow label located on the spare wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs from the values
given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure
given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim.
i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the spare wheel differs from the tire inflation
pressure of the road tires.
i The ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC does not have a spare wheel.

Model ML 350 (all models) ML 63 AMG
ML 550 (all models)
Rim 4.0 B x 18 H2 5.5 B x 19 H2
Technical data
Wheel offset 1.58 in (40 mm) 0.51 in (13 mm)

Minispare tire58 T 155/90 D18 113M —
or
T 155/90 R18 113M
Collapsible tire58 — 185/85-19 104P
Recommended tire 61 psi (4.2 bar) 51 psi (3.5 bar)
inflation pressure
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. fluids. Otherwise you could endanger persons
or the environment.
Capacities
Keep service fluids out of the reach of
Vehicle components and their respective children.
lubricants must match. Therefore only use For health reasons, you should prevent
products tested and approved by Mercedes- service fluids from coming into direct contact
Benz. with your skin or clothing.
For information on tested and approved If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
products, contact an authorized Mercedes- physician immediately.
Benz Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
G Warning!
Comply with all valid regulations with respect
to handling, storing, and disposing of service
58 Must not be used with snow chains.

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 357
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants,

lubricants, etc.
Engine with oil ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) Approved engine
filter oils
ML 350 4MATIC 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
ML 350
ML 550 4MATIC 9.5 US qt (9.0 l)
ML 63 AMG59 10.3 US qt (9.7 l)
Automatic All models, 9.5 US qt (9.0 l) MB Automatic
transmission except ML 63 AMG Transmission Fluid
ML 63 AMG60 9.7 US qt (9.2 l)
Front axle ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC 1.2 US qt (1.1 l) Hypoid gear oil
Technical data
ML 350 4MATIC
ML 550 4MATIC
ML 63 AMG Fuchs Titan
EG 5010 D
Rear axle ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC 1.2 US qt (1.1 l) Hypoid gear oil
ML 350 4MATIC
ML 550 4MATIC
ML 350 1.5 US qt (1.4 l)
ML 63 AMG 1.2 US qt (1.1 l) Fuchs Titan
EG 5010 D
Transfer case ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC 0.53 US qt (0.5 l) MB Automatic
ML 350 4MATIC Transmission Fluid
ML 550 4MATIC
ML 63 AMG
Power steering ML 350 approx. MB Power Steering
1.3 US qt (1.2 l) Fluid or approved
Dexron III ATF
ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC approx. MB Power Steering
ML 350 4MATIC 1.05 US qt (1.0 l) Fluid
ML 550 4MATIC
ML 63 AMG approx.
1.3 US qt (1.2 l)
59 Engine with oil cooler.

60 Automatic transmission with oil cooler.
Z
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants,

lubricants, etc.
Brake system All models 0.63 US qt (0.6 l) MB Brake Fluid
(DOT 4+)
Cooling system ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC approx. MB 325.0
ML 350 4MATIC 10.0 US qt (9.5 l) Anticorrosion/
ML 350 Antifreeze
ML 550 4MATIC approx.

12.7 US qt (12.0 l)
ML 63 AMG approx.
12.2 US qt (11.5 l)
Fuel tank All models 25.1 US gal (95.0 l) Gasoline engine:
Technical data
Premium unleaded
Fuel tank All models, approx. gasoline (Minimum
reserve except ML 63 AMG 3.4 US gal (13.0 l) Posted Octane 91
ML 63 AMG approx. [Avg. of
4.0 US gal (15.0 l) 96 RON/86 MON])
Diesel engine:
ULTRA-LOW
SULFUR HIGHWAY
DIESEL FUEL
(ULSD, 15 ppm
SULFUR MAXIMUM)
AdBlue® tank ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC 7.0 US gal (26.6 l) AdBlue® complying
with ISO 22241
Air All models — R134a refrigerant
conditioning and special
system PAG lubricant oil
(never R 12)
Washer system All models 7.6 US qt (7.2 l) MB Windshield
and headlamp Washer
cleaning Concentrate61
system (Y page 364)
Washer fluid mixing
ratio (Y page 364)
61 Mixed with water or commercially available premixed washer solvent/antifreeze.

Approved engine oils Viscosity grades for engine oils

Engine oils are specifically tested for their Using the chart below, select oil viscosity
suitability in our engines and durability for our according to the lowest air temperature
service intervals. Therefore, only use expected before the next oil change.
approved engine oils and oil filters required
for vehicles with the Maintenance System.
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil
filters, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
! Using engine oils and oil filters of a
specification other than those expressly
required for the Maintenance System, or
changing of oil and oil filter at change
intervals longer than those called for by the
Maintenance System will result in engine or
Technical data
emission control system damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Engine oil additives
Warranty.
! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
Please follow Maintenance System
They may damage the engine. Damage or
recommendations for scheduled oil
malfunctions resulting from blending oil
changes. Failure to do so will result in
additives are not covered by the Mercedes-
engine or emission control system damage
Benz Limited Warranty.
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Mercedes-Benz recommends MOBIL OIL. Air conditioning refrigerant
Use the table below to determine the
R134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
MB sheet number.
lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning
Model Engine, MB sheet system.
type number ! Never use R 12 (CFC) or mineral-based
ML 350 BlueTEC 642 229.51 lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
4MATIC system will occur.
ML 350 4MATIC 272 229.5

ML 350 272 229.3/ Brake fluid
229.5 G Warning!
ML 550 4MATIC 273 229.5 During vehicle operation, the boiling point of
the brake fluid is continuously reduced
ML 63 AMG 156 229.562 through the absorption of moisture from the
atmosphere.
i MB sheet numbers are printed on the Under extremely strenuous operating
conditions, this moisture content can lead to
outside of oil containers.
62 Restriction: Only SAE 0W-40/SAE 5W-40 engine oils may be used.
Z
the formation of bubbles in the system, thus light load such as two persons and no
reducing the system’s efficiency. luggage.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced RDo not exceed 2/3 of maximum
regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Maintenance accelerator pedal position if the vehicle
Booklet for replacement interval. is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain.
Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz
is recommended. Any authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center will provide you with additional
information. Fuel requirements
Gasoline engine
Premium unleaded gasoline (gasoline Only use premium unleaded gasoline. The
engine) octane number (posted at the pump) must be
91 min. It is an average of both the Research
G Warning! Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane
Technical data
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. Number (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also
It burns violently and can cause serious known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
personal injury. Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
materials near gasoline! such as ethanol, TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA, and
Turn off the engine before refueling. TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid of these oxygenates to gasoline does not
inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
contact. Extinguish all smoking materials. The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
Direct skin contact with fuels and the exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not
health. allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
! To maintain the engine’s durability and used.
performance, premium unleaded gasoline These blends must also meet all other fuel
must be used. requirements, such as resistance to spark
If premium unleaded gasoline is not knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
available and low octane gasoline is used,
follow these precautions: Diesel engine
RHave the fuel tank only partially filled Only use commercially available vehicular
with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL
with premium unleaded gasoline as soon (ULSD, 15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM) that
as possible. meets the ASTM D975 standard. Failure to
RAvoid full throttle driving and abrupt use ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL
acceleration. FUEL (ULSD) can severely damage the
vehicle’s exhaust after-treatment device.
RDo not exceed an engine speed of
To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with
3 000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a
improved cold flow characteristics is offered
in the winter months. Check with your fuel
retailer.

! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not RKnocking/pinging

blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosene. RMisfire
The fuel system and engine will otherwise
RPower loss
be damaged, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. In areas where carbon deposits may be
For further information on diesel fuel pump encountered due to lack of availability of
labeling, contact an authorized Mercedes- gasoline which contains these additives, the
Benz Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA use of Mercedes-Benz approved additives is
only). recommended.
Biodiesel (FAME = Fatty Acid Methyl or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only) for a
Ester) containing fuels listing of approved products. Follow
Mercedes-Benz USA approves the use of B5 directions on the product label.
(standard ULSD which may contain a Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
maximum of 5% biodiesel) in all Common-rail This only results in unnecessary cost and may
injection (CDI) and BlueTEC diesel engines.
Technical data
be harmful to the engine operation.
Diesel fuels containing a higher percentage of
! Damage or malfunction resulting from
biodiesel, e.g. B20, as well as straight
poor fuel quality or from blending additional
biodiesel may cause severe damage to your
fuel additives other than those tested and
engine/fuel system and are not approved.
approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz
Please ask your service station personnel for vehicles are not covered by the Mercedes-
further information. If the B5 biodiesel blend Benz Limited Warranty or by any pre-owned
is not sufficiently labeled to clearly indicate or Extended Limited Warranties.
that it meets the ULSD standard, please do
not use it.
The Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty does AdBlue®
not cover damages caused by the use of fuels
not meeting Mercedes-Benz approved fuel AdBlue® is a non-flammable, non-toxic,
standards. colorless and odorless, water-soluble liquid.
! Only use AdBlue® complying with
ISO 22241. Do not blend with additives.
Gasoline additives (gasoline engine)
A major concern among engine ! Rinse surfaces that have come into
manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by contact with AdBlue®, or remove AdBlue®
gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only with a moist cloth and cold water
the use of quality gasoline containing immediately. If AdBlue® has crystallized
additives that prevent the build-up of carbon already, use cold water and a sponge.
deposits. AdBlue® residues will crystallize and soil
After an extended period of using fuels the affected surfaces.
without such additives carbon deposits can
build up, especially on the intake valves and High ambient temperatures
in the combustion area, leading to engine
If AdBlue® in the reservoir heats up to above
performance problems such as:
122‡ (50†) for a long period of time, for
RWarm-up hesitation example due to direct sunlight, ammonia gas
RUnstable idle
Z
vapors may escape when opening the Coolants

AdBlue® tank.
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
G Warning! anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
When opening the filler cap of the AdBlue® RCorrosion protection
tank ammonia gas vapors may escape. Refill RFreeze protection
AdBlue® in a well ventilated area only.
RBoiling protection (by increasing the boiling
Ammonia gas vapors have a pungent odor and
are particularly irritating for your skin, point)
mucous membranes, and eyes. Inhaling The cooling system was filled at the factory
ammonia gas vapors will cause burning eyes, with a coolant providing freeze protection to
nose, and throat, as well as coughing and approximately -35‡ (-37†) and corrosion
watering eyes. protection.
! Add premixed coolant solution only.
Low ambient temperatures Adding water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/
Technical data
AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of Antifreeze separately from each other,

approximately 12‡ (-11†). Your vehicle is could cause engine damage not covered by
factory equipped with an AdBlue® preheating the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
system. The vehicle can thus be operated at If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -35‡
temperatures below 12‡ (-11†). (-37†), the boiling point of the coolant in the
pressurized cooling system is reached at
Special additives approximately 266‡ (130†).
The coolant solution must be used year round
! Only use AdBlue® complying with
to provide the necessary corrosion protection
ISO 22241. Do not add additives to
and increase boil-over protection. Refer to
AdBlue® and do not dilute AdBlue® with the Maintenance Booklet for replacement
water. Otherwise, the BlueTEC exhaust gas interval.
aftertreatment system could be damaged.
Coolant system design and coolant used
Damage caused by using additives or determine the replacement interval. The
diluting with water are not covered by the replacement interval published in the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solution
Purity or other Mercedes-Benz approved products
The purity of AdBlue® is of particular of equal specification are used to renew the
importance for avoiding malfunctions in the coolant concentration or bring it back up to
exhaust gas aftertreatment. the proper level.
If AdBlue® is pumped out of the tank, e.g. For information on other Mercedes-Benz
during repair work, the same liquid must not approved products of equal specification,
be used to refill the tank as its purity is no contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
longer guaranteed. or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
To provide important corrosion protection,
! Impurities caused for example by other the solution must be at least 50%
service products, cleaning agents, and dust anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to
result in increased emissions, freeze protection to approximately -35‡
malfunctions, catalyst damage, or engine [-37†]).
damage.

If you use a solution that is more than 55% Anticorrosion/antifreeze

anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum
to approximately -49‡ [-45†]), the engine
parts. The use of aluminum components in
temperature will increase due to the lower
motor vehicle engines necessitates that
heat transfer capability of the solution.
anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in
Therefore, do not use more than this amount
such engines be specifically formulated to
of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
protect the aluminum parts. Failure to use
If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0 such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used to result in a significantly shortened service life.
bring it up to the proper level (have cooling
Therefore, the following product is strongly
system checked for signs of leakage). Please
recommended for use in your vehicle:
make sure the mixture is in accordance with
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.
label instructions.
Before the start of the winter season (or once
The water in the cooling system must meet
a year in hot southern regions), you should
minimum requirements, which are usually
have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
satisfied by normal drinking water.
Technical data
concentration checked.
If you are not sure about the water quality,
The coolant is also regularly checked each
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
time you bring your vehicle to an authorized
Center.
Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
Model Approximate freeze protection

-35‡ (-37†) -49‡ (-45†)
Cooling system ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC 5.0 US qt (4.75 l) 5.5 US qt (5.2 l)
ML 350
ML 350 4MATIC
ML 550 4MATIC 6.3 US qt (6.0 l) 7.0 US qt (6.6 l)
ML 63 AMG 6.1 US qt (5.8 l) 6.8 US qt (6.4 l)
Z
Washer system and headlamp

cleaning system
G Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
X Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate

“MB SummerFit”.
X Mix with water for temperatures above
freezing point.
Technical data
X Mix with commercially available premixed

washer solvent/antifreeze for
temperatures below freezing point.
Washer fluid mixing ratio

For temperatures above the freezing point:
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts water
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] water)
For temperatures below freezing point:
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] solvent)

Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has
trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-
Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service
literature for your vehicle, please contact an
We consider this the best way for you to
obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the
Mercedes-Benz web site www.mbusa.com
(USA only) or www.mercedes-benz.ca
(Canada only).
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely
careful when performing any service work or
repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the
use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or
materials may damage the vehicle or its
equipment, which may in turn result in
personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying out
any type of service, turn to the advice of an
We reserve the right to make changes in

design and equipment.
Therefore, information, illustrations and
descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might
differ from your vehicle.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of
excerpts, is not permitted without our prior
authorization in writing.
Press time September 11, 2009
GSP/OIS
Printed in U. S. A.

É1645841383}ËÍ
1645841383
Order no. 6515 4317 13 Part no. 164 584 13 83 Edition B 2010

2010 Mclass PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2010 Mclass PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

M-Class

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

! Highlights hazards that may result in

i Helpful hints or further information you

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 25

Introduction ......................................... 20 Safety and security ............................. 35

Controls in detail ................................. 69

Operation ........................................... 209

Practical hints ................................... 267

Technical data ................................... 345

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1, 2, 3 ... Front passenger front air bag off

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Armrest, front Batteries, SmartKey

B CAC (Customer Assistance Center) ... 23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Coolant Digital clock

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Driving Electronic Stability Program

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Oil dipstick ..................................... 215 Fog lamps ............................................. 95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

G Daytime running lamp mode ............ 94

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Inflation pressure Global unlocking

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Front passenger front air bag off M

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Air filter .......................................... 292 Multifunction steering wheel

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

OCS (Occupant Classification Parts service ...................................... 346

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Program mode selector switch Reporting safety defects .................... 24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Securing cargo Sport Utility Vehicle

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Capacities fuels, coolants, Phone book .................................... 140

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Messages in the multifunction Transfer case ..................................... 117

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Modifications and alterations, Washer and headlamp cleaning

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Product Information We continuously strive to improve our

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1 Applicable to vehicles with gasoline engine only.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Operating safety Proper use of the vehicle

interconnected, any modifications made may Rtraffic rules and regulations

In Canada: Vehicle data recording

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Exterior view ....................................... 26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A Fuel filler flap 210

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function Page Function Page

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Multifunction steering wheel Function Page

5 Function only available in telephone menu.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Center console Function Page

7 See separate HYBRID Supplemental Operating Instructions.